Home

Open Advanced Process Control

1. HMI DigilO Digital Controller Flow Main Application Button_1 Element y Button_1 out Digil0 in Interlock Server A External Application Conditions met In this case it is possible to configure the project in a way so that the state of all relevant elements are reflected within the interlock server Next an external application can dock onto the server and communicate with it to watch and to influence these data Now this external application can perform the tasks that no longer are implemented within a ControlRoom internal flow As an example There is a very simple project that consists of a button which causes a motor to be turned on by setting a digital output The state of the motor itself can be read from an digital input Additionally there is an interlock condition the motor is allowed to be turned on only in some cases that might be a different input that watches a door is closed or a database that has the information if this motor has to be used or not or something similar This additional information is not available within the scope of the ControlRoom package only the external application can access it Here the set up might be as follows The button within the user interface is not connected to any other elements via the internal flows but it is configured to send its output values to the interlock server As soon as the user presses this button the changed ou
2. conditional return from a function block and jump back to the calling position within the instruction list if accumulator is TRUE VAR_GLOBAL END_VAR these statements encapsulate a list of global variable definitions this block is not allowed to exist within a function The variable definitions have to be done in style name type with one variable definition per line as an example var1 UINT defines a variable of type UINT with name var1 VAR_LOCAL END_VAR encapsulates a list of local variable definitions this block is allowed to exist only within a function block and defines variables to be used only within this function block Such local variables are not accessible from other subsequent function blocks and are not accessible from the top level instruction list scope FUNCTION BLOCK END_FUNCTION these two statements encapsulate a function block that can be accessed using one of the commands CAL CALC or CALCN please refer the description of CAL for some more details 5 71 5 3 3 Reserved Function Names Normally function blocks can be defined and used freely within a instruction list But there exist some reserved function block names that behave different they have to be defined under some special circumstances and they are not allowed to be called from the script itself These function blocks are used for the connection to the Interlock Server and are called independent from the current position within the in
3. 37 ScCciFitViewToSelectedEntities 38 ScCciAutoCompensate Off 39 ScCciAutoCompensateRef 40 ScCciAutoCompensateCal 41 ScCciSetMode A 42 ScCciGetMode 43 automatic command retrieves number and name of entities in current job 44 ScCciSetDoubleValue 1 A override speed 45 ScCciSetDoubleValue 3 A override frequency 46 ScCciSetDoubleValue 2 A override power 92 49 ScCciSetLongValue 4 A set digital outputs of scanner card 51 ScCciGetLongValue 4 get digital inputs of scanner card 52 ScCciSetStringValue 6 TXT save a screen shot with a width of 160 pixels 53 ScCciSetStringValue 7 TXT save a screen shot with a width of 320 pixels 53 ScCciSetStringValue 9 TXT save a screen shot with the full width Numeric IN1 X sets a value used as X parameter when a command is executed Numeric IN2 Y sets a value used as Y parameter when a command is executed Numeric IN3 A sets a value used as A parameter when a command is executed Char IN4 TXT sets a value used as TXT parameter when a command is executed Char IN5 NAME sets a value used as NAME parameter when a command is executed Digital IN6 EN sets a value used as EN parameter when a command is executed Digital OUTO returns a HIGH signal when the last command could be executed successfully LOW otherwise only when this output was set the next command can be send to INO elsewhere it will be rejected
4. This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_e1701 E1701L Laser Controller Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Using this plug in a E1701L laser controller can be used in environments where no appropriate laser signals are available but where a laser has to be accessed This can be a ControlRoom project where a simple tool control is implemented or a BeamConstruct configuration where no standard scanner controller card is used This plug in is able to connect to a E1701L laser controller via COM port serial interface and send control commands to to set laser parameters and to switch it on and off The plug in provides a basic configuration panel where general configuration can be changed e Interface here the name of the serial interface the controller is connected with has to be given this is COMx for Windows and dev ttyACMx for Linux where x is a number assigned by the operating system e Laser Type here the type of laser that is connected to E1701L controller can be configured for a 85 description of the different types and especially the three different YAG types please refer to manual of E1701L section control commands command cltyp e Power Output using this com
5. cceceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 231 OS 231 TAO VISION FUNCION Sci O E AATE ada 231 110 2 VISION GOOKDOOK lt taria a al sale EE 232 EA Processing Operation aaa aid sc eee 233 AZ WALKING tdt Da a dae ida a dt ei 234 42 7 ExpOring Dala nitrato aaa a 236 7 13 Multinead Operations irmas area aae ea e nn nn rencor nn nn nn a a a aae eaaa 236 TEE ORTE aN aT E E E EE E A A A E E TEE A 237 7 15 Customise BeamConstruct cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesegeccnaeaeeeeeeseeeanseeeeeeeeeaes 238 T 16 BEAMLOCK ansor r vod a Ed a ia 239 7 17 BeamServer Remote Control Interface ccccecceceeeecenneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececenecncaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeees 240 TAT WOVEIMIOW sesso een deteenints E a iaa yeah eles E anaa a eben ts 240 TAT USAGE aiieieo Ale ae AU Ae A Ano Ln a ee 240 7 17 3 Starting BEAMSEIVE iii cedeedeetieee oe evescoaeee cosesutened Ea iredi ENE E aA NEAKEN 241 7 17 4 Remote Control COMMANAG cccceeeeeeeeeeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececcecccanaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeesaaaaes 242 117 41 Elemen Flags ivive ve dey siden ev eee NEATE EEE ERAR 246 7 17 4 1 1 Scanner Bitmap Element Flags eccceccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 246 8 COMCOMC Cinca A A A oe vase a nan are 248 O TOVEIVICW fee citer aie he Ol a niet Lana et aca 248 8 2 USAGE Heck actin pee ee ian eed Reece een Aiea Sait eid eda dc cine AS 248 8 3 Correction Definition Dialogue da
6. frequency the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Stand By Length pulse length the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Field Left Position Field Upper Position defines the upper left coordinate of the field that has to be used by the scanner 106 Field Size the total size of the field that is used by the scanner this parameter together with the left and upper position specifies the coordinates input vectors have to be located within in case there are input data which define a position outside this field they will not be marked Swap X and Y swaps the input X and Y coordinate to exchange X and Y axis values of the scanner Mirror X Mirror Y mirror the input coordinates On the fly speed X On the fly speed Y specifies the used static speed in X or Y direction for marking on the fly operation Default Here several default parameters can be defined that are used in case the direct axis control inputs X Y and Z are used or in case control data are used that do not contain motion speed delay information Jump Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned off Mark Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned on Laser Off Delay Laser On Delay Jump Delay Mark Delay Polygon Delay these delays are used during marking operation they become active when the laser is turned
7. the motion of an axis is stopped immediately this option is available only for motion controllers that support this function and ignores the given position and speed values Move axes to home position the axis is moved to its home reference position this option is available only for motion controllers that support this function and ignores the given position and speed values All other parameters influence the whole motion element Pre Motion Delay this delay is done before the motion is triggered Use Control Output the BeamConstruct to Control plug in provides two CTRL outputs where motion control data can be emitted this option gives the possibility to define which of both outputs OUT2 or OUT3 have to emit the motion information defined for this element 7 7 4 14 Custom Output Most scanner controller cards provide several analogue and or digital outputs As soon as a scanner controller card is configured within the project settings this element can be used to send values to these outputs This Primary Element does not contain any geometry so clicking the related tool bar button immediately adds it to the current project The exact layout of the related property pane highly depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card There options are shown depending on the outputs the used card provides 215 So it is possible that following types of outputs can be enabled for modification and set with
8. Dashed Arcs the spiral consists of dashes where the dashes are not straight lines but follow the shape of the spiral and therefore are round Dashed Straights the spiral consists of dashes where the dashes do not follow the shape of the spiral but are straight lines Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance this parameter decides how long the resulting lines of the chosen line style have to be it is not valid for the continuous line style where the length would be always equal to the circumference Inner Radius the inner minimum or starting radius of the spiral Outer Radius the outer maximum or ending radius of the spiral Slope this value defines the steepness of the spiral its value influences how strong it rises per rotation Segments here it can be chosen how much segments the outer part of the spiral has to consist of this parameter influences the accuracy of the result for the line style Dashed Arcs it influences the smoothness of the resulting arcs while the Distance parameter influences their length Smoothing Factor normally a spiral is generated out of short lines where the length is calculated out of the number of segments specified above and the current radius This leads to an adapt
9. Numeric IN1 numeric IN7 data inputs for the AND concatenation Numeric OUT1 numeric OUT7 data outputs that send the values resulting from this operation Numeric Shift Register This flow elements implements a shifting register it stores all data that are set at its data input New values are stored so that they can be read at output 0 Whenever a new value is set all the preceding ones are shifted up by one output number so that the old value from output 0 is now located at output 1 the old one from 1 is located at output 2 and so on The old value from output 7 will be shifted to the overflow output where it is emitted immediately This operation does not require any further parameters or definitions Digital INO OUT when this input receives a HIGH signal all the outputs from 0 7 emit the data that are currently stored Digital IN1 RES using this input all the stored data can be reset to their default value 0 Numeric IN2 DATA every time new data arrive here the existing ones within the flow element are shifted up by one output position and the new one is stored to be fetched at output 0 at the next OUT signal Numeric OUTO numeric OUT7 on an HIGH signal on digital INO here the currently stored output data are emitted Character NOP This operation does not require any further definitions It does not modify the character value that is set to the input but simply returns it on next processing cycle NO
10. data outputs that become active only in case the gate is opened 5 3 3 7 2 8 External Flow Control Flow Objects Dialogue Using this plug in some user interaction is possible to inform the user about specific events or to ask a question in order to get some feedback This feedback is given within a dialogue window that pops up above the main window and has to be confirmed Within the configuration panel the text font and style can be defined which has to be used for the dialogue window A single plug in can handle only one message at the same time So when a new message text is set at one of the inputs while the dialogue window is still open it is rejected and will not be displayed Within the debugger that rejection is indicated within the OpenPlayer this message is rejected silently Char INO here the text for an error dialogue has to be given this text is displayed as the error message within the dialogue Char IN1 here the text for an warning dialogue has to be given this text is displayed as the warning message within the dialogue Char IN2 here the text for an informational dialogue has to be given this text is displayed as the information message within the dialogue Char IN3 here the text for an question has to be given this text should form a question that can be answered with Yes No or Cancel Digital OUTO this output sends a HIGH signal as soon as the error message is confirmed by the user Digital OUT1 this
11. input parameter for Y coordinate values as it is used by some of the FEB commands this input only sets a parameter for later use it does not cause communication with the scanner card Numeric IN Z input parameter for Z coordinates as it is used by several commands Numeric IN ANGLE angle input parameter this input only sets a parameter for later use and does not invoke a command Numeric IN VALUE generic input parameter for numeric values used by some of the FEB commands Char IN ENTITY_NAME input to set a name of an entity for later use with a command Char IN VALUE generic input parameter for text values used by some of the FEB commands Digital IN LOAD_JOB when a HIGH signal is set to this input a new job is selected using the job number of the VALUE input as a result the outputs CMD_OK and in case an error occurred during selecting a job the output ERROR is set Digital IN MARK_TRIGG this input enables the mark trigger mode using the currently selected job after setting this input the current job is marked as soon as the scanner card receives an external trigger Digital IN MARK_START starts marking the currently selected job immediately Digital IN MARK_STOP stops a running marking process immediately and disables the mark trigger mode in case it is active Digital IN MATRIX_ROT rotates the complete job around the centre of the working field using the value of the ANGLE input Digital IN MATRIX_SCA s
12. output for the Control data delivered at IN7 here the control data are emitted synchronously dependent on the current movement position so that a tool can be controlled correctly dependent on the current position This output also pays attention to possible tool on delays or tool off delays as long as they are smaller than 0 the control data are emitted the given time before the related movement starts so that negative on off delays are handled correctly This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_ims_mdrive2 Sill R Focus Ethernet This is a one axis motion plug in to access a Sill focus shifter via Ethernet Since the hardware is controlled via serial interface an Ethernet to serial converter is required in order to use this plug in In first configuration panel the TCP IP configuration of that converter has to be set In second panel the motion parameters can be set the focus shifter has to be operated with Here a conversion factor from distance in unit um to internal representation of the focus shifter has to be given Beside of that the upper and lower movement limit in unit um can be specified as well Since this is a motion plug in that can control only one axis only following in and outputs are available Numeric INO POS absolute position in unit micrometers to move the axis to here the factor out of the configuration is used to calculate the incremental position used by the focus shifter out of the given metric distance
13. the digital outputs that correspond to the lines DO D7 of the parallel port Digital INO ACK digital input that emits the signal of the ACK input whenever its state changes Digital IN1 BSY digital input that emits the signal of the BSY input whenever its state changes 74 Digital IN2 PE digital input that emits the signal of the PE input whenever its state changes Digital IN3 SEL digital input that emits the signal of the SEL input whenever its state changes Digital IN4 ERR digital input that emits the signal of the ERR input whenever its state changes This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_parallel_inout Serial Interface This plug in can be used to establish bi directional communication via a serial interface The transferred data can be formatted depending on the configured mode or they can be plain and unformatted as handed over to the plug in Within the configuration panel the name of the serial interface and the serial connection parameters have to be set Additionally a user name and password can be given These authentication data are valid only with the formatted transfer modes and require a software on the opposite side of the connection that is able to understand this format for an example an other Serial Interface plug in would be able to handle this format correctly Next one of the following operation modes has to be selected Command Value a mode for formatted data transmissions tha
14. this is a command input that lets axis 1 move immediately to the given position using the speed value that is set at input AX1_SPD Numeric IN AX1_SPD sets a new speed that is used for the next movement of axis 1 Digital IN AX1_STOP stops a movement of axis 1 immediately Digital IN AX1_HOME this input can be used when the axis has stopped it lets the axis do a reference movement to find its home position Numeric IN AX2_POS this is a command input that lets axis 2 move immediately to the given position using the speed value that is set at input AX2_SPD Numeric IN AX2_SPD sets a new speed that is used for the next movement of axis 2 Digital IN AX2_STOP stops a movement of axis 2 immediately Digital IN AX2_HOME this input can be used when the axis has stopped it lets the axis do a reference 120 movement to find its home position Numeric IN AX3_POS this is a command input that lets axis 3 move immediately to the given position using the speed value that is set at input AX3_SPD Numeric IN AX3_SPD sets a new speed that is used for the next movement of axis 3 Digital IN AX3_STOP stops a movement of axis 3 immediately Digital IN AX3_HOME this input can be used when the axis has stopped it lets the axis do a reference movement to find its home position Numeric IN AX4_POS this is a command input that lets axis 4 move immediately to the given position using the speed value that is set at input AX4_SPD Nu
15. END MAP nalean in a a a A de an deeds danny Lees 151f END VAR r ataa ain nine A eee 150 ONdICSS a E E E E EE T E E E 17 endless lO Piti ic AA AA A Ad 28 Enlarge TUCU A A iia 229 El A eds Se E 147 ETA A ind 106 248 EXE iii 132 Execute Programi accenn iie rareta A A ee 132 EM da A a ee AAA daa 148 Exit ADpliCatiON ien i ee aa ee e d A ia ee tee 60 193 Ext icon A Weta 240 242 Expand BY Dti o a da o den 167 207 External Application ci a tt 17 External Trigger td od 215 F False COS A A A et 231 A A EEA A E AA EEE ARAE 231 AE raaa a AE RE hea EA E a N a e E A OA 63 EEE O e EAEE ETE A EEE E E E E E E EE E EASA 228 Flat Z extemally Ariven cosida E n a ee eel E AN dde 226f Floating NumberFleld ccc ia iii 22 30 NEOA KS visi A A aa aia 27 Flo WEIR a E E E AS 16 24 FIG Wel NLE 1O EESE sce E EE T E E A EE A AE E ESA si AE AE E beak E AE el 35 TOCA COMEN A E EA E A EAE 248f FOCAL COM O AARRE EE AE EAE A TA AE E EA ca Aiea AE A A A ES EA A dhe 249 ROM TA AA E A EA EA T ab 20 FORMU Pa R E E A E a te heehee ice Aa A 212 Foreground Colour aserne don 20 TO Mais ct a ota 41 44f EMO bd laa ct O A ENT 23 ETeeze VISCO td a ras Aida 231 ELE QUEEN Ys ETA di ta decida 162 195 TONES Win A E Aaa 203 FUNCTION BLOCK soon id 149f 152 G A Coad Sack a r a seussaw cad tetas esan accuses sh dandotehsan openadenuad Gebaa a daddeatatesteart 80 88 C Code Controler aida dd dE da 80 O AAN 81 CAMA A A E A E OAE A ea 201 El AAE ER EAN oa
16. Flow Plug in Plug in Plug in Plug in Hardware The most simple architecture consists of the OpenPlayer only here the Visualisation and the logic flow is handled by the OpenPlayer completely plug ins are connected to it directly so that access to hardware or other external data sources is done by the OpenPlayer too While such a system can be set up fast and easy it has some great disadvantages it can become confusing very fast when it grows because there is no clear structure where every part of the system is located on an own logic layer So it is recommended to use this set up only for very small and simple projects where no chance exists that they may grow over time 13 For more complex environments it is recommended to uncompress the whole thing and to put every component into an own layer that corresponds to its task So all elements plug ins that somehow access the hardware should be uncoupled from the visualisation HMI of the OpenPlayer This requires an additional communication instance that gives the possibility to connect the now separated components with each other Here the Interlock Server comes into account it is located below the OpenPlayer and above the plug ins that access the hardware These plug ins itself now are managed by a small program named OpenPlugger This application is able to handle exactly one plug in and to communicate with the
17. LOW is chosen that was done in configuration panel Graphs Numeric IN1 CMD using this input the state of the graph panel can be changed during runtime Every command exists of a number xy where the decimal digit x can be in range 1 6 and specifies the number of the graph the numbers 4 6 are assigned to the graphs A C The digit y specifies the operation that has to be done with this graph 0 disables it so that it is no longer visible but still collects data 1 enables it to become visible 2 resets all data completely so that it starts from the beginning this command acts independent from the chosen Data Skip Mode Numeric IN2 1 input data from graph 1 Numeric IN3 2 input data from graph 2 Numeric IN4 3 input data from graph 3 Numeric IN5 A input data from graph A Numeric IN6 B input data from graph B Numeric IN7 C input data from graph C This plug in is located in hmiplugins libio_hmi_plot2d Vector2D This plug in can be used to display two dimensional vector data out of sequences of binary control structures These structures can be generated e g with the CSV to Control HPGL to Control BeamConstruct to Control or CNConstruct to Control plug ins please refer below Thus the Vector2D plug in offers a possibility to implement a preview of how the data look like or what was processed last It offers several configuration possibilities that influence the behaviour and
18. MAP this output is related to an optional wafer scanner after a SCN command is sent to the robot and the scanning process is finished the scanning result is emitted at this output using a sequence of numbers that specifies the state of every wafer these numbers are the result of a MAP command This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_iwh_robot Panasonic Minas With this plug in Panasonic Minas servo controllers can be accessed and used for motion operations There is also a macro available that encapsulates the low level functionalities described here and gives more comfortable possibilities to access the drive The plug in is able to handle up to four axes that are connected to the same RS485 line The Minas controllers itself need to have a basic configuration in order to operate with this plug in So the motion position at index 1 has to be configured for absolute movements single operation and to use the speed 1 All other motion position indices in range 2 60 can be used and configured freely Beside of that every connected drive needs to be set up with a unique address so that the plug in is able to identify and access the axes correctly Within the configuration panel different parameters have to be set up First of all the serial interface has to be configured here the interface name and the connection parameters need to be set according to the parameters that are configured for the controller Next for every used axis seve
19. NUMbEraiws weenie dale tied ieee A A a ede 191 Qutput Pol unta Amen Rie ee Aine adi ela A ce ee ees 191 Override Control ParaMeterS iii ia A A ed an 58 P Panasonic aT e dl 114 Parallel Mie a E a a a a a aa cht a a aaa aa E E D aE ET EA A AAE 74 Parameter Wizard ae e a ai 196 Pa Sii A A EAN 235 Par s Coti ria iaa eel ods 193 Password Field cali add iaela 22 30 131 Pocas ates aa ros 165 205 Pen TOQUEN A ae A eee 193 PON OMEGA OU E e a daa 162 196 Pen ON CO OU A a OA 162 196 Pen Parameter WIZand situ a la 196 Pen SetINGS ia he ea ave eee eel ei donne sh E E de avi ei 194 POD A A A ii in oa Ea bass 58 PID Controller coi ai a A A N rico 58 A A 191 234 Pincushion distin A a e rada aes AS 248f Pincushion Distortion a EA a Muvdnbdontonecadeded bbc d 249 O O 33 PIPE A tae o a iota seals att dei A 38 placeholder dd ti A A E A EE 41 PC it vacua A e ear Aoi ae 146 30124 D AE EELE E E E E EATA EE EAEE A E Te aia ala ah Ha ola Seka Coteau teat aire ee Mek ILM 36 Pr la td rd ca Saad Mio Otic uml De 125 MU tad o e cdo de coo de a E aa ted ated 12 Plugged DEVICES A Taa a o a A e ees 16f 132f 156 pont edito eea a a aa a e m a aaa a a a a a a ld 164f 203f PONGO ee ta a e e o dee det o o a a 161 190 POIVQOM O cddaee E E bese tases TA T TA 171 211 POSITION tit ba Mucus ows fuural Suet a A meas 20 Position Co mec sudar a a E A E NE 33 Position Correction to NUMDEL ccccceeeeccecceesecceecesssceeceaussceesceausseeeee
20. Raylase R SP ICE2 Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Beside of that some laser equipment can be damaged in case it is controlled with wrong signals Thus it is highly recommended to check the output generated by this plug in using e g an oscilloscope to avoid problems caused by wrong configurations This should be done prior to putting a system into operation for the first time and prior to putting a system into operation after a software update was installed This plug in can be used to access the Raylase SP ICE2 scanner controller card for controlling a scan head and a connected laser in real time Within the configuration dialogue the plug in and the scanner controller card have to be configured according to the connected devices Basic P the IP of the board to be controlled by this plug in Port the port number of the board Laser type the type of the connected laser the field that was selected here directly corresponds to the laser tab panes where some additional laser specific settings can be done for a detailed description of the available options please refer to the manual of the SP ICE2 and to the manuals of the laser device vendor Power output the laser ou
21. configuration panel offers following configuration possibilities Device Open Command here a custom command can specified that is sent to the laser when everything is initialised and when all connected devices are opened e Device Open Delay this is an optional delay that can be specified to let the plug in wait after the Device Open Command is sent and before all other operations like opening of other devices are continued this can be useful to let the laser start up settle completely e Ready for Marking Command this custom command is sent to the laser whenever it has to be ready for marking it is issued e g in case BeamConstruct opens the Mark dialogue e Ready for Marking Delay this is an optional delay that can be specified to let the plug in wait after the Ready for Marking Command is sent and before all other operations like start of marking operation are continued this can be useful to let the laser start up settle completely e Job Start Command this command is sent to the laser prior to submission of first vector data to the scanner card e Job Start Delay this is an optional delay that can be specified to let the plug in wait after the Job Start Command is sent and before sending of marking vector data begins e Control power during process when this checkbox is set the plug in controls the power of the laser means it sends the related command to it automatically on every change of output power and bef
22. this time out is active when the robot references and or moves to the home position When this operation lasts longer as the specified home time out value in unit seconds the operation is cancelled Char INO CMD an ASCII command that is sent to the robot depending on the kind of command the outputs of this plug in will change their state Digital IN1 STP a HIGH signal at this input stops any movement of the robot immediately Digital IN2 HOM when a HIGH signal is sent to this input the robot performs a movement to its home position depending on the kind of encoder that is used that operation includes referencing for all axes Numeric OUTO R current radius of the robots position in 1 1000 inches Numeric OUT1 T current angular position of the robots arm in unit 1 100 degrees Numeric OUT2 Z current height of the robots arm in unit 1 1000 inches all these three values change its state permanently during a movement of the robot Digital OUT3 VCMD this output signals the current state of the chucks vacuum valve it signals if it is turned on vacuum enabled wafer gripped or of Digital OUT4 VSEN here the state of the vacuum sensor is given this output emits a HIGH as soon as the vacuum valve is turned on and a wafer is detected on the chuck Digital OUT5 MOV this output is set to HIGH as long as the robot moves a new movement can be sent to the robot only when LOW is given here Numeric OUT6
23. when a value is set here the movement starts immediately Numeric IN1 MODE at this input several other parameters can be specified depending on the given value to start a movement a value greater than 0 has to be set here prior to specifying the target positiion at input 0 when a value of 0 is set the axis is stopped independent from its current position a value of 1 causes a movement to the home position Binary IN7 CTRL input for binary motion control data Numeric OUTO POS this output gives the current position of axis 1 during a movement operation it changes permanently Numeric OUT1 MODE this is a state output that emits a O when the drive has stopped or the current speed otherwise Digital OUT6 BSY this output signals the busy state of the plug in it is set to HIGH as soon as a motion 113 command arrives and is started to be executed and goes back to LOW only in case the axis stopped moving and no more motion commands are available this output has to be connected with the BSY input of the plug in that provides the binary motion data This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_sill_focus IWH Robot Using this plug in an Isel Wafer Handling Robot and compatible devices can be controlled via ASCII commands that are transmitted using a serial interface Thus the serial port and its parameters have to be set up according to the used settings As additional parameter the home time out has to be specified
24. 0 specify the current motion speed in unit mm sec Digital OUT6 BSY signalises the busy state of the plug in as long as motion data are processed for at least one axis or as long as there are motion data available for processing this output has to be connected with the BSY input of the plug in that generates the control data Binary OUT7 CTRL this output emits the tool controlling part of coordinate related control information that have been set at IN7 these data are emitted time synchronous to the data at the numerical outputs This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_ctrl2num Control To Tool This plug in uses a binary control structure as input and returns the single tool related fields out of it as outputs Thus it can be used to access a tool directly by sending the related parameters to it using separate communication channels that do not handle the ControlRoom internal control structure This converter expects binary control data that are not delivered by a converter like the CSV or HPGL converter directly but from a motion plug in that emits the control data with correct timing like the MDrive plug in The Control To Tool plug in handles the on delays and off delays correctly in case they are positive means the data emitted by this plug in already have the correct timing according to the related movement Within the configuration panel of this plug in it has to be configured which parameters have to be emitted at outpu
25. 1 of the display Numeric IN1 LN1 the value for the bar graph that is displayed in line 1 of the display possible values are in range 0 100 Char IN2 LN2 the text that has to be displayed in line 2 of the display Numeric IN3 LN2 the value for the bar graph that is displayed in line 2 of the display possible values are in range 0 100 Char IN4 LN3 the text that has to be displayed in line 3 of the display Numeric IN5 LN3 the value for the bar graph that is displayed in line 3 of the display possible values are in range 0 100 Char IN6 LN4 the text that has to be displayed in line 4 of the display Numeric IN7 LN4 the value for the bar graph that is displayed in line 4 of the display possible values are in range 0 100 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_lcdproc LUA IO This plug in does not access any external hardware but provides some in and outputs that can be programmed freely via an embedded LUA script For details regarding LUA programming language please refer to http www lua org The plug in comes with a predefined set of in and outputs of different types which can be read and written out of a LUA script This script can run once or within a loop or can be triggered by the plug in to run periodically means the plug in restarts the script as soon as it has finished A LUA example project and related script that accesses all los is available in example projects Following additional
26. 151f isX b digi datace i rn AA 151f isX CD NUM data iii A e AD AAA niae e A 151f S OE A N AE eee a N 151 IS Di A E E A E E ence T E E A A 151f DN ecdas decane vee 151 IWH Robotics ane Aa eae A ein adel AA tedden Aa ee eestor 114 IWH Robot Controller cv toc A annie dadeageeebebese deers 119 IWH Robot Plug Maisie eiei A iii 119 J JMP da ee alent niet dao cae ee eles 148 IMP Ciud dis 148 IMP E Noi A AA AAA 148 JOY Warrior Accelerometer aranesi a a dd Daba 67 JUMP A A AA AA AA n 234 JUMP Delays ii A db ca E 197f JUMP Speed iii AA ed ia 193 195 K Ot sala Mavens tetatat eaten 172 213 Keyboard TONG sirota E lia 18 Keyboard size Tacna id phates ates 18 Keystone COMEN ae ccccccs ccc ceceeevencs decode vecncce iv eduad adi 223f L LS a ada als de ae de foe a eb e a 27 194 Laser Off Delay i zis facet a5 A ll aora 196 198 259 Laser On Del iii a Desi Ds ande 196 198 ER OOO 215 LC A Lab 228 LV A e o ed el et to rt DL titan 166 205 LY a O e O ca 165 205 Layer Tab Panes tna a a de el O e aaa asco 166 205 Layered Sphere detect 209 LC NumericDiS pl cc total 23 34 KeBa korog CALS aN An E E AE Aaa O ls AMA 67 ED A A A TN teen Ae ott aS a a e eta ata E 146 A E O T T A E N E 151 ON E P EE A AE T A T N EAT AET E E E 146 Eon O A 147 lipbwlOCate asc csc ewe esse bagel inn td E AAA 77 A A ROTO RN 192 A OS 23 167 207 Mea Meter A N E 35 Linear Regulators x a s shea ai o tada de 32 NT a S old e sca ae enn oe UNA
27. 239 BEAM Piscinas Td a Aerial 44 188 236 BEAMS ral o a E A E A A 240 Bezler CUE A adi s 171 211 BINARIA ceo tmunane wo eee 4200 Ooh 25 Binary Data Coume eoi a a religeees tates E sac cste e a aaea tecce E a A A es Meee 57 Binatty Galoa AOS 62 Binary NOR e do Oe ada 53 Bman SNR Regleta ii ies 53 Binary Triggered Gate a A E ed nteeheninun kites 62 BOO as coor sae as Aoi ae oleae ances idee dh Miss ban abieatiebeas a e aaa 149 153 Bottom 1 0 Tops taiete sees ted EA ue ad ISS 226f AA 5 a ar tty ele oe ide ets eo etalon ato Marae at tata eda dak a teeGl Le haan 201 C GA EEE E detal 149 7a E OE EEEE IE AFEA E EN E ES EAEE E ida ies 150 07a EN EEAS EATS E EEEE ESET E EEEE AEA E ES PEREA EEEE E EE ESS E TOA 150 Calculate Delays rnai a A A A E NEETA 197 Galibrate Game fa a a a aaa a a aaa bebidas 232 Capture Images e a AEA E EA ENE EE ANR 65 COM X NEET EE EAT E EE S EEEE EE E E E E TE A cdt oda 164 204 CONIC NR 164 204 CONTO Lt E E ETE E E A E A EA EEE A A 204 Character Counter EEEE EA EE EE EEE E EE EE OTERA 57 Character Gate E EEE A EEEE E EE A EAEE ATS 61 Character O EE E E EA S E EE EEA TEE Gade came dt E EAEE EEA 52 Character Shit Registon 2 5552 fess tado lc E EA EAA aR 52 Character Triggered Gena leccion 61 Characters tO OM DMa Ve R a dd 43 Characters to Digital static ENA EEEE E A e EE K a ean KSAR E 42 Characters to MAEA dt dia 45 Characters to Number a a e dd ae 42 CHA RS A ltd do ii 25 NN 35 COMEDOR ia add M
28. 40 Digital to Number ai 39 Digital Triggered Gate ci di 60 DIN a AET N A ra saben 149 153 disabled aca 22 158 DNS A Ol 21 23 Display image on manual activation ONlY ooooccoccnnnnncccccnnnncocccnccnonannnnnononnnn cn cnn nano no nan cnn nn n nn arc n anar nnnan rn EEEE 192 Display redute ci A A is 228 Display Redute oeaan cai 228 Distance to Model ic ita 229 Dl A O lo cei seven dedi Ra 147 Don t show warning when referencing AXES ooccocccccoccccccccononnnncccnnnoncnnncnnnnnncnncnnnnn nn cnn rnnnnnnrnn nr naar nn ran rr naene nananana 192 DO a 167 207 DOUblS ArTOWS ia ii toas 235 DAW CO West oda 161 169f 190 209ff DraWw Off Movements asia nidad 162 195 DraWing Arau di a E 190 Drop Calibrator eatin ada cicair 232 Drop a o cafes 232 Duplicate cia A E E 166 180 206 E E Mail INOtITIGATION ju tai A et ela A A A i 124 EVP OMD tl A A 83f ETO Laser Controller A ias 85 ETC ME A aii 109ff EJES COM ii ihe E apes dandh cea deaceantedsetn Seen Aes 161 190 AC oo o iena a aan ited hac s ea Oh alain Leen ii detied eta al iasieldaastaaaes 193 Element E oE ate la EEE E sl A Diarias T T 165 204 EEN A M E E E AE A ENE E T E AA A Oh E AEEA ET OAA EAE A 176 218 S A EE E idas AA 23 Embed mto Project ii n a A AEEA E AA 22f Enable User Management oscinina aa E AE IKEA AIA ear aA aaa 193 ona eTe eena a E E E a e T A 158 Enclose Model Completely orinis a anona a a ar A A EE danna ccoo 229 END FUNCTION J wa e aa aA E E NA 149f 152
29. A aeai a 37 45 174 177 181f CNG aE E AE EEE east Me AEE AEE A AAE EEEE ida SENEE TEE E EEE 45 184 Coherent R Avia Ethernet Laser Controller o ooooccnnnnnncccnnnnnocccncccnnnannnoncnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn nc nncnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 80 Colour after Maki a di 196 201 Coloured Bitmap Marking coi cielo 200 coloured Scanner bitMapS oia A l me Sheena 196 201 comma separated ValS r tetanic dica 177 219 Common Layer Interface ici ali cool ead EEEE aves dbo 226 Compare Character et thane 56 Compare Diales ias iii ici 54 Compare NUMDe Sci Irae ici 56 Compress Datars iii A ii 48 CONNOR decae rra 26 O aides ale samen esi ue oo AE E A T eet aeanen lamas 22f CONTA Aa oda 201 CONTO AA At a ads 21f Control Flow Timez O LO i E E ada 17 Control Marking ster enaa a aaae a ie Aa e E a a a a aa E Eaa aig 193 OLONIRE RIR ORA IOTA 0121 PAPAR EEFE E A Rd EA AEE A E 46 Gontrol TO Folio A EE EE AE AA a A 47 ControlRoo0 a E EEE A A taa ET 11f 60l ap E0 AET PEETA A A EE R EE ad daa 248 Comeet Multiple POUnts lt lt a a a a ave A a a aoa 248 Correct SINGIG Pone eaaa T E NT A E T ETET 248 Correction BIUC EAER cid a 201 laK iol Taca E aoe TE E A O AEEA TA 191 Gorrection Factoria is tia 191 Correction Ni O Aaa 201 comrection ETE EEEE E A A a iaa 191 Correction Osetia ia A ein 191 Correction Rede nuria Aaa nos 201 correction table ita a iii 248 COS AS Tet as A A vi Na ot Cae es 148 A A ca eats Ca Tec gc CEN a ea Po ne wea ea
30. CSV file contains more than only one column 6 5 7 2 OpenAPC Data Input This input can t be previewed within the editor of CNConstruct It expects input data when the CNConstruct project file is running within an ControlRoom project This can be done by using the CNConstruct to Control plug in This plug in provides three Char inputs IN2 IN3 and IN4 Data that are set at this input are used by this Data Input element to modify the assigned Primary Geometry element Thus a CNConstruct project can be changed dynamically directly within an ControlRoom project 178 Because the data are provided by the ControlRoom project later here only the input has to be defined that has to be used for setting data into the CNConstruct project Whenever new Char data arrive at this input they are used to re create the assigned Primary Geometry element for the next material processing cycle 6 5 7 3 Serial Date Time This is a very complex Data Input element that can be used to generate numbers date or time informations or combinations of them The result can be used to create e g serial numbers best before information or others within a text or a bar code depending on the Primary Geometry element where this input is assigned to The Data itself are updated before the next material processing cycle is started Depending on the used configuration this update increments decrements the serial number and or updates the date or time information to
31. Draw CCW normally a spiral has an clockwise orientation means it is drawn from its starting point to right direction when this check box is set the drawing direction is reversed Inside To Outside this option influences the growing direction when the check box is set drawing of the spiral starts at the inner side and ends outside in case it is not set it starts at the outer side and ends at the inner 7 7 4 8 Polygon A polygon consists of a undefined number of edges but requires at least three Drawing it can be done by 211 left clicking at the position where a corner between the connecting lines has to be positioned This can be done several times the process of drawing this polygon can be finished by right clicking the mouse Then the last corner and the first position where the user left clicked are connected by a line Drawing functionality can be extended by pressing one of the keys Shift or Ctrl after specifying the starting point of the polygon first click when Shift is held down for one of the following points a horizontal line is drawn next and vertical deviations of current mouse position are ignored When Control is held down a vertical line is drawn and horizontal deviations of current mouse position are ignored Following options are available to modify the parameters of the polygon Line Style the style the polygons lines is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry co
32. Interlock Server So for every plug in that accesses hardware or external devices one instance of the OpenPlugger is used OpenPlayer HMI Flow Plug in Plug in gt Sequencer Interlock Server lt lt Open Open Plugger Plugger Plug in Plug in Hardware 14 This structure now gives the additional possibility to dock other components to the Interlock Server that are able to access and influence all components of this environment They can watch hardware states as reported by OpenPlugger instances and their plug ins can react on user input as reported by the OpenPlayer and can control application flows and sequences This element named as Sequencer here can be an own application a LUA or Instruction List script or an other instance of the OpenPlayer that resides on an other system After the communication with the Interlock Server is done via TCP IP completely all the components referred here can be spread over a network The big advantages of such a structure are it can be extended easily simply by adding new elements that all communicate via the Interlock Server the structure is clear and the communication paths simple everything is routed via the Interlock Server no confusing cross connections between involved elements are necessary the flow within the OpenPlayer
33. Lines all lines between the selected points are removed the points itself are left untouched Insert point before a new point is added in the middle between the currently selected point ant its preceding one Insert point after a new point is added in the middle between the currently selected point ant its subsequent one 6 6 2 Edit Non Destructive The non destructive editing functions perform modifications that leave the geometries untouched as well as the elements they are created from Some of them are available also from within the context menu of the Element Tree Alternatively they can be found in Menu Edit sub menu Non Destructive and require at least on element to be selected Group several selected Primary Geometry elements are concatenated together within a group Group to Active Split using this function geometries that are larger than the available working area can be cut into smaller pieces and processed step by step using an additional drive for more information please refer the related section below Group to Active Move here full geometries can be processed repeatedly and combined with movements so that the same geometry is arranged in tiles or at the circumference of a ring several times for more information please refer the related section below UnGroup an existing group of elements is removed the contents of the group are put out of it Duplicate a cop
34. OpenPlugger can be used only with projects that make use of the Interlock Server In case a local Interlock Server is configured within a project the OpenPlayer or the OpenDebugger will start all required OpenPlugger instances automatically But in case a remote Interlock Server is used that needs to be done manually after the server and before the player was started In such cases the OpenPlugger can be executed using the following command line options p lt project_file gt specifies the path to the project file this project file has to be exactly the same like it is used for all other OpenPlugger instances and for the OpenPlayer OpenDebugger Beside of that the Interlock Servers IP that is configured within that project file needs to be accessible from the host where the OpenPlugger is started from in order to establish a communication channel with the Interlock Server n lt plug_in_name gt the unique name of the plug in that has to be handled by this instance of the OpenPlugger every plug in within a project that was configured for external use has to be handled by exactly one OpenPlugger i lt id gt the unique number that was assigned to a plug in within the Plugged Devices list every plug in within a project that was configured for external use has to be handled by exactly one OpenPlugger in case this option is used no plug in name option u needs to be given V be verbose print out additional information
35. Tab Pane Comparing to the Geometry Pane this one contains more global parameters of the selected element Depending on the type of selected element only some of the parameters are accessible Type this is an informational field and therefore read only it displays the type name of the element Name here the name of the element is shown and can be changed this name is auto generated when the element is created and shown within this pane and within the element tree on the main windows right hand side Layer CNConstruct supports several drawing and displaying layers that can be used to separate parts of the whole project from each other and to make it easier to manage complex projects these layers can be hidden and shown depending on which has to be visible using the combo box provided here the selected element can be assigned to one of the available layers for more information please refer the section about the layer tab pane below Pen a pen is a definition about how the related geometry has to be processed on the target system here a pen can be assigned to the current geometry so that is is processed using these specific pen parameters please refer above for a description of the available pen parameters Process Geometry this check box decides if the related geometry has to be processed or not when it is not checked the related element acts as some kind of help drawing only it is not used by the target system fo
36. Tessellation Language eera a A E E A A E NSS 226 Symbol But ier E a A O E E a S 33 T Fabpbed Pane rie im AAN AAN 23 38f Teach Fid cial mnnn i a wae atin nc da 232 Vb AA N Ada 20 172 177 212 219 TextField ai A A ee edad 22 30 TOxtLlabeliita A e 23 38 TOXELIS DO A A vie edd ea eee ee 33 MMS ideas A eeu eh in catia A eee 227 229 Tile SKip SiZ6saiacsehoies usted dahon shied asl ee ee a hee ee aa dda a eee ed 227 229 A NN 60 TIME Resol ON do o o e ES 17 TO PrOduUces it e a e e a aeaa a iets wealth Sad 235 Toggle BUON d a 22 30 TOQGIE FIIPF litio A di dt 51 TOO A a el lia 176 218 TOO COMPENASAMON a 176 SA tes Aactieet Aa ene eat act ced hac cota nthe a dere dt ad TN 162 A ord cece O nati hon Bitante cate 162 TOO SIZES ssa A hee atte aoageah eset desde ma tae tons E a Catt oc nda oie tats eM cad ot Shale 162 TOD TO BOOM a a e Ls ONO 226f O NN 203 TOUCH SCrESNISUPPOMMA se fae A A dde 18 O A NN 168 207 ngger ao a A E EA aa oAocae 242 U L EEA PNI EE EE E PEA o la EET 102 UDIN A AEE E T E E A E E A nit eaes deante a sanburntuteand 149 153 A Raa E E E E E E E E E EA A Po ital eal etias 149 153 A NN 76 A O ch bated cad N ay chee eel kee tee dh a beeeed ad 149 153 Wi GrOU NN 180 WnGroup m ETA aE EAE EE AEE A E dazeautaebade tous ph debe temnedateneseataaneserececes 166 206 USBUIR IEEE E E A E A S A E E ATE 76 Us as coloured Scanner bitmap a aa t aa a a a a a aa aa dei 201 US6as defaultiPen aaa E PE E A A e ESAT A
37. This functionality has to be handled with care When such a potentially endless loop is defined and explicitly enabled there has to be a condition to interrupt such a loop e g by using a gate element to interrupt the data flow of the loop or at least a delay of a nameable time has to be added When this is not done the project may consume much processing time in OpenPlayer and may stop or cumber other processes on the target machine and it may consume much computing power So in such cases a very exact and accurate debugging is necessary 5 3 3 6 Grouping Flow Objects Within the Flow Editor one or more flow elements that belong together can be put into a group To do that they first have to be surrounded by a rectangular box that specifies the elements that have to be put into one logical group That can be done by holding down the left mouse button and dragging the mouse around the desired elements This draws a thin rectangle from the starting point of the mouse to its current position which can be used to include flow elements When the mouse button is released next the right mouse button has to be pressed and within the opening pop up menu the item Group Elements can be selected Now the current project is modified all the selected flow elements are replaced by one bigger box that has as much inputs and outputs as all the flow elements had to connect with the not selected elements which now are the outer world This bigger box is a
38. a large buffer is used it may hold some none processed data while for this progress bar they are already finished So this progress information is mainly suitable for long running processes where relative deviation between mark dialogue estimated and real marking time is quite small but not for getting a process forecast for fast marking operations For last case it is still recommended to use the function Simulate in menu Process 7 12 1 Exporting Data To use the created data on the target system for processing work pieces they have to be stored in a usable format Here following possibilities exist BeamConstruct BEAMP project files This is the project file format of BeamConstruct here all information about used elements and sub elements modified geometry scanner and laser parameters are contained no information are lost when this format is used 236 CSV format The comma separated values format is more a simple list of parameters that are comma separated This format includes all geometry and some pen information and can be used e g by the CSV to Control plug in of the ControlRoom software to extract the processing information out of it Here no dynamic information are contained only static geometry can be marked when this format is used HPGL format This is a vector graphics format that contains only geometry information the pen and thus the processing data are not part of this format So it should be
39. a structure for such an environment could consist of the main project running in OpenPlayer the Interlock Server running in background and holding the data of all user interface elements flow elements and what is possible just by sending data with a new currently unused name to the 142 server helper data that are used to cache additional information an own application for automatic sequences that docks to the Interlock Server and runs automated processes and own application for software interlocks that checks if all security conditions are met that are necessary before an external device is used in this case both the application for automatic sequences and the main project from within the OpenPlayer never should access data elements directly that are located behind the interlock application both should send events to the Interlock Server that have to be checked by the software interlock anown application for automatic processes that are no operational sequences and have to run all the time here you can implement things like operating hours counters as long as a specific device is turned on this application counts the time and writes the result into an other data element that itself can be displayed within the main projects HMI anown application that stores important data from time to time to keep information that should not get lost e g the operating hours counter values at next applicati
40. ae acute Matar 149 153 N E E EET R O eniaage de Pataauisy assis O TEE 148 Load default iCONfIQUTAION cc a R A 194 Edad Elduain da a a A tha au venees 232 Load MaS A A a laeetaree 126 Mc A O 193 IDA MRO oE ii o e 193 Load OX actors aha aM see e dl dl A oh O e e Gna 127 A ode ke a Acta a a eaten Od alee tae elena a ne ts te aa ees 239 ED G O E fesdtnat an E A E A EE Bak ee 148 ioro EDENI a E A A E EEN N eee aG es 21 130f oto Hate eono E 2 ET EEA OS 20 131 II A ee ee ee ee Li a Eie e aE ie als 131 A 20 LOGIC Operations ici A indore A E ib dd 27 OP ica A A A A A A dc ica 17 LREAL A geet iets i iar ei vee ait Ne eee nln a A a ee 149 153 O 147 LUA oc a A AA AA ede ee aed eed 14 143 LWA Oi E E A A E A Gin ae a AAA A 68 luaig get VU Devi tt dd 68 lalo Nas new value jaise reises innii di cini eraan E eaaa i iai ana A EEN aeaa aE aa a deci 68 luaio recv dataCallDaCk iici ra iaaa a aaa dd nn EEEa a 68 UA set Valli a adi 68 A NN 143 Ly con LY 001Scanner Controller acond ero 86 M MAGCIOS iii A AAA A ASA aa ie aa 27 29 Makeblock XY P lote noc uri a aa laos 88 Manager Users iumiicini ee te 193 Manli a A A A diel cb eel avs 234 Map outputs O SAVE A ans 27 MAP Sun A A A 151ff Markus 233 Mark Delay ccoo A dda be ee oe ee nde eee eas 197f Mark dialogaro dial diene de eae ins 234 Mark didlo ecean a a a did bi DIA 82 Mark repeated y ennaa is id ls ida 234 Mark selected elements noia ds lat aa e a alii 234 MENO AA a Mh adeelo
41. an angle between two vectors of a layer is smaller than the angle given here they will be concatenated to one common vector For small angle values and in most cases this results in a memory consumption which is dramatically lower and processing speed therefore much higher while there is no visible loss in quality of the result Slice Direction here the slice direction for the 3D model can be selected Top To Bottom may be used e g for depth engraving where operation starts on top of the model and moves into the material Bottom To Top can be used e g for rapid prototyping applications where processing starts from bottom and builds up a model slice by slice Slice Mode here it can be selected if the depth information has to be handled by the Z axis of a scanner or by usage of external equipment when mode Real 3D is selected all the slices are located at their true Z position according to the origin model This mode is for usage with a 3D scanner In case mode Flat Z externally driven is selected all slices are located at Z position 0 and the movement in depth direction has to be done with a separate device Control elements for this device can be added to a slice group later In case the scanner card is configured for two axis operations only the second option is available in this case Real 3D is disabled and can t be selected Split to tiles the working area is split into invisible tiles
42. and Z are used or in case control data are used that do not contain motion speed delay information Jump Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned off Mark Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned on Laser Off Delay Laser On Delay Jump Delay Mark Delay Polygon Delay these delays are used during marking operation they become active when the laser is turned off or on when the scanner jumps to an other position when it moves to an other position while marking or when the movement direction is changed during marking for a detailed description of these values their usage and their influence to the marking result please refer to the SP ICE2 manual All following tab panes contain laser specific definitions that are used depending on the selected laser type For information about these parameters and their usage please refer to the manuals and specifications of the 90 used lasers The SP ICE2 scanner controller card plug in can be controlled via its inputs directly by transmitting coordinate values to the X Y and Z inputs or by using the control input where a stream of movement data will be accepted It is recommended not to use both options at the same time or without additional synchronisation The results may be undefined when direct and control stream commands are set at the same time In case the control input is used the BSY ou
43. and their usage please refer to the manuals and specifications of the used lasers The RTC ScanAlone scanner controller card plug in can be controlled via its inputs directly by transmitting coordinate values to the X Y and Z inputs or by using the control input where a stream of movement data will be accepted It is recommended not to use both options at the same time without additional synchronisation Here the results may be undefined when direct and control stream commands are set at the same time In case the control input is used the BSY output has to be connected with the source of the control data it signalises if the scanner controller card is still working or if it has finished so that other operations can be triggered Following in and outputs are available for the RTC ScanAlone plug in Numeric INO X the X position the scanner has to be moved to setting a new value to this input does not cause any movement it will be invoked only after the Y or Z input was set Numeric IN1 Y the Y position the scanner has to be moved to in case the plug in was configured to use two axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y Numeric IN2 Z the Z position the scanner has to be moved to in case the plug in was configured to use three axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y z Digital IN3 L turns the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR the power the laser has to be driv
44. and wide parts of the user interface of separate BeamConstruct application please refer to description of BeamConstruct below Comparing to the BeamConstruct2Control plug in it also encapsulates all hardware control means no scanner laser motion controllers have to be connected to this element in Flow Editor The plug in shows the user interface of BeamConstruct containing the tabbed panes the drawing view and the element tree All other buttons and user interaction functionalities can be added via the control input Here command values can be set to cause some actions similar to real user interaction These command values can be generated e g by buttons that are converted to numbers Comparing to the stand alone application the BeamConstruct plug in behaves different in a few important points So it manages default settings too comparing to BeamConstruct main application these default settings are loaded every time after a new project file is opened Here all hardware settings of the loaded project are overwritten to reflect the configuration of the used machine This includes all connected devices but not the pens and their parameters 30 The plug in provides following in and outputs Char IN1 FILE when a path to a BEAMP project file is given here this project is loaded into BeamConstruct plug in Char IN2 corresponds to all OpenAPC inputs within the current project replaces the contents of related dynamic elements at input 2
45. appearance of the 2D view that can be set up via the properties dialogue within the HMI Editor There the Tab Pane Configuration contains the following parameters Maximum Number of Vectors defines how much vectors are displayed within the 2D view at maximum when more data than the amount specified here are transmitted to the plug in the oldest ones are dismissed Field Left Position defines the left position X value of the visible field in unit mm Field Upper Position defines the upper position Y value of the field displayed by this plug in in unit mm Field Size specifies the total size of the shown 2D view in unit mm this parameter together with the two preceding ones specifies which section of the whole coordinate system is shown by the Vector2D plug in Swap X and Y exchanges the incoming X and Y values and therefore flips the display Mirror X mirrors the incoming X values along the Y axis of the coordinate system Mirror Y mirrors the incoming Y coordinate values along the X axis of the coordinate system Within the Tab Pane Colours following definitions can be made for both activation states LOW and HIGH Border the colour of the border drawn around the 2D view Line 0 Power the colour that is used for lines where the power value within the related incoming binary control structure is set to 0 Line 100 Power the colour that is used for lines where the power value within the related
46. are set at its data input New values are stored so that they can be read at output 0 during the next read operation Whenever a new value is set all the preceding ones are shifted up by one output number so that the old value from output 0 is now located at output 1 the old one from 1 is located at output 2 and so on The old value from output 7 will be shifted to the overflow output where it is emitted immediately This operation does not require any further parameters or definitions Digital INO OUT when this input receives a HIGH signal all the outputs from 0 7 emit the data that are currently stored Digital IN1 RES using this input all the stored data can be reset to their default value LOW Digital IN2 DATA every time new data arrive here the existing ones within the flow element are shifted up by one output position and the new one is stored to be fetched at output 0 at the next OUT signal Digital OUTO digital OUT7 on an HIGH signal on digital INO here the currently stored output data are emitted Position Correction to Number This plug in separates the contents of a position correction binary structure and outputs it as plain numbers Binary IN7 POSCORR position correction structure to be converted by this plug in Numeric OUTO X translation in X direction mm Numeric OUT1 Y translation in Y direction mm Numeric OUT2 Z translation in Z direction mm Numeric OUT3 XANG rotation ar
47. as long as this input is set to LOW all the outputs are disabled no incoming data are forwarded to them Numeric IN1 numeric IN7 data inputs the values that are set here are available at the related outputs only in case GATE is set to HIGH Numeric OUT1 numeric OUT7 data outputs that become active only in case the gate is opened Character Triggered Gate This triggered gate expects a character value at input O and emits it at the opposite output as soon as an digital signal 1 is received at the related input Char INO the input for the value that has to be emitted for every trigger signal Digi IN1 Digi IN7 the inputs for the trigger signals that cause the emission of the value from input O at the related outputs Char OUT1 Char OUT7 the outputs for the data that are assigned to the trigger signal inputs Character Gate This element can be used to enable or interrupt the flow of character data Comparing to the triggered gate the digital input does not cause the emission of data that have been stored before here the input allows incoming data to be output immediately HIGH to enable the gate or to be stopped LOW for a disabled gate When the GATE input is set to HIGH that does not cause a data transmission immediately but only 61 after the next data packets arrive Digital INO GATE as long as this input is set to LOW all the outputs are disabled no incoming data are forwarded to them C
48. as stand alone marking data into a local file This requires a configuration where a scanner controller is set up properly that supports this feature like HALaser E1701 controller series The given path specifies the full path of the file that has to be used for the stand alone data When the file already exists it will be overwritten without further notice Such a file can be transferred to the scanner controller manually in next step e g by storing it onto the microSD card of E1701 and then putting this card back into the controller CmdSendMark Using this command it is possible to send the current project data as stand alone marking data to a connected scanner card This requires a configuration where a scanner controller is set up properly that supports this feature like Scanlab RTC4 ScanAlone Here no additional parameters are required since this function sends one exclusive set of marking data to the card CmdSendNamedMark lt name gt Using this command it is possible to send the current project data as stand alone marking data to a connected scanner card using a given name This requires a configuration where a scanner controller is set up properly that supports this feature like HALaser E1701 controller series The given lt name gt is an identifier the marking data are stored on the card with Here the naming structure has to be according to the regulations of the used scanner card For E1701 controller this means the name need
49. be configured correctly planar or rotational mode and they have to access the correct axes that belong to the defined motion modes After such a splitting group has been created and after the correct parameters have been set the appearance of the related geometry does not change but within the entity list a different symbol for the group is shown in order to point to the fact a special kind of group is used here 183 6 6 3 Edit Destructive The functions of this category perform irreversible modifications to the input geometry That means only the resulting geometry is used for further processing and all source elements that have been used to create this geometry get lost Resulting from that there is much less computing time and memory used to hold such geometry and editing on a per vector level is much less difficult because the data no longer can t be overwritten by a re creation caused by some parameter changes On the other hand the conversion to static geometry means that no more dynamic changes are possible like they can be performed when Data Input elements are used Afterwards is is possible to assign Additional Geometry and Post processing elements to the static geometry again Following functions exist that perform such destructive modifications Merge the geometries of the selected elements are merged together the result is one static element with all geometries included into it this function can also be applied to one
50. be used for setting data into the BeamConstruct project Whenever new Char data arrive at this input within a ControlRoom environment they are used to re create the assigned Primary Geometry element for the next marking cycle 7 7 7 3 Serial Date Time This is a very complex Data Input element that can be used to generate numbers date or time informations or combinations of them The result can be used to create e g serial numbers best before information or others within a text or a bar code depending on the Primary Geometry element where this input is assigned to The Data itself are updated before the next material processing cycle is started Depending on the used configuration this update increments decrements the serial number and or updates the date or time information to represent the current time Following parameters can be used to influence the resulting data and their behaviour Start Value the starting value where the serial number has to count from when the project is loaded initially Reset At here a number can be defined that is used as limit for the serial number as soon as the current serial number is equal to the value given here the serial number is reset to the start value defined above Increment the value the serial number has to be incremented by for every update this value can 220 be negative which results in a decrement for every cycle Beat Count this number specifies for t
51. becomes Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines that form the spiral comparing to the previous option here the parameter Distance influences the length of these lines and therefore the resolution here the shorter the lines are the more segments this spiral consists of and the more smooth it becomes Dashed Arcs the spiral consists of dashes where the dashes are not straight lines but follow the shape of the spiral and therefore are round Dashed Straights the spiral consists of dashes where the dashes do not follow the shape of the spiral but are straight lines Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance this parameter decides how long the resulting lines of the chosen line style have to be it is not valid for the continuous line style where the length would be always equal to the circumference Inner Radius the inner minimum radius of the spiral Outer Radius the outer maximum radius of the spiral Slope this value defines the steepness of the spiral its value influences how strong it rises per rotation Segments here it can be chosen how much segments the outer part of the spiral has to consist of this parameter influences the accuracy of the result for the line style Dashed Arcs i
52. by using the Control input where a stream of movement data will be accepted It is recommended not to use both options at the same time or without additional synchronisation The results may be undefined when direct and control stream commands are set at the same time In case the Control input is used the BSY output has to be connected with the source of the control data it signalises if the scanner controller card is still working or if it has finished so that other operations can be started Following in and outputs are available for the LY 001 plug in Numeric INO X the X position the scanner has to be moved to setting a new value to this input does not cause any movement it will be invoked only after the Y or Z input was set Numeric IN1 Y the Y position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use two axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y When laser is off jump speed is used for this movement when it is turned on mark speed is used Numeric IN2 Z the Z position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use three axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y z When laser is off jump speed is used for this movement when it is turned on mark speed is used Digital IN3 L turns the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR the power the laser has to be driven with here a value in range 0 10
53. can be dragged to other positions This can be done for every point separately To drag a group of points together please refer the description of the Geometry Tab Panes table Coordinates below 7 7 1 1 2D and 3D Editing 203 Within most scanner controller parameters please refer to the description of the project settings above it is possible to choose between a 2D operation mode two axis mode and a 3D operation mode three axes controlled by the scanner controller This option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller and influences the behaviour of BeamConstruct s drawing area When a two axis mode is selected only the two axes X and Y can be modified within BeamConstruct and the drawing area offers manipulation possibilities for X horizontal direction and Y vertical direction only As soon as 3D mode is enabled the drawing area is extended by some semi transparent buttons that are shown directly within the drawing areas upper left corner These buttons can be used to switch the current view and the axes that are visible within this view top view the default view for a laser marking system from top where the laser source is located above the working piece here X Y are shown in horizontal vertical direction of the drawing area front view view from front where X Z are shown in horizontal vertical direction of the drawing area right view view from right side where Y Z are shown in horizo
54. case a ControlRoom project is able to process CNConstruct generated data This application exists beside the OpenAPC environment and is an additional tool that belongs to construction process not to production So the normal usage cycle is as follows XY processing data are created within CNConstruct that can be done apart the production place e g in an construction office the constructed data are exported the exported data are transferred to the production where an ControlRoom project is running this ControlRoom projects loads the CNConstruct data and uses it as binary control data internally for processing materials in the desired way 6 3 Project Configuration When starting with a new project it has to be configured first so that the editing environment of CNConstruct reflects the real processing conditions within production This can be done in global settings the related dialogue can be found in menu Project sub menu Project settings There a dialogue opens which offers different configuration options Working Area Upper Left these two input fields define the upper left coordinates of the working area in unit millimetres these values references to a standard XY coordinate system and can be positive or negative Working Area Size the total size of the working area in X and Y direction starting from the previously defined upper left position this size is the range that can be reached
55. case you have to go back to the project settings as described in step 2 and to correct the set up of your scanner controller card SECURITY CHECK Next the laser and scanner will be accessed Since there are some laser controllers available that are VERY sensitive to wrong laser signals it is recommended first to check the output your scanner controller card produces This can be done e g by using an oscilloscope instead of the real hardware The target equipment should be connected only in case all signals are checked correct and acceptable by the hardware More than this it is recommended to repeat this step whenever the something within the complete set up changed changes may be caused e g by modified parameters by software or driver updates Start marking Now marking can be started by pressing the big yellow button the one with the laser warning sign in the middle of the marking dialogue This starts sending of all laser and scanner data to the scanner controller card so that it is able to output motion and laser control data synchronously 189 Such a marking operation can be stopped by pressing the big red button with the STOP symbol at the dialogues right hand side PLEASE NOTE this stop button is not a replacement for a real emergency stop it will try to stop the currently running laser process only via software which in worst case may fail for an example due to an abnormal problem or in case of a hardware failu
56. click into the drawing area specifies the centre point of it the second one specifies the first radius The second radius is set to a smaller value automatically After the star is drawn initially it still can be modified interactively within the drawing area Here every second point the ones that belong to the second radius is marked by a small blue cross This cross can be dragged with the mouse in order to change the second radius independent from the first one and in order to apply an offset to the angle of these points Beside of that the star can be modified via its options too Line Style the style the circle is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of single continuous lines Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points all these lines are connected Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance this parameter decides how long the resulting lines of the chosen line style have to be it 170 is not valid for the continuous line style Radius 1 the first radius that is valid for all odd numbered
57. configuration panel provides possibilities to set up the serial interface here the same parameters have to be specified the Optris LT serial port is running with The second panel gives the possibility to define the behaviour of the plug in via following options Lower Temperature here a default temperature can be set which is used to turn on an external device e g a heater when measured temperature falls below of the limit specified here the device 73 is turned on within a BeamConstruct environment this value can be overriden by pen parameters within ControlRoom Numeric INO can be used to set a new lower temperature value during operation Upper Temperature here a default temperature can be set which is used to turn off an external device e g a heater when measured temperature rises above the limit specified here this device is turned off within a BeamConstruct environment this value can be overriden by pen parameters within ControlRoom Numeric IN1 can be used to set a new lower temperature value during runtime e Additional Digital Output Port this parameter can be used within BeamConstruct only it can be specified to configure the digital output port of a connected scanner controller card to be used for switching the external device within a ControlRoom environment always Digital OUT6 is used for this e Additional Digital Output Bit this parameter can be used within BeamConstruct only it can be specified to
58. controllers have to be driven by BeamConstruct directly or by the BeamConstruct HMI plug in here a valid configuration is required for at least one of them Motion Controller OUT2 or OUT3 this combo box can be used to select a motion controller that would be accessed whenever a motion control information is assigned to output OUT2 or OUT3 please refer to the description of the Primary Element Motion and other motion related functionalities below This selection list makes use of the motion plug ins of the ControlRoom environment so for a description of the related plug ins parameters please refer above The parameters that are set for such a motion controller are NOT handed over to BeamConstruct fully so when some of the axes of a motion controller are not enabled here within its settings they are still be usable and configurable within the related BeamConstruct elements This is necessary to keep all options and possibilities for a user that wants to export a BeamConstruct project and use it within a ControlRoom project where more other axes may be available Reference axis on start up here these axes can be specified that have to be referenced on application startup or on first opening of devices automatically Axis alias and orientation here for the default axes A B and C an own name can be set that is shown e g within mark dialogue to identify the axis additionally for planar axes it can be specified in which direction movem
59. data it is necessary to synchronize several movement operations Binary OUT7 IN binary data that reflect the state of the digital inputs of this scanner controller card these data are required by some plug ins that need to react on these inputs and there have to be connected to them like the scanner controller stepper motor plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_rtc5 SCAPS R FEB Using this plug in the stand alone option of the USC scanner card can be used The communication is done via serial interface and gives the possibility to control the marking process of the scanner card while it is running in stand alone mode and without any other external applications that are controlling it To use this plug in or to initially put data to the scanner card a license may be necessary which is not part of this software package Please contact the vendor of the USC FEB stand alone option for such a license There is also a macro available that encapsulates this plug in and provides several pre defined inputs and functionalities 100 To use this plug in the scanner card has to run in stand alone mode and with no other PC connected where a software is running at that influences the scanner card Within the configuration panel of the plug in the port name of the local serial interface and the serial communication parameters have to be set that correspond to the settings stored at the scanner card When the plug in is initialised
60. data only in operation mode Command Value and always together with a data value that was assigned to this command Digital OUT1 DATA received digital data Numeric OUT1 DATA received numeric data Char OUT1 DATA received text data Binary OUT1 DATA received binary data This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_network_client Network Receiver Using this plug in a server can be set up where several clients can connect to It provides a uni directional connection and emits data received from these clients These data can be formatted depending on the operation mode the client is running with So this plug in expects clients that are able to handle a specific network protocol like the Network Client or Network Transmitter Plugins Within the configuration panel the IP and port number this plug in has to listen at have to be specified together with the maximum number of incoming connections the plug in will handle at the same time Additionally a user name and password can be given In case there are some authentication data set here a connecting client has to authenticate at this plug in In case user name and password do not match the incoming connection is rejected A data transfer mode has not to be specified here this plug in automatically switches to the mode of the connecting client Char OUTO CMD output for a command that was received this output emits data only when the connected client uses operati
61. data to the interlock server and to receive input data from there as soon as they change within the scope of the server the resulting configuration is nothing less than a complete backup of the current process data When in this case for some reason the main application leaves unintentionally it can be restarted and will be able to continue seamless at the point where it has left on start up it fetches all data from the interlock server and sets its internal values using the data received from there So the last process state did not get lost PLEASE NOTE whenever a value is received from the interlock server it starts a new data flow The data received from the interlock server are not ordered there no prediction is possible which element is updated from the interlock server next So the design of the data flow within the main application has to reflect this behaviour elsewhere the project will not be able to continue with its last state 5 7 2 Implement Software Interlocks Many different application flows and logical connections can be done directly within the flow editor these flows will run as soon as the project is executed But there might be situations where this flow editor is not enough may be because the logical combinations between elements are much to complicated or may be because the logic depends on external data sources that are not available within the scope of the ControlRoom program package 139 Flow
62. digital input So when bit 0 of an input is set a file 1 beamp would be loaded When all bits of an 8 bit digital input are set a file 255 beamp would be loaded When no bits of a digital input are set a file 0 beamp would be loaded nevertheless it is not recommended to use this file name in order to have a neutral state with no active marking data All these files have to be placed into directory created in previous step 3 go to project settings enable lOSelect mode in Misc panel specify the directory created above and select the digital input that has to be used for reading the input state This step requires a scanner controller card configured properly 4 Select menu Process gt Mark to activate automatic lOSelect and to start marking operations Following things have to be noticed e when the digital input provides an input pattern for a file name where no corresponding project file exists current project is flushed so that there are no marking data available e loading a project automatically does not overwrite the current hardware settings so all project parameters found in loaded file are ignored and current settings are kept e in lOSelect mode marking is not controlled by external trigger automatically to do that all the numbered projects stored in OSelect directory have to start with an External Trigger Primary Element and mark loop option has to be set in Mark dialogue e in multihead environments curren
63. direction the speed value given here is used to correct the internal calculated value Numeric IN4 SPDY sets the current speed for the X direction the speed value given here is used to correct the internal calculated value Numeric IN5 SPDZ sets the current speed for the X direction the speed value given here is used to correct the internal calculated value Numeric OUTO ACCX the current acceleration in X direction here a value is emitted whenever the acceleration changes Numeric OUT1 ACCY the current acceleration in Y direction of the device here a value is emitted whenever the acceleration changes Numeric OUT2 ACCZ the current acceleration in Z direction of the sensor here a value is emitted whenever the acceleration changes Numeric OUT3 SPDX the current speed calculated out of the acceleration values in X direction here a value is emitted whenever the acceleration changes Numeric OUT4 SPDY the current speed calculated out of the acceleration values in Y direction here a value is emitted whenever the acceleration changes Numeric OUT5 SPDZ the current speed calculated out of the acceleration values in Z direction here a value is emitted whenever the acceleration changes This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_jwarrior LCDproc Client Using this plug in a connection to a LCDproc controlled display can be established in order to show some information there for more infor
64. drawn Also in case 3D mode or 3D geometry is used the hatcher offers a 2D functionality only but it can be applied to 3D elements In such cases the hatcher always uses the geometry in X and Y direction similar to the top view and ignores the Z value to create the hatch pattern After this pattern is generated the Z information out of the lines they start from end at are used to modify the hatch lines This results in perfect 3D hatch patterns in most cases but may have unexpected results when complex geometries are combined with more advanced hatch options like beam compensation or inner hatch lines The hatcher offers following parameters Line Style the style the lines the text consists of is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of closed connected lines with as less as possible points Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points all these lines are connected Dashed simple the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style this mode starts with a line at every beginning of a hatch line Dashed interleaved the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style this mode starts with a line and a space alternative at every new beginning of a hatch line Dashed continuous the geo
65. element logically 2203 optimise the geometries of the selected element 2204 reduce the geometries of the selected element using a lossy algorithm 2205 extrude the selected element into third dimension 2301 freeze the currently shown background video 2302 calibrate the currently connected camera 2303 teach fiducials 2304 load fiducials 2305 save teached fiducial s 2306 drop teached fiducial s 2307 drop camera calibration data 2308 toggle image capturing on or of when configured to be started manually in global project settings 3001 start process simulation 3002 opens the marking dialogue to let the user control the marking process 3003 marks the current project once here the mark dialogue is opened to let the user stop the marking process if necessary the dialogue is closed automatically as soon as marking was finished the return information OK for this command is sent only after marking process has finished thus it is not necessary to check the marking state as soon as a response is received marking is complete or was stopped 3004 marks the current project silently and without opening the mark dialogue the return information OK for this command is sent only after marking process has finished thus it is not necessary to check the marking state as soon as a response is received marking is complete or was stopped by external signal 3006 increment the elem
66. elements are involved that are able to generate log data for its own the Log Recorder flow element can be used It can be attached to data flows to watch their values and to create log information if necessary There can exist several Log Recorders within the same project all of them send their data to the same Log Output object like it is used by the HMI objects Within the definition dialogue that is very similar to the one known from the HMI objects of this flow object it can be defined which values or ranges of values have to cause logging events for which type of log Digital INO digital IN1 inputs to watch digital data Numerical IN2 numerical IN3 inputs to watch numerical data Char IN4 char IN5 inputs to watch text data Log In User This element belongs to the internal user management functionality and can be used only when this feature is enabled and used Using this flow element a users login name and password can be set When both are correct and belong to an active user all user interface elements of the current project are set to a state that belongs to the privileges of this user So this element is mandatory when user management functionality has to be implemented for a project As a minimum configuration a text fields data flow and a password fields data flow have to be connected with this element so that a user is able to enter a login name and a password initially Then the comparison of these user data and the m
67. end point all these lines are connected Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points between the start and end point every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the length of the additional points that form the selected line style Expand By Dot expands the line according to the chosen distance value by one dot or one line segment Remove Last Dot removes the last dot or line segment 7 7 4 3 Triangle To draw a triangle all three corners have to be specified separately by single left mouse clicks for each First the starting point is defined with the next click an other corner of the triangle is specified and the last one completes the triangle by setting the third corner of it Drawing functionality can be extended by pressing one of the keys Shift or Ctrl after specifying the first corner point of the triangle first click when Shift is held down a horizontal line is drawn next and vertical deviations of current mouse position are ignored When Control is held down a vertical line is drawn and horizontal deviations of current mou
68. ends of the lines Hatch Offset normally hatching starts at the border of a polygon this parameter allows to specify an offset in positive and negative direction to modify the position where hatching really starts Number of Lines this input field is activated only when lines hatch styles are used it specifies the maximum number of inner or outer lines to be calculated when this value is smaller than the number of inner lines required to fill a geometry completely inner part of the element will contain a non hatched hole interleave Lines when this parameter comes with a value greater than 1 hatch lines are not processed one after an other but by dropping that number of lines after each that is specified by this parameter The remaining lines then are done in additional cycles skipping the same number of lines in between This mode slows down the process caused by many additional jumps but gives the possibility to let the material not heat up too much This can be useful in case of temperature sensitive materials there the currently marked areas get some time to cool down until the lines in their direct neighbourhood are processed As an example instead of marking lines 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 with an interleave value of 4 it would mark lines 1 5 9 2 6 10 3 7 11 4 8 12 Tool Compensation the tool that is used to process a working piece itself has an own size that results in the width of
69. functional group that can be entered by double clicking it Now the contents of the group are displayed and these contents are all the flow elements that have been selected before By double clicking somewhere in the editor where no element or flow connection line is 28 located such a group can be left Such groups can be nested means a group itself can contain similar functional groups too A group can contain only flow elements the flow part of an HMI element can not be put into a group they have to stay on top level A group can be saved separately here the APCG format is used To do that the right mouse button has to be pressed while it is positioned over a group and the pop up menu item Save Group has to be selected On the other hand saved groups can be loaded into an existing project to extend it by the functionalities encapsulated within that group To do that the right mouse has to be pressed at a position where the new group symbol has to be located and the pop up menu item Load Group has to be selected Now a file dialogue opens that gives the possibility to choose the correct APCG file When a group is right clicked and the menu item Edit Element is selected a configuration dialogue opens Here the name of the group can be changed and the names of all inputs and outputs of that group that are similar to the connections within that group can be changed Beside of that in panel Basic a category ca
70. functions are supported by the plug in luaio_ recv_data_callback input This is a callback function which has to be defined within an own script in order to get informed whenever some data change at the inputs The parameter input contains a nuber that specifies which input comes with new data After this function was executed it is possible to read the input data by calling luaio get value luaio get value input This function can be called to fetch input data from a specific input As parameter the number of the input the data have to be read from needs to be handed over The function returns the read value using a data type that corresponds to the type of input it is read from Valid range for input is 0 7 luaio has new _value input Alternatively to using the callback function luaio_recv data callback this function can be used to poll an input for new data As parameter the number of the input to be polled has to be handed over in range 0 7 The function returns false when no new data are available at this input or true otherwise In last case the new data can be fetched by calling luaio get value luaio_set_value output value Using this function an output of the plug in can be set Here output specifies which output to change in range 0 7 and value are the data to be set The data type of value has to correspond to the data type of the output elsewhere an error occurs 68 Errors within the LUA script loaded i
71. gives access to a configuration dialogue where the general parameters of a project can be specified These settings are stored within the project file and implicitly include information like the OpenEditor s window size and position and the active size of the Flow Editors editing area Beside of that the following parameters can be influenced by the user directly Visual Size this is the width and height unit pixels of the HMI area it specifies the total size of the editing area within the HMI Editor and the size that is used for the applications window when the project is executed in player or debugger So here the total screen size of the target system should be set in order to hide all other user interface elements of that targets operating system Visual Grid Size the visual grid is a helper grid that is used and visible only within the HMI Editor There a grid of points is displayed with a distance in x and y direction as specified here When a project is executed within the debugger or player this grid is not shown Snap to Grid When this check box is selected all objects that are placed or re positioned within the HMI Editor automatically snap with their upper left corner to a position that is specified by the visual grid This option gives the possibility to position elements very exact it applies only to the HMI editor and does not have any influence on a running project Background Colour specifies the backgr
72. group has been created and after the correct parameters have been set the appearance of the related geometry does not change but within the entity list a different symbol for the group is shown in order to point to the fact a special kind of group is used here 225 7 8 3 Edit Destructive The functions of this category perform irreversible modifications to the input geometry That means only the resulting geometry is used for further processing and all source elements that have been used to create this geometry get lost Resulting from that there is much less computing time and memory used to hold such geometry and editing on a per vector level is much less difficult because the data no longer can t be overwritten by a re creation caused by some parameter changes On the other hand the conversion to static geometry means that no more dynamic changes are possible like they can be performed when Data Input elements are used as soon as these elements have been modified by such a destructive modification all the sub elements it consisted of are lost But afterwards is is possible to assign Additional Geometry and Post processing elements to this static geometry again Following functions exist that perform such destructive modifications Merge the geometries of the selected elements are merged together the result is one static element with all geometries included into it this function can also be applied to one single Primary Geometr
73. has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use two axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y Numeric IN2 Z the Z position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use three axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y z Digital IN3 L turns the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR the power the laser has to be driven with here a value in range 0 100 is expected that corresponds to the as a percentage laser power value Numeric IN6 CMD this input can be used to set additional commands and to perform additional control operations using them here following command values are supported 0 stop marking immediately and flush the list of control commands that may be already stored within the plug in Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to move the scanner and to control the laser such a stream can contain complex marking operation information Digital OUT6 BSY signals if marking is still active HIGH or if the scanner controller card has finished all operations this input has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data it is necessary to synchronize several movement operations Binary OUT7 IN binary data that reflect the state of the digital inputs of this scanner controller card these data are required by som
74. has to be provided specify the time after the lock has to become active and a password for unlocking it Specify a master password Press the button Lock System When a system is already locked you have to specify the current master password in order to override this lock When a system was not locked before but contains a fresh and clean installation it may be the software asks for a password too in this case use HALaser as password When HALaser without the quotation signs does not work for you your system was already locked and you cannot overwrite the current lock without knowing the master password that was used during this lock There is no way to remove such a lock when the master password is not known 5 Write down your passwords and keep them secure PLEASE NOTE these passwords and especially the master password are the ONLY way to access your system after specified time has elapsed or to set a new lock Once again There is no way to remove such a lock when the master password is not known so keep these passwords secure and do not press the Close or Cancel button before you got them PLEASE NOTE For Windows locking procedure it depends on the privileges BeamConstruct is executed with by default When it is running using an Administrator account the steps described above have to be done using BeamLock exe together with the same Administrator account When it is executed using a non privileged user account the steps descr
75. height y for an element The lower part of the configuration dialogue is divided into two rows it corresponds to the digital input O INO of the related flow object Within that part of the dialogue the appearance of the HMI object can be controlled and two different appearances can be defined So the first row is active when the digital input O of the related object is set to LOW default state The appearance defined within the second row becomes active when a HIGH value is set at the digital INO of that object This functionality can be used to e g signalise special states information flows limitations and other things Here following values can be set Text the text that is displayed with in the user interface element Font the font that is used for the text Background Colour the background colour that is set for this user interface element Foreground Colour the foreground colour that is set for this HMI control 66 State some specific states that can be set for the element like read only disabled All these parameters are available within a first tab pane Basic Depending on the used control some additional configurations might be necessary In this case additional tab panes are added to this dialogue window 5 3 2 1 2 Logging HMI Control Properties The logging tab pane is an optional one and exists only for these element types that handle data in a way that may be inter
76. icon image in PNG format 5 copyright text to be shown in About dialogue As an example Beamy Raymanipulator http www beamconstruct com beamoem png beamoem icon png Copyright c 2012 by LaserFreak This file in UTF 8 encoding placed within the directory described above renames BeamConstruct to Beamy Raymanipulator shows http www beamconstruct com within the About dialouge instead of http www lasermarkingsoftware com as well as the additional copyright information As splash image for the startup screen the image out of file beamoem png is used When this files name is given without a absolute path the application tries to find it in installation directory Windows or in directory usr local openapc Linux The same is true for beamoem_icon png which is used as image for the applicattions icon The images that are shown within toolbar and entity tree can be replaced by own ones too Here two different methods have to be used to replace all of them To replace the toolbar and entity tree images replacement images in PNG format have to be put into to the plug ins location but with different names The base name is always the name of the plug in without extension For the toolbar image a 1 png has to be added to this base name for the entity tree image a 2 png has to be added As an example The images of the barcode plug in have to be replaced It can be found in folder priplugins with t
77. in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_psc140p Coherent R Avia Ethernet Laser Controller Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Using this plug in a Coherent Avia laser can be controlled via Ethernet To access the serial interface of the target laser an Ethernet to serial converter is required The plug in provides a basic configuration panel where the network parameters can be set according to the configuration of the TCP IP to serial converter A second panel gives the possibility to enter several laser specific parameters By default the plug in can be used to set fixed frequency and power that are used all the time On Basic configuration panel this behaviour can be changed There are checkboxes to influence the behaviour of the plug in Control power during process when this checkbox is set the power values defined in pen parameters are sent to the plug in before the related vector data are sent to the scanner card Control frequency during process when this checkbox is set the frequency values defined in pen parameters are sent to the plug in before the related vector data are sent to the scanner card The plug in provides following in and outputs to be used
78. in provides two CTRL outputs where motion control data can be emitted this option gives the possibility to define which of both outputs OUT2 or OUT3 have to emit the motion information defined for this element 6 5 5 Additional Geometry Elements Additional Geometry elements add new geometry based on the already available data of the primary element it belongs to Here the additional element only uses geometric data of the primary element it ignores possibly existing other additional elements that might exist for the same primary element To add an Additional Geometry element to a existing Primary Geometry element the drawing area doesn t has to be used Here the desired primary element has to be selected within the element tree then the additional element has to be clicked within the tool bar There the Additional Geometry elements are shown in violet colour and are added to the Primary Geometry element as soon as the tool bar item is clicked 175 6 5 5 1 Hatcher Hatching is the process of filling a closed polygon with a line pattern The result can be used to process a bigger area to fill the inner part of geometry instead of processing only the outline of an geometric element It can be useful e g combined with texts to get characters that consist not only of its outline Hatching will work only with closed polygons and might fail on specific geometries that do not describe a closed not overlapping area non ambiguous In such cases the r
79. incoming binary control structure is set to the maximum of 100 all other values between 0 and 100 are interpolated so that the change of power is visualised by a colour fade Line Size the size of the lines to draw the vector data with in unit pixels Vector2D supports the following plug in specific IO s that can be used within the Flow Editor Digital IN1 RES reset all internally stored data and clear the 2D view completely Binary IN7 CTRL input for the binary control structure data that have to be shown they become visible only when there are at least two consecutive coordinate values where the tool is turned on and when they are located within the visible range that was defined by the field parameters movement data that are performed with the tool turned off are not shown The plug in itself is located in hmiplugins libio_hmi_vec2d 37 5 3 3 7 1 5 Flow Objects of Static HMI Elements Static HMI elements that are not described below do not offer additional inputs or outputs beside the digital INO and digital OUTO that is described above Text Label Char IN3 sets a new label changes on INO will overwrite this label with the predefined ones Image Binary IN3 set binary image data dynamically during runtime through this input changes on INO will NOT overwrite this image and will NOT switch back to the default one 5 3 3 7 1 6 External Flow Objects of Static HMI Elements Pipes This plug in can be used
80. input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears Numeric IN1 numeric IN7 inputs for the numbers that have to be converted Digital OUTO OVL the clock overflow signal is emitted whenever an overflow condition appeared during the conversion for outputs that react on the external clock This overflow clock signal e g can be transferred to the CLK input of the next Number to Digital converter Digital OUT1 digital OUT7 the output signals that are emitted dependent on the input values and the configuration of this object Overflow the numeric overflow output when the conversion operation did not match the rules defined within the configuration of the flow element so that no digital output signal could be found that belongs to the number at an input this number is sent to the overflow output Together with the OUTO OVL signal both can be used for a next conversion step to check some more conversion conditions Thus several conversion objects can be cascaded in order to implement complex conversion rules Number to Bits Comparing to the preceding converter this one is more specialized it takes exactly one number as input sends the bit pattern of its lower 8 bits to its own outputs and outputs the resulting number right shifted by 8 bits on the overflow So with cascaded sets of converter whole numbers of 8 32 bit width can be converted to their related bit patterns Numeri
81. is modified So in case you change the scale factor of your geometry the position and size values of it will be changed too as soon as you hit your Return key within the scale value input field 7 Apply laser parameters Required laser parameters can be applied to existing geometry via a 188 number of predefined and freely definable pens Such an existing pen can be set via the tab pane Element and the selection list named Pen Whenever a new pen is selected for an existing geometry it is applied to it automatically which means the visual representation of that geometry within the drawing area changes its colour and the next laser marking cycle would use the parameters of this pen when this specific geometry is processed The different laser and scanner parameters that are assigned to such a pen can be modified by selecting menu Project menu item Pen settings There a dialogue opens where you can select the pen that has to be modified by using the selection list on the upper side of the dialogue The tab panes below this list give access to all relevant parameters that influence mark and jump speed laser power and frequency scanner delays and others more When you change some of these parameters and leave the dialogue by pressing OK all the geometries that are assigned to this now changed pen will use the modified parameters during next laser marking process Adding a hatch pattern Currently only th
82. is different to the Spacing value it only influences character combinations where kerning is defined for 213 Arc Length when creating geometry out of the available font information depending on the style of the chosen font different round parts have to be created like the two arcs that are needed for creating a letter B This parameter specifies the segment length for these round parts the smaller it is the more accurate the result is but the more data are used to hold it Set Monospaced when this option is checked equal distance is set between all characters independent from their shape and independent from the distance information of the used font To create radial text this element can be combined with the Curve Post Processing Tool please refer below 7 7 4 11 Barcode Using this function several types of 1D and 2D barcodes can be created This element accepts static data for creating a barcode or dynamic values that can be set via an Input Element The size of the created barcode can be defined freely when creating this element a rectangle is drawn exactly in the same way like it is done for the Rectangle Primary Element This rectangle describes the outline of the barcode For some barcode types that use a fixed aspect ratio between width and height the predefined outline is modified automatically The complete layout and structure of the barcode is defined via the parameters that can be set within the elements tab
83. is executed Digital IN6 EN sets a value used as EN parameter when a command is executed Digital OUTO returns a HIGH signal when the last command could be executed successfully LOW otherwise only when this output was set the next command can be send to INO elsewhere it will be rejected because the preceding command is still in progress Char OUT1 when a command could not be executed successfully here an error message is returned that corresponds to the error code returned from the FEB stand alone option 101 Numeric OUT2 some commands retrieve numeric values from the scanner card this value is given at this output when the command could be executed successfully This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_samfeb SCAPS R USC 1 2 Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Beside of that some laser equipment can be damaged in case it is controlled with wrong signals Thus it is highly recommended to check the output generated by this plug in using e g an oscilloscope to avoid problems caused by wrong configurations This should be done prior to putting a system into operation for the first time and prior to putting a system into operation after a software update was installed This
84. is executed within the OpenPlayer The total available size of that interface can be configured within the projects global settings Normally it should be equal to the total screen size of the target platform in order to hide all other elements of the related operating system A new graphical element can be added quickly by right clicking with the mouse into the HMI panel There a pop up menu opens that offers access to several elements like containers buttons input fields display elements images and others To make creation of several elements of the same type easier there is also a repeat functionality available When function key F2 is pressed the last element type that was created newly is created again This new element is placed at the position of the last left mouse click within the HMI panel Please note this does not copy the currently selected element it generates a new element of the same type like the last element created within the HMI editor On the right hand side of the editor exists a fold bar that offers an alternative way to select HMI elements It 18 provides the same categories of elements like the context menu They can be opened by double clicking the bar titles Then the list of HMI elements is shown where one of it can be chosen The selected element is highlighted and a slow left click within the editors drawing area adds this element at the clicked position Selecting the same fold bar item again disables it so th
85. is retrieved and returned at output NUM_ENTITIES Second the names of all these entities are returned at the output ENTITY_NAMES When an entity of the current job does not have a name simply an empty string is returned The names provided here can be used to modify the jobs using the commands that require the name of an entity at input ENTITY_NAME Digital IN USC_OUTO USC_OUT5 these inputs set the related digital optical output of the USC scanner card directly and immediately to O or 1 depending on the signal set at these inputs Digital IN GET_USC_IN when this input is set to HIGH a state update for the opto inputs of the USC scanner card is requested the inputs are read and the new state of the opto inputs is given at the output lines USC_INO USC_IN5 of the macro Digital IN GET_SCR_32 this command creates a screen shot of the View2D of SAMLight and returns it at the binary output SCREEN the shot of the View2D has a size of 320 pixels Digital IN GET_SCR_FU this command creates a screen shot of the View2D of SAMLight and returns it using the binary output SCREEN here the View2D is given using its original size Digital OUT CMD_OK this output informs about the result of every command that was given when a HIGH signal is given at this output the last command could be executed successfully LOW means an error happened In case of an error a plain error text is given at the ERROR output Please note this output is 104 update
86. it is set S Digital OUT5 Q inverted data output of the third flip flop it is set to HIGH when it is not set R Digital OUT6 Q data output of the fourth flip flop it is set to HIGH when it is set S 50 Digital OUT7 Q inverted data output of the fourth flip flop it is set to HIGH when it is not set R Toggle FlipFlop In its initial state the Q output is HIGH and the inverted output is LOW Whenever a HIGH signal is set at the input of this FlipFlop both outputs change their state So with the first HIGH signal Q is set to LOW and the inverted output to HIGH with the next HIGH input signal they switch back to the original state This flow element contains four FlipFlops that act completely independent from each other Digital INO T toggle input for the first FlipFlop Digital IN2 T toggle input for the second FlipFlop Digital IN4 T toggle input for the third FlipFlop Digital IN6 T toggle input for the fourth FlipFlop Digital OUTO Q data output of the first FlipFlop Digital OUT1 Q inverted data output of the first FlipFlop Digital OUT2 Q data output of the second FlipFlop Digital OUT3 Q inverted data output of the second FlipFlop Digital OUT4 Q data output of the third FlipFlop Digital OUT5 Q inverted data output of the third FlipFlop Digital OUT6 Q data output of the fourth FlipFlop Digital OUT7 Q inverted data output of the fourth Fl
87. its functionality Within the OpenEditor the user interface is set up within the HMI Human Machine Interface Editor and the logical relations between the user interface elements and plug ins are set up within the Flow Editor In case the extended software structure has to be used where hardware access is done via external OpenPlugger s the third component the Plugged Devices list can be used to add and configure the plug ins that will run externally later Next this project can be executed within the OpenDebugger Here the same environment is given to the project like it is used for the target system Additionally there are some possibilities within the OpenDebugger to analyse the flow of the data to perform single stepping and to check the functionality of the project During the development process of a project it has to be switched between OpenEditor and OpenDebugger several times until it works as desired After this project works as expected it can be executed with the OpenPlayer on the target system In some seldom cases it also might be necessary to run the application within the OpenDebugger on the target system to find out the reason for some timing problems more informations about such runtime dependent problems are given below within the description of the OpenDebugger 5 3 Using the OpenEditor The OpenEditor consists of three main parts that can be accessed via tabbed panes the HMI Editor where the user interface and the l
88. list of available privileges The higher a privilege is stored within this list the higher its priority is This is important later when the privileges are assigned to visibility states within an HMI element This order of privilege names also can be changed at a later time when moving its position the related flags within the HMI elements and the user definitions that are using it change their position too There is one predefined privilege Supervision on top of the list which cannot be removed or edited This privilege is used for full access to the complete system and is available in every case 5 9 2 Defining User Data Next below the menu item for the user privilege panel an other one can be found where the users their names data and granted privileges can be set with This user data dialogue opens when menu File gt Users is selected It shows the list of existing users on the left hand side On the right hand side the formerly configured user privilege names can be found Whenever a user is selected within the list its data are shown on the right hand side of the dialogue the privileges that are granted for the user the login name of the user the full name a freely usable comment and others These values can be changed and have to be set to the user by pressing the Apply button Please note Such changes have to be applied in order to set them to a user before an other one is selected or the dialogue is left
89. list of privileges that are granted to this user is sent to every HMI element Now the list of privileges set within the HMI element is checked from top to bottom according to their priorities and compared with the list of privileges of the current user When the user has a privilege granted that was set for this HMI element too the related visibility enabled disabled or invisible is set to the HMI element and comparing user and HMI privileges is stopped When the HMI element is set to ignore for this privilege comparison continues with the next privilege in the lists So the complete list is checked until a non ignore option is found for this HMI element If no matching privilege could be found the visibility state is used that is set for the option None of them To clarify that following examples are given that base on a shortened list of privileges that may be set to a HMI element Privilege enabled disabled invisible ignore Supervision X Manager Users X Load Data X Start Process X None of them X 1 A user logs in that has the privileges Manage Users and Start Process granted Resulting from that log in process the complete list is checked The first match can be found at row Manage Users Here ignore is set so it is continued with the list The next match is in row Start Process which is set to enabled Now the HMI elemen
90. may contain copyrighted material trade secrets and other proprietary materials of the Vendor and its licensor s You agree that in order to protect those proprietary materials except as expressly permitted by applicable law neither you nor a third party acting on your behalf will I decompile disassemble or reverse engineer the Software 11 modify or create derivative works of the Software III transmit the Software in whole or in part over the Internet or other network or IV sell distribute rent lease sub license or otherwise transfer the Software to a third party that does not influence your right to sell the Software together with additional equipment that is controlled by this Software 3 Ownership The Software is licensed not sold to you for use only under the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the Vendor reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this Agreement The Vendor and or its licensor s retain title to the Software and all intellectual property rights therein 4 Termination This Agreement is effective until terminated Upon any violation of any of the provisions of this Agreement rights to use the Software shall automatically terminate and the Software must be returned to the Vendor or all copies of the Software must be destroyed You may also terminate this Agreement at any time by destroying all copies of the Software in your possession or control If the Vendor makes a request via pub
91. movement operation is in progress at this axis the motor is moved to the related position immediately Numeric IN1 MODE this input is used for different control commands depending on the value of the number that is set here when the given value is greater than 0 it is interpreted as speed and the value is used for the next movement command given at the preceding input when the input value is equal to 0 the motor is stopped immediately stop command a value of 1 causes a movement to the home referencing position here the reference input has to be connected and configured properly Numeric IN2 POS performs a movement with axis 2 similar to INO Numeric IN3 MODE defines the speed for axis 2 or controls its movement similar to IN1 Numeric IN4 POS performs a movement with axis 3 similar to INO Numeric IN5 MODE defines the speed for axis 3 or controls its movement similar to IN1 Binary IN7 CTRL input for 2D X and Y or 3D X Y and Z Control data to manage the movement here the related number of axes has to be configured properly The related output OUT7 emits motion synchronous Control data that can be used by a tool for machinery Digital OUT6 BSY busy signal specifies if at least one axis is still moving this output is set to LOW as soon as all current operations have been finished by this plug in Binary OUT7 CTRL output for the Control data delivered at IN7 here the control data are emitted s
92. name that was stored within the drive in order to identify it Axis Home Timeout is a time out value in seconds that described after what time referencing has to be stopped when no home switch can be found When a movement is running at an axis it can t be overwritten by a new position value immediately such a new position information would be rejected by the plug in In this case the axis first has to be stopped and after the related speed output indicates that this axis really stopped by emitting a speed value of 0 the new position can be set at the POS input Within the debugger such an invalid positioning request would be indicated within the OpenPlayer it is ignored without any further notice Numeric INO POS absolute position in unit millimetres to move axis 1 to here the factor out of the configuration is used to calculate the incremental position used by the drive out of the given metric distance when a value is set here the movement starts immediately using the last speed value that was set at the MODE input Numeric IN1 MODE at this input several other parameters can be specified depending on the given value when a value greater than 0 is set it is taken as speed information for the next movement of axis 1 when a value of 0 is set the axis is stopped independent from its current position a value of 1 causes a 112 movement to the home switch Numeric IN2 POS performs a movement with axis 2 similar to INO
93. new geometry based on the already available geometry of the primary element it belongs to Here the additional element only takes care of the primary one it ignores possibly existing other additional elements that might exist for the same primary element To add an Additional Geometry element to a existing Primary Geometry the drawing area doesn t has to be used here the desired primary element has to be selected within the element tree then the additional element has to be clicked within the tool bar There the Additional Geometry elements are shown in violet colour and are added to the Primary Geometry element as soon as the tool bar item is clicked 7 7 5 1 Hatcher Hatching is the process of filling a closed polygon with a specific line pattern This can be used to process a bigger area It can be useful e g combined with texts to get characters that consist not only of its outline Hatching will work only with closed polygons and might fail on specific geometries that do not describe a closed area non ambiguous In such cases the resulting hatch pattern may be incomplete or may be located outside of the polygon In general only two dimensional geometry can be hatched lines and dots are not extended by this element As an other condition a polygon can be hatched only at positions where the outline has a closed line style geometry with dotted lines can t be hatched geometry with a dashed outline is hatched only at positions where a line is
94. new label changes on INO will overwrite this label with the predefined ones Digital OUT1 pass through of digital IN1 and output of the button state when the button is pressed two data flows using a digital 1 and a digital O are emitted directly after each other Image Button Digital IN1 set the buttons state this kind of button can be toggled for a short time only also if the input keeps a 1 for a longer time So this functionality in most cases also will not make much sense and exists mainly for the sake of completeness Binary IN3 E set binary image data for the enabled state of the button 29 Binary IN4 S dynamic binary image data for the selected state of the button Binary IN5 D set binary image data for the disabled state dynamically here Digital OUT1 pass through of digital IN1 and output of the button state when the button is pressed two data flows using a digital 1 and a digital O are emitted directly after each other Toggle Button Digital IN1 set the buttons state Char IN3 sets a new label changes on INO will overwrite this label with the predefined ones Digital OUT1 pass through of digital IN1 and output of the user triggered button state when the button is pressed one data flow is emitted that submits a O or a 1 according to the buttons state Horizontal Slider Vertical Slider Angular Regulator Number Field and Floating Number Field Digital IN1 when it is configured withi
95. new polygon primary element 11011 create a new rectangle primary element 11012 create a new spiral primary element 11013 create a new star primary element 11014 create a new text primary element 11015 create a new triangle primary element 12001 set a hatch additional element to the selected one 13001 add a OpenAPC input element to the currently selected one 13002 add a serial date time input element to the currently selected one 14001 add a curve postprocessing element to the currently selected one 14002 add a sine postprocessing element to the currently selected one Numeric OUT1 ERR output for error codes in case some specific operations fail Digi OUT6 BUSY signals if marking is in process This plug in is located in hmiplugins libio_hmi_beamconstruct Linear Regulator This HMI plug in is able to display a numeric value within a linear field and gives the user the possibility to change this value Data usage and handling is very similar to the internal Ul element Vertical Slider But beside of the standard configuration parameters some additional data can be set that influence the appearance of this element Limits the colour for the limit values Value the colour of the displayed value Border the colour of the overall border of the meter Ticks the colour of the ticks Number of Ticks the total number of displayed ticks this value should fit to the minimum and maxim
96. not a plain hatch mode that can be used to really fill a geometry It repeats the outline of the hatched polygon on its outer side as often as specified by the value given in field Number of Lines At corner points where additional lines are necessary to close the polygon the shortest way is used by adding a straight line Outer lines rounded this mode is similar to Inner lines but not a plain hatch mode that can be used to really fill a geometry It repeats the outline of the hatched polygon on its outer side as often as specified by the value given in field Number of Lines At corner points where additional lines are necessary to close the polygon a round shape is created Please note this adds a lot of polygon points and may dependent on the geometry increase memory and processing time consumption dramatically So this mode should be handled with care and only in cases where it is really necessary to use this special shape Hatch Angle this angle specifies the orientation of the hatch lines according to the coordinate system Angle Offset this parameter applies only in case the hatcher is set as sub element of a group that contains more than one geometric element to be hatched in this case only the first primary element within that group is hatched with the original hatch angle for all following elements the hatch angle is modified by this offset So this parameter can be used to have some kind of rotating hat
97. of axis 2 Digital IN AX2_STOP stops a movement of axis 2 immediately Digital IN AX2_HOME this input can be used when the axis has stopped it lets the axis do a reference movement to find its home position Numeric IN AX3_POS this is a command input that lets axis 3 move immediately to the given position using the speed value that is set at input AX3_SPD Numeric IN AX3_SPD sets a new speed that is used for the next movement of axis 3 Digital IN AX3_STOP stops a movement of axis 3 immediately Digital IN AX3_HOME this input can be used when the axis has stopped it lets the axis do a reference movement to find its home position Numeric OUT AX1_CPOS the current position of axis 1 during a movement this output returns changing position data permanently Digital OUT AX1_MOVING this output is set to HIGH as long as the axis 1 is moving LOW indicates that the movement of the axis has stopped completely Numeric OUT AX2_CPOS the current position of axis 2 during a movement this output returns changing position data permanently Digital OUT AX2_MOVING this output is set to HIGH as long as the axis 2 is moving LOW indicates that the movement of the axis has stopped completely Numeric OUT AX3_CPOS the current position of axis 3 during a movement this output returns changing position data permanently Digital OUT AX3_MOVING this output is set to HIGH as long as the axis 3 is moving LOW indicates that the movement of t
98. of the CNConstruct to Control plug in are connected with the correct motion plug in Within these motion plug ins the related axes have to be configured correctly planar or rotational mode and they have to access the correct axes that belong to the defined motion modes After such a splitting group has been created and after the correct parameters have been set the appearance of the related geometry changes now it is overlapped by horizontal and or vertical lines These lines specify the cutting positions and can be modified manually They can be dragged with the mouse in horizontal or vertical direction exclusively to change the position where the geometry has to be cut The related modifications are done as soon as such a cutting line is released PLEASE NOTE the positions of the cutting lines do not influence the parameters given within the property panel but as soon as the parameters within the property panel are modified the positions of the cutting lines are reset to their default Thus their positions should be change only in case all other parameters do fit perfectly 182 6 6 2 2 Active Move Group This is a special kind of group that concatenates several elements into one group Due to the kind of this group it is recommended to use only geometries and not to put other ones like motion elements into it An Active Move Group is able to repeat a grouped geometry several times and to combine it with movements so that e g a ring
99. of this pen will be set to the values specified for the default pen Within a project only one pen can be default so whenever this option is selected for a pen it is disabled resetting this option can be done only by choosing an other pen as default one Pen On Colour this colour is used within the drawing area for all geometries Pen Off Colour this colour is used when Draw Off Movements are enabled to show the laser jumps within the drawing area 6 4 2 Miscellaneous Pen Settings This tab pane contains some movement related pen parameters Tool On Delay the time that is set between start of a movement and the moment the tool is switched on Tool Off Delay the time that is set between the end of a movement and the moment the tool is turned off In Polygon Delay the time the scanner has to wait for every edge within a polygon when the tool is turned on and stays turned on 6 4 3 Custom Pen Settings This panel contains a set of freely usable values and parameters Their names and measurement units can be specified within the project settings The values that are entered here are not used within CNConstruct but saved together with a CNCP project or exported in case a suitable export format is used So when these data are used to operate a machine all the custom pen parameters specified here are sent to the controlling device Thus it is possible to use these freely definable parameters for some
100. off or on when the scanner jumps to an other position when it moves to an other position while marking or when the movement direction is changed during marking for a detailed description of these values their usage and their influence to the marking result please refer to the ETH6608 manual All following tab panes contain laser specific definitions that are used depending on the selected laser type For information about these parameters and their usage please refer to the manuals and specifications of the used lasers The ETH6608 scanner controller card plug in can be controlled via its inputs directly by transmitting coordinate values to the X Y and Z inputs or by using the control input where a stream of movement data will be accepted It is recommended not to use both options at the same time or without additional synchronisation The results may be undefined when direct and control stream commands are set at the same time In case the control input is used the BSY output has to be connected with the source of the control data it signalises if the scanner controller card is still working or if it has finished so that other operations can be triggered Following in and outputs are available for the ETH6608 plug in Numeric INO X the X position the scanner has to be moved to setting a new value to this input does not cause any movement it will be invoked only after the Y or Z input was set Numeric IN1 Y the Y position the scanner
101. one of two digital input values is smaller equal or greater than the second one for digital data a HIGH value is always greater than a LOW value Here one flow element contains two separate compare functions that act completely independent from each other Beside the name no other parameters or values can be configured within the properties dialogue of this element The comparison result is emitted every time a new input value is set Digital INO A input of the first value of the first comparator that has to be compared Digital IN1 B Digital IN3 A Digital IN4 B input of the second value of the first comparator that has to be compared input of the first value of the second comparator that has to be compared input of the second value of the second comparator that has to be compared Digital OUTO gt this output is set to HIGH when value A of the first comparator is greater than value B Digital OUT2 lt this output is set to HIGH when value A of the first comparator is smaller than value B Digital OUT3 gt this output is set to HIGH when value A of the second comparator is greater than value B Digital OUT4 Digital OUTS lt this output is set to HIGH when value A of the second comparator is smaller than value B es pe e Digital OUT1 this output is set to HIGH when value A of the first comparator is equal to value B this output is set to HIGH when value A of the second comparator is equal to
102. operate in 2D or 3D mode e Field Left Position Field Upper Position defines the upper left coordinate of the field that has to be used by the scanner e Field Size the total size of the field that is used by the scanner this parameter together with the left and upper position specifies the coordinates input vectors have to be located within in case there are input data which define a position outside this field they will not be marked e Custom initialisation commands here it is possible to add own device specific G Code commands that are sent during initialisation of the device Jump mode here a mode can be chosen to perform fast jumps to a position while the laser or tool is turned off lt can be chosen between G Code command G00 which performs an as fast as possible movement and Jump speed which performs a normal linear movement using the jump speed specified below Swap X and Y swaps the input X and Y coordinate to exchange X and Y axis values of the scanner e Mirror X Mirror Y mirror the input coordinates in relation to output In Default panel several default parameters can be defined that are used in case the direct axis control inputs X Y and Z are used or in case control data are used that do not contain motion speed delay information Jump Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned off in case related jump mode is selected e Mark Speed the
103. org manual The luaPLC interpreter additionally offers some specific functions which can be used for communication with the Interlock Server and for accessing its data these functions have to be used in a similar way like the interface of liboapc please refer to the SDK and the related manual for more details about the ControlRoom interface 1 define a global callback function oapc_ispace_ recv_callback within your LUA script 2 initialize the connection to the Interlock Server by calling oapc_ispace connect 3 access the data of the server using the callback and functions oapc_ispace set data oapc_ispace request data oapc ispace request all data oapc_ispace set value and oapc _ispace get value 4 Calloapc thread sleep regularly to trigger the message handling and to let luaPLC call into oapc _ispace recv callback 5 close the connection to the Interlock Server by calling oapc_ispace disconnect Creation of a callback function within your LUA script is mandatory without such a callback no communication is possible with the server This is true also in case no functions are used actively that send data to this function in this case an empty implementation of it is necessary function oapc_ispace recv_callback nodeName cmd 10 s val0 vall val2 val3 val4 val5 val6 val7 end This callback function is called automatically whenever some data are changed within the database or when specific or all da
104. other position when it moves to an other position while marking or when the movement direction is changed during marking for a detailed description of these values their usage and their influence to the marking result please refer to the PSC140P manual All following tab panes contain laser specific definitions that are used depending on the selected laser type For information about these parameters and their usage please refer to the manuals and specifications of the used lasers The PSC140P scanner controller card plug in can be controlled via its inputs directly by transmitting coordinate values to the X and Y inputs or by using the control input where a stream of movement data will be accepted It is recommended not to use both options at the same time or without additional synchronisation The results may be undefined when direct and control stream commands are set at the same time In case the control input is used the BSY output has to be connected with the source of the control data it signalises if the scanner controller card is still working or if it has finished so that other operations can be triggered Following in and outputs are available for the PSC140P plug in Numeric INO X the X position the scanner has to be moved to setting a new value to this input does not cause any movement it will be invoked only after the Y or Z input was set Numeric IN1 Y the Y position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug i
105. output sends a HIGH signal as soon as the warning message is confirmed by the user 62 Digital OUT2 this output sends a HIGH signal as soon as the information message is confirmed by the user Numeric OUT3 when the question was answered by the user the result is emitted here the returned number informs which of the buttons was pressed 1 stands for Yes 2 for No and 3 for Cancel This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_dialogue Filedialogue This is an other plug in that provides some user interaction here dialogues for opening a file saving a file or selecting a directory can be created Within the configuration panel of the plug in the font and text style for the dialogues can be chosen and the texts of the title bars can be predefined Beside of that for the load and save file dialogue a wild card can be defined that provides a filter to the dialogue so that only files with defined extensions are displayed As long as a file dialogue is open no other dialogue of the same type can be created Within the debugger there is a notification in this case within the OpenPlayer the second request for a dialogue is rejected without any further notice Digital INO opens the dialogue for loading a file Digital IN1 opens the dialogue for saving a file when the user selects a file that already exists a confirmation question pops up Digital IN2 here a dialogue is opened that can be used to select a directory instead of a
106. pane Data the text or numeric data that are encoded within the barcode here it depends on the chosen barcode type if and which characters numbers or combinations of them are allowed and will result in a valid barcode Type here the type of barcode can be chosen depending on this type several of the following options are available and can be used for further definitions that are necessary for this type Mode this is a barcode type specific option here an encoding mode can be chosen for some of the barcodes Error Correction this is a barcode type specific option here an error correction level can be set Size this is a barcode type specific option here the resulting size can be specified which not influences the dimension of the barcode but the encoded data size Bar Width this parameter influences 1D barcodes only here the size of the resulting bar lines can be modified this value might be changed depending on the method of material processing in order to get a readable barcode Segments this parameter is used only for the Maxicode barcode it specifies the number of segments and therefore the smoothness of its circles Fade In Size this parameter is used for inverted barcodes it defines the size of the additional frame that is drawn around the barcode to get an inverted representation Force to Square this option applies to DataMatrix barcodes only in case it is set the resulting barcode is always a
107. pen parameters have to be used that follow different rules In such cases it is recommended to use this button it changes the current pen parameters including the scanner delays to values that are suitable for marking scanner bitmap elements Wobble Frequency Wobble Amplitude when wobble is enabled the linear movement of the scanner during marking is distorted by an additional frequency that lets the scanner oscillate around the predefined position This functionality can be used e g to warm up larger areas of a material for welding or similar things To enable wobble both parameters amplitude and frequency have to be greater than 0 The wobble frequency specifies how fast to oscillate and the wobble amplitude how much to vary over the original position Wobble has to be supported by the used scanner controller card in order to have any effect during marking The given delay values have a direct influence on the marking result and need to be adjusted carefully Wrong delay values can result in inaccurate geometries burn in points at some specific positions and or unnecessary long marking times Out of the visible result it can be evaluated which delays are to small or too big by checking following rules Parameter Value too big Value too small Remark Laser On Delay First part of a mark vector following a jump vector is not marked Burn in point at the beginning of a mark vector that follows a jump vector See pi
108. player itself does not offer any possibility to stop the application so if that is required within the loaded project an application end condition has to be defined or the player application has to be killed using the functionalities of the underlying operation system TaskManager kill command Within the ControlRoom software package no specific mechanism is provided to automatically execute the OpenPlayer together with a project file That has to be done manually once the project works properly and the system has to be set up for the end user From the OpenPlayer s point of view this configuration is simple the one and only parameter required by the OpenPlayer is the full path to the project file that has to be loaded and executed So dependent on the operating systems capabilities a call that starts the OpenPlayer using that parameter has to be added at a position that is intended to be used for auto starting applications after the system is booted This of course should be done after all elements are loaded that are required to display an application to the end user For Windows operating systems it is recommended to execute the OpenPlayer exclusively instead of the standard Windows Explorer please refer to MSDN for details about how to do that This locks the operating system for the user completely and no start menu task bar or desktop popup menu is shown where a user could change anything harmful on the computers system Access to t
109. plug in a list box can be added to a user interface Within such a list box several lines of text can be displayed new lines can be added and the user can choose one by single or double clicking it Beside the standard configuration options this plug in does not offer any additional parameters The complete custom handling of the plug in is done via its lO s Digital INO set the selection mode for the list box and apply the parameters according to the configuration done for the two possible input states LOW and HIGH Numeric IN1 SEL select an entry within the list box that is located at the row specified by the number given at this input Digital IN2 CLR clear the complete list box and remove all elements out of it Char IN7 append this text to the end of the list within the box Digital OUT the through connection of the selection mode input Char OUT4 1x whenever a list box element is single or double clicked this output emits the text that is stored at the selected position Char OUT5 2x whenever a list box element is double clicked this output emits the text that is stored at the selected position Numeric OUT6 1x whenever a list box element is single or double clicked this output emits the index number of the selected row Numeric OUT7 2x whenever a list box element is double clicked this output emits the index number of the selected row This plug in is located in hmiplugins libio_hmi_list box 5 3 3 7 1 3 Fl
110. plug in can be used to access the SCAPS USC1 and USC 2 scanner controller cards via the generic Scanner Controller Interface for controlling a scan head and a connected laser in real time The usage of this interface may require additional licenses provided by the vendor of the USC scanner controller cards Within the configuration dialogue the plug in the scanner controller card and the interface to the card have to be configured according to the connected devices Basic Laser type the type of the connected laser the field that was selected here directly corresponds to the laser tab panes where some additional laser specific settings can be done for a detailed description of the available options please refer to the SCAPS manuals and to the manuals of the laser device vendor Power output the laser output power can be controlled via an additional output the kind of output to be used can be defined here Number of Axes specifies if the scanner controller has to operate in 2D or 3D mode this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card and on the available SCAPS licenses Correction file the ucf correction file to be used for operation provided by the vendor of the scan head or by SCAPS Stand By Frequency frequency the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Stand By Length pulse length the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Field Left Position Fi
111. points Radius 2 the second radius that is valid for all even numbered points Spikes here it can be chosen how much spikes or rays the star shall have Angle offset here an offset can be specified for the points that are assigned to the second inner radius in order to create non regular spikes Draw CCW normally the star has an clockwise orientation means it is drawn to right direction when this check box is set the drawing direction is reversed 6 5 4 7 Spiral This primary element can be used to create spirals Starting point is always a spiral that is drawn in two steps the first left mouse click into the drawing area specifies the centre point of it the second one specifies the outer radius Next the spiral can be modified via its options Line Style the style the spiral is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of several short fully connected lines that form a continuous spiral for this mode the parameter Segments specifies how much of these short lines are used to create this spiral the more lines are used the more smooth the resulting spiral becomes Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines that form the spiral comparing to the previous option here the parameter Distance influences the length of these lines and therefore the resolution here the shorter the lines are the more segments this spiral consists of and the more smooth it becomes
112. position while marking or when the movement direction is changed during marking for a detailed description of these values their 102 usage and their influence to the marking result please refer to the SCAPS manuals All following tab panes contain laser specific definitions that are used depending on the selected laser type For information about these parameters and their usage please refer to the manuals and specifications of the used lasers The SCI scanner controller card plug in and thus the connected USC 1 USC 2 scanner controller card can be controlled via its inputs directly by transmitting coordinate values to the X Y and Z inputs or by using the control input where a stream of movement data will be accepted It is recommended not to use both options at the same time or without additional synchronisation The results may be undefined when direct and control stream commands are set at the same time In case the control input is used the BSY output has to be connected with the source of the control data it signalises if the scanner controller card is still working or if it has finished so that other operations can be started Following in and outputs are available for the SCI plug in Numeric INO X the X position the scanner has to be moved to setting a new value to this input does not cause any movement it will be invoked only after the Y or Z input was set Numeric IN1 Y the Y position the scanner has to be moved to o
113. possible to embed these images directly into the project file to avoid external dependencies and complications with paths that may not exist on target system To do that the check box Embed into project has to be selected This option can be used for all three external images but does not have any influence when one of the internal images is used A button that can be pressed by the user and that displays pictures instead of the standard button design here own images can be configured for normal disabled and selected state Toggle Button this is a button that stays at its selected state when it is pressed for the first time and has to be switched back to non selected state by clicking it for a second time so it toggles between two valid states These buttons can be put into mutual exclusion groups within such a group only one of all buttons can be selected So when one of them is selected all other buttons within the same mutual exclusion group are deselected automatically Creation of a new group or assigning a button to an existing group can be done within the HMI configuration panel there a combo box exists that lists all existing mutual exclusion group and offers an additional option to create a new one Radio Button this kind of button is a small round element that can be used only together with other elements of same type and the mutual exclusion function as described for the Toggle Button Usage and configuration of a Radio But
114. represent the current time Following parameters can be used to influence the resulting data and their behaviour Start Value the starting value where the serial number has to count from when the project is loaded initially Reset At here a number can be defined that is used as limit for the serial number as soon as the current serial number is equal to the value given here the serial number is reset to the start value defined above Increment the value the serial number has to be incremented by for every update this value can be negative which results in a decrement for every cycle Beat Count this number specifies for the number of cycles a serial number has to be left unchanged until it is updated here a value of three as an example would mean a serial number is updated and incremented only at every third marking cycle Beat Offset this parameter corresponds to the preceding one it adds an offset to the beat count means it defines at which number it has to be started to count for the number of Beat Counts Numeric Base by default a serial number consists of numeral values in range 0 9 which means the numeric base is 10 this parameter can be used to define any other numeric base so that less numeral values are used Numeric Base lt 10 or in a way where letters in range A Z are added for counting the serial number Numeric Base gt 10 Minimum Digits this parameter spec
115. set 3 perform operations that lead to unexpected results or that let error LED turn on 4 stop this operation and close application 5 check out the firmware debug log or send it to HALaser Systems OpenAPC Project Group for further assistance Here several default parameters can be defined that are used in case the direct axis control inputs X Y and Z are used or in case control data are used that do not contain motion speed delay information These default parameters are used only in ControlRoom projects and therefore do not appear within BeamConstruct Jump Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned off Mark Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned on Laser Off Delay Laser On Delay Jump Delay Mark Delay Polygon Delay these delays are used during marking operation they become active when the laser is turned off or on when the scanner jumps to an other position when it moves to an other position while marking or when the movement direction is changed during marking for a detailed description of these values their usage and their influence to the marking result please refer to E1701 manual All following tab panes contain laser specific definitions that are used depending on the selected laser type For information about these parameters and their usage please refer to the manuals and specifications of the used lasers Within Co
116. shorter than the given distance or points that are located between two other ones and describe a smaller angle than the specified one are removed and merged with their predecessor The result is a geometry that may use less data and therefore can be processed faster but also may have changed in its visual representation slightly 6 7 Processing Operation The machines that perform the material processing can t be controlled out of CNConstruct directly A CNCP project file can be executed only within a ControlRoom project with full functionality and full influence on all used machines But within CNConstruct the processing can be simulated here several functions are available in menu Process Simulate a full process cycle is simulated means the complete project is updated all serial numbers date and time objects are triggered the process time of geometries is calculated delays are measured and movements are partially simulated The resulting total process time is displayed to the user This time is nearly the same time such a process would need within the target environment It differs only in case motion elements are used that perform absolute movements here the real processing time can t be calculated because the starting position of an driven axis is not known Increment all serial number elements of the current project are incremented the date and time 184 elements are updated Decrement all seria
117. square and never a rectangle Merge Cells several barcode types may consist of cells rectangles or squares that are located directly beside each other this option merges such cells wherever that is possible without destroying the barcode information it can be used to save vector data Draw Cells as Dots when this option is enabled the cells some barcode types consist of are replaced by plain dots Draw Cells as Custom Dots when this option is enabled the cells some barcode types consist of are replaced by the custom dot geometry as defined within the settings Invert barcodes created by this element consist only of the outlines together with the Hatching Additional Geometry element these outlines can be filled Depending on the used material processing method these filled areas may result in lighter or darker areas In case the result is not readable by barcode scanners the light and dark areas can be exchanged by this option here an additional border is drawn around the barcode so that the hatching function generates an inverted fill pattern 214 7 7 4 12 Delay This element does not have a visual representation it does not accept any additional data or post processing but it can be used to influence the material processing The elements of a project are processed in the order they appear within the Element Tree At the position where this element is added the full process is delayed for the given time Thus this element
118. started then in case plug ins are configured for external use all required OpenPlugger s have to be executed and finally the OpenPlayer or OpenDebugger has to be started Here all OpenPlugger s and the OpenPlayer or OpenDebugger have to use exactly the same project file for operation elsewhere really weird effects resulting in heavy confusion and troubles are 17 preprogrammed To get additional information about the Interlock Server and its different operation modes please refer the related section below Touch screen support Activate this check box enables the support for touch screens in this case an on screen keyboard is opened automatically whenever the user selects a text input field and an on screen numpad is opened whenever an number input field is selected This applies only for the OpenPlayer the on screen inputs are shown only there not in editing or debugging mode The following project options apply to the touch mode only Keyboard size factor when the on screen keyboard or the on screen numpad is generated its size is shrunk to the minimum that is required for the currently used font and keyboard layout In some cases this size may be too small This size factor can be used to create a bigger layout with bigger buttons So the keyboard size factor can be used to enlarge them by the given factor Keyboard font here a font can be chosen that is used for the on screen keyboard and the on screen nu
119. support structure is created 230 always and will cover the whole model e Support Pens this table can be used to define patterns for the pens that have to be assigned to every slice s support structure There separate pens can be specified for contour and hatch First of all the check box in front of a row of the list has to be selected to enable this entry Then the pens to be used for contour and hatch of a support structure can be selected via the combo box All rows within that list define an order of pens that is repeated until the last slice is reached Here patterns of up to 5 different pen combinations can be defined Since the pen definitions for sliced geometry have to be done here the related option within the Element tab pane is disabled pens can be assigned only via this pen mapping table Alternatively the pen definitions for hatches can be disabled To do that the checkbox above the Hatch column has to be unset Now an own pen can be assigned to every hatch via the common way pen assignment in Element tab pane The difference between both methods while pen assignment via the table in Support section assigns the same pen to all hatches of a slice which additionally may alter over slices the pen assignment via Element tab pane can be used to assign different pens to each individual hatch that stay the same over slices Beside of that there is a slider available on the property panels left hand side there the
120. ta dat 147 General Per Settings 3 cosita dll dodo eee seen Soe eens 161 195 Generic LASEM O OO E rE E tal dido del li Sauevtoustian ton cacens 81 GOOMOU O O E S SE A T ae seaues 235 Geometry ab Pane 324 s0 etal ire A A i 164 204 Gobacktromithis TESUI ts A seacseccdys Acces nds dtsautesuanadat da decae 196 O sot eae a a e a ates Maan a ena te 66 76 A Bn E AE E EE E E re Pee Pe E AE a On 66 A OA 160 190 a E 28f Group ElEMeNtS A E a E decia 166 206 OU idas 26f 29 COW a ala Aaa 209 211 GSV 2 Measurement A 66 E EE rete o ad 147 H HALaser E1701D Scanner Controller ooccccccooonnncnccccooncnnnncnonnnnnoncnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnonnnrnnnnnononnnnnonnnnnnnanon 83 HALaser E1701M Stepper Motor Controller ooooooooccnnonccccccncccccccccccnconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnneninnnns 109 Hatch Anglais aaa 175 217 HatehDistalta cana aho diia 176 217 HATCH Of sectaria aaa aaa 176 217 Hatha atan aaa 175 216 O A id 11f 16 HMISditOR cotas naa 18 PANE GIO RN data ad 16 Honzo GaU gO to osados 23 34 Horizontal Slider att aaa 22 30 TAR Gees lt a taa aii 37 125 FIP GE to Controlar ita aida linia 37 125 184 236 HTTP Clie ts tanda idas 126 human machine INSTA A a A E Eat 12 H man Machine Interface ii A aa tati e 16 l Din a E A ae ata asd A aie o A cates 20 258 OTOT a o aos 158 AA O RS 146 148 N ae E D A SEE NS 146 MA ld al ed e 23 38 IMage Button Arete A A E adi ii 22 29 Image Ca
121. that have been set before but only after the next data packets arrive Digital INO GATE as long as this input is set to LOW all the outputs are disabled no incoming data are forwarded to them Digital IN1 digital IN7 data inputs the values that are set here are available at the related outputs only in case GATE is set to HIGH Digital OUT1 digital OUT7 data outputs that become active only in case the gate is opened Numeric Triggered Gate This triggered gate expects a numerical value at input O and emits it at an output as soon as an digital signal 1 is received at the related input Numeric INO the input for the value that has to be emitted for every trigger signal Digi IN1 Digi IN7 the inputs for the trigger signals that cause the emission of the value from input O at the related outputs Numeric OUT1 Numeric OUT7 the outputs for the data that are assigned to the trigger signal inputs Numeric Gate This element can be used to enable or interrupt the flow of numerical data Comparing to the triggered gate the digital input does not cause the emission of data that have been stored before here the input allows incoming data to be output immediately HIGH to enable the gate or to be dropped LOW for a disabled gate When the GATE input is set to HIGH that does not cause a data transmission of values that have been set before but only after the next data packets arrive Digital INO GATE
122. the OpenAPC software package contains a fully functional variant of this plug in Packages for all other operating systems contain a skeleton if this plug in without any functionality There it can be used to design a project that has to be executed on an Weecoboard later The lOs of this plug in correspond to the digital lOs of the board directly Digital INO 1 sets the digital output 1 Digital IN1 2 sets the digital output 2 Digital IN6 red switches the red orange LED of the board Digital IN7 green switches the green LED of the board Digital OUTO 1 watches the digital input 1 Digital OUT7 4 watches the digital input 4 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_weecolcd 5 3 3 7 2 12 Laser Flow Objects There exist no application internal flow elements of this type all motion related functionalities are provided by external plug ins 5 3 3 7 2 13 External Laser Flow Objects 3rdEye R PSC140P Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Beside of that some laser equipment can be damaged in case it is controlled with wrong signals Thus it is highly recommended to check the output generated by this plug in using e g an oscilloscope to avoid problems caused by w
123. the command INIT is sent to the card automatically This command puts the stand alone option into a proper operation mode After it requires a nameable time to finish its operation the scanner card is not able to execute any other command for several seconds Access to the scanner card and all it s functions happen via the inputs of the plug in The communication protocol of the FEB stand alone option works using handshake mode means after execution of a command the application has to wait for a response that is given at OUTO When a new command is given before this response is available that command is rejected This fact is noticed within the OpenDebugger only when it happens within the OpenPlayer the untimely command is rejected without any further notification Numeric INO CMD whenever a number is set at this input the related command is sent to the scanner card some of the commands require additional parameters that can be set using the following inputs Here only the mapping between the command number and the executed command is described for a detailed documentation about the purpose of every command please refer to the manual of the USC scanner card and the stand alone option Together with the command the parameters are given these parameter names correspond to the names of the plug ins inputs where the related values are expected at So when a description 99 FX X Y TXT is given that means that the command FX is executed
124. the configuration conditions can be defined at which the program flow has to be stopped the flow can be executed in single step mode where the user has to press a button for every data transfer cycle errors and warnings are displayed together with the name of the flow element that caused this warning that might be important for the user to find out where a program flow does not act as expected the outputs of flow elements can be watched to see the changes and values of data The OpenDebugger itself has to be started with a project file name as parameter when it is executed out of the OpenEditor this is done automatically using the current project Then it opens two windows the HMI interface window as it would appear on the target system when the project file is executed with the OpenPlayer and an additional debugging window This debugging window is opened right beside the HMI window so make sure that there is enough space on your screen 5 4 1 Debugging a Project All the debugging possibilities and functionalities can be reached via the tool bar of the debuggers main window The first two buttons can be used to open an other project file or to exit the debugger so the last 133 one brings the user back to the OpenEditor when the debugger is started from there The next button that symbolises a small bug in its original sense can be used for starting a program flow in debug mode This behaviour is diffe
125. the digital value that is set to the input Digital INO digital IN7 the input for the values that have to be inverted Digital OUTO digital OUT7 the inverted values from the related inputs Digital NOP This operation does not require any further definitions It does not modify the digital value that is set to the input but simply returns it on next processing cycle NOP no operation It can be used e g for testing specific functionalities to synchronize the order of data flows or to let data flows arrive after each other Digital INO digital IN7 the input for the values that have to be inverted Digital OUTO digital OUT7 the inverted values from the related inputs Digital N OR Using this flow control several inputs can be OR concatenated and the result can be inverted optionally Within the configuration dialogue the inputs that belong to one output and where the values have to be concatenated can be configured Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears If at least one output uses this input as clock no other outputs can be configured to use INO as data input Digital IN1 digital IN7 data inputs for the OR concatenation Digital OUTO digital OUT7 data outputs that send the values resulting from this operation Digital NOT XOR Using this flow control several inputs ca
126. the first time because of security reasons e The radio buttons below this combo box can be chosen to select what the pilot laser shall show in its preview Use total projects outline draws a simple rectangle that includes the whole project Use individual elements outline draws a simple rectangle for every element within the current project except dots lines and triangles which are shown fully and Use real element shapes draws the full shape of all elements except hatches The pen and therefore the related speed and delay values that is used for the pilot laser can be defined within the pen settings dialogue please refer above Tab pane Manual offers direct access to the position of scanhead Here mirrors can be moved to a specific position e In upper combobox the scanhead can be choosen this operation has to be performed on valid only for multinead configurations elsewhere Scanhead 1 has to be used e four arrows give the possibility to move the scanner position in positive and negative X and Y direction the input field between these arrows specifies the jump length every button press has to cause pressing these buttons lets the scanner jump immediately e In fields X and Y coordinates can be selected the scanner has to be moved to by pressing button Jump motion to these positions is started In tab pane Geometry the current projects vector data can be manipulated e A
127. the lines that are processed by this tool for the hatcher it might be necessary to compensate this tool size to avoid overlapping parts of the working piece to be processed more than once this compensation can be chosen here Use Toolsize From Pen here the tool compensation sizes are calculated automatically out of the tool sizes of the used pens Custom when this option is used a custom value for compensation can be defined 6 5 6 Post processing Tool Elements The Post processing Tools influence all geometric elements that are located on an earlier position within the Element Tree on the windows right hand side So the manipulation of the geometry that is done by sucha tool is always applied to the Primary Geometry element it belongs to and to all previously applied Additional Geometry elements of this primary one Additional elements that follow to a tool are not changed they apply their additional geometry to the modified primary geometry Post processing Tools are symbolised by red tool bar buttons and can be added to a primary element simply by clicking this tool bar button To do that the related Primary Geometry element has to be selected within the Element Tree Post processing Tools do not add any new points or lines to existing geometry thus it requires an outline that consists of lines that are short enough to let the tool apply its function elsewhere the result would not look like expected This means a non continuous line styl
128. the motion primary element It does not accept any additional data or post processing elements but it can be used to influence the material processing in general by changing the lasers focus The elements of a project are processed in the order they appear within the entity tree At the position where this element is placed a focus shifter or beam expander is accessed These axes have to be connected with the two additional CTRL outputs of the BeamConstruct to Control plug in within an ControlRoom project that makes use of this BEAMP file In case only BeamConstruct is used the related Z Shifter plug in has to be configured in projects hardware settings The focus z position can be influenced by the parameters that have to be set for this element Position the new position to move the z position to Speed the speed for the movement to the given position Relative defines a non absolute movement means the axis does not drive to the given position but changes it current position by the given distance 216 Move axes to home position the axis is moved to its home reference position this option is available only for motion controllers that support this function and ignores the given position and speed values All other parameters influence the whole motion element Pre Motion Delay this delay is done before the motion is triggered 7 7 5 Additional Geometry Elements Additional Geometry elements add
129. the next line of the text that is predefined with file 1 Char IN1 FILE1 overwrites the current predefinition of text file 1 this operation stops reading the previous file and opens the new one the first line of this file is read only when a HIGH signal is received at INO Digital IN2 CLK2 loads the next line of the text that is predefined with file 2 Char IN3 FILE2 overwrites the current predefinition of text file 2 this operation stops reading the previous file and opens the new one the first line of this file is read only when a HIGH signal is received at IN2 Digital IN4 CLK3 loads the next line of the text that is predefined with file 3 Char IN5 FILE3 overwrites the current predefinition of text file 3 this operation stops reading the previous file and opens the new one the first line of this file is read only when a HIGH signal is received at IN4 Digital IN6 CLK4 loads the next line of the text that is predefined with file 4 Char IN7 FILE4 overwrites the current predefinition of text file 4 this operation stops reading the previous file and opens the new one the first line of this file is read only when a HIGH signal is received at IN6 Char OUTO DATA the next text line out of file 1 Numeric OUT1 ERR1 when the end of the file 1 was reached or when an error occurred no text is emitted but the related error code is given here following error codes are used 1 the file coul
130. the parts counter this function counts how many parts already have been processed and informs the user when a limit was reached in this case the user has to confirm this limit and needs to reset the counter to continue marking confirmation and resetting can be done in mark dialogue Default part number here a number of default parts can be specified that is used for the parts counter it can be overwritten by the user in mark dialogue In tab pane Users access to functions can be limited depending on users their roles and privileges By checking the box Enable User Management this functionality is enabled and some predefined settings are used For all existing preconfigured users the password is similar to the username and should be changed prior to operating it on the target system The users tab pane lists the available users on the left hand side By selecting one of them the related privileges and settings are shown on the right hand side of the pane Once a user is selected its privileges can be changed the login and full name as well as the state and the comment can be modified To activate such changes after setting them the button Apply has to be pressed elsewhere the changes of a users parameters are not set The check boxes on upper right side of this tab pane define what a user can do after logging into the software successfully e Supervision this is a special privilege that applies only to user Superv
131. the poll delay that tells how fast lower values or how slow larger poll delays the position has to be updated Here big delay values can be used in case the device itself does not move or moves only relatively slow All other configuration is done automatically by 76 the underlying library libwlocate Digital OUTO OK when there are position data available this output returns a logic HIGH in case the position could not be evaluated e g because no internet connection is available the output gives a LOW and all the following outputs do not emit usable values Numeric OUT1 LAT here the latitude in unit degrees is given Numeric OUT2 LON this output emits the longitude in unit degrees Numeric OUT3 QUAL this output gives an information about the position quality in unit percent A value of 0 means that only a rough estimation of the position was possible here a deviation of some kilometres are possible Values in range 1 100 are used for a more accurate position evaluation 1 is used for deviations of about 100 300 meters while 100 is used in case of a deviation of only a few meters There is no exact calculation from percent to deviation in meters available this quality value mainly gives a probability about the exactness of the given position This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_wlan_pos and depends on the shared library libwlocate 5 3 3 7 2 11 lO Operation Macros Modbus RTU Master T
132. the request could be sent successfully or a number not equal to 1 otherwise This return value informs only about the data transmission to the Interlock Server it doesn t gives the information whether the data could be set correctly or not In case the operation could be done successfully on server side too the data block is noticed as a new changed one within the callback function oapc _ ispace get value nodeName Using this function a singe value can be fetched from a data block without using the callback function It fetches a data block where the name has to be set using parameter nodeName in style datablock io The function itself returns two values result and value Here result is equal to 1 when the operation could be done successfully In this case the second returned value contains the data of the requested data block and its specific IO The data type of this returned value depends on the type of the IO of this specific data block PLEASE NOTE this function blocks until the data could be retrieved from the Interlock Server or until the connection to it failed Depending on the network speed this may take some nameable time oapc _ispace disconnect This function closes the connection to the Interlock Server After calling oapc_ispace disconnect no more data blocks can be changed and the installed callback function oapc ispace recv callback is no longer notified when something changes within the Interlock Server oap
133. the robots position here the excursion of the robots arm is given in unit 1 1000 inch Numeric OUT POS_T this output gives a feedback about the robots position here the angular position of the robots arm is given in unit 1 10 degrees Numeric OUT POS_Z this output gives a feedback about the robots position here the height of the robots arm is given in unit 1 1000 inch Digi OUT VAC_CMD feedback for the current state of the vacuum command this output gives a HIGH signal in case the vacuum valve of the chuck could be turned on successfully using input VAC_CMD Digi OUT VAC_SENS feedback for the current state of the vacuum of the chuck this output gives a HIGH signal in case the vacuum valve is turned on input VAC_CMD and there is a wafer on the chuck which could be gripped successfully Digi OUT MOVING this is a state output that tells if the robot is currently moving HIGH or not LOW Numeric OUT SCN_MAP here the result of a wafer scanning operation robot command SCN or input SCAN_STAT is emitted as a sequence of numbers which belong to the scanned wafer slots and the scanning result Steppermotor Controller Using this macro it is possible to handle a stepper motor that is controlled via step and direction signals given at the parallel port Internally it uses the Stepper Motor Driver Parport plug in as a very first step there all required lO and controlling parameters have to be set Numeric IN AX1_POS
134. to be driven with here a value in range 0 100 is expected that corresponds to the as a percentage laser power value Numeric IN5 FREQ the frequency in unit Hz the laser has to be driven with during marking Numeric IN6 CMD this input can be used to set additional commands and to perform additional control operations using them here following command values are supported 0 stop marking immediately and flush the list of control commands that may be already stored within the plug in 1 auto calibration command turn auto calibration on and perform referencing for head 1 2 auto calibration command turn auto calibration on and perform referencing for head 2 5 auto calibration command perform calibration at head 1 6 auto calibration command perform calibration at head 2 9 turn auto calibration off for head 1 10 turn auto calibration off for head 2 Please note the auto calibration commands depend on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card and the used scan head Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to move the scanner and to control the laser such a stream can contain complex marking operation information Digital OUT6 BSY signals if marking is still active HIGH or if the scanner controller card has finished all operations this input has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control
135. to be parsed in case this value is set accidentially wrong all following parameters are assigned to the wrong field within the binary control structure no logic check can be performed here to avoid such a problem Column Separator specifies which character is used within the CSV file to separate the columns of data Output Data Structure this option can be used to specify if the created binary control structure contains 2D or 3D information this option normally should be set to the same value like the Input Data parameter but does not have to it can be used to perform a simple data conversion between 2D and 3D too Output 7 Value the numeric output 7 of this plug in is not assigned to a fixed value of the CSV file here it can be chosen which of the additional rows have to be used to emit data at OUT7 This conversion plug in uses the following in and outputs Digital INO CLK start loading and parsing of the current CSV file as soon as a HIGH value is given here the complete file is converted so that the related output emit a continuous stream of data according to the values found within the file Char IN1 FILE specifies a new CSV file that will be loaded when the next HIGH signal is given to INO Char IN2 CSV input for a single line of CSV data that is processed immediately and independent form the CLK input Binary OUTO CTRL output for binary Control data that contain movement and tool information
136. to design pipes easily These pipes can t be selected and don t change their layout depending on any input They are mainly a possibility to quickly insert fancy pipes into a HMI layout without the need to load external graphics Within the plug ins configuration panel the type of pipe can be chosen Every type is available in two colours for a steel pipe in metallic look and for a black plastic pipe plain horizontal pipe for connections in horizontal direction plain vertical pipe for point to point connections in vertical direction T piece to connect three pipes with each other here it can be chosen out of four T pieces that differ in their direction where the third pipe can be connected at elbow to switch from horizontal to vertical pipe or from vertical to horizontal pipe here also four different elbow elements are available that differ in the direction where the two open ends of the elbow are oriented into This plug in is completely static and does not react on any input The plug in itself is located in hmiplugins libio_hmi_hardpipes 5 3 3 7 1 7 Flow Objects of Container type HMI Elements Tabbed Pane Digital IN1 SEL select the first tab and put it in foreground Digital IN2 EN disable LOW or enable HIGH the first tab Numeric IN3 SEL select the tab with the number that is sent to this input here other tabs than only the first one can be accessed if no tab is available at the position specifi
137. to this input a new line is written into the corresponding file 1 Char IN1 FILE1 here the default file name 1 can be changed setting a new file name closes the preceding text file and creates a new one using this name when this new name is equal to the preceding one the old text file is overwritten Char IN2 TXT2 whenever a new text is send to this input a new line is written into the corresponding file 2 Char IN3 FILE2 here the default file name 2 can be changed setting a new file name closes the preceding text file and creates a new one using this name when this new name is equal to the preceding one the old text file is overwritten Char IN4 TXT3 whenever a new text is send to this input a new line is written into the corresponding file 3 Char IN5 FILE3 here the default file name 3 can be changed setting a new file name closes the preceding text file and creates a new one using this name when this new name is equal to the preceding one the old text file is overwritten Char IN6 TXT4 whenever a new text is send to this input a new line is written into the corresponding file 4 Char IN7 FILE4 here the default file name 4 can be changed setting a new file name closes the preceding text file and creates a new one using this name when this new name is equal to the preceding one the old text file is overwritten This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_savetxt 129 5 3 3 7 2 19 Miscellaneous
138. tool that is described here The resulting correction table afterwards can be saved in BeamConstruct HD bcorr correction file format a special format that provides much better accuracy than most other formats Such a correction file can be used for some of the scanner controller plug ins of OpenAPC package directly like the ETH6608 plug in 8 2 Usage To start with generation of a new correction file the New toolbar button or the menu Project New has to be selected This opens a dialogue where parameters for focal and pincushion distortion can be set Additionally it can be specified which of both corrections have to be applied to the correction table So for plain 2D applications or hardware set ups where no third axis or no possibility to change the focus exists only pincushion distortion parameters can be set For a real 3D set up focal correction parameters can be applied too Alternatively it is possible to load an already existing correction file via menu Project Open or by using toolbar button Load Project Next this correction table can be modified by specifying one or more nominal and actual positions To get the values required for this the current correction file has to be used for marking During the marking operation one or more single points have to be marked These points should be located at positions where the accuracy has to be increased or at positions spread over the whole working area After marking t
139. two things can be done layers can be renamed according to their meaning and they can be turned on and off When the box in front of a layer is checked all elements that are assigned to this layer are drawn within the drawing area Layers that are not checked are not visible within the drawing area they are hidden and therefore can t be selected or edited When a marking process is started out of BeamConstruct the layer visibility states do not have an influence on the marking result Means also these layers that are currently hidden will be marked 7 7 3 The Element Tree On the main windows right hand side a tree is shown that represents the current projects structure It consists of a list of primary elements and their optional child elements During processing on the target system the elements are processed in the same order as they are listed there from top to bottom including their children Every primary element may contain several Additional Geometry elements and several Post Processing Tools They are listed as child nodes of their Primary Geometry parents within this tree All these primary and child nodes can be edited within this tree via a context menu This menu can be opened by selecting a node within the tree and clicking the right mouse button Then following functions can 206 be chosen Group Elements while holding down the Shift or Ctrl key it is possible to select a range of elements within the entity tre
140. value B Digital Counter This flow element can be used to count digital events Digital INO RES reset the state of all counters back to 0 Digital IN1 1 count all digital data with HIGH state Digital IN2 0 count all digital data with LOW state 54 Digital IN3 count all digital data independent from their state Numeric OUT1 the number of counted HIGH states Numeric OUT2 the number of counted LOW states Numeric OUT3 the number of counted states Numerical Addition Using this flow control the values of several inputs and or a constant value can be added with each other Within the configuration dialogue the inputs that belong to one output and where the values have to be added can be configured The input values are treated as floating point numbers here Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears Numeric IN1 numeric IN7 data inputs for the addition Numeric OUT1 numeric OUT7 data outputs that send the values resulting from this operation Numerical Subtraction Using this flow control the values of several inputs and or a constant value can be subtracted from each other Within the configuration dialogue the inputs that belong to one output and where the values have to be subtracted can be configured The input values are treated as floating point numbers subtrac
141. value specifies which of the boards has to be used by this plug in Laser type the type of the connected laser the field that was selected here directly corresponds to the laser tab panes where some additional laser specific settings can be done for a detailed description of the available options please refer to the manual of the RTC3 and to the manuals of the laser device vendor Power output the laser output power can be controlled via an additional output the kind of output to be used can be defined here Number of Axes specifies if the scanner controller has to operate in 2D or 3D mode this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card Correction file the ctb correction file to be used for operation provided by the vendor of the scanhead Firmware file the hex firmware file to be used to operate the scanner controller card provided by SCANLAB Stand By Frequency frequency the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Stand By Length pulse length the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Field Left Position Field Upper Position defines the upper left coordinate of the field that has to be used by the scanner Field Size the total size of the field that is used by the scanner this parameter together with the left and upper position specifies the coordinates input vectors have to be located within in case there are input data whi
142. when this checkbox is set the minimum and maximum values are shown beside the axis this field applies to bar charts only and does not have any influence on the pie chart e Labels here it can be specified if every value shown within the chart should have no label should show the name of the value or the current value when the name is chosen to be shown it can be specified in the following text fields e Name specifies the name of a value this name is shown within the chart when Labels is set to Names In second tab pane Colours it is possible to choose or change a specific colour for every bar that is shown within the chart The chart is updated whenever a new value is set at one if the Numerical input INO IN8 Please note When input values change very fast and often this may cause a nameable load to the graphics which in case of slow hardware could slow down the whole system Flow Indicator Using this plug in the flow direction and speed of moved materials can be visualised It consists of an area where some kind of wave is shown that moves into a definable direction Here following additional parameters can be used to modify the behaviour of the element e Start Colour End Colour the two colours that are used to create the flow indicators waves e Border Colour colour of the border around the waves e Flow Speed movement speed of the waves e Flow Direction can be used to select if waves have to move horizonta
143. whenever the number 99 is received at INO Here only the first word is the original USC FEB command that can be found within the manual This command is executed using the values set for X IN1 Y IN2 and TXT IN5 These values have to be set before the command is given Currently following commands are supported by this plug in 4 TRB X Y A transform the complete job bitwise 5 RT A rotate the complete job 6 SC X Y A scale the complete job 31 JN A select a new job 23 ET EN enable disable triggering 24 M EN start stop marking 25 TX NAME TXT set a new text to a serial number entity 44 OS A overwrite speed 45 OF A overwrite frequency 46 OP A overwrite power 47 EM EN enable disable marking on the fly 48 LC A set global loop count 49 OOU A set digital outputs of the USC scanner card 50 OOF A set digital outputs of the FEB stand alone option 51 OIU get the digital inputs of the USC scanner card 52 OIF get the digital inputs of the FEB stand alone option Numeric IN1 X sets a value used as X parameter when a command is executed Numeric IN2 Y sets a value used as Y parameter when a command is executed Numeric IN3 A sets a value used as A parameter when a command is executed Char IN4 TXT sets a value used as TXT parameter when a command is executed Char IN5 NAME sets a value used as NAME parameter when a command
144. 0 100 is expected that corresponds to the as a percentage laser power value Numeric IN5 FREQ the frequency in unit Hz the laser has to be driven with during marking Numeric IN6 CMD this input can be used to set additional commands and to perform additional control operations using them here following command values are supported 0 stop marking immediately and flush the list of control commands that may be already stored within the plug in 1 auto calibration command turn auto calibration on and perform referencing for head 1 2 auto calibration command turn auto calibration on and perform referencing for head 2 5 auto calibration command perform calibration at head 1 6 auto calibration command perform calibration at head 2 9 turn auto calibration off for head 1 10 turn auto calibration off for head 2 Please note the auto calibration commands depend on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card and the used scan head Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to move the scanner and to control the laser such a stream can contain complex marking operation information Digital OUT6 BSY signals if marking is still active HIGH or if the scanner controller card has finished all operations this input has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data it is necessary to synchronize sever
145. 0 is expected that corresponds to the laser power value using unit percent Numeric IN5 FREQ the frequency in unit Hz the laser has to be driven with during marking Numeric IN6 CMD this input can be used to set additional commands and to perform additional control operations using them here following command values are currently supported e 0 stop marking immediately and flush the list of control commands that may be already stored within the plug in or within the scanner card Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to move the scanner and to control the laser such a stream can contain complex marking operation information Digital OUT6 BSY signals if marking is still active HIGH or if the scanner controller card has finished all operations this output has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data it is necessary to synchronize several movement operations Binary OUT7 IN binary data that reflect the state of the digital inputs of this scanner controller card These data are required by some plug ins that need to react on these inputs and there have to be connected to them like the scanner controller stepper motor plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_ly001 Makeblock XY Plotter Warning This plug in is designed to control laser or other dangerous equipment which may effect a person s health
146. 02 Schneider IMS MD VEE a a aa a eaa A a a A A EEE OIE ETNE 112 Schneider IMS MDrive Controller o oooccccccccccnncccnnncnonononononinonononononcnonnnnnnnncnnnnnannnnnannnnna nano nannncnnannananans 118 Send Stand Alone Data ccooccccnnccccnoccccnncccnnncncnnncnononcnonnncnnnnara conan nn a nn cnn ano nnnnnn nena Aa TE EEE aN 233 SEQUENCER a NR ARO 14 SE A TR el ca RRE 75 Serial Date IMe iia a da atan 178 219 Set Defaults for Bitmap Markin9 coonooccccnnnnnoccccncconnccnccnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnncnnnn nan nn cnn cnn nn Aar cnn nr nana OUES Oa 197 SHOW SD MeSH siete ds A A AA A Doa 228 SNOWAISICES ia IA 228 SNOW Stalin Ato ee A A ad 233 SIIK R Focus Ethernet reciau aa A tb ci da 113 Simple BUON tia A coi 22 29 SiN ta A Ads Dd ll so et 148 DINE Dist aii ad cee 176 218 SIS AMI ii A dd Ea 235 Single Panelne n aaa iaeia A eae ihe ead eee 24 39 SiN A A A A dd aoe a 149 153 Sintec R ETHG606 c2c2si anand ethnics lsd A to 106 SIRENA in 66 A SP eS On PO Oe 20 ORIPIMALKS TEE E E TE a oil Aad oh 205 A RN 205 Slice Direc uc tit clica 226f Slice DISTANCE ti tn A a ii 226f Slice MOE A o asas i 226f O NO 161 170 190 210 Smoothing Ei a a dada 170 210 Snap to A eA wack Peake ea dared eid eee ela ee eho tered a 17 160 190 LOIA IERTA Ale AAE E E E E ata sa dad snlesasnac dd 137 156 SPFIGE 2 ae a a td o ee a od a 90 Pra EE EA A E AE et de A AAN 75 RT 235 SPI G4 Laser RS232 Controlee a e a a a S eaaa aa ae Te eaae ae aaa
147. 211 TIA BOO CUINA ai dae ea Eae dadadada diae 211 r E a E A E il a ETE a EEA TE EE 212 TARA BCO catala ita da 213 AAA Do EI E AAEE EAEE E EIO ATN AA EINE E E AEE ila 214 PLATS MOUI ci 214 T1414 Gustom OU Utd iso EN 215 114 19 External Tiggo naa a o aa os bane ieee ost 215 E A A 216 7 7 5 Additional Geometry ElementS ooooononcccncnccononcncccnnnoncnoncnannnncnncnnnnnn cnn cnn nano nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 216 LA A a o OS 216 7 7 6 Post processing Tool ElementS oooocccccnnonocccccccnnonccnncnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnans 218 1 1 6 1 SING DISTOMION aiea o a eaan Ea a aata e Aaa rn aeee n a Se 218 TA 0 2 CUE DISLOMION A a 218 TL DataInput Elements aenea a ideado asar a 219 CATA CSV Data pt E A E A E sheen seaahbeasaneeahavs 219 TIA ZOpenAPC Data Input at ds io aia ea 219 TATI Seral Date TMM Sessa ek a Wate tages cated cha te agate aa ma hecho teats A aa aAa aeaa 219 CO EIN A AO T E ATAA DA ci 221 PONEMOS Add 221 78 2 Edit Non DestructiVe m menneen e innata id ida idad 222 1 8 2 1 Active Split GTO UD a 222 7 8 2 2 Active Move Group ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesseaaaasasseaaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeesaes 224 7 973 Edit DESTTUCIVO uc dia 225 0 9 Process 3D Dalai is T ceca 226 79 Slicing ID Data ii ai a 226 7 9 2 Sliced 3D MeS GrOUPinitiaa a oa slate tiveneintag aid bien ene a 227 7 9 3 Auto Arrangement of 3D Meshes in Sliced 3D Mesh GrouP5S
148. 227 7 9 2 Sliced 3D Mesh Group This is a very specific group that contains a 3D model that will not be marked and several slices which are generated out of this model Such a group has to be combined with other elements carefully since it performs operations in Z direction that have to fit to other elements or groups that are located before or after it within the current project A Sliced 3D Mesh Group is shown as a group element with one 3D Mesh element for every imported 3D model and one sub element for every slice within the element tree on the windows right hand side When the group is selected a special property panel opens on the windows left hand side There several parameters can be changed Some of these parameter changes lead to a recalculation of the slices which means the currently existing slices their sub elements and possibly added motion elements are removed from this group So it is recommended first to optimise all the slicing parameters and then add more data and elements to such a group The Sliced 3D Mesh Group property panel itself is split into two major parts Section Model contains all parameters that belong to the 3D mesh and the related data Section Support is related to automatic creation of additional structures that are intended to help creating the model itself especially at positions where parts of the model hang over and would not be stable during the phase of marking of single slices In section Model f
149. 5 check out the firmware debug log or send it to Lyocon for further assistance Here several default parameters can be defined that are used in case the direct axis control inputs X Y and Z are used or in case control data are used that do not contain motion speed delay information These default parameters are used only in ControlRoom projects and therefore do not appear within BeamConstruct Jump Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned off 87 e Mark Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned on e Laser Off Delay Laser On Delay Jump Delay Mark Delay Polygon Delay these delays are used during marking operation they become active when the laser is turned off or on when the scanner jumps to an other position when it moves to an other position while marking or when the movement direction is changed during marking for a detailed description of these values their usage and their influence to the marking result please refer to LY 001 manual All following tab panes contain laser specific definitions that are used depending on the selected laser type For information about these parameters and their usage please refer to the manuals and specifications of the used lasers Within ControlRoom projects LY 001 scanner controller card plug in can be controlled via its inputs directly by transmitting coordinate values to the X Y and Z inputs or
150. 6 CorrCorrect Cookbook Following some steps are described to get a suitable and accurate correction file that fits to a custom scanhead hardware setup Since every combination of scanhead with a specific lens results in an own specific distortion a separate correction file is needed for every scanhead lens combination For the same combination typically the same correction file can be used By performing following steps a suitable correction file can be created 1 Generate a project within BeamConstruct that consists of a square which is nearly as large as the whole working area edge length should be about 96 of the maximum working area size that is possible with a scanhead and can be 100 in a second step when an already created correction file has to be verified and refined 2 Add a horizontal and a vertical line to this project both should be exactly centred vertically and horizontally to the working area crossing each other in exact centre Mark this project on a material where the marking lines can be seen as clear and sharp as possible Check the marking result the edges of the square and the position of the horizontal and vertical lines please refer to example in image below 251 Y Angle X Angle X Offset Now switch over to CorrCorrect When the square is distorted at top and bottom edge distance marked in upper left corner in picture above this distortion has to be corrected with the Y Angle parameter in Correcti
151. D IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT This is a legal agreement between you either an individual end user or an entity and the Vendor Agreement By using this software you are agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement If you do not agree to the terms and conditions of this Agreement promptly return the software and other items that are part of this product in their original package with your sales receipt to your point of purchase for a full refund or if you have downloaded this software from the Vendors web site then you must stop using the software and destroy any copies of the software in your possession or control 1 Grant of Agreement Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement the Vendor and its suppliers grant to you a non exclusive license to use one licensed copy of the Software and any documentation accompanying this Agreement on one computer No other rights are granted The Software is in use if it is loaded on the computer s permanent or temporary memory For backup purposes only you may make one copy of the Software You must include on the backup copy all copyright and other notices included on the Software as supplied by the Vendor Installation on a network server for the sole purpose of your internal distribution of the Software is permitted only if you have purchased an individual Software license for each networked computer to which the Software is distributed 2 Restrictions The Software
152. Destructive and require at least one element to be selected Group several selected Primary Geometry elements are concatenated together within a group Group to Active Split using this function geometries that are larger than the available working area can be cut into smaller pieces and processed step by step using an additional drive for more information please refer the related section below Group to Active Move here full geometries can be processed repeatedly and combined with movements so that the same geometry is arranged in tiles or at the circumference of a ring several times for more information please refer the related section below UnGroup an existing group of elements is removed the contents of the group are put out of it Duplicate a copy of the currently selected element is created the copy is 100 identically to its original except its position it is placed a bit above the original element 7 8 2 1 Active Split Group This is a special kind of group that concatenates several elements into one group Due to the kind of this group it is recommended to use only geometries and scanner bitmaps and not to put other ones like motion elements into it An Active Split Group is able to handle geometries and bitmaps that are larger than the available working space It cuts them into smaller pieces and combines them with motion control information so that these large and cut geometries and bitm
153. EA 162 195 Usetor Pilot Laser nsien eaa e adaa a e ead eaa ae iaa e a a NER ind 195 Use individual elements Outline ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeee eee eaeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeescaaaeeeeaeaeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeees 234 USE parameters fOr Piet ii A can ee eee een Ana nda done ened aus eee 196 Use real elomentiS apesta aid o dls 234 Use total projects QUtlINO cta liada 234 us rmanagement Gne Areda adea e e enea ad aA Kaaa aa ane tase LA Ea 18 21 39 131 156ff User Management ean a a E a EETAS dd 156 User Management Panell eroaren a eaaa EAA td did 39 Jor PIEGO A ATE AAA NEIDE EEEIEE 21 User Privilege SetinOS iii ll TER KAATE ENA ted 18 US SEMI A A eS 18 US dl Ghee nents 193 SIN TES o e da 149 153 V VAR GLOBAL otra ii aa aaea o hates e e e io el e ale ol a ds 150 153 VAR VOGAL oca cients tea a stella a a a E ea aA e N a a 150 153 Vector Dia a a A A OAL Sheds 37 Vertical GAME a s 23 34 Vertical Idea A AENA 22 30 Vid o Controlar EII e O A aN tana a a a 192 231 VSD a de do a a a E aci ae a a a 158 Visual Grid SIZ6 sity il on Aa 17 Vis al Size aan AA aaa 17 W Wallis tilda A E AAE 135 Weecoboard 4M lO iio cid a edad oan A e e th and E a Ea EA ae aaa EAE Oa yas E aeaea Ga 77 Weecoboard LCD IOs aii ti are ast anes Ea AAA e Hebb sty oa aaraa aTa 78 WM aE ETEA a EET A E E E ET 25 WIEAN2POSITON i scarico Id RA e ve canst hvu id 76 Wobble Amplitd es fr ctcacacccezneey cee e a A atacada 197 Wobble Frequency esa A Ag
154. ENTITY_NAME in its X Y and Z direction these scaling factors have to specified by using inputs X Y and Z before Digital IN ENTITY_TRA translates the entity specified by ENTITY_NAME in given X Y and Z direction the transformation distances have to specified by using inputs X Y and Z before Digital IN MATRIX_ROT rotates the output matrix around the coordinates given at X and Y input using the value of the ANGLE input Digital IN MATRIX_SCA scales the complete output in X and Y direction using the values set at the inputs X and Y Digital IN MATRIX_TRA translates the output matrix using the values that have been set at the inputs X Y and Z before Digital IN MATRIX_RES modifications of the output matrix stay active also when a new job is loaded they can be reset to its default state no scaling no rotation and no translation with the command that is sent to SAMLight when this input is triggered with a HIGH signal Digital IN CHG_TEXT this command changes the text of an Text2D object within the currently loaded job the entity that has to be changed is specified by the value given at input ENTITY_NAME and the new text has to be set at character input VALUE before Digital IN GET_ENTITI this command does not require additional parameters it retrieves the names of all entities that are currently loaded When a job is loaded into SAMLight and a HIGH signal is triggered at this input first the number of available entities
155. F is copyright trademark legal trademark of SIRF Technology Inc Weecoboard Weecoboard 4M and Aptasys is copyright trademark legal trademark of Aptasys s r l SP ICE2 Raylase and others are copyright trademarks legal trademarks of Raylase AG ETH6608 Sintec and others are copyright trademarks legal trademarks of Sintec Optronics PSC PSC140P 3rdEye and others are copyright trademarks legal trademarks of 3rdEye Coherent Avia and others are copyright trademarks legal trademarks of Coherent Inc Sill and others are copyright trademarks legal trademarks of Sill Optics GmbH amp Co KG All other trademarks mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks by their respective owners All rights not expressly granted herein are reserved 2 Legal Issues LICENSE AGREEMENT The Open Advanced Process Control software package that is made available the Software is owned by OpenAPC Project Group the Vendor This Software is protected by copyright laws and is being made available solely for use by you in accordance with the following terms and conditions Any use reproduction or redistribution of the Software that is not in accordance with this Software License Agreement is expressly prohibited by law and may result in civil and criminal penalties SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT THE VENDOR IS WILLING TO LICENSE THIS SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINE
156. Flow Objects Interlock Server Connection Instead of implicit mapping of outputs to the Interlock Server and instead of allowing the Interlock Server to modify the inputs of a local element directly this flow element offers an alternative very specific possibility to access data nodes Normally it should not be necessary to use this direct communication path but in some seldom cases it might be useful especially when direct communication is necessary with plug ins that are handled by the external OpenPlugger It offers eight inputs and outputs of different data types that can be assigned to data nodes within the Interlock Server Whenever data are sent to an input of this flow element these data are forwarded to the configured node and its input Whenever a configured node changes within the Interlock Server at a output that is set up within the configuration panel of this flow element the changed data are emitted at the related output So within the configuration panel for every input and output two things have to be configured the unique name of the node within the Interlock Server the flow element has to connected with and the number of the input or output of that node to assign the lO of the flow element with When an input field for a node name is left empty within the configuration dialogue this input output is unused and will not affect anything will not be affected by anything PLEASE NOTE This flow element is not able to modify or t
157. HALaser E1701D Scanner Controller WARNING This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Beside of that some laser equipment can be damaged in case it is controlled with wrong signals Thus it is highly recommended to check the output generated by this plug in using e g an oscilloscope to avoid problems caused by wrong configurations This should be done prior to putting a system into operation for the first time and prior to putting a system into operation after any software update This plug in can be used to access the HALaser Systems E1701D scanner controller cards for controlling a scan head and a connected laser in real time Within the configuration dialogue the plug in and the scanner controller card have to be configured according to the connected devices Basic configuration parameters e IP or Serial Interface here it has to be configured how and where the controller is accessible In case of Ethernet connection the IP in style aaa bbb ccc ddd has to be entered here in case of USB connection the name of the serial interface has to be given COMx for Windows dev ttyACMx for Linux where x is the number of the serial interface the controller was connected with e Ethernet Password this parameter h
158. IN31 these inputs send single bits to the connected slave and change the state of the related outputs Numeric NINOO NINO3 these inputs send numeric values to the connected slave and change the state of its related outputs Digital OUT DOUT00 DOUT31 these outputs return the state of the inputs of the connected slave Numeric NOUTOO NOUTOS these outputs return the state of the related values of the connected slave Weecoboard 4M IO This plug in is designed to access the Weecoboard 4M by Aptasys Since this is an ARM embedded board 77 only the Linux ARM runtime of the OpenAPC software package contains a fully functional variant of this plug in Packages for all other operating systems contain a skeleton if this plug in without any functionality There it can be used to design a project that has to be executed on an Weecoboard later The lOs of this plug in correspond to the digital lOs of the board directly Digital INO 1 sets the digital output 1 Digital IN1 2 sets the digital output 2 Digital IN6 red switches the red orange LED of the board Digital IN7 green switches the green LED of the board Digital OUTO 1 watches the digital input 1 Digital OUT7 8 watches the digital input 8 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_weecoio Weecoboard LCD IO This plug in is designed to access the Weecoboard LCD by Aptasys Since this is an ARM embedded board only the Linux ARM runtime of
159. INESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE AVAILABILITY PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THE INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THIS WEBSITE EVEN IF THE VENDOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITIES OF SUCH DAMAGES LINKS TO OTHER WEB SITES Links to other web sites are available on the Vendors web site and these links allow you to leave the Vendors web site The linked sites are not under the control of the Vendor the Vendor is not responsible for the contents of any linked site or links within a linked site These links are provided as a convenience only and do not imply any endorsement or recommendation by the Vendor 3 Safety The OpenAPC software package components are designed to control different kind of machinery This machinery may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured The client shall solely be responsible to strictly comply with all applicable and relevant safety regulations regarding installation and operation of the system at any time 10 4 Overview This document describes the full Open Advanced Process Control software package including all existing functionalities options and additional software components Depending on the software variant you really use some of the described features and functionalities
160. M ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE OR MEDIA AND ANY WARRANTIES OF NON INTERFERENCE OR ACCURACY OF INFORMATIONAL CONTENT NO DEALER AGENT OR EMPLOYEE OF THE VENDOR IS AUTHORIZED TO MAKE ANY MODIFICATION EXTENSION OR ADDITION TO THIS WARRANTY Some jurisdictions do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts so the above limitation may not apply to you 8 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL THE VENDOR OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY COSTS OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES LOST PROFITS LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE SALE OF USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE ANY VENDORS PRODUCT OR SERVICE EVEN IF THE VENDOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO CASE SHALL THE VENDOR ITS SUPPLIERS TOTAL LIABILITY EXCEED THE ACTUAL MONEY PAID FOR THE VENDORS PRODUCT OR SERVICE GIVING RISE TO THE LIABILITY Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you The above limitations will not apply in case of personal injury where and to the extent that applicable law requires such liability 9 Export Law Assurances You agree and certi
161. Numeric IN3 MODE defines the speed for axis 2 or controls its movement similar to IN1 Numeric IN4 POS performs a movement with axis 3 similar to INO Numeric IN5 MODE defines the speed for axis 3 or controls its movement similar to IN1 Binary IN7 CTRL input for 2D X and Y or 3D X Y and Z Control data to manage the movement here the related number of axes has to be configured properly The related output OUT7 emits motion synchronous Control data that can be used by a tool for machinery Numeric OUTO POS this output gives the current position of axis 1 during a movement operation it changes permanently Numeric OUT1 MODE this is a state output that emits a O when the drive has stopped or the current speed otherwise Numeric OUT2 POS this is the position output for axis 2 similar to OUTO Numeric OUT3 MODE here the current state of axis 2 is given similar to OUT1 Numeric OUT4 POS this is the position output for axis 3 similar to OUTO Numeric OUTS MODE here the current state of axis 3 is given similar to OUT1 Digital OUT6 BSY this output signals the busy state of the plug in it is set to HIGH as soon as a motion command arrives and is started to be executed and goes back to LOW only in case none of the axes moves and no more motion commands are available this output has to be connected with the BSY input of the plug in that provides the binary motion data Binary OUT7 CTRL
162. OW logging when the value becomes HIGH logging when the value changes 2 Objects that handle numerical data in logging configuration a difference is made for objects that handle whole numbered and floating point values logging when the value is greater than a defined one logging when the value is smaller than a defined one logging when the value is within a defined range logging whenever the value changes 3 Objects that handle texts logging whenever the value changes 5 3 2 1 3 User Privilege HMI Control Properties This panel belongs to the integrated user management functionality and can be used only when this function was activated Here it can be defined if the user element has to become visible and enabled visible and disabled or invisible whenever a user logs in that has granted some special user privileges For details about how to use this user management functionality the user privileges and user data please refer above The user privilege panel itself offers a matrix of visibility states and user privileges where it can be chosen if the element has to be enabled disabled or hidden when a logged in user user has the related privilege granted For easier editing of this matrix below of every row there exists a button Set all which checks all elements of this row and therefore defines the related state for all privileges A check box Select visibility priority dependent at the bottom of this panel gives
163. Open Advanced Process Control Users Manual Version 4 1 c 2008 2015 by OpenAPC Project Group Table Of Contents TOOP Ea A A A a N di 6 2 Legal ISSUCS ss e a le telat hha cuttin ant eins hdres oa als cual AS 7 O SAlGly nts Aen ties loatiasa lites Sa aaa ae aro eet ee ated do canal iat Qed haba lees ad 10 A OVEIVIGW O O sitet cantare tices 11 4 1 The Sottware Structure a 22s cn edie dae iaa e ad eta ad edelet 11 RS SA thot ns ea theta A askew Seay EA wig Aa a tes 12 Ss System Architecture can seed ecsd aa 12 5 2 Creating And Running A Project ee cceceeeeseeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeenaeeeeeetenaaeeeeeseenaeeeeseseeaaeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaa 16 9 3 Usingi the OpenEditO Risa ant Gece edema ete eed de ee tee 16 5 3 1 The Project Configuration 2 cccccciiccceedeeesenceeeessubbncceeeeeseeacedeebebetene desebneccueesebtecseedeseedueeeeeseetees 17 9 321 1 General Project Settings sanaa oan arrer AR Es 17 9 3 1 2 User Privilege Settings urone nianna id A 18 0 97123 User SINO ii encores ES TA R EE mse Gatien diate 18 5 3 2 The HMI Editor of the OpenEditor coccccccccnnnnnnnnnonononcnccccnnnnnnnccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnrrr ninas 18 5 3 2 4 HMI Control Properties a 19 5 3 2 1 1 General HMI Control Properties ccccccccceeecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeacneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 20 5 3 2 1 2 Logging HMI Control Properties ooooooccccnnnncccccnnnnocccccnononanancnnnnnnnnnn cnn nn nnnn nc cnn nnnnnn
164. P no operation It can be used e g for testing specific functionalities to synchronize the order of data flows or to let data flows arrive after each other Char INO char IN7 the input for the values that have to be inverted Char OUTO char OUT7 the inverted values from the related inputs Character Shift Register This flow elements implements a shifting register it stores all data that are set at its data input New values are stored so that they can be read at output 0 Whenever a new value is set all the preceding ones are shifted up by one output number so that the old value from output 0 is now located at output 1 the old one from 1 is located at output 2 and so on The old value from output 7 will be shifted to the overflow output where it is emitted immediately This operation does not require any further definitions 52 Digital INO OUT when this input receives a HIGH signal all the outputs from 0 7 emit the data that are currently stored Digital IN1 RES using this input all the stored data can be reset to their default value an empty string Char IN2 DATA every time new data arrive here the existing ones within the flow element are shifted up by one output position and the new one is stored to be fetched at output 0 at the next OUT signal Char OUTO char OUT7 on an HIGH signal on digital INO here the currently stored output data are emitted Binary NOP This operation does not require an
165. Polygon Style here it can be chosen if the last polygon point and the first one are connected by a line style Closed or not style Open 6 5 4 9 Bezier Curve Creation and parameters of this element are very similar to the polygon described above but it does not generate direct connections between the specified base points but a smooth round Bezier curve This curve uses the given base points as creation hint but does not necessarily cross them Such a Bezier curve consists of a undefined number of base points but requires at least three of them Specifying the position of these base points can be done by left clicking within the drawing area This can be done several times the process of drawing the related curve can be finished by right clicking the mouse After that the positions of the base points still can be modified As long as this element is selected the real position of the base points are marked by blue crosses These crosses can be dragged with the mouse Changing the position of the base points also changes the appearance of the resulting Bezier curve Following parameters are available to modify the parameters of the Bezier curve Line Style the style the polygons lines is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of continuous lines that consist of a number of sub segments which are specified by the parameter Resolution Connected Lines the geometry consists of seve
166. Power the output power in range 0 100 the laser has to be driven with Frequency the frequency in unit Hz the laser has to be driven with the allowed frequency range can be configured within project configuration dialogue Mark Speed the speed of the scanner that is used during marking motion while laser is turned on the allowed speed range can be configured within project configuration dialogue Jump Speed the scanners speed that is used during jumps motion while laser is turned off the allowed speed range can be configured within project configuration dialogue Spot Size the diameter of the lasers spot on the surface this value should be as exact as possible because it is used for different calculations Draw Off Movements this option is related to the visual representation of a project within BeamConstruct only when this option is set not only these parts of the geometry are shown within the drawing area where the laser is turned on but also the jumps where the laser is turned off this option can be helpful to optimise a project Use as default Pen the pen where this option is set for is used as default pen for all newly created geometries More than this whenever a new pen is created the parameters of this pen will be set to the values specified for the default pen Within a project only one pen can be default so whenever this option is selected for a pen it is disabled resetting this
167. ScCciDoSomething is executed whenever the number 99 is received at INO This command is executed using the values set for X IN 1 Y IN2 and TXT IN5 The commands parameters the values at the other inputs than INO have to be set before the command is given Currently following commands are supported by this plug in 1 ScCciTest NAME 2 ScCciShowApp A 3 ScCciGetWorkingArea A 4 ScCciOpticMatrixTranslate X Y A 5 ScCciOpticMatrixRotate X Y A 6 ScCciOpticMatrixScale X Y 7 ScCciOpticMatrixReset 8 ScCciGetOpticMatrix A 9 ScCciSetHead A 10 ScCciGetHead 11 ScCcilsMarking 12 ScCciStopMarking 13 ScCciSwitchLaser EN 14 ScCciMoveAbs X Y A 15 ScCciSetPen A 16 ScCciGetPen 17 ScCciResetSequence 18 ScCciResetCounter 19 ScCciResetSerialNumbers 20 ScCcilncSerialNumbers 21 ScCciDecSerialNumbers 22 ScCciResplitJob 23 ScCciSetMarkFlags A 24 ScCciMarkEntityByName NAME EN 25 ScCciChangeTextByName NAME TXT 26 ScCciGetEntityOutline NAME A 27 ScCciTranslateEntity NAME X Y A 28 ScCciRotateEntity NAME X Y A 29 ScCciScaleEntity NAME X Y A 30 ScCciDeleteEntity NAME 31 ScCciLoadJob TXT 1 EN 1 32 ScCcilmport NAME TXT auto generated extension X A 33 ScCciSaveJob TXT A 34 ScCciNewJob 35 ScCciFitViewToWorkingArea 36 ScCciFitViewToEntities
168. TO the value of the digital input 1 at the board Digital OUT1 the value of the digital input 2 at the board Digital OUT2 the value of the digital input 3 at the board Digital OUT3 the value of the digital input 4 at the board Numeric OUT4 the value of the ADC input 1 Numeric OUT5 the value of the ADC input 2 Numeric OUT6 the value of the ADC input 3 Numeric OUT7 the value of the ADC input 4 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_avr_netio AVR Net 10 serial This plug in can be used to access the AVR Net 10 controller board via its serial interface to set digital outputs and to retrieve the state of digital and analogue inputs Within the configuration panel of the plug in the parameters of the serial interface have to be set together with a polling time that decides how often the plug in has to check for new or changed data Independent from this polling time the outputs of the plug in emit data only in case something has changed on the inputs 64 of the board Digital INO set the digital output 1 at the board Digital IN1 set the digital output 2 at the board Digital IN2 set the digital output 3 at the board Digital IN3 set the digital output 4 at the board Digital IN4 set the digital output 5 at the board Digital IN5 set the digital output 6 at the board Digital IN6 set the digital output 7 at the board Digital IN7 set the digital output 8 at the board Digital OUTO the value of the digi
169. a can be used within a process control environment directly and without the need to deploy the editing software BeamConstruct on the target system Comparing to CNConstruct this application is not only able to generate these data but optionally also to test it and to start laser marking and related motion processes directly out of the application 7 3 Position within the system BeamConstruct is not a vital part of the OpenAPC runtime environment More than this OpenAPC not necessarily requires BeamConstruct main application for proper operation also in case a ControlRoom project is used for processing BeamConstruct generated data This application exists beside the ControlRoom environment and is an additional tool that primarily belongs to construction process not to production So one possible usage cycle is as follows 1 Processing data are created within BeamConstruct that can be done apart the production place e g in an construction office The constructed data are saved or exported The saved or exported data are transferred to the production where an ControlRoom project is running 4 This ControlRoom projects loads the BeamConstruct data and uses it as binary control data internally for processing materials in the desired way Optionally it is possible to perform some additional fine tuning between step 2 and 3 with the generated project files using an other or the same installation of BeamConstruct at the produc
170. a 190 A eceutd ENEAS EEEa ETEA arRo NETE AN EE AA 195 T 6 1 General Pen Settings ci cece a ia acac 195 7 6 1 1 Pen Parameter Wizard ooooooococccccccccnncccccccccncnnnnnnnnononcnconcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnaninnnnns 196 76 2 Scanner Pen Stings viii a NETAN 196 ARE CTI 200 7 6 4 Using Pens for Coloured Bitmap MarkiNQ ccoonoocccnnnncnccccccconnnoncncncnanononcnnnnnnonnncnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 200 7 7 Construction Of Geometry o aneii iaai iaee eee ieee enn non rn rr NANNE AAN ADTEC ESEA 201 TIA The Drawing Ara nastia pennin ENa ERENER ENa 202 FAALT 2D and 3D EGiting i coccion ia tds 203 1 1 2 The Property Tab PaneS 2 cc cecicseuinveeehelen e a eii 203 7 7 2 1 The Tab Pane Of The Currently Selected Element ooonnocccnnnnnnnccccnnnnononccnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 203 1 1 2 2 The Geometry Tab P MO italian rodantes 204 FZS The Element tab PANE a e a a aaa tactil eros lada 204 Lr eA The Layer lab Pane ota on A ete dadaeaans 205 72753 The Element TRECs a aa e a a aa stacayewts cabdabtetalasdantieadgas cabiaedtede aaa 206 1 14 Primary Geometry Elemen S enaa a EE ENEE EEE ES ENAT 206 TCA DOE rarr EA T A 207 CA AZ LMG EAE E E EE E AANE E TEE N EE VE eedtecedeaed 207 CAS TTO a A A piso 207 1144 REaNg Oa e E E AA E 208 AA E E E TE E E E E ananuanyet coerenadeeumabunadys 208 CEEE AE E PEE E E E EEN E EE PE E ENE A 209 AS E gt EEE A E O A EAE AT S O E E E A EA T 210 ELAR A ARTERA ENA TAE E AA EEE LA ESATE ed
171. a a ar da e a a a E 143 145 Oapc thread Sleep dalt E E A A 143ff oape util hreadsl ep acido A E A 145 OTP CLAY teens ieeasesiutrs teeaboteben coatbe E E diated E bd cabeated T 47 113 117f OTD AY O ds aecantibantnn 123 125 OM SPEC ve isticaiethe NO 124 Off Speeds cc Sec eck lr dai ta dt es eh 123 125 162 OM GOLA cia tt vase dele eee a a Dee 47 113 117f On Dela Visitas dia dd desa 123 125 ON PO A A ia Ai 124 ON SPCC A NN 123 125 162 A NN 18 A AA coenesneadscadesautad coeds EAEN ATEEK cucy opbanaghdeve serum nctesueheedeaneuaaedehaviaweerey 18 OM SCFESN MUM PAs wesc ez eek Wiad evan Case nh Gined dence duets Mh a sta AA Cand cages vad da Eaa dade saa Memes 18 OpenAPC Data INPUT hasi ita ida ie a aane na tn eerie 177 219 Ope nDeb gge Fusion le dni 12 16f 28 60 133ff OpenEditOF toca tt a it a ia 12 16 Open HPV h asde haan ll it aleea a Cak 12 137 A E T A A TEE AET a nc Sele E E 12 17 137 OpenPlayeR ai tired 12ff 16f 60 133 135f OPEN UI odiando 12f 16 133 136 155f OPUMIZE ia A A a Searels 183 225 Optris LT PyrTO0 Meteosat ada era 73 DR a id tula Mace eata soe tes Aladin a aca 147 O ct tee aa a OT 147 CW RE O a 29 a a e 192 oa oo a 192 Outer lines rOUNKEO cccoooocccnccccoonncnnncnonononnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnenennnnnnnnnns 175 217 Quterlines straldNt E A A DS ciate an See iis Meh ters 175 217 OUTER Radis Shee teks ta A An 161 190 Output
172. a project may run slightly slower within the OpenDebugger no exact forecast can be made when and where a program flow will be terminated due to that time out That means the related information within the debugger window only gives a rough idea that there could be a problem and where it may appear it is not an exact information to deal with So here it is the best way to modify the program flow definition in a way so that such time outs do not appear any longer 5 4 1 2 Watching the Outputs of Flow Elements Within the watch window flow elements can be listed to inspect their outputs The window consists of a table with eight columns that are equal of the maximum of 8 regular outputs of an flow elements The flow elements itself are listed as rows To add a new column the last row named as Add new element has to be double clicked Now a windows opens where all flow elements of this projects are listed here the flow element to be watched can be chosen Now this element is shown in a new row within the watch table Outputs that are not supported by the selected flow element are displayed in grey all other outputs are displayed using the colour that represents their data type digital numeric character or binary When a flow element is added to the watch window newly the fields of the outputs are empty Only after the flow was started and only after one of the outputs changes its state during operation the new value is displayed within th
173. a taae rhaa ia danian 108 A O a e a aea a ear a AEA 170 210 A A A E 161 190 SMa sass case ON 170 210 ll a A A e a arias 180 183 225 Splitto tiles cai di a 226 Split TOMES AS E AA 228 SPICY W e a r a E a an coped 203 30101 17A A E 218 Spot Size ii A A A A A aa alte eee 195 SOR Trae an a SR ON 148 A E AE A E N a O O 50 a E a eat aa e e E E io a 146 DlACKSCPAMC AAEE E as E EE 24 39 AA 169 209 A at oh cevadned sepsevaucgueatvatenatst anes 210 Bo 2 LAVA A O NN 231 A a ote Manet one 20 AC a e che chic Dot ado tes e ds e Ge 21 23 Stepper Motor Driver Parport cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceenceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecececcccaneaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeeeeeeseesaaaaees 115 Stepper Motor Driver Scannercard esisin enairar ie paaa an DEA ARa AEn EEA EREE aapi aiaiai 117 Steppermotor Cop O ETa a aa a a aaa E a ia a aaa ae reae a a aE 120 SM tt Dd A A A IA ds 151 A AN 226 Ni ii A A A Se AA A na ieee nite eevee 146 Stop image capture during marking OPperatiONS ooonnncccnnnnnncccccnnnnencccnnnonan nc cnn nana n cnn ran 192 Stop image capture ON MOTION OperatiONS oooocccccccncccccnnonnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnmnnnee 192 A A E A NON 148 STRING roisia A AAA a aea a A nee ie AYES 153 SUB a A EE a E DA A IAS atone Hee ay rE a lA 147 UPA OM iii a A A A a rt 193 S PEN SO A ea 193 Support POS aeaa A ei E anda en E even 230 Support Structures heal a A A A aa e eaa eara ee IDA 229 surface
174. a type and therefore can be connected successfully An existing flow connection can be edited afterwards So it is possible to change the position of the flow lines vertical flow lines can be moved in horizontal direction horizontal flow lines can be dragged to be moved to a different vertical position PLEASE NOTE The Flow Editor would also allow it to create data flow loops Such loops exist when a flow starts from the output of an object and is connected with the input of the same object That may be a direct connection or a connection with some additional flow elements in between After such connections could cause endless loops the software tries to detect them during runtime So when a data flow reaches an object where it was started from it sets its value to the input and is terminated afterwards no loop is performed Such problems can be detected within the OpenDebugger there the whole operation can be stopped in case such a problem appears The debugger then will print out an information that points to the element where this data flow was terminated The software in general tries to avoid such possibly endless loops for all flow elements Nevertheless there are conditions where such a loop is required e g when a counter is implemented that counts up or down a value So for several flow elements there is a possibility within the properties dialogue to disable the check for an endless loop That s true e g for mathematical flow elements
175. aAA 160 6 3 Project Configura joto diia iiinod 160 A ad btanasteasd seeded A N penmanneeceneeneeeaes 161 6 41 Generali Pen SCtINGS serie tececseence ia EE E dao 161 6 42 Miscellaneous Pen Settings imita arras dabas 162 6 43 Custom Perm Soling mexicas moe a S K E AEAN 162 GSConstiuchon Or GEOMCthy reie aA AA E AA 162 625 1 The Drawing Area een tii 163 6 5 2 he Property Fab Panes ascii iros ella aaa 164 6 5 2 1 The Tab Pane Of The Currently Selected Element oooocnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnccnnnnniccccncccnnannnnarnn 164 6 5 2 2 The Geometry Tab Fane imiacicna lll A aprobada 164 6 5 2 3 The Element Tab Pane orien E EA A E RA 165 6 5 2 4 The Layer Tab Paion a a cgdeaaadlas 166 65o The Blement Tree arani aaa a ada 166 6 5 4 Primary Geometry Elements 2 ccccceecccccceseesvesceceneedeteaceeesdanheceveedudenataceeduceceeaderdensceecdestensegeeeeends 167 A NO 167 aA N E a e EREA DEE tas Svea decades sz AN A TEE E IEE snes tevanactedealvarnsioeees baat cetaueeiedle 167 0 04 Tane a a a ceases R T a E 168 0 0 4 4 ROCtANG Cisse aan KA E ae e aeaa a a aad 168 AA A N E E EE E E E E A dass 168 SA A ET 169 ANA sate NN 170 EA O 171 6 5 4 9 Bezier Curve A hiatal wee eee ed a aaa eos walt 171 6 5 4 10 Texto ceive cancel mechs Oem A eng iohe le lrae he Gas Sahat ed A Patent Moauhy 172 OA a E Barcode autre i Athan a Path cs A E A 173 09412 Delay O ee an 174 COATI MOON S224 2 68 ies etek ria 174 6 5 5 Additional Geometry Element ee ceccceeec
176. aaees 153 9 0 Usage EKIM Seoni rana a AA EA EAA daft cued eathe RE ie ronca 154 5 7 7 Interlock Server Operation MOdeS oooooococccccccccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnncnnnnnss 154 STel Single Local MOE nr a E E E T AN 154 STe Mirrored Local ModE iia da 154 5 7 7 3 Single Remote Mode wine icia ii dani AAAA 154 5 7 7 4 Redundant Remote Mode ocooccconoocccccconononccccconnoncnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnc nan nn rra nc naar nara ncrnnnnnnnaninn 155 5 8 Using the OpenPlug9EF ooncioioniiiin di skorts coceviced seuuiievhes ATAA ENEAN EA KENAA SEA Ea 155 5 9 Using the User Management FUNCHIONS oooconcoccccnnnnnoccccnononanncnnnnonno no cnn nnnnnn nn rca nr nn rr 156 9 1 Defining User Privileges oraora iiaa ELLO elec 157 9 2 Defining User Dat EE 157 5 9 3 Specifying Visibility States for HMI ObjectS ooooonnoccccnnnnnocccccnnononacccncnnnnoncnnnnnnnrnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 158 5 9 4 Logging In Users During RUNtIME oooocconnnoccccccnononcncncnonannnoncnnnnnnnnnnc nano nnnn cnn anna nan crnnnnnn nan cnnnnnnn 159 5 9 5 Changing User Data During RuUNtiME ooocconoocccccccncoocccncnonennnancnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 159 ON CONS tU ivi A LODO ALEC 160 O O A E E eels eaieeens el aeienenevedrietehey dit esnes Se Ai E E dv agiebheevedettie 160 6 2 Position within the SySteM ooooooccccnnnncccccnnononancncnnonnonncnn conan nn cnn cnn nn cnn aran nn nn rr rra NAE KEENE E rn rra E ATEA
177. according to the values out of the loaded file or according to the values out of the given CSV line here a stream of data is emitted until all lines of a given file are processed an exact timing that would result out of the movement speeds and the position is ignored this has to be handled by the plug in that is responsible for the motion Numeric OUT1 ERR this output emits error codes in case the specified CSV file could not be loaded Digital OUT2 ON whenever the ON state of the tool changes this output emits a new value LOW or HIGH that signals the new state Numeric OUT3 PWR whenever the power value changes this output emits a new value in range 0 100 that signals the new power state Numeric OUT4 FREQ whenever the frequency value changes this output emits a new value that signals the new frequency Numeric OUT5 OFFSPD whenever a new off speed is set this output emits a new value that signals the new speed value Numeric OUT6 ONSPD whenever a new on speed is set this output emits a new value that signals the new speed value Numeric OUT6 PRM here a new value is emitted whenever the parameter changes that was configured for this output within the settings panel of the plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_csv2ctrl E Mail Notification When an event occurs on a system where no user sits in front of it to take notice of it this plug in can be used to send the related information
178. aia 73 Network Transmite a gerne 73 NMEA a aio 66 Non DestructVe iaa o TT 179 221 NO D AE ROA T 147 Number Field sia A A A ac a aa a 22 30 Number ot LiNE Srii NA dai st 176 217 Number OF VECIOFS uti ada 166 205 Numberto BllSaidata A Resale ate ads eae eee 41 Numiberto lt Gharactens id danna la 41 Numberto GMD ValuesPalR sta dto 42 Number to Digital uo a abi 40 NUMBER Cuarta a A id TS 25 NUMERIC Gate aaa rice ah 61 Numeric Shift Registerad en i e A ici 52 Numeric Triggered Gale iii a is 61 Numerical NJAN De oia A A dice eee 52 Numerical NOR a O cael ide Mitt ta ewtiebt T AN tinh 51 Numerical NOT XOR siroa eshte ci 52 Numerical Add iria id dt ti 55 Numerical Couture di she 56 Numerical DIVISION 3 dd td aia 55 Numerical Multiplica A A da 55 Numerica NO Posa a a a leido eta iio 51 Numerical NOM n 51 Numerical Subtraction ic a won od a wok a r nd aerate decd QA abide Rides dace dbvaiehe E a a iE 55 O OAPC CMDERR_ DOESNT EXISTS e e i eaaa i ea EEk eaan adidas iaa 143 OPC SPACE CONNECK iii ia A A A enti iene eee need eaa A Eea 143f oape ispace disco Ci e aa a a a a ias 143 145 cape Space det VAA retina a a aa ade EEAS 143 145 oape ispace recv Callback e a a a E guste retail 143f o pc ispace feqduestal sata Je a dr aa a aaae ei etas 143f cape Space request data r E a a aa a a a aaea 143f oapeispace set Catal ites a a a a aa aa aa us aaa a eaa EA 143ff cape Space set Value a a chad ara a
179. al Only in case a HIGH is given logging in was successful and only in this case all the HMI elements of the current project could be updated to a new state 5 3 3 7 2 20 External Miscellaneous Flow Objects Execute Program With this plug in an external program can be started Within the configuration panel of the plug in up to four applications can be predefined including their command line parameters Please note after the programs that can be defined here depend on the underlying platform it might be necessary to modify a project manually before it is moved to a different system So when a project was created e g on a Windows system and is set up to execute a specific EXE file there the path and the name of this program have to be adapted before the project is put e g to Linux which does not know EXE files That s necessary because the application paths and program names are different on these systems The plug in can handle up to four applications using the four input possibilities of it Nevertheless it is not able to start an application for one of the inputs where the preceding application is already running in this case the second call to start the program will be rejected To avoid such collisions applications have to be used that run in background automatically they have to be configured to go in background or it has to be avoided that it is started while the previous program is still active Within the debugger such a colli
180. al devices Additionally it might be necessary to read some external input to check if some conditions are met After reading of these inputs and the conditional usage of them is similar to what was described within the preceding section the following example will be limited to a simple control that only sets some outputs To describe the working principle imagine a project that has two elements which both are controlled via digital outputs a warning lamp and a motor Both have to be used in a defined sequence First the warning lamp has to be turned on for at least 5 seconds then the motor has to be started for some time Afterwards the motor has to be turned of and in a last step the warning lamp has to be turned of too because the motor is no longer active no user has to be warned about it Here the project within the main application may consist of exactly one flow element that controls two digital outputs DIGIO for the lamp and DIGI1 for the motor Both are mapped to the interlock server so that the server is able to influence the state of the flow element Next an external application is connected to the interlock server This application implements the automatic sequence by setting the data within the interlock servers data space First it writes a HIGH value to the data node within the server that corresponds to the flow element that is able to set the digital outputs Here only DIGIO is set to HIGH DIGI1 is left unchanged so that only the lamp
181. al movement operations Binary OUT7 IN binary data that reflect the state of the digital inputs of this scanner controller card these data are required by some plug ins that need to react on these inputs and there have to be connected to them like the scanner controller stepper motor plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_rtc4 98 SCANLAB R RTC5 Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Beside of that some laser equipment can be damaged in case it is controlled with wrong signals Thus it is highly recommended to check the output generated by this plug in using e g an oscilloscope to avoid problems caused by wrong configurations This should be done prior to putting a system into operation for the first time and prior to putting a system into operation after a software update was installed This plug in can be used to access the SCANLAB RTC5 scanner controller card for controlling a scan head and a connected laser in real time Within the configuration dialogue the plug in and the scanner controller card have to be configured according to the connected devices Basic Use Board Number in case more than only one board is used within the same host computer this value spec
182. alibration dialogue opens For camera calibration following steps have to be performed 1 A black white checkerboard has to be placed in cameras view Such a board can be found e g at http halaser eu checkerboard png Here the board must be visible in cameras live image fully none oft the squares have to be cutted 2 The camera calibration dialogue has to be opened and the boards parameters have to be entered here the number of crossing points between squares the chessboards inner corners not the number of squares itself have to be entered for horizontal and vertical direction 3 The button Try calibration has to be pressed It starts a calibration run where the checkerboards inner corners are searched If this is successful all these crossing points are marked by blue circles and the OK button of the dialogue is enabled 232 4 The dialogue has to be left with OK in order to take over the calibration data Now they can be saved by selecting menu Project Save as default configuration Menu Vision gt Drop Calibration The current calibration data are dropped afterwards the shown camera image is uncalibrated Menu Vision Teach Fiducial Here one or more fiducials can be taught that have to be recognised later This can be done in fiducial teaching dialogue which opens after selecting this menu item This dialogue shows the current probably calibrated image There an area can be marked b
183. all geometry of a given file is processed an exact timing that would result out of the movement speeds and the position is ignored this has to be handled by the plug in that is responsible for the motion This is true for this output as well as for all following outputs they all change their values according to the current conversion state but not according to the timing that results out of the motions that have to be performed Numeric OUT1 ERR this output emits error codes in case the specified CNCP file could not be loaded Binary OUT2 CTRL here additional motion data are emitted that correspond to motion elements used within the currently loaded CNCP file the BSY output of the plug in that receives these control data has to be connected with the BSY input of this plug in Binary OUT3 CTRL here additional motion data are emitted that correspond to motion elements used within the currently loaded CNCP file the BSY output of the plug in that receives these control data has to be connected with the BSY input of this plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_cnco2ctrl Control To Number This plug in accepts control data as input and converts them to numerical output values It simulates the operation that would be done by e g a real motion plug in that controls external drives Thus the generated numerical values not only correspond to the position such a drive would be moved to but also to the speed that movement wo
184. alues can be configured within its properties dialogue The comparison result is emitted every time a new input value is set Char INO A input of the first value of the first comparator that has to be compared Char IN1 B input of the second value of the first comparator that has to be compared Char IN3 A input of the first value of the second comparator that has to be compared Char IN4 B input of the second value of the second comparator that has to be compared Digital OUTO gt this output is set to HIGH when value A of the first comparator is greater than value B Digital OUT1 this output is set to HIGH when value A of the first comparator is identical to value B Digital OUT2 lt this output is set to HIGH when value A of the first comparator is smaller than value B Digital OUT3 gt this output is set to HIGH when value A of the second comparator is greater than value B Digital OUT4 this output is set to HIGH when value A of the second comparator is identical to value B 56 Digital OUTS lt this output is set to HIGH when value A of the second comparator is smaller than value B Character Counter This flow element can be used to count character data events Digital INO RES reset the state of all counters back to 0 Char IN1 lt gt count all texts that are not empty Char IN2 count all texts with a length of 0 empty texts Char IN3 count all charac
185. ameter the locale can be chosen that has to be used for these time information 6 6 Edit Geometry Geometries are mainly generated by Primary Geometry elements Whenever the parameters of such an element are changed the geometry is created completely new and all assigned Additional and Post processing Elements are executed again to apply their modifications to the new geometry Thus modifications that are done for single vectors get lost as soon as such modifications are done Nevertheless it is possible to perform such modifications in case one of the two conditions are met the parameters of the elements that create a geometry are not touched afterwards ageometry is converted to a static one where no Primary or Additional Geometry or no Post processing Element is assigned Functions to edit geometries can be found at two places in menu Edit and its sub menus Non Destructive and Destructive within the main window and within the context menu of the drawing area that opens when an element is selected and the right mouse button is clicked 180 6 6 1 Edit Vectors Editing of one or more separate vectors requires selection of these vectors This can be done within the Coordinates list of the Geometry tab pane when an element is selected Here following functions are available Delete selected Points all selected points are deleted resulting from that the lines between them are removed too Delete selected
186. and grant itself privileges Whenever user data are changed during runtime within this panel the modified data are stored within an own data file This data file is located in application directory the exact location of this directory depends on the used operating system It has the same name like the project file plus an extension rtdat or rtbak PLEASE NOTE user data changed within a HMI running in OpenPlayer are never stored within the original project file but within these special data files So when these files get lost when they are deleted or when the project is moved to an other computer and the files are not copied with it the application goes back to the default user data that have been done within the OpenEditor and that are stored within the project file 160 6 CNConstruct 6 1 Overview CNConstruct is a small but powerful CAD application that can be used to create process data These data can be used together with motion devices like XY tables and tools like milling machines that do the material processing CNConstruct is able to store the generated processing data in different formats that can be used by ControlRoom plug ins directly Thus the generated processing data can be used within a process control environment directly 6 2 Position within the system CNConstruct is not a vital part of the OpenAPC runtime environment More than this OpenAPC not necessarily requires CNConstruct for proper operation also in
187. and 1B 2B Digital IN4 AS i inputs 3B 10B Digital IN5 AS i inputs 11B 18B 63 Digital ING AS i inputs 19B 26B Digital IN7 AS i inputs 27B 31B Digital OUTO AS i outputs 1A 8A Digital OUT1 AS i outputs 9A 16A Digital OUT2 AS i outputs 17A 24A Digital OUT3 AS i outputs 25A 31A and 1B 2B Digital OUT4 AS i outputs 3B 10B Digital OUT5 AS i outputs 11B 18B Digital OUT6 AS i outputs 19B 26B Digital OUT7 AS i outputs 27B 31B This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_asi AVR Net IO Ethernet This plug in can be used to access the AVR Net 10 controller board via network to set digital outputs and to retrieve the state of digital and analogue inputs Within the configuration panel of the plug in the network parameters of the board have to be set together with a polling time that decides how often it has to check for new or changed data Independent from this polling time the outputs of the plug in emit data only in case something has changed on the inputs of the board Digital INO set the digital output 1 at the board Digital IN1 set the digital output 2 at the board Digital IN2 set the digital output 3 at the board Digital IN3 set the digital output 4 at the board Digital IN4 set the digital output 5 at the board Digital IN5 set the digital output 6 at the board Digital IN6 set the digital output 7 at the board Digital IN7 set the digital output 8 at the board Digital OU
188. and can be used within the scope of this function block nodeName STRING the name of the data block the following data belong to 10 s UDINT a bit mask that specifies which digital O s have changed here the bits 16 24 are used char0 char7 STRING variables containing the data of the data block here only these variables contain valid data that are specified by the bit mask of variable IO s MAP_ISx END_ MAP when data of the Interlock Server are accessed via ISxRA LDISx STISx the result can be accessed only via an indirect way or the communication may slow down the execution of the script for a non predictable time Because of that it is also possible to map O s of data blocks directly and asynchronously into the scope of an instruction list script These mapped values are assigned to a variable means whenever the data within the server change the value of the variable changes And whenever the 153 user changes the value of such a variable these modification is sent to the Interlock Server automatically Such a map can be defined in a similar way like variables are defined but additionally the name of the data block has to be specified variable type datablock io Here variable is the name of the defined variable type is the data type of it and datablock is the name of the block e g Toggle_Button_1 io specifies if the input in or the output out of the block has to be rea
189. and processed within the production environment thus only these parts of constructed geometry can be processed that are located within this area Grid Size this is a helper grid that is used and visible within the working area as an array of of points with an distance in X and Y direction as specified here Snap to Grid when this check box is selected all geometry that is drawn or re positioned within the working area automatically snap to a position that is specified by the visual grid this option gives the possibility to position elements very exact Background Colour this option changes the visual representation of the editor and does not have any influence on the generated data it specifies the colour of the background within CNConstruct s drawing area 161 Working Area Border the previously defined working area is shown as rectangle within the drawing area of the application here the colour of this rectangle can be changed similar to the previous option this one also does not influence the generated data Menu item shortcuts the area below of these parameters contains an editor that gives the possibility to edit the shortcuts of CNConstructs menu items On lower left hand side the menu item to be edited can be selected in a tree view Next right beside that tree the new shortcut has to be typed in field New Shortcut and then can be added using button Add The new shortcut is shown in the lis
190. aps can be put together during processing So this functionality can be used to handle big working pieces that e g are moved by a XY table The cutting operation only applies to X Y direction equal to top view An other application is processing on the surface of rings here a special radial mode is supported This mode gives the possibility to cut geometries into segments and to process the whole ring inner or outer side As soon as some geometric elements are grouped together within such an Active Split Group it s behaviour can be modified using the parameters that are available within the property panel of this group Split horizontal splits the grouped geometry along X axis this option can be combined with Split vertical to define two dimensional movements Split distance the split size in horizontal direction Split vertical splits the grouped geometry along Y axis this option can be combined with Split horizontal to define two dimensional movements Split distance the split size in vertical direction Split radial defines a splitting operation onto a ring this option can not be combined with one of the previous splitting direction modes Direction specifies the direction for the rotational splitting here it can be chosen between Horizontal and Vertical the axis that is assigned to this direction has to be aligned properly Diameter the total diameter
191. ar and entity tree can be replaced by own ones too Here two different methods have to be used to replace all of them To replace the toolbar and entity tree images replacement images in PNG format have to be put into to the plug ins location but with different names The base name is always the name of the plug in without extension For the toolbar image a 1 png has to be added to this base name for the entity tree image a 2 png has to be added As an example The images of the barcode plug in have to be replaced It can be found in folder priplugins with the file name libio_pri_barcode dll or libio_pri_barcode so Here two images libio_pri_barcode1 png with a size of 25x25 pixels and libio_pri_barcode2 png with a size of 15x15 pixels have to be put into the same folder After next software start the barcode appears with the new images To replace all other images PNG files with special names have to be placed in folder icons e newprj png for the New symbol openprj png for the Load project symbol saveprj png for the Save project symbol e saveprjas png for the Save project as symbol e quit png for the Quit application symbol e Zzoomin png for the Zoom in symbol e Zoomout png for the Zoom out symbol e Zzoomworkarea png for the Zoom full working area symbol e zoomselected png for the Zoom s
192. are configured to act only when this external trigger appears Char IN1 char IN7 inputs for the texts that have to be converted Digital OUTO OVL the clock overflow signal is emitted whenever an overflow condition appeared during the conversion for outputs that react on the external clock This overflow clock signal e g can be transferred to the CLK input of the next Characters to Digital converter Digital OUT1 digital OUT7 the output signals that are emitted dependent on the input values and the configuration of this object Overflow the text overflow output when the conversion operation did not match the rules defined within the configuration of the flow element so that no digital output signal could be found that belongs to the text at an input this number is sent to the overflow output Together with the OUTO OVL signal both can be used for a next conversion step to check some more conversion conditions Thus several conversion objects can be cascaded in order to implement complex conversion rules Characters to Number With this flow object a conversion from text to digital signals is done that internally is performed as comparison or in case the related configuration option is set by the user as conversion where the software tries to parse the text and to interpret it as number Dependent on the input value specific digital output values are created LOW HIGH or pulse Digital INO CLK the c
193. aring to other markers on this working piece Think about using coloured light which could result in better contrast between fiducial and background 3 Adjust the camera parameters in BeamConstructs hardware settings First of all a monochrome image should be used The Vision system does not make use of colours and would convert the image to monochrome representation in every case So enable grayscale mode in camera plug in and check the points 1 and 2 again 233 7 11 Calibrate the camera as described above Please note in case your camera has a really good lens and does not distort the image this step should be dropped The camera calibration always results in a loss of information and quality and therefore should be avoided when possible Nevertheless a lens distortion is much more worse than this loss of information so this should be dropped only in case of a really good camera Teach the fiducials as described above It is not possible to make any forecast which of the fiducial recognition keypoints has which influence on the recognition result Thus several iterations are necessary here select the fiducial s in teach dialogue remove the unused keypoints accept the result and try recognition with a changed position of the working piece And depending on the results start from the beginning with fiducial selection and keypoint removal Processing Operation To manipulate a loaded project related to the processing operation severa
194. as to be given as parameter and needs to point to an existing file in appropriate file format The element where the data are replaces by this command has to be selected by calling CndSelEntName before CmdSetElemFlag lt name gt Sets a flag to an element that was selected by calling CmdSelEntName before The flag itself is specified by the given name and is activated by this function The name of the flag and it s functionality depends on the type of element that is selected For an overview of available flags please refer to section below CmdResetElemFlag lt name gt Resets a flag of an element that was selected by calling CmdSelEntName before The flag itself is specified by the given name and is deactivated by this function The name of the flag and it s functionality depends on the type of element that is selected For an overview of available flags please refer to section below 7 17 4 1 Element Flags This section describes the flags that are available for the different element types that can be set or reset with commands like CmdSetElemFlag and CmdResetElemFlag 7 17 4 1 1 Scanner Bitmap Element Flags ditherFs bw greyscale these flags are special they can only be set and not reset and only one of them can be set Means when a flag bw is set the two other flags ditherFS and greyscale are automatically reset These flags decide the format of the image which can be either a Floyd Steinberg dithered black a
195. as to be given only in case Ethernet connection is used here a password can be specified in order to identify connection to a controller The same password has to be set within the related E1701 scanner controller When password specified here and password configured at connected controller do not fit to each other connection is closed and plug in is not able to use this controller e Laser type the type of the connected laser the field that was selected here directly corresponds to the laser tab panes where some additional laser specific settings can be done for a detailed description of the available options please refer to the manual of E1701 controller and to the manuals of the laser device vendor e Power output the laser output power can be controlled via an additional output the kind of output to be used can be defined here PLEASE NOTE the possible outputs listed here require specific variants of E1701 scanner card and or specific extension boards which are optional Please refer to E1701 scanner controller manual for details which outputs are available together with wich base and extensionboards Analogue Output Correction Factor this parameter applies to analogue output AO of LP8 Extensionboard only It can be used for analogue output voltages in range 0 5V but requires an external power supply which provides 5V exactly voltages provided via USB are often below of 5V This factor can be used to adjust the output voltage b
196. ase refer to the manuals and specifications of the used lasers The RTC4 scanner controller card plug in can be controlled via its inputs directly by transmitting coordinate values to the X Y and Z inputs or by using the control input where a stream of movement data will be accepted It is recommended not to use both options at the same time or without additional synchronisation The results may be undefined when direct and control stream commands are set at the same time In case the control input is used the BSY output has to be connected with the source of the control data it signalises if the scanner controller card is still working or if it has finished so that other operations can be triggered Following in and outputs are available for the RTC4 plug in Numeric INO X the X position the scanner has to be moved to setting a new value to this input does not cause any movement it will be invoked only after the Y or Z input was set Numeric IN1 Y the Y position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use two axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y Numeric IN2 Z the Z position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use three axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y z Digital IN3 L turns the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR the power the laser has to be driven with here a value in range
197. at an other slow left lick no longer places HMI elements Existing elements can be selected for further editing Elements can be selected by surrounding them with a selection rectangle hold down the left mouse button within the panel and drag it over all elements that have to be selected That selection method works for all kinds of elements For some of the HMI elements there exists a faster way too left clicking it will select and highlight them But please note the left click method does not work for all kinds of HMI elements depending on their type and internal behaviour some of them have to be selected by surrounding them with the selection box When one or more user interface elements are selected they can be edited and modified Now some additional functionalities of the pop up menu are activated Using that menu these elements can be duplicated deleted its properties can be edited and others more A special operation that can be performed at this point is the cut insert function When HMI elements are cut out of the current view they are hold within an internal buffer existing flow connections to and from these elements stay active although they are no longer shown within the Flow Editor Now these elements can be re inserted at a different position or within a different panel using the context menu item Insert As a result of this operation they now are placed at this new position and with a new parent additionally they re appear wi
198. ated and added to the model automatically at positions where an overhang could cause problems These additional geometries are only contours and need to be extended by hatch elements in order to get them filled and stable Here for both contour and hatch suitable pens and related pen parameters have to be choosen in order to not to melt together the support structures and the model s structures Distance to Model here a distance can be specified that always has to be used at positions where the contour of model and support structure are neighbouring within a slice using this distance it can be ensured the support structure can be removed easily after processing When this value is too large the effect of supporting the model may fizzle out Enlarge Structure the value given here can be used to make the support structures larger than necessary in order to overlap the model completely this value has no influence on the distance to the model it expands the support structure to its outer borders Enclose Model Completely normally a support structure is created from bottom to top until it is covered and replaced by parts of the model itself This is done because support structures are created to inhibit negative effects caused by gravity and therefore are no longer necessary when there are stable structures of the model itself Thus at some point there are no more support structures available but only the model When this option is set the
199. ated instead of a rectangle Horizontal distance from first point specifies the side length of the square Within the rectangles property tab pane following options are available Line Style the style the rectangles lines are created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of exactly four points that are connected by four completed lines which form a rectangle Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines connecting the four corners including additional points all these lines are connected and therefore form a closed rectangular shape Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points between the four corners every second line is drawn so that it results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the length of the additional points that form the selected line style 7 7 4 5 Circle This primary element can be used to create circles and arcs Starting point is always a circle that is drawn in two steps the first left mouse click into the drawing area specifies the centre point of it the second one specifies the radius via its distance from the first poi
200. ations that lead to unexpected results or that let error LED turn on 4 stop this operation and close application 5 check out the firmware debug log or send it to HALaser Systems OpenAPC Project Group for further assistance The settings within the axis panels apply for one specific axis only Here different settings for each axis can be given 109 Enable Axis an axis is used and can be moved by this plug in only in case this checkbox is set When plug in has to be used in coordinate mode access via Control input where XY or XYZ position coordinates are sent to it instead of separate axis position data axis 1 and 2 have to be enabled for 2D coordinates X and Y and axis 1 2 and 3 have to be enabled for 3D coordinates X Y and Z Axis Mode an axis can be operated in two modes planar or radial In planar mode it moves over a distance using unit mm in angular mode it moves to an angle in unit degrees Resolution Factor this value has to be used to specify conversion factor from shown position value mm in planar mode degrees in angular mode to incremental position of the used motor depending on its incremental resolution step configuration of used driver and used gearbox Low Limit the lower limit in unit mm is a soft limit specifying the minimum position the axis is allowed to move to in planar mode in case of angular mode this value is ignored PLEASE NOTE when an axis was not referenced yet this limit is useless si
201. ault values when they are created newly Following a description of the available elements the steps to create them within the working area and their parameters are provided 6 5 4 1 Dot This is the most simple element that is possible When it is selected for drawing within the tool bar the first and only click into the drawing area creates a single point at the left clicked position This element does not offer any parameters so there are no input fields available within the element specific tab pane as soon as such a dot is selected Within the options the dot can be configured Style specifies the style of the created point here Dot is a simple one that consists of a single coordinate and has no size or Custom for a dot as configured within the global parameters 6 5 4 2 Line When drawing a line two clicks are necessary within the drawing area the first click specifies the starting position of the line the second one the end position It is not necessary to keep the mouse pressed between these two clicks Drawing functionality can be extended by pressing one of the keys Shift or Ctrl after specifying the starting point of the line first click when Shift is held down a horizontal line is drawn and vertical deviations of current mouse position are ignored When Control is held down a vertical line is drawn and horizontal deviations of current mouse position are ignored After drawing or selecting such a line f
202. ayout that is visible to the end user can be set up the Flow Editor where the logic connections between user interface elements and plug ins can be configured the Plugged Devices list where all these plug ins can be defined and configured that will not run inside the player directly but are handled by the OpenPlugger this list can be used only when parameters of a project are set to use the Interlock Server please refer to General Project Settings below lt can be switched between both editors and the list via the tabs on the upper part of the window Above these tabs there are some tool bar buttons Some of them correspond to menus of the application They can be used for different things like creating a new project loading an existing project saving the current project using the current or a new file name editing and deleting the selected HMI element inspecting the application for errors and possible problems debugging and testing the current project within the OpenDebugger executing the current project within the OpenPlayer These tool bar buttons act on all the HMI and the Flow Editor as well as the Plugged Devices list The same is true for the menus here following additional functionalities can be found Changing the project configuration searching for an element by its name 16 5 3 1 The Project Configuration 5 3 1 1 General Project Settings The menu File Project settings
203. be used at LaserB output e LaserB Length pulse width to be used at LaserB output value has to be smaller than period length of chosen frequency The plug in provides following in and outputs to be used within the Flow Editor of ControlRoom Digital IN3 L can be used to turn the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR controls the laser power Numeric IN5 FREQ controls the laser frequency Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to control the laser Digital OUT6 BSY signals if the plug in is still communicating with the laser HIGH or if it has finished all operations so that other components can start its operation this output has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_lc_e17011 Lyocon LY 001 Scanner Controller WARNING This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Beside of that some laser equipment can be damaged in case it is controlled with wrong signals Thus it is highly recommended to check the output generated by this plug in using e g an oscilloscope to avoid problems caused by wrong configurations This should be done prior to putting a s
204. bility states have to be set to ignore except the one where it has to be enabled It has to be set to state enabled and None of them defines the disabled state for all other possible user privileges 5 9 4 Logging In Users During Runtime After all these definitions have been done as a last step a possibility has to be set up to log in a user during runtime There exists a special flow element that accepts a users login name and a password as input and if both fit to existing user data switches the state of all HMI elements automatically There are no additional operations necessary the user management and HMI element enabling disabling is done fully automatically by this flow element For a full description of this element its inputs and outputs please refer to section Flow Elements above 5 9 5 Changing User Data During Runtime The user data that are set within the OpenEditor are default values that are stored within the main project file To offer a possibility to manage and change users during runtime within the OpenPlayer a special HMI element User Management Panel can be added This panel looks and works exactly like the user management panel that can be found in OpenEditors File menu PLEASE NOTE When such a HMI panel was added to a project it has to be configured to be enabled only for users with a privilege Manage Users in order to avoid that everybody is able to change user data
205. ble Default P the P portion of the controllers calculation algorithm Default the I portion of the controllers calculation algorithm Default D the D portion of the controllers calculation algorithm Minimum Output the minimum value the resulting output may have Maximum Output the maximum value the resulting output is allowed to have Numeric INO SET the actual input value that has to be compared with the reference value Numeric IN1 REF overwrites the default reference value Numeric IN2 P overwrites the controllers pre configure P value 58 Numeric IN3 I overwrites the controllers pre configure value Numeric IN4 D overwrites the controllers pre configure D value Numeric OUTO the resulting output value that has to be set in order to reach the desired reference value This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_pid_controller Rotate Control Parameters This plug in influences the geometry part of binary control data it rotates them by defined angles around X Y or Z axis using a defined 3D coordinate point The related values can be defined as static default within the plug ins configuration panel or they can be set dynamically via the inputs Binary INO CTRL the binary control data that have to be changed by this plug in Numeric IN1 CX X value of the coordinate to be used as rotation centre Numeric IN2 CY Y value of the coordinate to be used as rotatio
206. ble background please refer to description of import functionality Position Size using these input fields the position and displayed size of the captured video can be specified it expects the same coordinate system and orientation like it is used for definition of working area Display image on manual activation only when this option is set the image is not shown all the time it has to be enabled manually and can be disabled afterwards to continue without a live background image this can be done via vision menu or via the image button in mark dialogue Stop image capture on motion operations this option may be useful on systems with limited computing power when it is set capturing of image data is stopped as long as an external axis is driven Stop image capture during marking operations this option may be useful on systems with limited computing power when it is set capturing of image data is stopped as long as marking is in process In tab pane Motion Axes it is possible to configure up to two different motion controllers with up to three independent axes each Both possible motion controllers are identified via names OUT2 and OUT3 which are identically to the outputs of the related BeamConstruct2Control plug in So when a BeamConstruct project is executed out of a ControlRoom environment using this plug in the hardware settings given here are ignored and the motion data are emitted at these plug ins outputs When the motion
207. ble options please refer to the manual of LY 001 controller and to the manuals of the laser device vendor Power output the laser output power can be controlled via an additional output the kind of output to be used can be defined here Number of Axes specifies if the scanner controller has to operate in 2D or 3D mode Correction file a correction file to be used for operation provided by the vendor of the scan head Here several formats are supported by the card directly and can be used without any conversion Stand By Frequency frequency the laser has to be driven with in standby mode depends on selected laser type if applicable this frequency is emitted after initialisation of the plug in Stand By Length pulse length the laser has to be driven with in standby mode depends on selected laser type if applicable this pulse width is used after initialisation of the plug in Field Left Position Field Upper Position defines the upper left coordinate of the field that has to be used by the scanner Field Size the total size of the field that is used by the scanner this parameter together with the left and upper position specifies the coordinates input vectors have to be located within in case there are input data which define a position outside this field they will not be marked Swap X and Y swaps the input X and Y coordinate to exchange X and Y axis values of the scanner Mirror X Mirror Y mirror the i
208. block is called some parameters can be handed over to it CAL print text my text colour 255 thick varl 150 Here in this example three parameters my text 255 and var1 which itself is a variable in the current execution context are handed over its values are stored within three new variables text colour and thick These three new variables exist only within the scope of the called function block they can t be accessed outside of it On the other hand every call to this function has to contain exactly these three variables elsewhere the execution of the function block will fail when one of these variables is used it will be undefined in this case The new variables itself inherit the data type of the given values or variables Similar to these local variables every function block will use its own accumulator means the contents of the current accumulator are not available within the function block and the contents of the accumulator within the function block are not accessible outside of it CALC conditional call of function block similar to CAL if accumulator is TRUE CALCN conditional call of function block similar to CAL if accumulator is FALSE RET return from a function block and jump back to the calling position within the instruction list RETC conditional return from a function block and jump back to the calling position within the instruction list if accumulator is TRUE RETCN
209. bo box an additional output port can be chosen to set the current power value at When this configuration does not fit to the current laser type e g because it uses an other output that can t be used together with the one chosen here this parameter is ignored e Stand By Frequency frequency to be used when laser is turned off usage depends on chosen laser type Stand By Length pulse width to be used when laser is turned off usage depends on chosen laser type has to be smaller than period length of chosen frequency Panel CO2 contains settings that are specific for CO2 laser type e Maximum Duty Cycle this value specifies the duty cycle at which a connected CO2 laser emits maximum power this value is needed to calculate the correct pulse width for the laser when setting the power for it Panel IPG MO Latch contains settings that are specific for IPG and compatible fiber laser types e Master Oscillator Timeout this timeout specifies how long the master oscillator has to stay on after the last laser off command When a 0 sec is given here the master oscillator is turned off immediately Switching on the MO always needs some time so dependent on the application it may worth to keep it on for a longer time to not to toggle it every time the laser is switched Panel Dual contains settings that are specific for lasers that require a second control frequency out of LaserB output e LaserB Frequency frequency to
210. c IN7 data inputs for the OR concatenation Numeric OUT1 numeric OUT7 data outputs that send the values resulting from this operation 51 Numerical NOT XOR Using this flow control several inputs can be Exclusive OR concatenated and the result can be inverted optionally Within the configuration dialogue the inputs that belong to one output and where the values have to be concatenated can be configured The input numbers are treated as 32 bit signed whole numbered values for concatenation so all decimal places will get lost when this operation is performed Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears Numeric IN1 numeric IN7 data inputs for the XOR concatenation Numeric OUT1 numeric OUT7 data outputs that send the values resulting from this operation Numerical N AND Using this flow control several inputs can be AND concatenated and the result can be inverted optionally Within the configuration dialogue the inputs that belong to one output and where the values have to be concatenated can be configured The input numbers are treated as 32 bit signed whole numbered values for concatenation so all decimal places will get lost Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears
211. c INO receives the number where the lower 8 bits have to be converted Digital INO digital IN7 the converted bit pattern Overflow the 8 bits right shifted rest of the input number that can be forwarded to the next converter Number to Characters With this flow object a conversion from numbers to texts is done that internally is performed either as real conversion or as comparison Dependent on the input value specific digital output values are converted to a text that displays the number a text that is created using a format string a static predefined text that is assigned to an output dependent on a specific input value The format string that is used here can consist of a text that can be chosen freely and some place holders The input numbers are put into that text on all positions where these place holders are set They consist of a sign a character d for whole numbers or f for floating point numbers and an additional number in range 1 7 that specifies which input value has to be used So whenever there is a place holder d1 in the text it will be replaced by the number at input 1 a place holder f4 would be replaced by the number at input 4 in floating point representation Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears Numeric IN1 numeric IN7 inputs for t
212. c util thread sleep milliseconds This function is deprecated and will be removed in future software versions so please use oapc thread sleep instead oapc thread sleep milliseconds This is a small helper function that implements a possibility to let the script sleep for a given time in unit milliseconds easily and to let LUA handle the internal messages during that time This function has to be called regularly in order to receive data and to get changed data from the Interlock Server 146 5 7 5 3 Access Via IL Instruction Language Scripts Instruction List is one of the languages supported by the IEC 61131 3 standard It is a low level language designed for programmable logic controllers PLCs The ControlRoom software component offers a special IL Instruction List interpreter that extends the original IEC 61131 language by several functionalities that are useful for accessing the data of the Interlock Server Beside of that some of them make the use of IL easier The IL interpreter iIPLC is a command line utility that runs in background and does not offer any user interface It has to be called with the name of the IL scriptfile as parameter using the command line option e ilPLC f example il This example starts the IL interpreter with the IL script file example il Error messages and warnings are printed to the command line interface where it was started from To get additional information about what is
213. cales the complete job in X Y and Z direction using the values set at the inputs X Y and Z Digital IN MATRIX_TRA translates the current job within the range of the working field using the values that have been set at the inputs X Y and Z before Digital IN CHG_TEXT when a HIGH signal is set at this input the contents of a serial number entity within the currently loaded job are changed the entity that has to be changed is specified by the value set at input ENTITY_NAME the new value it has to be set to is defined by the character input VALUE Digital IN USC_OUTO USC_OUT5 these inputs set the related digital output of the USC scanner card directly and immediately to O or 1 depending on the signal set at these inputs 105 Digital IN GET_USC_IN when this input is set to HIGH a state update for the digital inputs of the USC scanner card is requested the inputs are read and the new state of these inputs is given at the output lines USC_INO USC_IN5 of the macro Digital IN FEB_OUTO USC_OUT7 these inputs set the related digital output of the FEB stand alone option directly and immediately to 0 or 1 depending on the signal set at these inputs Digital IN GET_FEB_IN when this input is set to HIGH a state update for the digital inputs of the FEB stand alone option is requested the inputs are read and the new state of these inputs is given at the output lines FEB_INO FEB_IN7 of the macro Digital OUT CMD_OK this output i
214. can be processed with a repeated pattern on its surface or to repeat the current geometry on a large working piece that itself is re positioned by using an XY table As soon as some geometric elements are grouped together within such an Active Move Group it s behaviour can be modified using the parameters that are available within the property panel of it Move horizontal moves the grouped geometry along X axis this option can be combined with Move vertical to define two dimensional movements Move distance the distance a movement has to be done in horizontal direction between two processing cycles Move steps specifies how often processing of the geometry has to be repeated in horizontal direction Move vertical moves the grouped geometry along Y axis this option can be combined with Move horizontal to define two dimensional movements Move distance the distance a movement has to be done in vertical direction between two processing cycles Move steps specifies how often processing of the geometry has to be repeated in vertical direction Move radial defines a movement operation onto a ring this option can not be combined with one of the previous splitting direction modes Diameter the total diameter of the ring where the geometry has to be marked at Move angle the movement angle for every split the size of the single split pieces result out of this angle and the diameter of the ring Move s
215. can be used whenever a delay is necessary e g to let material become dry let material become colder or whatever This element expects exactly one parameter Delay the delay in unit seconds the full process has to stop 7 7 4 13 Motion This element does not have a visual representation it does not accept any additional data or post processing elements but it can be used to influence the material processing in general The elements of a project are processed in the order they appear within the entity tree At the position where this element is placed additional motion axes apart from the axes of the used scanner can be driven These axes have to be connected with the two additional CTRL outputs of the BeamConstruct to Control plug in within an ControlRoom project that makes use of this BEAMP file The motion can be influenced by the parameters that have to be set for this element First of all up to three axes can be controlled by the element using following parameters Enable specifies if an axis has to be changed by the following parameters or if it has to be left untouched axes that are not enabled stay at their current position Position the new position to move the axis to Speed the speed for the movement to the given position Relative defines a non absolute movement means the axis does not drive to the given position but changes it current position by the given distance Stop Axis
216. case a damage to the computer hardware is possible 115 And as last the used operating system and its capabilities are the bottleneck So depending on which system the software is running at and depending on the available computing power the connected axes may run more or less smooth Here e g recent Linux operating systems will work better because they have more real time like capabilities than other desktop systems The plug in is able to control up to three axes via two output signals Step and Direction These axes will operate sequentially two or more axes will not move at the same time This is also a tribute to the missing real time capabilities of a standard desktop system As global parameter only the port address of the parallel port has to be configured For every of the up to three axes some additional parameters need to be set Factor specifies a factor that is used to calculate a metric value in millimetres out of the drive internal position information that is given in unit increments the exact factor depends on your hardware set up and the gear you are using Low Limit specifies the lower limit in unit millimetres where the axis is allowed to move to at minimum High Limit specifies the upper limit in unit millimetres where the drive is allowed to move to at maximum Acceleration a value that specifies how smooth the drive should start its movements Deceleration a value that spec
217. case two dimensional motion is defined both process order selections are combined with each other to describe the 2D motion Motion speed the movement speed in unit mm sec or degrees sec that is applied to the motion between the splits Overlap splits here an as a percentage value can be set that specifies how much the pieces should overlap means how much of the geometry should exists twice so that it is processed two times at the areas of intersection Try split between pieces here the splitting algorithm tries to find empty spaces between geometries to avoid cutting of lines in case this option is set the specified split distance or split angle is used as maximum value a cut is set wherever space between geometries is found or latest after the given split distance split angle In last case cutting of lines is still done So in this mode split distance split angle define the maximum size of a resulting piece while the real distances where the geometry are cut can be smaller than this Axis mapping at the lower end of the property panel a matrix of radio buttons exists where the axes can be mapped to the related movements there it can be specified which of the axes A B or C of the two possible outputs OUT2 and OUT3 have to provide the related planar movements in horizontal or vertical direction or the angular movement Later when such a project has to be used within a ControlRoom project is has to be made sure the outputs OUT2 and OUT3
218. cessing operations in an easy way within a comfortable WYSIWYG environment projects created using CNConstruct can be integrated seamless into a ControlRoom process control project BeamConstruct is a CAD type application similar to CNConstruct but specialised for laser based processing and for all kinds of laser marking operations welding cutting engraving surface cleaning and processing such laser marking projects can be executed out of BeamConstruct directly or they can be added to a ControlRoom process control project to integrated them into an existing HMI solution 11 5 ControlRoom The ControlRoom component of the OpenAPC software package can be used to create HMI human machine interfaces and to define process control applications It consists of several parts the open editor named OpenEditor not available for all target systems that can be used to set up a new project and to edit existing ones the open debugger named OpenDebugger not available for all target systems that can be used to execute a project created with the OpenEditor this debugger offers possibilities to analyse the flow of data and to test proper function of an OpenAPC project the open player named OpenPlayer that is used on the target system in order to execute a project created with the OpenEditor the special player variant OpenHPlayer that is able to execute projects without any HMI part here the defined f
219. ch angle for several elements that are concatenated together within a group Hatch Distance this is the distance that is kept between the hatching lines for the zig zag hatching mode it applies to the ends of the lines Hatch Offset normally hatching starts at the border of a polygon this parameter allows to specify an offset in positive and negative direction to modify the position where hatching really starts Number of Lines this input field is activated only when lines hatch styles are used it specifies the maximum number of inner or outer lines to be calculated when this value is smaller than the number of inner lines required to fill a geometry completely inner part of the element will contain a non hatched hole Interleave Lines when this parameter comes with a value greater than 1 hatch lines are not marked one after an other but by dropping that number of lines after each that is specified by this parameter The remaining lines then are marked in additional cycles skipping the same number of lines in between This mode slows down marking process caused by many additional jumps but gives the possibility to let the material not heat up too much This can be useful in case of temperature sensitive materials there the currently marked areas get some time to cool down until the lines in their direct neighbourhood are processed As an example instead of marking lines 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 with an interleav
220. ch define a position outside this field they will not be marked Swap X and Y swaps the input X and Y coordinate to exchange X and Y axis values of the scanner 95 Mirror X Mirror Y mirror the input coordinates On the fly factor X On the fly factor Y specifies the factor in X or Y direction for marking on the fly operation this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card Default Here several default parameters can be defined that are used when the direct axis control inputs X Y and Z are used or when control data are used that do not contain motion speed delay information Jump Speed the speed the position has to be changed with when the laser is turned off Mark Speed the speed the position has to be changed with when the laser is turned on Laser Off Delay Laser On Delay Jump Delay Mark Delay Polygon Delay these delays are used during marking operation they become active when the laser is turned off or on when the scanner jumps to an other position when it moves to an other position while marking or when the movement direction is changed during marking for a detailed description of these values their usage and their influence to the marking result please refer to the RTC3 manual All following tab panes contain laser specific definitions that are used depending on the selected laser type For information about these parameters and their usage please ref
221. ch line depending on the previous hatch line the pattern is kept continuous Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the length of the additional points that form the selected line style Hatch Style the hatching mode depending on the selection made here a different pattern is used to fill a polygon Lines forward filling is done with parallel lines that go all into the same direction Lines forward backward the polygon is filled with parallel lines that change their direction Connected lines this mode extends the previous one here the parallel lines are connected and form some kind of waved lines Zig zag these lines are no longer parallel they exchange their direction alternative and are connected at their ends directly Inner lines this mode repeats the outline of the hatched polygon in its inner side as often as it fits with the chosen hatch distance Outer lines straight this mode is similar to Inner lines but not a plain hatch mode that can be used to really filla geometry It repeats the outline of the hatched polygon on its outer side as often as specified by the value given in field Number of Lines At corner points wher
222. changed here the lower 8 bits bits 0 7 are used digiO digi7 BOOL variables containing the data of the data block here only these variables contain valid data that are specified by the bit mask of variable I0 s isX_cb_num_data this is also a callback function that has to be defined explicitly within an IL script As soon as a Interlock Server connection is established that belongs to the number x this function block is called automatically whenever numeric data within the servers data space change or when all data are retrieved from the server using command ISxRA When this function block is called following local variables are created and can be used here nodeName STRING the name of the data block the following data belong to 10 s UDINT a bit mask that specifies which digital lO s have changed here the bits 8 15 are used numo num7 LREAL variables containing the data of the data block here only these variables contain valid data that are specified by the bit mask of variable IO s isX_cb_ char data a reserved function block name that can be used as callback function as soon as a Interlock Server connection is established that belongs to the number x this function block is called automatically whenever text data within the servers data space change or when all data are retrieved from the server using command ISxRA When this function block is called following local variables are created
223. cified by this number nothing is done Numeric IN5 DIS disable the tab with the number that is sent to this input here other tabs than only the first one can be accessed if no tab is available at the position specified by this number nothing is done 5 3 3 7 1 8 Flow Objects of Miscellaneous type HMI Elements User Management Panel This is a complex HMI element that can be used together with the internal user management functionality Therefore this element can be added to an HMI only when the user management is used and enabled The panel itself offers the same functionality like the user management dialogue within the OpenEditor but it gives the possibility to offer these functionalities to an end user that operates an HMI within the player So within this HMI element users can be added deleted and edited in the same way like it can be done within the OpenEditor This panel itself does not offer any in or outputs except the two standard digital 1O s O for the selection state of the element All other data are handled internally Digital INO set the selection mode for the whole user management panel and apply the parameters according to the configuration done for the two possible input states LOW and HIGH Digital OUT the through connection of the selection mode input This HMI element can exist exactly once within a project 5 3 3 7 2 Stand Alone Flow Objects For flow objects that do not correspond to a visual representation wi
224. cified distance Binary OUTO CTRL the modified binary control data 5 3 3 7 2 7 Flow Control Flow Objects Initial Flow Start This is a flow element that is executed exactly once at the beginning Whenever a project is loaded and started all elements of this type are executed and the values that are configured for them are sent out So because it is a starting point that can t depend from any other condition it does not use any inputs Digital OUT1 digital OUT2 digital constants that are sent Numeric OUT3 numeric OUT4 numeric constants that are sent Char OUT3 char OUT4 text values that are sent 59 Timer Comparing to the preceding one this is a flow element that is executed periodically Within its configuration dialogue the values can be configured that are sent repeatedly and the time after which these values have to be sent can be configured PLEASE NOTE comparing to the input poll cycle time of some external plug ins this timer value does NOT depend on the projects global cycle time it can have a smaller resolution PLEASE ALSO NOTE Within the OpenDebugger this element may behave not exactly as expected When the program flow is stopped there or when it is executed in single step mode the time configured here may cause different results than in the OpenPlayer due to the fact that a stopped or single stepped flow has a different timing in general Digital OUT1 digital OUT2 digital values that are sent per
225. command name can be assigned for every input The values that are received at this input will be combined with that name to the pair of command and value Char INO Char IN7 the inputs for the values that have to be combined with the command name Char OUTO CMD the output for the command whenever an value is set to an input an command is emitted here as specified within the configuration Char OUT1 the output for the value that is assigned to the command whenever an value is set to an input an command is emitted together with this value Binary to CMD Value Pair With this element digital data can be converted to CMD Value pairs Within the configuration of the flow element a name can be assigned for every input The values that are received at this input will be combined with that commands name to the pair of command and value Binary INO Binary IN7 the inputs for the values that have to be combined with the command name Char OUTO CMD the output for the command whenever an value is set to an input an command is emitted here as specified within the configuration Binary OUT1 the output for the value that is assigned to the command whenever an value is set to an input an command is emitted together with this value CMD Value Pair to Binary This element performs the conversion back from Command Value pairs to plain binary data blocks Within the configuration of the flow element a name can be assigned for every inp
226. completed successfully the dialogues mark buttons can be used afterwards It provides a button for starting the pilot laser requires fully configured pilot laser outputs in project settings on the left side of the dialogue a mark button in the middle that starts the main laser and a stop button on the right side that stops the main or pilot laser Below of them some options can be found that influence the marking operation e Mark repeatedly starts an infinite loop as soon as the mark button is pressed the current geometry is marked again and again until the stop button is pressed e Mark selected elements when this option is set only these parts of a project are marked that are selected within the Entity Tree and highlighted within the drawing area Additional marking related functionalities are arranged in separate tab panes that are grouped according to the functionality they contain Tab pane Pilot Laser contains functions for accessing the previoew pilot laser that can be started by the upper left mark button e Mode this combo box gives the possibility to choose the pilot laser marking mode Off disables usage of the pilot laser Manual expects that the user starts the pilot laser manually by pressing the big pilot laser button on the windows upper left hand side and Auto re starts the pilot laser after every marking process automatically Also in mode Auto the pilot laser has to be started manually for
227. configure the pin number of the digital output port configured with previous parameter within a ControlRoom environment here always Digital OUT6 is used e Stop Process on Temeprature Deviation gt 10 this parameter is working within BeamConstruct only when this option is set a running marking process is stopped when the temperature is more than 10 above the limit specified by Upper Tempearature parameter the process is continued only when temperature falls below the Upper Temeperature value When this plug in is used within BeamConstruct the pen parameters are extended by an additional tab pane Heating that offers some parameters that can be set to individual values for each pen During marking these related values are sent to the plug in whenever then pen changes e Lower Temperature a temperature which is used to turn on an external device like a heater when measured temperature falls below of the limit specified here the device is turned on Upper Temperature a temperature which is used to turn off an external device when measured temperature rises above the limit specified here Within a ControlRoom environment following IO s can be used Numeric INO L to specify a new lower temperature that overrides the default value specified in settings Numeric IN1 H to specify a new upper temperature that overrides the default value specified in settings Numeric OUTO CURR the current temperature measured with the p
228. creen this parameter has to be followed by the custom Y position in unit pixels this value is mandatory and is the full path to the ControlRoom project file apcp file that has to be executed 136 5 6 Using the OpenHPlayer The OpenHPlayer is a special execution environment for a ControlRoom project that can be used on the target system instead of the standard OpenPlayer This specific player variant has to be executed with the project file name and path given as parameter too but it is not able to display a window or any HMI elements When a project contains HMI elements they are ignored Beside this the OpenHPlayer behaves exactly as the standard OpenPlayer it starts the flows contained within a project automatically Within the ControlRoom software package no specific mechanism is provided to automatically execute the OpenHPlayer together with a project file That has to be done manually once the project works properly and the system has to be set up for the end user From the OpenHPlayer s point of view this configuration is simple the one and only parameter required by the OpenHPlayer is the full path to the project file that has to be loaded and executed So dependent on the operating systems capabilities a call that starts the OpenHPlayer using that parameter has to be added at a position that is intended to be used for auto starting applications after the system is booted This of course should be done after all elements are loaded
229. cted that corresponds to the as a percentage laser power value Numeric IN5 FREQ the frequency in unit Hz the laser has to be driven with during marking when the laser is turned on Numeric IN6 CMD this input can be used to set additional commands and to perform additional control operations using them following commands are supported 0 stop marking immediately and flush the list of control commands that may be already stored within the plug in 1 auto calibration command turn auto calibration on and perform referencing for head 1 2 auto calibration command turn auto calibration on and perform referencing for head 2 5 auto calibration command perform calibration at head 1 6 auto calibration command perform calibration at head 2 9 turn auto calibration off for head 1 10 turn auto calibration off for head 2 Please note the auto calibration commands depend on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card and the used scan head Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to move the scanner and to control the laser such a stream can contain complex marking operation 96 Digital OUT6 BSY signals if marking is still active HIGH or if the scanner controller card has finished all operations this input has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data it is necessary to synchronize severa
230. ctures below Laser Off Delay Burn in point at the end of a mark Last part of a mark vector before See pictures vector and before the next jump a jump vector is not marked below vector Jump Delay Mark time is longer than Geometry is damaged at the end necessary of jump transient oscillation Mark Delay Mark time is longer than The end of a vector is turned See picture necessary towards the direction of the below following jump vector In Polygon Delay Burn in points at the corners The corners of the polygon are not sharp but rounded and at wrong position 198 Laser on delay is too short laser is switched on too early while mirrors are still slow or accelerating thus it fires on the same position for a too long time which results in burn in points Y Laser on delay is too long laser is turned on too late while scanhead already started marking of the next vector thus parts of the mark geometry are missing at the beginning Laser off delay is too short laser is turned off before the end off the current mark vector is reached thus parts of the mark geometry are missing at the end 199 Laser off delay is too long laser is turned off too late while end point of the vector is already reached and mirrors of the scanhead slow down this results in burn in points at the end of the mark vectors Mark delay too short motion of next jump vector is started too early and before end position of previ
231. currently shown and used slice can be selected and it can be used to scroll through the sliced model The same is true for the input field below of that slider there a number of the current slice can be entered or chosen Such a Sliced 3D Mesh Group is shown as a group element with one sub element for every slice within the element tree on the windows right hand side Comparing to other groups it behaves a bit different So it is possible to put new elements like a motion control element or I O elements into that group directly To do that either the group node itself or one of its slices has to be selected and the Primary Element to be added has to be chosen within the tool bar Now a dialogue is opened where the user can select if that element has to be added as a single one only below of every slice or for a range of slices This way it is possible to set motion controlling elements for every slice easily More than this all elements that are added via such a range will belong together afterwards whenever a parameter of one of the elements is changed the parameters of all others that belong to the same range and therefore have the same number in its name are modified too The same is true for Additional Elements when there is a hatch added to a single slice the user can choose to apply it to a range of slices or to all slices When the parameter of one of these hatches is changed the change is applied to all the other hatches that have been cr
232. custom control values 6 5 Construction Of Geometry Comparing to other CAD applications that offer basic primitives with huge amount of options and parameters the concept of CNConstruct is different It offers several basic primitives like lines circles and others that contain only as less parameters as necessary To get a wide range of effects and complex geometries these basic data can be combined with other elements that add new data to them or that modify and manipulate them Thus several simple and easy to understand elements can be put together to complex geometries 163 CNConstruct offers following element types that can be used for these combinations Primary Geometry such an element is always the starting point and offers a basic primitive geometric element like a rectangle triangle text or others like this this element can be combined with several other elements like Additional Geometry this elements uses a previously defined geometry and adds some more geometry to it Post processing Tool this element modifies existing geometry Input Element here a indirect influence to existing geometries is possible this kind of element gets data from an external source and inputs it to Primary Geometry elements that can use these data for their own geometry like the text or barcode element Following rules apply to these elements aPrimary Geometry element can have several child elements but none of
233. d Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance this parameter decides how long the resulting lines of the chosen line style have to be it is not valid for the continuous line style where the length would be always equal to the circumference Radius the radius of the circle Segments here it can be chosen how much segments the circle has to consist of this parameter influences the accuracy of the resulting circle for the line style Dashed Arcs it influences the smoothness of the resulting arcs while the Distance parameter influences their length Start Angle and End Angle these two parameters can be used to change the circles starting and end angle it can be used to draw arcs in case the resulting total angle is smaller than 360 degrees or to let a circle be drawn several times in case the resulting total angle is a multiple of 360 degrees Draw CCW normally the circle has an clockwise orientation means it is drawn to right direction when this check box is set the drawing direction is reversed 6 5 4 6 Star This element is a special variant of a circle it consists of two radii where every second point the element consists of belongs to an other radius Resulting from that stars can be drawn and modified by its parameters Such a star is drawn in two steps the first left mouse
234. d point of this line using its parameter Orientation its orientation and therefore its direction can be flipped additional configuration parameters give the possibility to define the thickness of this line and to specify special geometry for each of its ending point like squares or circles and their size Text Label this is a plain text which can be placed within the HMI for describing and naming purposes Ellipsis an ellipsis where the width and height defines its X and Y radius the line width can be set within its configuration Frame a not filled rectangle parallel to the X axis where the width and height defines its size the line width can be set within its configuration Image a picture that is displayed at the specified position within the interface here as additional parameter the path to the picture file can be given When a path to such an external image is specified this image can be embedded directly into the project file to avoid external dependencies and complications with paths that may not exist on target system To do that the check box Embed into project has to be selected A picture that is displayed at the specified position within the interface here as additional parameter the path to the picture file can be given Other elements that might be listed within the same sub menu are provided by external plug ins 5 3 2 2 4 Containers Following HMI elements of type Container are supported by th
235. d a string or a variable of type STRING has to be given that specifies the name of the data block here a node name in format datablock io has to be given Within that name datablock is the name of the block e g Toggle_Button_1 io specifies if the input in or the output out of the block has to be read and defines the number of the IO in range 0 7 PLEASE NOTE this command uses a network connection In case of a broken or bad connection it may need several seconds until the command returns and the script continues Beside of that the time this command needs until it finishes is not defined in general So it is not recommended to use this command in productive environments but only for testing For an alternative method of accessing data of the interlock server please refer to the description of the MAP_ISx END_ MAP statements below STISx stores the value of the accumulator into the Interlock Server afterwards the content of the accumulator is a BOOL value that specifies if this command could be executed successfully As operand a string or a variable of type STRING has to b e given that specifies the name of the data block here a node name in style datablock io has to be used Within that name datablock is the name of the block e g Toggle_Button_1 io specifies if the input in or the output out of the block has to be read and defines the number of the IO in range 0 7 The data type of the accumulato
236. d and defines the number of the IO in range 0 7 So as an example a definition level INT Level Control out 3 would assign a variable level which is of type INT to the data block named Level Control From this data block the output number three equal to the fourth output is mapped to this variable PLEASE NOTE the data type defined within the instruction list and the data type of the data blocks lO within the interlock server have to fit If they do not the variable is not set So for a digital input or output a variable of type BOOL has to be defined for a character I O a variable of type STRING has to be set as well as for a numeric I O one of the number data types from USINT to LREAL need to be used 5 7 5 3 5 Supported Data Types The following data type identifiers can be used within VAR_GLOBAL VAR_LOCAL and MAP_1Sx statements to set a type for a variable that is defined there The type specifies the allowed range and the purpose of this variable Please note there are also IL commands available with the same name which can be used to cast the contents of the accumulator to a different data type Here the usage context decides how a mnemonic is used when it is called within the executable part of a script it is an active statement that causes a modification to the accumulator Only when they are used within VAR_ or MAP blocks they define the data type of a variable and do not modify the accumulator USINT whole
237. d and value Digital INO Digital IN7 the inputs for the values that have to be combined with the command name Char OUTO CMD the output for the command whenever an value is set to an input an command is emitted here as specified within the configuration Digi OUT1 the output for the value that is assigned to the command whenever an value is set to an input an command is emitted together with this value CMD Value Pair to Digital This element performs the conversion back from Command Value pairs to plain values Within the configuration of the flow element a name can be assigned for every input When a command is sent into this flow element that is identical to this name the value is emitted at the related output Char INO CMD the input for the command here the command name that is assigned to the value is expected Digi IN1 the input for the value that is assigned to the command Digital OUTO Digital OUT7 the outputs for the values that could be identified by the configured command when the string that is set to Char INO could not be found within the configuration of the flow element nothing is output here Number to Digital With this flow object a conversion from numbers to digital signals is done that internally is performed as comparison Dependent on the input value specific digital output values are created LOW HIGH or pulse 40 Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these
238. d line style Bezier Style here it can be chosen if the last polygon point and the first one are connected by a line style Closed or not style Open Resolution this parameter specifies the smoothness of the Bezier line the bigger it is the more sub 212 lines are used to create such a curve the more smooth it becomes and the more resources are used for it 7 7 4 10 Text This primary geometry can be used to draw some text using an existing true type font This element accepts static texts or dynamic values that can be set via an Input Element When such a project is moved from one computer to an other or from one operating system to an other it has to be made sure a used font is available on the other system too Otherwise the application tries to find a similar font which might be only somehow similar but exact positions sizes and outlines may be got lost in such a case Drawing such a text is quite easy only one single click into the drawing area is necessary to specify the position of the text there a new geometry is set using a default text This text can be changed together with some other parameters Line Style the style the lines the text consists of is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of closed connected lines with as less as possible points Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points all these lines are con
239. d not be opened 3 the file could not be read 4 the end of the file was reached no more data are available 5 no file name was specified Char OUT2 DATA2 the next text line out of file 2 Numeric OUT3 ERR2 when the end of the file 2 was reached or when an error occurred no text is emitted but the related error code is given here Char OUT4 DATA3 the next text line out of file 3 Numeric OUT5 ERR3 when the end of the file 3 was reached or when an error occurred no text is emitted but the related error code is given here 127 Char OUT6 DATA4 the next text line out of file 4 Numeric OUT7 ERR4 when the end of the file 4 was reached or when an error occurred no text is emitted but the related error code is given here This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_loadtxt MySQL Access With this plug in it is possible to communicate with a MySQL database server to send data to a database and to retrieve data out of it Within the configuration panel the IP and port number of the server the user name and password and the name of the database have to be specified Char INO QUER this input has to be used for SQL statements where no response is expected statements that set data like INSERT or UPDATE Char IN1 REQ this input has to be used for SQL statements that may cause a response statements that request data like SELECT Char OUT1 RES the result of a request to input 1 th
240. d only in case a command input is set when values are set that do not invoke a command to the scanner card CMD_OK is not used Char OUT ERROR the plain error text that is returned by SAMLight in case a command could not be executed successfully Numeric OUT NUM_ENTITIES this output is used together with the GET_ENTITI command input and returns the number of entities that are used by the current job Char OUT ENTITY_NAMES this output is used together with the GET_ENTITI command input and returns the names of the entities that are used by the current job Digital OUT USC_INO USC_IN5 the state of the digital inputs of the USC scanner card these inputs are updated every time the input GET_USC_IN of this macro is set Binary OUT SCREEN this output gives raw image data containing a screen shot of SAMLight s View2D SCAPS FEB Controller Using this macro it is possible to implement a connection and communication with the FEB stand alone option of the SCAPS scanner cards Internally this macro uses the SCAPS R FEB plug in As a first step this plug in has to be set up here the used serial parameters have to be configured including the name of the used serial port The macro itself gives access to most of the commands supported by the plug in via its lO s Numeric IN X input parameter for X coordinates as it is used by several commands this input only sets a parameter for later use it does not invoke a command Numeric IN Y
241. d to disk the file is written using the current default file name 2 as soon as binary data arrive at this input Char IN3 FILE2 overwrites the default file name 2 Binary IN4 IMG3 the binary image data that have to be saved to disk the file is written using the current default file name 3 as soon as binary data arrive at this input Char IN5 FILE3 overwrites the default file name 3 Binary IN6 IMG4 the binary image data that have to be saved to disk the file is written using the current default file name 3 as soon as binary data arrive at this input Char IN7 FILE4 overwrites the default file name 4 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_saveimg Save Text This plug in behaves a bit different than the other file operations Here the data are not written once instead of it this plug in opens a file and writes all text data into this file line by line as soon as it gets them The Save Text plug in can handle up to four independent streams that save data into four separate files Within the global configuration panel default names for these four files can be set This plug in can be used e g to save logging information to disk as they are created by the application internal log functionalities PLEASE NOTE when the project is moved to a different platform or system it has to be made sure that the default paths given for the text files are still valid Char INO TXT1 whenever a new text is send
242. d to the BSY input 108 of plug in that is used to generate the control data This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_Ic_spi 5 3 3 7 2 14 Motion Flow Objects There exist no application internal flow elements of this type all motion related functionalities are provided by external plug ins 5 3 3 7 2 15 External Motion Flow Objects 5 3 3 7 2 15 External Motion Flow Objects HALaser E1701M Stepper Motor Controller Using this plug in up to three axes of E1701M stepper motor controller by HALaser Systems OpenAPC Project Group can be accessed These axes can be moved independently or synchronously via the control input In second case it is possible to perform flat linear X Y movements or three dimensional X Y Z movements It can be used e g together with an XY Table and a tool for machining purposes The controller can be accessed either via USB serial interface or via Ethernet Within the configuration panels of the plug in there are two major set up possibilities The first panel provides general settings and parameters that apply to the plug in and controller globally e IP or Serial Interface here it has to be configured how and where the controller is accessible In case of Ethernet connection the IP in style aaa bbb ccc ddd has to be entered here in case of USB connection the name of the serial interface has to be given COMx for Windows dev ttyACMx for Linux where x is the number of the serial interface the con
243. da 249 8 4 Correct Single and Multiple Points Dialogue ooooococcnnnncccccnnnncconcccnnnnnonncnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnn nn cnn cnnnnrncnana nano 249 g Spatial Correction Dialogue oia oi 250 8 6GorrCorrect COOKBOOK a r ti tidad 250 1 Copyright This document is by OpenAPC Project Group OpenAPC ControlRoom CNConstruct and BeamConstruct are registered trademarks Other software described here that not belong to the OpenAPC software package is O and TM by their respective owners Fedora RedHat RedHat Enterprise Linux RHEL are copyright trademarks legal trademarks of Red Hat Inc Linux is a trademark legal trademark of Linus Torvalds Ubuntu is copyright trademark legal trademark of Canonical Microsoft Windows the Windows logo are copyright trademarks legal trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Panasonic and Minas are copyright trademarks legal trademarks of Matsushita MDrive and MDrive are copyright trademarks legal trademarks of Schneider Electronic MySQL is copyright trademark legal trademark of Oracle Isel and Isel Wafer Handler Robot are copyright trademarks legal trademarks of Isel JoyWarrior is copyright trademark legal trademark of Code Mercenaries Hard and Software GmbH SCAPS SAM CCI FEB and USC are copyright trademarks legal trademarks of SCAPS GmbH SCANLAB RTC RTC3 RTC4 RTC5 RTCscanalone and others are copyright trademarks legal trademarks of SCANLAB AG SiR
244. defines in which order the grouped geometry have to be repeated Left to right horizontal direction always starts from left Right to left horizontal direction always starts from right Zig zag from left horizontal direction starts from left and performs zig zag movements Zig zag from right horizontal direction starts from right and performs zig zag movements Top to bottom vertical movement starts from top Bottom to top vertical movement starts from bottom In case two dimensional motion is defined both process order selections are combined with each other to describe the 2D motion Motion speed the movement speed in unit mm sec or degrees sec that is applied to the motion Axis mapping at the lower end of the property panel a matrix of radio buttons exists where the axes can be mapped to the related movements there it can be specified which of the axes A B or C of the two possible outputs OUT2 and OUTS have to provide the related planar movements in horizontal or vertical direction or the angular movement Later when such a project has to be used within a ControlRoom project is has to be made sure the outputs OUT2 and OUT3 of the BeamConstruct to Control plug in are connected with the correct motion plug in Within these motion plug ins the related axes have to be configured correctly planar or rotational mode and they have to access the correct axes that belong to the defined motion modes After such a splitting
245. dent from their shape and independent from the distance information of the used font To create radial text this element can be combined with the Curve Post Processing Tool please refer below 6 5 4 11 Barcode Using this function several types of 1D and 2D barcodes can be created This element accepts static data for creating a barcode or dynamic values that can be set via an Input Element The size of the created barcode can be defined freely When creating this element a rectangle is drawn exactly in the same way like it is done for the Rectangle Primary Element This rectangle describes the outline of the barcode For some barcode types that use a fixed aspect ratio between width and height the predefined outline is modified automatically The complete layout and structure of the barcode is defined via the parameters that can be set within the elements tab pane Data the text or numeric data that are encoded within the barcode here it depends on the chosen barcode type if and which characters numbers or combinations of them are allowed and will result in a valid barcode Type here the type of barcode can be chosen depending on this type several of the following options are available and can be used for further definitions that are necessary for this type Mode this is a barcode type specific option here an encoding mode can be chosen for some of the available barcode types Error Correction this is a barcode type specific opt
246. desired text can be added and combined with some place holders which are replaced by serial number or date or time information Here following place holders are possible S this string is replaced by the serial number as defined with the parameters above A is replaced by national representation of the full weekday name a is replaced by national representation of the abbreviated weekday name B is replaced by national representation of the full month name b and h are replaced by national representation of the abbreviated month name C is replaced by the year divided by 100 c is replaced by national representation of time and date D is equivalent to Y m d y d is replaced by the day of the month as a decimal number 01 31 e is replaced by the day of month as a decimal number 1 31 single digits are preceded by a blank F is equivalent to Y m d G is replaced by a year as a decimal number with century This year is the one that contains the greater part of the week Monday as the first day of the week g is replaced by the same year as in G but as a decimal number without century 00 99 H is replaced by the hour 24 hour clock as a decimal number 00 23 l is replaced by the hour 12 hour clock as a decimal number 01 12 j is replaced by the day of the year as a decimal number 001 366 k is replaced by
247. ding on the shape of the used geometry Coordinates this list contains the coordinates of all points of the currently selected geometry here they can be changed to re position a single point of it selecting a point within this list also affects the highlighted element within the drawing area there the selected point is surrounded by a separate blue box which can be used to drag this point thus the geometry can be edited using the mouse Within this table of coordinates a single point or groups of points can be selected This can be done by left clicking into the row of the point that has to be selected Additional points can be chosen by selecting additional rows of points while the shift or control key is held down In case more elements are selected they can be modified within the drawing area by dragging them to other positions here all highlighted points are moved together Comparing to this a point editing mode is available that gives the possibility to highlight and edit all points of an element separately For more details about this mode please refer above For the parameters described here the same is true as described for the manipulation functionalities within the drawing panel When the changes are applied to a primary element they influence the subsequent elements too When an additional element is selected there is no feedback to its parent primary element the changes will not override the parents geometry 6 5 2 3 The Element
248. direction All other rows within that list define an order of pens that is repeated until the last slice is reached Here patterns of up to 5 different pen combinations can be defined Since the pen definitions for sliced geometry have to be done here the related option within the Element tab pane is disabled pens can be assigned only via this pen mapping table 228 Show All Slices in case this check box is selected all slices that belong to a 3D model are shown within the drawing area of BeamConstruct This function has to be handled with care since a large amount of slices can slow down the application dramatically here it is recommended to use Display reduced parameter to show only every nth number of slice Show 3D Mesh draws the 3D model the slices result from it is necessary to enable this option in case the model has to be edited all functions like rotating scaling moving and others more that are available within the drawing area can be accessed and applied to the 3D model only in case this option is selected PLEASE NOTE as soon as something was changed at the 3D model all currently existing slices are dropped and a new slicing operation is started in order to get slices that reflect the modified 3D models shape Display Reduced reduces the number of slices that are shown in case option Show All Slices is selected the bigger this number becomes the less slices are shown within the drawing area Split T
249. e continued this can be useful to let the laser start up settle completely Job Start Command this command is sent to the laser prior to submission of first vector data to the scanner card Job Start Delay this is an optional delay that can be specified to let the plug in wait after the Job Start Command is sent and before sending of marking vector data begins Laser On Command this is a very specific command that should be used only in some very special applications it is issued whenever the laser has to be turned on this is done by the scanner card normally so the user has to ensure that both commands don t overlap Please note Since serial communication is quite slow and not very responsive this way of turning on the laser is quite inaccurate it should be used only when exact laser timing does not matter Laser On Delay this is an optional delay that can be specified to let the plug in wait after the Laser On Command is sent and before sending of marking vector data begins Laser Off Command this corresponds to the Laser On Command and is a very specific one that should be used only in some very special applications it is issued whenever the laser has to be turned off this is done by the scanner card normally so the user has to ensure that both commands don t overlap Please note Since serial communication is quite slow and not very responsive this way of turning off the laser is quite inaccurate it should be used only when
250. e in case more than one Primary Geometry element is selected it is possible to put them into a group using this function UnGroup Elements this item can be used when a group element is selected it resolves the group pulls all element out of it into the hierarchical level where the group existed before Delete Element s deletes an element completely in case this is applied to a primary element all its sub elements are removed too Duplicate the currently selected Primary Geometry element is copied and inserted at a position that is slightly shifted according to the original element Move To Top the selected element is moved to the top position within its same hierarchically level means a child of a primary element will stay a child of it but it will become the first one Move Up the selected element is moved one position up but also within the same hierarchically level Move Down the selected element is moved one position down within the same hierarchically level Move To Bottom the selected element is moved to the bottom position within its same hierarchically level means a child of a primary element will stay a child of it but it will become the last one Import 3D Mesh this option is active only when a single Sliced 3D Mesh Group element is selected it gives the possibility to import an additional 3D Mesh into this Sliced 3D Mesh Group after successful import this Sliced 3D Mesh Gro
251. e like Connected Lines should be selected 6 5 6 1 Sine Distortion This Post Processing Tool applies a sine waveform to existing geometry This tool does not add any new points or lines to existing geometry thus it requires an outline that consists of lines that are much shorter than the wavelength Elsewhere the result would not look like a real sine waveform Following parameters can be set for this tool Direction the direction the waveform has to be applied to Horizontal sets a sine parallel to X axis Vertical sets a waveform parallel to Y axis 177 Wavelength the length of a single wave Amplitude the amplitude of the sine wave Offset an offset that defines at which position within the wave the sine calculation has to be started this offset can be used to shift the waveform 6 5 6 2 Curve Distortion Using this tool an existing geometry can be bent around a defined centre point to get a radial round shape It is useful e g in combination with the Text Primary Geometry element to define radial texts This tool does not add any new points or lines to existing geometry thus it requires an outline that consists of lines that are short enough to get a result that looks like an bent outline Following parameters can be used to influence the result Alignment this field specifies where the centre point is located relative to the geometry that has to be processed Radiu
252. e BeamConstruct plug in overwrites all hardware related settings out of a loaded project with the default settings immediately after a new project file was loaded 1010 save project with options 2001 undo last operation 2002 redo last un done operation 2101 concatenate all selected elements into one group 2102 concatenate all selected elements into a splitgroup 2103 concatenate all selected elements into a movegroup 2104 ungroup the elements out of the selected group 2105 duplicate the selected element 2201 merge the geometries of the selected element into a static one 2202 split the geometries of the selected element logically 2203 optimise the geometries of the selected element 2204 reduce the geometries of the selected element using a lossy algorithm 2205 extrude the selected element into third dimension 2301 freeze the currently shown background video 2302 calibrate the currently connected camera 2303 teach fiducials 2304 load fiducials 2305 save teached fiducial s 2306 drop teached fiducial s 2307 drop camera calibration data 2308 toggle image capturing on or of when configured to be started manually in global project settings 3001 start process simulation 3002 opens the marking dialogue to let the user control the marking process 3003 marks the current project once here the mark dialogue is opened to let the user stop the
253. e E A a de Lalo Vands SOD daa ed evaded cou Peedi Se icv da taeda bec 165 ANT Zire EEA A Barats Na cate aca da ua vnc E EA EE INA E L AAE E NEE AESA DT 205 COSV A E e a A AO oca 37 177 219 CSV DatalNpUt arna A a ey eee 177 219 CSV 10 CHArACters sieves a a td eE AN 47 CSV 10 CONTO Aae a cata Adve a A T NAS 37 123 184 236 ESVE OMN IUT D101 EEEE A E E A EE a NAE E E E E he aed 48 CUVE Distortion r aE a a a A O e OA T a EA A N a 177 218 CUStOM DO lirie A A A E AS EA a Ta N 190 Custom Dot Style merie A A dd dd dt EER 161 190 Custom Outputs cient A e ia 215 Custom Pen SOtings ciencias ltda te 162 AU E E E A 19 Miura 25 D Dita Aaa 27 121 Data Conversi n iaa air ad 26 Data DUMMY aa 65 data MW A E oe Senha ae ee Be ita tk ae tage ae a 17 Dataminputrai a aid ia 177 219 data PES iii A A ail ieee 25 EA iba ee ad ibe a a a ea e dade adh lente ee elena teed 60 174 214 Delete Element S 2 se cccetieus wile dei ie A te dial aia 166 206 DestructiVO ui ata e dois 179 221 AER E O 62 DIGITAL 020 A ds 25 Digital NAND tcc fi bites a dl 49 Digital NJOR RO netas 49 Digital NOT XOR sei eniten ea o at te fees e o Batlle catalan iat 49 Digital Coti A castes dant o 54 DigitaliGate ir N A A E N SA E AAA 61 Digital NOP ceso A N E E a AN E E AANG 49 Digital NOV ot a ace Pda N a E RAER 49 diata Out PU ua ata a A a E a a T A ETR 215 Digital SME Register o a es A lela 49 Digitalto Characidae 40 Digital to CMD NValu6 Pallt ici ai
254. e IA dead 197 WOMKING ANCA ant ad e daly a eE EAS 160 191 WOKING ATEA ois ese nee aedes tries sens a cake datas dat sha dee e adie davedenes 160 190 WOK Area SIZG ea aE aE chad DA lc talca 249 Working Area Upper ell it A depen tddi 160 Write Stand Alone Data ooooooncccccccnncnnnnnnnnonnncnccncnnnnnn eee e ete caaaaaaeeaaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesaaaaeaeeeaaaeaeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeeeees 233 X XOR ean RR NN 147 Y ll Wii ii A A Wie A aa 25 Z ZHDISTAN CE A a oa 249 LES ne ca EET 194 216 ZA a A ee ee 175 217 ZOOMM Mat A O AA 164 202 ZOOM DUE A A A A alles ana teeta hale oceans eet 164 203 ZOOM LO SCICCIEd Accs side aati oa 164 203 Zoom To Working Areasta a teed adie ites elie eel ee secede aaa E ta a eaa 164 203 A EAE ha avec ea eg e a e de de a NSE 23 40 48f 51f 70f 77 191 l O A EN EAE E A A ATA AS NN 147 De Compress Dataticec suits an a E E A Askin cls ds 48 Maa atrial sisas 41 44 A EE TEELE A hs sogsuaent sahaaddadadaasdgeahanatareent 44 oO dilata talas lcdsa laico annaouehid abeoesansansdaabenwtheedcavauasbacohddadgaad aaagdaaaaesst eed 41 odiosa libelar ls 44f Vaillant td AET EESE 41 TIN 44 O RN 45 267
255. e Primary Geometry element has to be selected within the Entity Tree Next the green tool bar symbol of the Data Input has to be clicked to assign it to the Primary Geometry element 7 7 7 1 CSV Data Input This plug in offers basic connectivity to data out of tables in CSV format comma separated values a platform and application independent table file format It loads data out of a CSV table and jumps to next line row of this file during every marking operation The data read from this table are applied to the related Primary Element Within the settings panel of this plug in first the path to the CSV file has to be chosen Next two parameters specify the delimiter used within the CSV file to separate columns as well as the number of the column to be shown in case a CSV file contains more than only one column 7 7 7 2 OpenAPC Data Input This input can t be previewed within the editor of BeamConstruct It expects input data when the BeamConstruct project file is running within an ControlRoom project This can be done by using the BeamConstruct to Control plug in This plug in provides three Char inputs IN2 IN3 and IN4 Data that are set at this input are used by this Data Input element to modify the assigned Primary Geometry element This way a BeamConstruct project can be changed dynamically directly within an ControlRoom project Because the data are provided by the ControlRoom project here only the input has to be defined that has to
256. e additional lines are necessary to close the polygon the shortest way is used by adding a straight line Outer lines rounded this mode is similar to Inner lines but not a plain hatch mode that can be used to really filla geometry It repeats the outline of the hatched polygon on its outer side as often as specified by the value given in field Number of Lines At corner points where additional lines are necessary to close the polygon a round shape is created Please note this adds a lot of polygon points and may dependent on the geometry increase memory and processing time consumption dramatically So this mode should be handled with care and only in cases where it is really necessary to use this special shape Hatch Angle this angle specifies the orientation of the hatch lines according to the coordinate system 176 Angle Offset this parameter applies only in case the hatcher is set as sub element of a group that contains more than one geometric element to be hatched in this case only the first primary element within that group is hatched with the original hatch angle for all following elements the hatch angle is modified by this offset So this parameter can be used to have some kind of rotating hatch angle for several elements that are concatenated together within a group Hatch Distance this is the distance that is kept between the hatching lines for the zig zag hatching mode it applies to the
257. e application directly Tabbed Pane this element is the base for a combination of several tab panes that can contain different user interface elements each The area within such a tabbed pane behaves similar to the global HMI editing area there the same pop up menus and functionalities are available To add a 23 HMI control to such a tabbed pane the pop up menu inside this pane has to be used means right click within that pane to add a new element via the opening menu Stacked Pane This object is similar to the Tabbed Pane it offers the possibility to place several panels at the same position and to give the possibility to browse between them Different to the Tabbed Pane this one does not offer any graphical tabs that can be used for page turning here the panels are stacked on each other invisibly Switching to a different panel than the current one can be done within the HMI editor only via the context menu Here the base Stacked Pane has to be selected and right clicked then the menu items Selected Element gt Previous Pane and Selected Elements gt Next Pane have to be chosen During runtime the panels can be selected and switched only via its inputs means there need to be some functionality defined via flows that access the panes Additional Pane this element can be added to an existing Tabbed Pane or Stacked Pane only it appends an other pane to it The area within such an additional pane behaves similar to the gl
258. e can be detected a change from HIGH to LOW as soon as such an edge is detected the result is emitted at OUT2 and OUT3 Numeric IN4 this input can be used to detect a numeric rising edge which is the case when the second of two given values is bigger than the first one the result is given at Outputs OUT4 and OUTS Numeric IN6 this input can be used to detect a numeric falling edge which is the case when the second of two given values is smaller than the first one the result is given at Outputs OUT6 and OUT7 Digital OUTO 0 when there is detected a rising edge at INO this output emits a LOW signal Digital OUT1 1 when there is detected a rising edge at INO this output emits a HIGH signal Digital OUT2 0 this output emits a LOW signal when there is a falling edge at IN2 detected Digital OUT3 Digital OUT4 Digital OUT5 1 when there is detected a rising edge at IN4 this output emits a HIGH signal 1 this output emits a HIGH signal when there is a falling edge at IN2 detected 0 when there is detected a rising edge at IN4 this output emits a LOW signal Digital OUT6 0 this output emits a LOW signal when there is a falling edge at IN6 detected Digital OUT7 1 this output emits a HIGH signal when there is a falling edge at IN6 detected This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_edge 5 3 3 7 2 5 Mathematical Flow Objects Compare Digital This is a comparison function that checks if
259. e fly factor X On the fly factor Y specifies the factor in X or Y direction for marking on the fly operation this option can be used with Digi I O Extension board only for details please refer to manual of E1701D scanner card Gain X Gain Y linear correction factor in X and Y direction to stretch or shrink the output Rotation rotates the output by the given angle in unit degree using the center of the working area as rotation point Laser Ready Input specifies a specific digital input to be used as Laser Ready signal When this option is set marking is possible only in case a HIGH signal is detected at the input specified here This option can be used only together with Digi I O Extension board Firmware Debug Log in case of problems operating the controller or in case the error LED is turned on this parameter can be used to get some logging information from controller and to write it into a file To use it a path to a file has to specified here where the controller firmware log has to be written into When this text field is left empty no debug log is written PLEASE NOTE the firmware log file is created new on every start up so all preceding log data are overwritten To get a useful log please perform the following steps 1 power on E1701 scanner controller if already powered toggle power or reset controller 2 start application that makes use of E1701 controller with a configuration where firmware debug log is already
260. e inputs for the values that have to be combined with the command name Char OUTO CMD the output for the command whenever an value is set to an input an command is emitted here as specified within the configuration Numeric OUT1 the output for the value that is assigned to the command whenever an value is set to an input an command is emitted together with this value CMD Value Pair to Numeric This element performs the conversion back from command value pairs to plain values Within the configuration of the flow element a name can be assigned for every input When a command is sent into this flow element that is identical to this name the value is emitted at the related output Char INO CMD the input for the command here the command name that is assigned to the value is expected Numeric IN1 the input for the value that is assigned to the command Numeric OUTO Digital OUT7 the outputs for the values that could be identified by the configured command when the string that is set to Char INO could not be found within the configuration of the flow element nothing is output here Characters to Digital With this flow object a conversion from text to digital signals is done Internally this is performed as a comparison operation Dependent on the input text specific digital output values are created LOW HIGH or pulse Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that
261. e is paid licensing conditions are met agreements are redeemed Without the password the software installation is no longer usable also deinstalling and installing BeamConstruct again will not solve this issue BeamLock provides the possibility to define up to three time ranges with own passwords for each of these time ranges Thus it is possible to define several lock grades that become active after different time ranges Additionally a master password has to be defined which can be used to override the time dependent locks at once and to disable the full lock immediately PLEASE NOTE all passwords including the master passwords have to be completely different in order to have a good security Beside of that it is recommended to use complex passwords with a length of at least 8 characters and with upper and lowercase characters that itself do not form meaningful words Examples for BAD PASSWORDS are mylock1 mylock2 mylock2 and mylockm Examples for good passwords are XdlfTr238 yERf12rt67 934trAwx4 m4RT56ZZtgd34 To apply such a lock following steps have to be performed 1 Start BeamLock on the system that has to be locked For Windows BeamLock exe can be found in OpenAPC installation directory for Linux it has to be started out of a console by entering command BeamLock On none of the supported systems BeamLock comes with an icon in start menu 2 Set the Enable checkbox for every row where a time range and a password
262. e of 90 degrees can be entered in tab pane Geometry once Smaller other rotation angles that compensate mounting accuracies should not be set here but by using parameter Rotation in scanner card settings X Offset Top Left gaaaa Y Offset Bottom Right 32 2634 32 2634 mana Size 64 5268 64 5268 0 0000 Keep aspect ratio Rotation 0 0000 0 0000 Rotation 5 Save the generated correction file configure BeamConstruct to make use of it and mark the same geometry again Depending on the result you may now continue with 4 to refine the correction or 252 finish here when the marked square does not show any distortions Some important things that have to be mentioned for the process of creation of correction tables There is no direct relation between the pincussion distortion of an edge of the marked square and the angle value to be set to adjust it means there is no simple formula to calculate the angle value out of a measured distance in marking result Thus it is necessary to try in several steps to find out the correct values When a given angle does not fully remove a distortion it has to be set to a larger value in next step When a used angle over compensates a distortion and causes an edge to be bent in other direction it has to be set to a smaller value A correction table shown in CorrCorrect always has a base size of 65 535 x 65 535 mm This is an artificial size value that has to be used by CorrCorrect b
263. e outline of the triangle is shown and only this outline would be processed during laser marking To process the inner side of the triangle too a fill pattern has to be added by using the Additional Geometry element Hatch It is symbolised by a violet tool bar icon that consists of several horizontal lines When this icon is clicked as long as a Primary Geometry element like the triangle is selected it is added to this element automatically Now the appearance of the geometry and the appearance of the application changes the first pane on the main windows left hand side switches to show all the Hatch parameters the Element Tree on the main windows right hand side now shows the new hierarchical structure of the element with the Hatch as sub element of the primary Triangle geometry the triangle within the drawing area is filled with some hatch lines This hatch pattern now can be changed by modifying the values within the property pane Hatch on the main windows left hand side PLEASE NOTE after clicking the Hatch button within the tool bar the new geometry of the now added hatch fill pattern is selected instead of the triangle That means all modifications to the selected geometry as described previously now would apply to the hatch geometry only but NOT to its parents triangle Save data To avoid the currently generated geometry gets lost the project has to be saved now To do that select menu Project m
264. e plug in and the connected plotter Digital OUT7 BSY signals if the plug in is still communicating with the plotter HIGH or if it has finished all operations so that other components can start its operation this input has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_makeblock_xy Printer driver controlled Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Beside of that some laser equipment can be damaged in case it is controlled with wrong signals Thus it is highly recommended to check the output generated by this plug in using e g an oscilloscope to avoid problems caused by wrong configurations This should be done prior to putting a system into operation for the first time and prior to putting a system into operation after a software update was installed This plug in can be used for all scanner controllers that can be accessed via a standard system printer driver So within the configuration dialogue no laser scanner related parameters can be set but values for line width orientation and others Field Left Position Field Upper Position defines the upper left coordinate of the field that has to be used by t
265. e plug ins that need to react on these inputs and there have to be connected to them like the scanner controller stepper motor plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_eth6608 107 SPI G4 Laser RS232 Controller Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Using this plug in a SPI G4 laser can be controlled via serial interface ASCII commands It is able to connect to such a laser controller via COM port serial interface send predefined and freely definable commands to it and receive responses from the laser The plug in provides a basic configuration panel where the serial interface parameters can be set according to the communication parameters of the lasers serial interface A second panel gives the possibility to specify behaviour of the plug in and to enter custom commands that have to be sent to the laser Every of these custom commands has to be separated by specific characters that specify carriage return and or line feed Here for a carriage return the special character sequence CR has to be added for a line feed LF can be used Please note also in case only one laser command has to be sent the CR LF termination characters have to be appended The Commands
266. e resulting columns of a row are returned as CSV comma separated values when more than row is returned every row is emitted with a separate text string at this output This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_mysal PostgreSQL Access With this plug in it is possible to communicate with a PostgreSQL database server to send data toa database and to retrieve data out of it Within the configuration panel the IP and port number of the server the user name and password and the name of the database have to be specified Char INO QUER this input has to be used for SQL statements where no response is expected statements that only set or modify data like INSERT or UPDATE Char IN1 REQ this input has to be used for SQL statements that may cause a response statements that request data like SELECT Char OUT1 RES the result of a request to input 1 the resulting columns of a row are returned as CSV comma separated values when more than row is returned every row is emitted with a separate text string at this output This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_postgresal Random Generator This plug in creates random data of type digital and numeric Whenever the related digital input is triggered the assigned output emits a random signal The digital output signal is randomly set to LOW or HIGH The valid range of the numeric output can be configured within the configuration panel there the maximum value can be specif
267. e table digital values show their state HIGH or LOW clicking into the related cell changes this state numerical values are displayed as floating point numbers they can be edited within the cell directly character values are shown as printable text they can be edited within the cell directly binary values are displayed as a hexadecimal number that represents the address where the binary data are stored at in memory this value is only informational and can t be changed Changing the value of an output causes a new data flow using the new value That flow is emitted during the next execution cycle To remove a flow element out of this watch table the related row has to be double clicked 5 5 Using the OpenPlayer The OpenPlayer is the execution environment for an ControlRoom project This application is intended to be used on the target system The player is as small and as efficient as possible and therefore doesn t offers 135 any special service usage or debugging functionalities It has to be executed with the project file name and path given as parameter Here it is recommended to hand over the full absolute pathname always especially in cases where the OpenPlayer itself invokes OpenPlugger instances that is necessary so that the OpenPlugger can find the project file The OpenPlayer loads this project file then initializes all plug ins used for it and executes the flows within that project it immediately The
268. e than one referencing step these speed values should decrease for every step Using these three parameters reference speed values can be specified When a speed is given for a step that is not used in chosen reference mode this value is ignored Referenced Position after referencing was finished successfully the current axis position is set to the position value specified here 110 e Limit Switch 1 2 Input beside the soft limits it is possible to define hardware controlled position limits via limit switches When such limit switches are used and connected to E1701M controller the inputs they are connected with can be specified here Whenever one of these switches sends a HIGH signal current movement is stopped using stop deceleration e Auto leave Limit Switch when a limit switch is hit normally no more motions are allowed until this switch is left When this option is set and an axis hits a limit switch it automatically moves back until this switch is left PLEASE NOTE when this option is set a possibly unexpected motion may start in opposite direction e Encoder E1701M controller board supports up to two external quadrature encoders that provide position information When such an encoder is connected to decoder input 0 digital inputs O and 1 or decoder input 1 digital inputs 2 and 3 these inputs can be enabled here for an axis When an external encoder is activated newly the axis position on start up is set to 0 To spec
269. e that is equal to the name of the user interface element it may correspond with or any other unique name 2 Whenever new data are sent to the server using a new identifier these new data are stored and all connected clients are informed 3 Whenever new data are sent to the server using an already known identifier these new data overwrite the already stored ones and all connected client are informed about these changes Beside of that following is true every data set that consist of a identifier and some data is organized in the same way like an element within the main application it can have up to 8 separate data values consisting of one of the data types DIGI NUM CHAR BIN Changing of the data type is not possible once it was set to one of the allowed types it accepts only data of the same type an existing set of data can t be deleted Flow HMI Main Application Button_1 y Button_1 out Interlock Server 138 At a first sight this structure and the tasks the interlock server performs looks a bit useless But this simple method of storing data gives a wide range of possibilities to control a complete project Following some use cases are described there of course more of them and combinations out of them are imaginable 5 7 1 Reflect The Current State Of An Application When all data elements of the main application are configured to send their output
270. e value of 4 it would mark lines 1 5 9 2 6 10 3 7 11 4 8 12 Beam Compensation the laser beam that is used to process a working piece itself has an own size that results in the width of the lines that are processed by it for the hatcher it might be necessary to compensate this lasers spot size to avoid parts of the working piece to be processed more than once by the overlapping beam this compensation can be chosen here Use spotsize from pen here the tool compensation sizes are calculated automatically out of the spot sizes of the used pens Custom when this option is used a custom value for compensation can be entered 218 7 7 6 Post processing Tool Elements The Post Processing Tools influence all geometric elements that are located on an earlier position within the Element Tree on the windows right hand side So the manipulation of geometry that is done by such a tool is always applied to the Primary Geometry element it belongs to and to all previously applied Additional Geometry elements of this primary one Additional elements that follow a tool are not changed they apply their additional geometry to the modified geometry Post Processing Tools are symbolised by red tool bar buttons and can be added to a primary element simply by clicking this tool bar button To do that the related Primary Geometry element has to be selected within the Element Tree Post Processing Tools do not add any new points or lines to existin
271. ea This can be done several times the process of drawing the related curve has to be finished by right clicking the mouse After that the positions of the base points still can be modified interactively As long as this element is selected the real position of the base points are marked by blue crosses These crosses can be dragged with the mouse Changing the position of the base points also changes the appearance of the resulting Bezier curve Following parameters are available to modify the parameters of the Bezier curve Line Style the style the polygons lines is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of continuous lines that consist of a number of sub segments which are specified by the parameter Resolution Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines of a defined length including additional points all these lines are connected Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines of a defined length including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the length of the additional points that form the selecte
272. ean data types for both accumulator and operand ANDN bitwise AND of the accumulator and the negated operand this command can be used only with integer or boolean data types for both accumulator and operand 147 OR bitwise OR of the accumulator and the operand this command can be used only with integer or boolean data types for both accumulator and operand ORN bitwise OR of the accumulator and the negated operand this command can be used only with integer or boolean data types for both accumulator and operand XOR bitwise exclusive OR of the accumulator and the operand this command can be used only with integer or boolean data types for both accumulator and operand XORN bitwise exclusive OR of the accumulator and the negated operand this command can be used only with integer or boolean data types for both accumulator and operand NOT and bitwise negation of the accumulator s content this command can be used only with integer or boolean data types for both accumulator and operand ADD addition of accumulator and operand result is copied to the accumulator SUB subtraction of accumulator and operand result is copied to the accumulator MUL multiplication of accumulator and operand result is copied to the accumulator DIV division of accumulator and operand the result is copied to the accumulator and the data type of the accumulators content is changed to LREAL GT check if accumulator is gr
273. eated together with this first one Using this way the same operations and parameters can be applied to all slices easily Between every slice subelement of the group there is also a Process element created automatically This element does expect only one parameter the path to an existing project file This project file is executed at the position of every Process element and can contain processing operations that are necessary between every slice such as motion operations to move a Z table setting of digital outputs and waiting for digital inputs a to synchronise with external devices Using such an external project it is not necessary to add these control steps which normally are always the same for a machine manually for every newly sliced element 7 9 3 Auto Arrangement of 3D Meshes in Sliced 3D Mesh Groups A Sliced 3D Mesh Group can hold several 3D Meshes They appear as sub elements of type 3D Mesh in element tree These 3D Meshes can be positioned with the standard functions in tab pane Geometry in order to place them at suitable positions in working area Alternatively it is possible to let BeamConstruct arrange these meshes automatically To do this the Sliced 3D Mesh Group has to be selected and right clicked in element tree then menu item Auto Arrange 3D Meshes has to be selected Now a dialogue opens which provides options to arrange the 3D Meshes in X and Y direction and to align them at a specific Z heigh
274. eater than operand result BOOL is copied into the accumulator this command can be used only with numerical and boolean data types for both accumulator and operand GE check if accumulator is greater than or equal to the operand result BOOL is copied into the accumulator this command can be used only with numerical and boolean data types for both accumulator and operand EQ check if accumulator is equal to the operand result BOOL is copied into the accumulator this command works using all data types including STRING NE check if accumulator is not equal to the operand result BOOL is copied into the accumulator this command works using all data types including STRING LE check if accumulator is less than or equal to the operand result BOOL is copied into the accumulator this command can be used only with numerical and boolean data types for both accumulator and operand LT check if accumulator is less than operand result BOOL is copied into the accumulator this command can be used only with numerical and boolean data types for both accumulator and operand 148 JMP unconditional jump to the label specified as operand this label has to exist in format labelname elsewhere within the code but not within a different function block or outside of the scope of the current function block JMPC conditional jump to the label after a check if the accumulator is TRUE this label has to exist in format
275. eauseeeeeseaasceeeeeaeeeeeeesseneeeeeeeaeetaneees 50 Postprocessing TOOL sica ia 163 201 PostgreSQL ACCESS ta iia 128 DO Wir a dd is 148 POWER NN aaa ati 162 195 Primary Geometry ii tee chara a g a sendertausarat a aa 163 167 201 206 PRINTS oa 148 Printer driver controlled izada a iD dea Dead 89 POCOS A a A os 230 ProcessibetWween sliCOS iodo a a 192 Process Control imac oido iaa aa E E A adi 194 Process Geometry iii a wee nnd Dera ieee dans Nine aides Leg von avian die era 165 205 POCOS UM AT E rau tuo dopseas tute coals A r EE 166 205 ProgrOS S cenit Ste A TL nd WA et 235 properties dlalOguE coincida at E AE A sede Epaia ive vier 19 ASL K O AE A A A E 78 Pulse Q tp t irine a A bead aeae a Aa A ins tenes eee ees 215 PUIPlO ia E E E A A A E E A eee eat 25 PUEC O Told A SA E AE O E Sein Ud EE A E E T E ea vated 26 R Rad O BUON it A AA A E 22 Random Generators iia dae A dents S E 128 REMER gS Eo a A A E A AE N E EEE T E A A A ET 90 read ici A a thsi nie E et 22 Ready For Marking SIgNal iooooccin ii a aa 191 REAL O didas 149 153 REA SD sss bd ness a A ANS 226f Recalc Focal COmeCtHOM ie win cos devosdeteu ak daa 248f Rectangle soties A A ds 23 168 208 Reduce EMO Vii AA ba eee 183 225 RREGUCHON ido 226f Re SN 235 Reference axiS ON Start Ups sccci cine ted A aa led As 192 Reme Mises a A sa evit 196 Remote Control CommandS ita A AA aes 242 Remove Last Dota ias a daa 168 207 Rende Mea td ica 226 RepeatmalkSan trie
276. ecause this application does not know anything about used hardware setup and real working area size Thus a measured X or Y offset in real working area always has to be set in relation to this artificial working area size The offset value to be entered within CorrCorrect then has to be a value calculated out of the real offset and the relation between real working area size in BeamConstruct and 65 535 mm artificial working area size in CorrCorrect After saving a new correction file it is mandatory to let BeamConstruct close a possibly existing connection to a scanner controller card This can be done by going into project settings BeamConstruct loads a correction file only once on initialisation of scanner controller card thus a new initialisation has to be forced this way When this is not done BeamConstruct will continue working with a preceding correction table and will not notice there are any new data saved into the same file 253 1 iaa ant ba bid aaa a lcd Nd oe tahoe OTE EES EE edge ie Ma dee 240 3 DS AS A Aa 203f OL VSW AA as A a bd 203 3rdEye R PSC140P conan ad A oie E 78 A ACCESS MAS A EA A A A a A ee Oe eee N 158 ACCUFANS Dir iS EE ES Da A LA EA IDA A it 226 ACUIVSIMOVE NA A EA A EA RA EE E 180 222 Active MOVE Group toscas a ea is ee a i eee eat 182 224 Active Plica A deeds eel SLL ed le ae ee ee tees 180 222 Active Split Groupsets c0 Aa eek ani a aN E Erria i 180 222 O O 147 Ada Eleme a E A E AS O A abba 27 Add
277. ed As an example BeamServer exe 17 would show BeamConstruct consisting of drawing area 1 and menu bar 16 only For Windows please note BeamServer exe has to be started using OpenAPC installation directory as working directory To ensure this directory is used it is recommended to create a shortcut to BeamServer exe out of the OpenAPC installation directory this configures the correct directory automatically Additionally it is possible to set the parameter within the shortcut definitions too When BeamServer exe is started using any other directory it will not work propery and will not be able to use any of the elements and plug ins 7 17 4 Remote Control Commands Every command that is sent to BeamServer via TCP IP is responded either by a text OK when operation was successful or by a text ERROR signalising the last command could not be executed successfully ERROR is always followed by two error codes where the first one describes the kind of the error that 242 happened and the second one is an internal error number that may be helpful in case of problems of the BeamServer itself For first error code following values are possible 7 OAPC_ERROR_RESOURCE tried to access a resource that does not exist e g when using UID or name of an element that could not be found 11 OAPC_ERROR_NO_MEMORY not enough memory available 16 OAPC_ERROR_INVALID_INPUT the data parameters given within last command are incomplete or
278. ed afterwards again Skip offset this parameter belongs to Skip marks and specifies an offset at what mark skip counting has to start so with both parameters elements can be created that are marked interleaved Element 1 with skip marks 1 and skip offset 0 Element 2 with skip marks 1 and skip offset 1 results in two elements that are marked alternating each exclusively Element 1 with skip marks 2 and skip offset 0 Element 2 with skip marks 2 and skip offset 1 Element 3 with skip marks 2 and skip offset 2 results in three elements that are marked alternating each exclusively Total line length this field contains an information too here the total length of the geometry is shown this value takes the on lines into account only off lines movements with the tool turned of to go to the beginning of the next on line are ignored here Process time here the time is displayed that is needed to process the currently selected element this value is calculated out of the length of on lines the length of off lines between them and the speed and delay information of the pen that is assigned to this element 7 7 2 4 The Layer Tab Pane Every element can be assigned to exactly one layer These layers are in no way related to the processing of the data within the target system but they are a useful utility that makes it easier to handle complex projects Within this tab pane
279. ed by this number nothing is done Numeric IN4 EN enable the tab with the number that is sent to this input here other tabs than only the first one can be accessed if no tab is available at the position specified by this number nothing is done Numeric IN5 DIS disable the tab with the number that is sent to this input here other tabs than only the first one can be accessed if no tab is available at the position specified by this number nothing is done 38 Single Panel Digital IN1 SEL select this tab and put it in foreground the same operation can be done with the numeric IN3 of the parent Tabbed Pane or Stacked Pane Digital IN2 EN disable LOW or enable HIGH this tab the same operation can be done with the numeric IN3 and IN4 of the parent Tabbed Pane or Stacked Pane Stacked Pane Digital IN1 SEL select the first of all stacked tabs and put it in foreground Digital IN2 EN disable LOW or enable HIGH the first tab this operation puts the tab in background when it is visible otherwise nothing is changed Numeric IN3 SEL select the tab with the number that is sent to this input here other tabs than only the first one can be accessed if no tab is available at the position specified by this number nothing is done Numeric IN4 EN enable the tab with the number that is sent to this input here other tabs than only the first one can be accessed if no tab is available at the position spe
280. ed operation was finished are mentioned explicitly below Currently following lt number gt values are possible All four digit numbers correspond to menu items and or tool bar buttons and their functionality within the main application when such a number is used the related operation is invoked for a more detailed description please refer to BeamConstruct documentation above 1001 new project 1002 load existing project file 1003 import custom file format as supported by BeamConstruct vector and raster image formats 1004 save the current project using a known name 1005 save the current project using a new name 1101 export vector data in CSV format 1102 export vector data in HPGL PLT format 1103 export layer vector data in CLI format 1006 open general settings dialogue 1007 open pen settings dialogue 243 1008 save the current configuration as default settings 1009 load default settings 1010 save project with options 2001 undo last operation 2002 redo last un done operation 2101 concatenate all selected elements into one group 2102 concatenate all selected elements into a splitgroup 2103 concatenate all selected elements into a movegroup 2104 ungroup the elements out of the selected group 2105 duplicate the selected element 2201 merge the geometries of the selected element into a static one 2202 split the geometries of the selected
281. eecneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeseenaeeeeeesenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 174 6 55 41 Hatch tia neawieestuscaereceretzea dome nscebeseahe ca eaten bet me aaa a ainda metre a E a 175 6 5 6 Post processing Tool ElOMents cccecseceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenneeeeeeseenaeeeeeeeeneeeeeesssnaneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 176 6 5 6 1 SINE Distortion iiaae esteen aa da 176 6 9 0 2 Curve DISTIN da 177 6 5 7 Data Input Elements nene A A dd 177 6 5 7 CSV Data Input tana ida 177 6 5 7 2 OpenAPC Data INput ea aeaa E r a aaa a aaa aae aa a anaa aa la daha uaa 177 6 5 7 3 SerlallDate TIMO naci A A ade 178 6 6 Edit Geometty iii A ina 179 6 0 1 Edit Vector iia ia italia reia 180 6 6 2 Edit Non Destructive 4 85 vests La A A 180 6 06 21 ActiVE SPlit Group si ia gecaiaardesntageer NS 180 6 6 2 2 Active Move Group ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaaecsaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaneeeeeseeeeaes 182 6 63 Edit DESILUCHVE sc a a Da a aca 183 6 7 Processing Operational A aia 183 6 8 Exporting ENC Date cavas iio 184 6 9 Customise CNCONSUUCT aiea eaaa I i 184 hk BCAMCONSUUCE si E E E EI EOT 186 EE OCUINY E EA EA E E E E A A a AE TE 186 TEPA ONT BYE AEREE EEE O A E ay sat E A A E 186 7 3 Position within the SYStOM rirerire a E A A AR a T anna 186 7 4 Quick Start into BeaMConstruct ccc cece cece ee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeceeaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeensnees 187 7 5 Project CONTIQUEAtION emita e A A AL E
282. eek number of the year Sunday as the first day of the week as a decimal number 00 53 u is replaced by the weekday Monday as the first day of the week as a decimal number 1 7 V is replaced by the week number of the year Monday as the first day of the week as a decimal number 01 53 If the week containing January 1st has four or more days in the new year then it is week 1 otherwise it is the last week of the previous year and the next week is week 1 v is equivalent to e b Y W is replaced by the week number of the year Monday as the first day of the week as a decimal number 00 53 w is replaced by the weekday Sunday as the first day of the week as a decimal number 0 6 X is replaced by national representation of the time x is replaced by national representation of the date Y is replaced by the year with century as a decimal number y is replaced by the year without century as a decimal number 00 99 Z is replaced by the time zone name z is replaced by the time zone offset from UTC a leading plus sign stands for east of UTC a minus sign for west of UTC hours and minutes follow with two digits each and no delimiter between them is replaced by national representation of the date and time Locale some of the date time place holders are replaced by information that depend on a language and or on local specialities using this par
283. eement between the parties with respect to the use of the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings communications or agreements written or oral regarding such subject matter The Vendor may in its sole discretion modify portions of this Agreement at any time The Vendor may notify you of any changes by posting notice of such modifications on the Vendors web site s or sending notice via e mail postal mail or other means Your continued use of the Software following notice of such modifications shall be deemed to be your acceptance of any such modifications to the Agreement If you do not agree to any such modifications you must immediately stop using the Software and destroy all copies of the Software in your possession or control 12 The Software is protected by Commonwealth of Australia copyright law and international treaty Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of the Software is subject to civil and criminal penalties NOTICE SPECIFIC TO INFORMATION AVAILABLE ON THE WEBSITE OF THE VENDOR The information provided is for informational purposes only and is subject to change without notice It is provided AS IS and without any warranty Any risk arising out of the use of the information on this website shall remain with the reader INNO EVENT SHALL THE VENDOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUS
284. eft clicked position This element does not offer any parameters so there are no input fields available within the element specific tab pane as soon as such a dot is selected 207 Within the options the dot can be configured Style specifies the style of the created point here Dot is a simple one that consists of a single coordinate and has no size or Custom for a dot as configured within the global parameters 7 7 4 2 Line When drawing a line two clicks are necessary within the drawing area the first click specifies the starting position of the line the second one the end position It is not necessary to keep the mouse pressed between these two clicks Drawing functionality can be extended by pressing one of the keys Shift or Ctrl after specifying the starting point of the line first click when Shift is held down a horizontal line is drawn and vertical deviations of current mouse position are ignored When Control is held down a vertical line is drawn and horizontal deviations of current mouse position are ignored After drawing or selecting such a line following parameters are available to manipulate them Line Style the style the line is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of exactly one starting and one end point where one single line is drawn between Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points between the start and
285. eld Upper Position defines the upper left coordinate of the field that has to be used by the scanner Field Size the total size of the field that is used by the scanner this parameter together with the left and upper position specifies the coordinates input vectors have to be located within in case there are input data which define a position outside this field they will not be marked Swap X and Y swaps the input X and Y coordinate to exchange X and Y axis values of the scanner Mirror X Mirror Y mirror the input coordinates On the fly factor X On the fly factor Y specifies the factor in X or Y direction for marking on the fly operation this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card and on the available SCAPS licenses Default Here several default parameters can be defined that are used in case the direct axis control inputs X Y and Z are used or in case control data are used that do not contain motion speed delay information Jump Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned off Mark Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned on Laser Off Delay Laser On Delay Jump Delay Mark Delay Polygon Delay these delays are used during marking operation they become active when the laser is turned off or on when the scanner jumps to an other position when it moves to an other
286. elected entity symbol e pointdrag png for the Point drag mode symbol 186 7 BeamConstruct 7 1 Security This application is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Beside of that some laser equipment can be damaged in case it is controlled with wrong signals Thus it is highly recommended to check the output generated by this plug in using e g an oscilloscope to avoid problems caused by wrong configurations This should be done prior to putting a system into operation for the first time and whenever a software update was installed or whenever some of the relevant parameters have been modified Here software update not only means updates of the OpenAPC or BeamConstruct software but also modifications with dependent software like components or drivers for scanner controller cards 7 2 Overview BeamConstruct is a CAD application which is a bit similar to CNConstruct but specialised for creation and processing of laser marking data These data can be used together with a laser scanner system to perform the material processing Beside of that BeamConstruct is able to store the generated processing data in different formats that can be used by ControlRoom plug ins directly Thus the generated laser marking dat
287. eless memory usage because the logged data are not flushed out of this flow element Beside a logging information that is given as plain human readable text also a unique identifier is given This identifier specifies the element that has issued the logging event The identifier is a number that can be found within the property dialogue of such an element for an HMI element right beside the name input field for an Flow element within the dialogue title Char OUTO output for the error log texts that are generated by other objects Numeric OUT1 output for the unique identifier of the object that has caused the error log event Char OUT2 output for the warning log texts that are generated by other objects Numeric OUT3 output for the unique identifier of the object that has caused the warning log event Char OUT4 output for the information log texts that are generated by other objects Numeric OUTS output for the unique identifier of the object that has caused the information log event Char OUT6 output for the event log texts that are generated by other objects Numeric OUT7 output for the unique identifier of the object that has caused the additional log event Log Recorder Most of the HMI objects offer the possibility to watch their data directly and to cause log events if necessary These elements can create log events directly if required When data have to be watched within a more complex flow structure or where no
288. elsewhere the changes are lost Within the privileges there again the option Supervision can be found When this privilege is selected all other check boxes are disabled because it overwrites all other definitions When a new user is generated using the button Create user the log in name of this user has to be given Afterwards the list of users is extended by this new user As default password the login name is used This default password should be changed using the button Set password Predefined there always exists a user Supervisor which has Supervision privileges It is recommended not to delete this user or to have at least one other user with Supervision privileges All data that are set here are stored within the project file as some kind of project default values There exists a possibility to modify the user data within a running project The values changed here are not stored within the project but within a special file that is stored in application directory within a file that has the same name like the project file plus extension rtdat or rtbak When these files do not exist or have been deleted the default user data specified within the OpenEditor and stored within the project file are used Thus this is a possibility to get access to a system that is locked and where the login information are lost On the other 158 hand it is necessary to protect general operating system access so tha
289. en with here a value in range 0 100 is expected that corresponds to the as a percentage laser power value Numeric IN5 FREQ the frequency in unit Hz the laser has to be driven with during marking when the laser is turned on Numeric IN6 CMD this input can be used to set additional commands and to perform additional control operations using them following commands are supported 0 stop marking immediately and flush the list of control commands that may be already stored within the plug in 1 auto calibration command turn auto calibration on and perform referencing for head 1 2 auto calibration command turn auto calibration on and perform referencing for head 2 5 auto calibration command perform calibration at head 1 6 auto calibration command perform calibration at head 2 94 9 turn auto calibration off for head 1 10 turn auto calibration off for head 2 Please note the auto calibration commands depend on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card and the used scan head Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to move the scanner and to control the laser such a stream can contain complex marking operation Digital OUT6 BSY signals if marking is still active HIGH or if the scanner controller card has finished all operations this input has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the c
290. ent is done the setting made here influences what kind of arrows are shown for axis movements in mark dialogue Don t show warning when referencing axes when some axes are configured to perform referencing homing operation on start up this may result in an unexpected surprising and therefore possibly dangerous movement Because of this prior to referencing operations an information is shown the user has to confirm in order to start the referencing operation When this option is set this information bot is NOT shown referencing of axes starts immediately and WITHOUT ANY WARNING Thus this option has to be used carefully and only in case the whole machine is secure and covered completely Process between slices here a path to an existing project can be given that is used when 3D meshes are sliced this project can contain a processing sequence that is performed between every slice Tab pane Limits gives the possibility to configure allowed ranges and behaviour of some pen parameters here the minimum and maximum value that can be specified within pen settings dialogue can be set Beside 193 of that the behaviour of the related slider can be changed when check box Logarithmic is set the sliders no longer act linear Here allowed range and behaviour of following values can be configured e Pen Frequency e Jump Speed e Mark Speed Beside of that some processing related limits can be set e Parts Counter Enable enables
291. ents in current project 3007 decrement the elements in current project 3008 reset the elements in current project to their default start values 3011 open devices scanner card motion controller and image capture device as configured 3012 close opened devices 3013 open devices when not already done and show scanner card state dialogue 3020 this is similar to command 3003 it opens the mark dialogue starts marking automatically and closes it after operation is finished the return information OK for this command is sent only after marking process has finished Different to command 3003 this one automatically sets the mark loop checkbox so that the current project is marked repeatedly Additionally this checkbox is disabled so that user is not able to uncheck it The mark dialogue and mark loop can be left only by pressing the stop button or by clicking the close symbol of the mark dialogue itself 4001 show the about dialogue 4002 show license information 4003 reset the current license 4004 show the credits dialogue All five digit numbers correspond to remaining tool bar buttons and their functionality within the main application please refer to section BeamConstruct above to get detailled information about them 10001 zoom into view 10002 zoom out of view 10003 zoom to view full working area 10004 zoom to fully view selected element 10005 enable pointdrag mode for
292. enu item Save as and save these data at a suitable position using the BEAMP format PLEASE NOTE this project contains all the hardware definitions that have been done during configuration of the software in first steps Whenever you change this configuration and then load this project again the hardware set up of the project is used instead of the changed one of the application To avoid that after loading such a project the menu Project menu item Load default configuration can be chosen to replace the projects hardware set up by the local desired one SECURITY CHECK Next the scanner controller card will be accessed for the first time That means it is opened and initialised and all connected equipment may start working now Thus it is very important to ensure all security regulations are met and nobody can be injured and no damage can be caused also in case laser output or other motion starts spontaneously and unexpectedly Prepare for laser marking Now the created geometry has to be sent to the connected laser and scanner system for processing it on some material To do that the menu Process menu item Mark has to be selected It opens the marking dialogue and tries to access the connected hardware In case it is not possible to access the scanner controller card an error message is shown and none of the buttons of the mark dialogue are usable except the Cancel button to leave the dialogue In this
293. eometries faster in this case big overlapping areas have to be configured to let both heads work on same area in parallel e mark independent geometries faster in this case working areas do not need to overlap In last case it is recommended to use scan heads with the same performance and lasers with same power elsewhere it may happen one marking area slows down the full marking process In first two cases different lasers and scan heads can be used but it is recommended to have the more powerful lasers and the faster scan heads configured at the first position Setting up of a multihead configuration is quite easy and can be done in general project settings please refer to detailled description of settings above There in tab pane Hardware two combo boxes can be found One is for selecting a scanner controller and one for selecting a scan head Both can be separate things but don t have to this depends on the used scanner controller the used scanner controller plug in The difference between both e the scanner controller is a piece of hardware a plug in that accesses this scanner controller device where more than one scan head can be connected to e the scan head is assigned to a single working area and a single laser that is used for this working area it is possible to have more than one scan head connected to a scanner controller In many cases there will be a 1 1 relation where scanner controller selection is equal to scan
294. er and the first position where the user left clicked are connected by a line Drawing functionality can be extended by pressing one of the keys Shift or Ctrl after specifying the starting point of the polygon first click when Shift is held down for one of the following points a horizontal line is drawn next and vertical deviations of current mouse position are ignored When Control is held down a vertical line is drawn and horizontal deviations of current mouse position are ignored Following options are available to modify the parameters of the polygon Line Style the style the polygons lines is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of lines that use exactly one starting and one end point where one single line is drawn between Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points all these lines are connected Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the length of the additional points that form the selected line style
295. er has to be set for each axis DN X where X is the identifier The echo mode has to be set to mode 2 EM 2 2 3 The party mode has to be enabled PY 1 4 These parameters have to be stored to the drives permanently XS J 5 When the homing referencing functionality has to be used the input S1 of the drive has to be connected to the home switch When this configuration was done successfully the drives can be set up within the configuration panel of the plug in First of all the data of the serial interface have to be defined Here the correct port name and the interface settings have to be given in order to establish the communication to the drive Next for every used axis several parameters have to be given Axis Mode specifies the operational mode of the drive here out of the two options planar expects linear input data and rotational expects angular input values in unit degree can be chosen Factor specifies a factor that is used to calculate a metric value in millimetres or a angular value in degrees out of the drive internal position information that is given in unit increments the exact factor depends on your hardware set up and the used gear Low Limit specifies the lower limit in unit millimetres where the axis is allowed to move to at minimum High Limit specifies the upper limit in unit millimetres where the drive is allowed to move to at maximum Axis Name is the device
296. er of it Drawing functionality can be extended by pressing one of the keys Shift or Ctrl after specifying the first corner point of the triangle first click when Shift is held down a horizontal line is drawn next and vertical deviations of current mouse position are ignored When Control is held down a vertical line is drawn and horizontal deviations of current mouse position are ignored Within the triangles property tab pane following options are available Line Style the style the triangles lines are created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of exactly tree points that are connected by three completed lines Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines connecting the three corners including additional points all these lines are connected and therefore form a closed shape Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points between the three corners every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the distance between the additional points that form the selected line style 6 5 4 4 Rectangle When drawi
297. er than 0 and the current drives error code with values smaller than 0 when the drive is in error state this error is reset automatically with the next movement command Numeric OUT2 POS this is the position output for axis 2 similar to OUTO Numeric OUT3 MODE here the current state of axis 2 if given similar to OUT1 Numeric OUT4 POS this is the position output for axis 3 similar to OUTO Numeric OUTS MODE here the current state of axis 3 if given similar to OUT1 Numeric OUT6 POS this is the position output for axis 4 similar to OUTO Numeric OUT7 MODE here the current state of axis 4 if given similar to OUT1 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_panasonic_minas Stepper Motor Driver Parport Using this plug in a stepper motor can be controlled via the parallel port interface the Centronics printer port There also exists a macro that encapsulates the functionalities of this plug in and gives a more comfortable access to it PLEASE NOTE this plug in is a very cheap solution where some things are different to a external real time capable controller which of course is much more expensive So this plug in only works with real parallel port hardware USB to Parallel converters can t be used Second the maximum output current of the parallel port interface has to be checked when the connected motor driver consumes more current additional actions have to be taken or the plug in will not work in worst
298. er to the manuals and specifications of the used lasers The RTC3 scanner controller card plug in can be controlled via its inputs directly by transmitting coordinate values to the X Y and Z inputs or by using the control input where a stream of movement data will be accepted It is recommended not to use both options at the same time without additional synchronisation Here the results may be undefined when direct and control stream commands are set at the same time In case the control input is used the BSY output has to be connected with the source of the control data it signalises if the scanner controller card is still working or if it has finished so that other operations can be triggered Following in and outputs are available for the RTC3 plug in Numeric INO X the X position the scanner has to be moved to setting a new value to this input does not cause any movement it will be invoked only after the Y or Z input was set Numeric IN1 Y the Y position the scanner has to be moved to in case the plug in was configured to use two axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y Numeric IN2 Z the Z position the scanner has to be moved to in case the plug in was configured to use three axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y z Digital IN3 L turns the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR the power the laser has to be driven with here a value in range 0 100 is expe
299. eral elements into one group Due to the kind of this group it is recommended to use only geometries and not to put other ones like motion elements into it An Active Move Group is able to repeat a grouped geometry several times and to combine it with movements so that e g a ring can be processed with a repeated pattern on its surface or to repeat the current geometry on a large working piece that itself is re positioned by using an XY table The active movement functionality only applies in 2D mode or in X Y direction equal to top view Comparing to the Active Split Group here the 224 contents of such a group are not cut or somehow else modified they are marked all in once repeatedly As soon as some geometric elements are grouped together within such an Active Move Group the groups behaviour can be modified using the parameters that are available within the property panel of this group Move horizontal moves the grouped geometry along X axis this option can be combined with Move vertical to define two dimensional movements Move distance the distance a movement has to be done in horizontal direction between two processing cycles Move steps specifies how often processing of the geometry has to be repeated in horizontal direction Move vertical moves the grouped geometry along Y axis this option can be combined with Move horizontal to define two dimensional movements Move distance the distance a movement
300. ere the state flag read only or disabled has to be set within their property dialogue Other elements that might be listed within the same sub menu are provided by external plug ins 22 5 3 2 2 2 Displays Following HMI elements of type Display are supported by the application directly Horizontal Gauge Vertical Gauge these elements linearly display a numeric value Angular Meter with this HMI control a numeric value can be displayed using a round meter similar to a speedometer this element offers additional configuration possibilities for the number of ticks the start and end angle where the value has to be displayed in between and the colours of the different segments of it LC Numeric Display this HMI element offers a visual representation of a number using a 7 segment display for every digit the total number of digits to be displayed and the number of decimal place digits can be configured separately Other elements that might be listed within the same sub menu are provided by external plug ins 5 3 2 2 3 Static Elements Following HMI elements of type Static are supported by the application directly Rectangle a filled rectangle aligned parallel to the X axis here the width and height of the rectangle are independent parameters that can be chosen freely and define width and height of it Line a free line that can have any angle width and height and position define the starting and en
301. erforms a movement with axis 2 similar to INO Numeric IN3 MODE defines the speed for axis 2 or controls its movement similar to IN1 Numeric IN4 POS performs a movement with axis 3 similar to INO Numeric IN5 MODE defines the speed for axis 3 or controls its movement similar to IN1 Binary IN7 CTRL input for 2D X and Y or 3D X Y and Z Control data to manage the movement here the related number of axes has to be configured properly The related output OUT7 emits motion synchronous Control data that can be used by a tool for machinery Numeric OUTO POS this output gives the current position of axis 1 during a movement operation it changes permanently Numeric OUT1 MODE this is a state output that emits a O when the drive has stopped or the current speed otherwise Numeric OUT2 POS this is the position output for axis 2 similar to OUTO Numeric OUT3 MODE here the current state of axis 2 is given similar to OUT1 Numeric OUT4 POS this is the position output for axis 3 similar to OUTO Numeric OUTS MODE here the current state of axis 3 is given similar to OUT1 Digital OUT6 BSY this output signals the busy state of the plug in it is set to HIGH as soon as a motion command arrives and is started to be executed and goes back to LOW only in case none of the axes moves and no more motion commands are available this output has to be connected with the BSY input of the plug in that provide
302. es all plug in that are related to laser marking including scanner controllers lasers and laser marking software interfaces Miscellaneous within that subtype all these flow elements are collected that do not belong to one of the other types Beside of the menu item Add Element the pop up menu contains an item Add Macros It contains the same subtypes like described above Here no plain basic flow elements can be added but complete macros that contain a more complex functionality Internally these macros are grouped flow elements for a description about how these functional groups can be created and used please refer below 5 3 3 4 Editing Flow Objects When flow objects have been added to the Flow Editor they can be edited and modified there First of all it is possible to drag them around with the left mouse button held down on such a flow object This allows you to reposition them Additional editing possibilities like deleting an existing flow object is possible via the known pop up menu again When you press the right mouse button directly over a placed flow object this menu offers additional functionalities including functions to edit the parameters of the flow object Depending on the type of object here a dialogue opens where the configuration and behaviour of the flow object can be changed All these flow element dependent configuration dialogues have some common parameters that can be set up for all kinds of flow e
303. ese parameters and their usage please refer to the manuals and specifications of the 99 used lasers The RTC5 scanner controller card plug in can be controlled via its inputs directly by transmitting coordinate values to the X Y and Z inputs or by using the control input where a stream of movement data will be accepted It is recommended not to use both options at the same time or without additional synchronisation The results may be undefined when direct and control stream commands are set at the same time In case the control input is used the BSY output has to be connected with the source of the control data it signalises if the scanner controller card is still working or if it has finished so that other operations can be triggered Following in and outputs are available for the RTC5 plug in Numeric INO X the X position the scanner has to be moved to setting a new value to this input does not cause any movement it will be invoked only after the Y or Z input was set Numeric IN1 Y the Y position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use two axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y Numeric IN2 Z the Z position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use three axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y z Digital IN3 L turns the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR the power the laser has
304. esting for logging events If how and which events and data have to be logged can be defined within such a logging definitions panel First of all there exist four log types an error log that should be used for events that appear related to an error only user has to take any 20 actions in case of an error anwarning log that should be used for events that appear to a possibly dangerous state where the user has to be informed about user should take some action in case of an error an information log that should be used for events that appear to other states where the user could be informed about user does not necessarily have to react on an information an additional freely usable event log Every element that offers the logging definition panel and the related logging functionality contains definitions for all four log types Here it can be decided if and which events have to cause a reaction for which log type The logged data itself are sent to a special flow object Log Output that is the target for all these data and that offers outputs where the logging information can be fetched For a more detailed description of this flow object please refer below Depending on the type of data that are handled by an HMI object it can be defined which values changes actions have to cause a log event Here following possibilities exist 1 Objects that handle digital data like buttons logging when the value becomes L
305. esulting hatch pattern may be incomplete or may be located outside of the polygon Only two dimensional geometry that surround a surface can be hatched lines and dots are not extended by this element As an other condition a polygon can be hatched only at positions where the outline has a closed line style geometry with dotted lines can t be hatched geometry with a dashed outline is hatched partially only The hatcher offers following parameters Line Style the style the lines the text consists of is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of closed connected lines with as less as possible points Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points all these lines are connected Dashed simple the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style this mode starts with a line at every beginning of a hatch line Dashed interleaved the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style this mode starts with a line and a space alternative at every new beginning of a hatch line Dashed continuous the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style this mode starts with a line or a space at the next beginning of a hat
306. et a wide range of effects and complex geometries these basic data can be combined with other elements that add new data to them or that modify and manipulate them Thus several simple and easy to understand elements can be put together to complex geometries CNConstruct offers following element types that can be used for these combinations Primary Geometry such an element is always the starting point and offers a basic primitive geometric element like a rectangle triangle text or others like this this element can be combined with several other elements like Additional Geometry this elements uses a previously defined geometry and adds some more geometry to it Post processing Tool this element modifies existing geometry Input Element here a indirect influence to existing geometries is possible this kind of element gets data from an external source and inputs it to Primary Geometry elements that can use these data for their own geometry like the text or barcode element Following rules apply to these elements a Primary Geometry element can have several child elements but none of type Primary Geometry Additional Geometry and Post Processing Tools can exist several times as child of a Primary Geometry element but they influence only the state of the geometry like it exists before their own position an Input Element can exist exactly once for a Primary Geometry element and only for such e
307. et for some specific pilot lasers to invert their behaviour Correction Factor Correction Offset pilot lasers normally have a different colour and therefore a different wavelength than the main laser In case some optics are used within the scan head this may result in variances in the marked positions due to a different light refraction factor Using these parameters such variances can be compensated The correction factor is a factor that modifies the size of the pilot lasers output in X and Y direction while the correction offset modifies its absolute position Ready For Marking Signal here a signal can be defined that is emitted on a digital output of the scanner card as soon as the software is ready for marking Output Port here a port can be chosen that has to be used for the Ready For Marking signal Output Number here the bit number at the previously chosen output port has to be selected which shall be used to toggle the Ready For Marking signal please note some scanner controller cards use some of their output bits for specific reserved purposes these bits should not be used for this signal in order to avoid any unwanted and undefined behaviour Invert Output Logic inverts the output value for the ready signal Marking Active Signal here a signal can be defined that is emitted on a digital output of the scanner card as long as marking is in process this signal is NOT identical to the laser gate wich tu
308. exact laser timing does not matter Job End Command this command is sent to the laser after submission of vector data to the scanner card has finished End Ready for Marking Command this command is sent to the laser whenever it no longer needs to be ready for marking it is issued e g in case BeamConstruct closes the Mark dialogue Device Close Command here the command can specified that is sent to the laser when everything is deinitialised and when all connected devices are closed this command is invoked e g when the main application is closed The plug in provides following in and outputs to be used within the Flow Editor 82 Digital IN3 L can be used to turn the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR controls the laser power this functionality is currently not supported and does not result in data sent to the laser Numeric IN5 FREQ controls the lasers output frequency this functionality is currently not supported and does not result in data sent to the laser Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to control the laser Digital OUT6 BSY signals if the plug in is still communicating with the laser HIGH or if it has finished all operations so that other components can start its operation this input has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_Ic_ generic
309. f grey a luminance based conversion is done here Mirror X Y the image is mirrored along the X or Y axis The plug in is polled by the main application periodically Binary OUT7 emits the captured image This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_grabimg Data Dummy This plug in offers no functionality except than forwarding data from an input unmodified to the related output This it does not offer any specific configuration parameter This plug in can be used for testing purposes even tough it handles data only it was put into this functional category so that it can be used for device related tests 65 Digi INO data are forwarded to Digi OUTO Digi IN1 data are forwarded to Digi OUT1 Numeric IN2 data are forwarded to Numeric OUT2 Numeric IN3 data are forwarded to Numeric OUT3 Char IN4 data are forwarded to Char OUT4 Char IN5 data are forwarded to Char OUT5 Binary IN6 data are forwarded to Binary OUT6 Binary IN7 data are forwarded to Binary OUT7 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_dummy GPS NMEA SIRF binary This plug in can be used for GPS based positioning It is able to access a GPS device via serial interface or via USB connection that is mapped to a serial interface like most GPS mouses are doing it It requires a GPS device that supports the NMEA ASCII protocol or the SIRF binary protocol For the plug in itself only the serial connection parameters have to be c
310. file Char OUTO when a file was selected and the file dialogue was left with OK the complete path to the selected file is returned here Char OUT1 when a file name was specified by the user and the file dialogue was left with OK the complete path to the selected file is returned here when this file already exists it can be overwritten by the application because in this case the user already confirmed that Char OUT2 when a directory was selected and the file dialogue was left with OK the complete path to that directory is returned here This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_filedialogue 5 3 3 7 2 9 10 Operation Flow Objects Currently there exist no internal flow objects of this type 5 3 3 7 2 10 External lO Operation Flow Objects AS i Serial Interface This plug in can be used to access AS i devices and to exchange digital data with them It supports 240 output and 240 input lines AS i device range 1A 31A and 1B 31B The AS i master can be controlled via serial interface The serial parameters have to be set within the configuration panel together with a Poll Delay value that decides how often the inputs have to be polled for changes A mapping of the inputs and outputs has not to be configured they are assigned to the 8 inputs and outputs of the plug in statically Digital INO AS i inputs 1A 8A Digital IN1 AS i inputs 9A 16A Digital IN2 AS i inputs 17A 24A Digital IN3 AS i inputs 25A 31A
311. fy that neither the Software nor any other technical data received from the Vendor will be exported outside the Commonwealth of Australia except as authorized and as permitted by the laws and regulations of the Commonwealth of Australia If you have rightfully obtained the software outside of the Commonwealth of Australia you agree that you will not re export the Software nor any other technical data received from the Vendor except as permitted by the laws and regulations of the Commonwealth of Australia and the laws and regulations of the jurisdiction in which you obtained the Software 10 Agents and Third Party Purchasers If you are acquiring the Software on behalf of another person or entity you represent and warrant that you have the authority to bind the party or entity for which you are acquiring the Software to the terms and conditions of this Agreement 11 General Terms and Conditions This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Australia without regard to or application of its choice of law rules or principles If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of this Agreement or portion thereof to be unenforceable that provision of the Agreement shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to affect the intent of the parties and the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect This Agreement constitutes the entire agr
312. g at positions with the place holder f1 Numeric OUT2 output for values extracted out of the input string at positions with the place holder f2 Numeric OUT3 output for values extracted out of the input string at positions with the place holder f3 Numeric OUT4 output for values extracted out of the input string at positions with the place holder f4 Char OUT5 output for values extracted out of the input string at positions with the place holder s5 Char OUT6 output for values extracted out of the input string at positions with the place holder s6 Char OUT7 output for values extracted out of the input string at positions with the place holder s7 This plug in is located in flowplugins char2mixed CNConstruct to Control This plug in converts CNConstruct project files to a stream of binary control data structures Comparing to the plug ins that convert static CSV or HPGL vector data this one supports all the dynamic features that CNConstruct offers This includes counting of serial numbers setting date time information for every new process cycle manipulating the contents of a project via the inputs of the plug in synchronising different motion information and others more The resulting control data then can be handled by motion elements like the MDrive plug in and to access tools like a mill to process materials Before using this plug in following parameter has to be set within t
313. g geometry thus it requires an outline that consists of lines that are short enough to let the tool apply its function elsewhere the result would not look like expected So within the parameters of the elements that have to be modified the line style has to be set to a non continuous mode for an example connected lines dashed lines or dots with a small distance should be used here 7 7 6 1 Sine Distortion This Post processing Tool applies a sine waveform to existing geometry This tool does not add any new points or lines to existing geometry thus it requires an outline that consists of lines that are much shorter than the wavelength Elsewhere the result would not look like a real sine waveform Following parameters can be set for this tool Direction the direction the waveform has to be applied to beside the two values that are relevant for 2D data Horizontal sets a sine parallel to X axis Vertical sets a waveform parallel to Y axis four additional options are available that are relevant for 3D data only These options can be used to specify the direction of the amplitude and the direction the wave grows into Wavelength the length of a single wave Amplitude the amplitude of the sine wave Offset an offset that defines at which position within the wave the sine calculation has to be started this offset can be used to shift the waveform 7 7 6 2 Curve Distortion Using this tool an existin
314. g geometry can be bent around a defined centre point to get a radial round shape It is useful e g in combination with the Text Primary Geometry element to define radial texts Curve distortion is available for 2D elements only it can be applied to three dimensional geometry too but its distortion is always done in X and Y direction with an axis around Z similar to the top view This tool does not add any new points or lines to existing geometry thus it requires an outline that consists of lines that are short enough for a result that looks like an bent outline Following parameters can be used to influence the result Alignment this field specifies where the centre point is located relative to the geometry that has to be processed Radius the radius of the circle the geometry is bent to this is the distance from the middle of the geometry to the radial centre point Angle Offset an offset for the bending angle starting point using this value the geometry can be shifted 219 7 7 7 Data Input Elements This type of element influences geometry only in a very indirect way it provides data that can be used by Primary Geometry elements to create their geometry So all types of Primary Geometry elements that accept such input data can be combined with all types of Data Input elements Of course it is not possible to have more than one Data Input element per Primary Geometry element To add such a Data Input element th
315. g in of course does not perform any translation the language setting is responsible for a good native pronunciation of the given texts Char INO the text that has to be spoken using voice 1 Char IN4 the text that has to be spoken using voice 2 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_speak USB UIRT Using this plug in the infra red remote control device USB UIRT can be used to receive and to send IR codes Sending can be done by using raw text strings that represent the code in a USBUIRT device compatible format or by calling a named code out of a list These lists can be created using the UlRTeach application that is part of the full OpenAPC package Within the configuration panel of this plug in the interface has to be configured where the device is connected with not necessary on Windows for other Operating systems a device like dev ttyUSBx has to be specified Beside of that up to ten different code lists can be predefined for later usage these code lists need to have a format like it is generated from the UlRTeach application These code lists consist of name code pairs where every code should have a unique name that identifies it Char INO NAME a code name as it exists in the currently used code list when a code with this name is found the UIRT device sends the related IR code Char IN1 CODE a raw code in UIRT PRONTO format this code is sent independently from any code list Numeric IN2 INDEX a i
316. ged and other things more 8 3 Correction Definition Dialogue When menu Project New or toolbar button New Project is selected a dialogue opens where focal and pincushion distortion parameters can be set There exists an other dialogue that provides only focal correction parameters and that can be selected via menu Edit Recalc Focal Correction This dialogues parameters are a subset of the parameters of the correction definition dialogue and therefore are not described separately This dialogue provides following general parameters e Z Distance the shortest distance between last mirror and working area The correction dialogue provides following parameters for pincushion distortion e Checkbox Pincushion Distortion the 2D pincushion distortion parameters are applied to the newly generated correction table only when this checkbox is set e X angle the distortion strength angle in X direction e Y angle the distortion strength angle in Y direction This dialogue provides following parameters for focal correction e Checkbox Focal Correction the depth focal distortion parameters are applied to the newly generated correction table only when this checkbox is set e Working Area Size the size of the working area independent from its real shape here always a squared size is assumed and the biggest used size has to be entered here 8 4 Correct Single and Multiple Points Dialogue Both the single and the mu
317. ggered numeric gate where the clock input is connected to a clock source that triggers it using the desired period This plug in offers several possibilities to set up and configure the behaviour and the layout of the plotted graphs Beside the standard configuration panels of the HMI object the following additional panels can be used for setting up the parameters Configuration e Initial Graphs the managed graphs can be enabled and disabled to show and to hide them This parameter specifies how much graphs counted from 1 are enabled initially Maximum Graphs the maximum number of graphs this flow element will handle here up to six graphs can be configured for single axis modes and up to three graphs when two inputs are combined to feed the X and Y axis with data please see the drawing direction below e Direction specifies the direction the graphs move to when a new value is set at an input here one of the modes X the input data influence the height of the graph while the width is updated automatically Y the input influences the width the height is incremented automatically and X Y combined the inputs 1 and A 2 and B 3 and C are combined so that one sets the X value and one the Y value can be chosen e Maximum Graph Length specifies the maximum number of data a graph may collect until it is reset e Data Skip Mode this mode specifies the method of skipping dropping data in case the maximum length of a gra
318. ght be interesting for the movement or the tool here the data within the CSV file have to fit to the capabilities of the used motion element or tool Additional Parameter 2 optional this is a parameter that can be used freely for some additional values that might be interesting for the movement or the tool Additional Parameter 3 optional this is a parameter that can be used freely for some additional values Additional Parameter 4 optional this is a parameter that can be used freely for some additional values Additional Parameter 5 optional this is a parameter that can be used freely for some additional values Additional Parameter 6 optional this is a parameter that can be used freely for some additional values 123 The rows of such a CSV line have to consist of numbers as soon as any other character is detected parsing of the current line is stopped dropping all the data in case the operation failed during parsing of the mandatory coordinates or it is stopped using the data that could be fetched until this position in case failure happened during parsing the optional values Before using this plug in following parameters have to be set within the configuration panel Default Filename path to a predefined CSV file that has to be loaded and converted Input Data here it has to be chosen if the CSV file contains only two rows for 2D X and Y coordinates or three rows for 3D X Y and Z coordinates that have
319. ghted points are moved together Comparing to this a point editing mode is available that gives the possibility to highlight and edit all points of an element separately For more details about this mode please refer above For the parameters described here the same is true as described for the manipulation functionalities within the drawing panel When the changes are applied to a primary element they influence the subsequent elements too When an additional element is selected there is no feedback to its parent primary element the changes may override the parents geometry 7 7 2 3 The Element Tab Pane Comparing to the Geometry Pane this one contains more global parameters of the selected element Depending on the type of selected element only some of the parameters are accessible Type this is an informational field and therefore read only it displays the type name of the element Name here the name of the element is shown and can be changed this name is auto generated when the element is created and shown within this pane and within the element tree on the main windows right hand side Layer BeamConstruct supports several drawing and displaying layers that can be used to separate parts of the whole project from each other and to make it easier to manage complex projects These layers can be hidden and shown depending on which has to be visible Using the combo box provided here the selected element can be assigned to one of the a
320. going on within a script the interpreter can be executed with the additional parameter v verbose which causes the IL interpreter to print out much more information When this option is enabled the current line number the interpreter is working with is displayed together with the command that is executed there Within the following sections the commands supported by the interpreter are described 5 7 5 3 1 Commands according to IEC 61131 3 Here a short overview about the IEC 61131 3 conform commands is given For a full and detailed description please refer to the original specification of the international standard LD loads the operand into the accumulator the operand can be a variable or a constant expression LDN loads the negated value of the operand into the accumulator the operand can be a variable or a constant expression of an integer or boolean type ST stores the content of the accumulator into the operand variable STN stores the negated content of the accumulator into the operand variable this command can be used only with integer or boolean data types for both accumulator and operand s sets the operand data type BOOL to TRUE when the content of the accumulator is TRUE or not equal to 0 R sets the operand data type BOOL to FALSE when the content of the accumulator is FALSE or equal to 0 AND bitwise AND of the accumulator and the operand this command can be used only with integer or bool
321. h are mandatory An additional Z value is required only in case a 3D CSV file is read in This can be used to generate three dimensional tool data All other values are optional In case they do not exist the related fields of the binary Control structure are set to 0 or to a value that was found within the CSV file preceding The given additional parameters always apply for the current coordinates As an example there is a new power value set within a row This value becomes active before the movement to the given coordinate is started means the new power is valid for the way to the coordinate that was given in the same line like the new power value Following CSV rows are possible X mandatory the X value of the current position coordinate in unit mm Y mandatory the Y value of the current position coordinate in unit mm Z mandatory in case X Y and Z values have been configured as input data the Z value of the current position coordinate in unit mm ON optional specifies if the tool has to be turned on 1 or off 0 for the movement to the coordinates given in the same line if no value is specified here the preceding state is used or 0 in case no ON value was set until now Power optional the power a connected tool has to be used with here a value in range 0 100 is possible if no value is specified here the preceding state is used or 0 in case no power value was set within the current file Frequency optio
322. h ones are installed there Alignment the text is always drawn from a fixed position that is specified by the left mouse click when setting the text initially using this list it can be chosen how the text has to be aligned to this position left centred or right Orientation this list specifies the direction the single characters of the text have to be drawn Spacing this value can be used to modify the distance between the characters here a value of 100 is the distance that is specified by the used font smaller values set the characters closer to each other larger ones stretch it to a bigger distance Kerning this value can be used to influence the kerning distance for fonts that support it here 100 is equal to the kerning value that it specified by the font bigger values set the characters with a kerning value closer to each other values smaller than 100 set a bigger distance between them this parameter is different to the Spacing value it only influences character combinations that make use of kerning Arc Length when creating geometry out of the available font information depending on the style of the chosen font different round parts have to be created this value specifies the segment length for these round parts the smaller it is the more accurate the result is but the more data are used to hold 173 it Set Monospaced when this option is checked equal distance is set between all characters indepen
323. hanges that was configured for this output within the settings panel of the plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_ctrl2tooldata CSV to Characters This plug in is able to split single lines of CSV data to extract the data fields out of them and to emit the contained values at its outputs Here all data are threatened as characters means also numbers are output as texts Such numbers in textual representation have to be converted to real numeric data types explicitly here e g the Character To Number conversion element can be used Whenever a field within a CSV line does not contain data the related output does emit nothing no empty string is sent in this case Within the configuration panel the CSV separation character has to be specified here it can be chosen between tabulator semicolon comma space and colon Please note the use of a comma to separate CSV 47 fields excludes the use of floating point number data fields that use a comma too Beside of that for every output a number has to be specified that corresponds to the field number of the CSV line that has to be emitted at this output Char INO CSV input for the CSV data whenever a new line is set it is converted and split automatically the fields are sent at the related outputs as configured Char OUTO Char OUT7 output for a CSV data field as configured within the plug in settings panel This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_csv2cha
324. har IN1 char IN7 data inputs the values that are set here are available at the related outputs only in case GATE is set to HIGH Char OUT1 char OUT7 data outputs that become active only in case the gate is opened Binary Triggered Gate This triggered gate expects a binary data block at input O and emits it at the opposite output as soon as an digital signal 1 is received at the related input Binary INO the input for the value that has to be emitted for every trigger signal Digi IN1 Digi IN7 the inputs for the trigger signals that cause the emission of the data set at input 0 Binary OUT1 Binary OUT7 the outputs for the data that are assigned to the trigger signal inputs Binary Gate This element can be used to enable or interrupt the flow of binary data Comparing to the triggered gate the digital input does not cause the emission of data that have been stored before here the input allows incoming data to be output immediately HIGH to enable the gate or to be stopped LOW for a disabled gate When the GATE input is set to HIGH that does not cause a data transmission immediately but only after the next data packets arrive Digital INO GATE as long as this input is set to LOW all the outputs are disabled no incoming data are output Binary IN1 binary IN7 data inputs the values that are set here are available at the related outputs only in case GATE is set to HIGH Binary OUT1 binary OUT7
325. has to be done in vertical direction between two processing cycles Move steps specifies how often processing of the geometry has to be repeated in vertical direction Move radial defines a movement operation onto a ring this option can not be combined with one of the previous splitting direction modes Diameter the total diameter of the ring where the geometry has to be marked at Move angle the movement angle for every split the size of the single split pieces result out of this angle and the diameter of the ring Move steps specifies how often processing of the geometry has to be repeated on the ring Keystone correction when marking the inner side of a ring the laser beam has to be slanted in order to hit only the lower inner side of the ring and not the upper outer side too Resulting from that the length of the beam varies dependent on the X Y position of the geometry which results in a distortion when no special optic is used Using the keystone correction this distortion can be suppressed so that the marking result will look like expected This correction is done by setting an as a percentage correction factor and by defining the side of the geometry this factor may apply to The correction factor specifies how much the geometry shall grow or shrink according to its original size at the outer position where the full distortion has to be expected Process order this order applies to the planar movement modes and
326. he Interlock Server can be watched by the script To do that three function blocks isX cb digi data isX cb num data and isX cb char data can be defined within the script to receive information about data changes within the interlock server Here the x has to be replaced by the number of the server connection these function blocks belong to so currently their names are isO cb digi data is0 cb num dataand is0 cb char data These function blocks are called in parallel and independent from the position of the main script They do not return to a position within that script after they have been finished For a more detailed description of these function blocks please refer below ISxC establishes a connection to a local Interlock Server the success of this operation is returned in accumulator as BOOL after this command was done successfully all changes of data within the Interlock Server are notified at the isX_cb YYY data where X is the number of the server connection and YYY specifies the data type it handles function blocks ISxRA this command requests all data that are currently managed by the interlock server the result is sent to the local callback function blocks isX_cb YYY_data please refer below this command has to be handled with care it may cause a big load of data LDISx loads a value from the Interlock Server into the accumulator the resulting accumulators data type depends on the IO of the loaded data block as operan
327. he axis has stopped completely IWH Robot Controller This is a macro that incorporates the IWH Robot Plug In as described above and offers a more comfortable access to its functions via its extended lO possibilities Char IN GET_CAS this is the first part of the two step command to GET a wafer out of a cassette Here the station name of the cassette has to be set Setting this name does not cause any action and a station name can be overridden by any other name as long as no data are set to the next input Numeric IN GET_CAS_SL this is the second part of the two step command to GET a wafer out of a cassette here the slot number to fetch the wafer from has to be set The robot starts its movement as soon as the number is set at this input using the station name of the previous command and the slot number given here Char IN PUT_CAS this is the first part of the two step command to PUT a wafer into a cassette Here the station name of the cassette has to be set Setting this name does not cause any action as long as no data are set to the next input Numeric IN PUT_CAS_SL this is the second part of the two step command to PUT a wafer out of a cassette here the slot number to put the wafer into has to be set The robot starts its movement as soon as the number is set at this input using the station name of the previous command and the slot number given here 119 Char IN GET_STAT this command can be used to GET a wafer from the defau
328. he configuration panel Default Filename path to a predefined CNCP file that has to be loaded and converted this project file is 45 loaded at startup of the application and can be replaced dynamically via character input IN1 This conversion plug in uses the following in and outputs Digital INO CLK start conversion of the loaded CNConstruct project as soon as a HIGH value is given here the complete file is converted so that the related output emit a continuous stream of data according to the values found within the file Char IN1 FILE specifies and loads a new CNCP file that will be converted when the next HIGH signal is given to INO Char IN2 input for dynamic text data that can modify the currently loaded CNCP file in case the related input element is used within that project Char IN3 input for dynamic text data that can modify the currently loaded CNCP file in case the related input element is used within that project Char IN4 input for dynamic text data that can modify the currently loaded CNCP file in case the related input element is used within that project Digital IN7 BSY this is a synchronisation input that has to be connected with the BSY outputs of all motion elements that receive control data from this plug in Binary OUTO CTRL output for binary control data that contain movement and tool information according to the values out of the loaded file here a stream of data is emitted until
329. he file name libio_pri_barcode dll or libio_pri_barcode so Here two images libio_pri_barcode1 png with a size of 25x25 pixels and libio_pri_barcode2 png with a size of 15x15 pixels have to be put into the same folder After next software start the barcode appears with the new images To replace all other images PNG files with special names have to be placed in folder icons newprj png for the New symbol openprj png for the Load project symbol saveprj png for the Save project symbol e saveprjas png for the Save project as symbol e quit png for the Quit application symbol e zoomin png for the Zoom in symbol e Zoomout png for the Zoom out symbol e zoomworkarea png for the Zoom full working area symbol e Zzoomselected png for the Zoom selected entity symbol 239 e pointdrag png for the Point drag mode symbol 7 16 BeamLock BeamLock is a tool that can be used to apply some own lock rules to a system This might be useful e g for machine integrators that ship hardware with installed BeamConstruct to customers before the full invoice is paid In this case a lock can be placed on such a system that becomes active after a given time This means the machines functionality is time limited Now the user would have to enter a password that is provided by the vendor of the machine only when invoic
330. he laser has to be driven with in standby mode Field Left Position Field Upper Position defines the upper left coordinate of the field that has to be used by the scanner Field Size the total size of the field that is used by the scanner this parameter together with the left and upper position specifies the coordinates input vectors have to be located within in case there are input data which define a position outside this field they will not be marked Swap X and Y swaps the input X and Y coordinate to exchange X and Y axis values of the scanner Mirror X Mirror Y mirror the input coordinates On the fly factor X On the fly factor Y specifies the factor in X or Y direction for marking on the fly operation this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card Default Here several default parameters can be defined that are used in case the direct axis control inputs X Y and Z are used or in case control data are used that do not contain motion speed delay information Jump Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned off Mark Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned on Laser Off Delay Laser On Delay Jump Delay Mark Delay Polygon Delay these delays are used during marking operation they become active when the laser is turned off or on when the scanner jumps to an
331. he number of cycles a serial number has to be left unchanged until it is updated here a value of three as an example would mean a serial number is updated and incremented only at every third marking cycle Beat Offset this parameter corresponds to the preceding one it adds an offset to the beat count means it defines at which number it has to be started to count for the number of Beat Counts Numeric Base by default a serial number consists of numeral values in range 0 9 which means the numeric base is 10 this parameter can be used to define any other numeric base so that less numeral values are used Numeric Base lt 10 or in a way where letters in range A Z are added for counting the serial number Numeric Base gt 10 Minimum Digits this parameter specifies the number of digits a serial number has to consist of at minimum independent from their real value in case a number would have less digits than specified here it would be filled with one or more preceding zeros Time Offset here an offset can be specified using freely selectable numbers of years days hours and minutes this offset is added to the time information that can be incorporated into the resulting data and can be used e g to define a best before date counted from the current date time Format String this format string defines the layout and contents of the resulting data which are handed over to the assigned Primary Geometry element Here any
332. he numbers that have to be converted Digital OUTO OVL the clock overflow signal is emitted whenever an overflow condition appeared during the conversion for outputs that react on the external clock This overflow clock signal e g can be transferred to the CLK input of the next Number to Characters converter Char OUT1 char OUT7 the output signals that are emitted dependent on the input values and the configuration of this object Overflow the numeric overflow output when the conversion operation did not match the rules defined within the configuration of the flow element so that no text output could be found that belongs to the number at an input this number is sent to the overflow output Together with the OUTO OVL signal both can be used for a next conversion step to check some more conversion conditions Thus several conversion objects can be cascaded in order to implement complex conversion rules 41 Number to CMD Value Pair A CMD Value pair is a combination of a value and a command name that is assigned to this value Such pairs can be used to connect to external applications or to identify a value for other purposes Using this element numerical data can be converted to such pairs Within the configuration of the flow element a command name can be assigned for every input The values that are received at this input will be combined with that name to the pair of command and value Numeric INO Numeric IN7 th
333. he operating system can be given via the Execute Command plug in here an instance of the Windows Explorer can be started This of course should be allowed only for higher level users and not for standard operators For Linux operating system the situation is similar here a window manager should be chosen where no access to the operating system is given and where OpenPlayer can be started automatically and as one and only application Operating system access can be given the same way via the command execution plug in that e g could open a terminal or something other useful 5 5 1 OpenPlayer Command Line Options The OpenPlayer can be executed from command line or from within a script using the following syntax and parameters OpenPlayer exe b x xpos y ypos lt projectname gt or for non Windows operating systems OpenPlayer b x xpos y ypos lt projectname gt OpenPlayer or OpenPlayer exe is the applications name that has to be used always b is an optional parameter that decorates the OpenPlayers window with a border so that the user can grab it and change its position by dragging it x is an optional parameter that can be used to specify its X position which is normally 0 left side of the main screen this parameter has to be followed by the custom X position in unit pixels y is an optional parameter that can be used to specify its Y position which is normally 0 left side of the main s
334. he positions it has to be measured where the points have been marked really The resulting values have to be entered in single or multiple point correction dialogue that can be opened via menu Edit Correct Single Point or menu Edit Correct Multiple Points After entering the nominal coordinate s the coordinates of the points within BeamConstruct and the actual coordinate s the real coordinates as measured after marking the current correction table is modified at the given position s in order to reflect the deviation s at this these point s This operation has to be repeated with the same or varied point coordinates until the resulting correction table offers the required accuracy Please note these correction operations influence the correction table only in X and Y direction A possibly existing focal correction is damaged by these operations Because of that for full 3D correction the focal correction has to be applied again after this By selecting menu Edit Recalc Focal Correction the related correction is re calculated according to the changed positions of 2D correction coordinates Additionally the CorrCorrect tool provides the same Geometry panel like it is known from BeamConstruct 249 So when the current correction table that is shown in the middle of the application is selected here several operations can be performed It can be scaled mirrored centred rotated the total position can be chan
335. he scanner Field Size the total size of the field that is used by the scanner this parameter together with the left and upper position specifies the coordinates input vectors have to be located within in case there are input data which define a position outside this field they will not be marked Swap X and Y swaps the input X and Y coordinate to exchange X and Y axis values of the scanner Mirror X Mirror Y mirror the input coordinates The printer driver based scanner controller plug in can be controlled via its inputs by transmitting a stream of movement data to the control input Numeric IN6 CMD this input can be used to set additional commands and to perform additional control operations using them here following command values are supported 0 stop marking immediately and flush the list of control commands that may be already stored within the plug in Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to move the scanner and to control the laser such a stream can contain complex marking operation information Digital OUT6 BSY signals if marking is still active HIGH or if the scanner controller card has finished all operations this input has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data it is necessary to synchronize several movement operations This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_sc_printer 89
336. he time the button is pressed does not influence the motion e Ref start referencing of the related axis For planar movement axes the images of the buttons can be changed within the motion axis configuration panel of the general project settings Depending on the real movement direction left right up down in out a different symbol can be shown here in order to make it easier for the operator to decide which direction a motion will use The same is true for the axis names they can be configured via the axis alias value in general project settings The third tab pane Parts is related to part counting its buttons and functionality will be enabled only when part counting is enabled for the current project can be done in general project settings dialogue When part counting mode is enabled the large counter shows the current number of parts already marked When the limit specified in project settings and in input field To produce is reached no more marking operations are possible until the user presses button Reset Counter The tab pane Progress shows some information regarding the current marking progress its functionality is limited to some specific applications First of all it is feed with timing and operational data only when sliced 3D marking data are processed Next it will not show the real marking state of the connected controller but only the state of data sent to the scanner card So when a scanner controller card with
337. head selection but in case one scanner controller plug in is able to control more scan heads independently this separation between controller and head is necessary 237 The same can be found in pen settings please refer to description above There the scan head can be selected means different pen parameters can be set for every working area independent from the fact which scanner controller plug in really controls this head 7 14 lOSelect Mode Normally a project can be loaded by using the related menu item and by selecting the path and name of the project file manually This can be automated using lOSelect mode it is possible to read the state of digital input port of a connected scanner controller and to use the value received from there to automatically load a project file When this mode ins enabled marking dialogue is opened and the state of the used digital input port changes a new project is loaded and can be processed during next marking operation In case the input state changes when a marking process is still running loading of the new project is performed as soon as the current marking cycle was finished To set up OSelect mode following steps are necessary 1 create a subdirectory that will hold all the project files 2 create the project files that have to be loaded here the filename has to consist of a number followed by the file extension beamp The number has to correspond to the bitpattern detected on
338. hen a floating point value is processed by a whole numbered operation the number is rounded before CHARS Plain text including all printable purple alphanumerical characters BINARY _ Other data of variable size variable yellow Binary data are of a defined type and length the data package itself contains that information internally Different to the other data types the user has to take care about connecting elements with binary data flow types they can handle So e g image data can be sent only to flow elements that are able to handle image data the operation will fail or the data package will be dropped by the receiver when such data are sent to e g elements that expect sound data The colour that represents a special data type can be found within the flow symbols in and outputs 5 3 3 1 The Flow Symbols The symbols that are used within the Flow Editor use a specific layout to symbolise their behaviour They 25 consist of small rectangles On the upper side the incoming flow connections connections can be connected with the inputs These inputs are small arrows that point into the symbol They use the colour that represents the data type this input is able to handle In general it is possible to connect several flow lines with the same input But it is recommended for digital flows and digital inputs to concatenate them using a logical flow operation like an logic OR and connect the resulting single flow line
339. here are input data which define a position outside this field they will not be marked Swap X and Y swaps the input X and Y coordinate to exchange X and Y axis values of the scanner Mirror X Mirror Y mirror the input coordinates On the fly factor X On the fly factor Y specifies the factor in X or Y direction for marking on the fly operation this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card Default Here several default parameters can be defined that are used in case the direct axis control inputs X Y and Z are used or in case control data are used that do not contain motion speed delay information Jump Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned off Mark Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned on Laser Off Delay Laser On Delay Jump Delay Mark Delay Polygon Delay these delays are used during marking operation they become active when the laser is turned off or on when the scanner jumps to an other position when it moves to an other position while marking or when the movement direction is changed during marking for a detailed description of these values their usage and their influence to the marking result please refer to the RTC5 manual All following tab panes contain laser specific definitions that are used depending on the selected laser type For information about th
340. hich of the boards has to be used by this plug in Laser type the type of the connected laser the field that was selected here directly corresponds to the laser tab panes where some additional laser specific settings can be done for a detailed description of the available options please refer to the manual of the RTC4 and to the manuals of the laser device vendor Power output the laser output power can be controlled via an additional output the kind of output to be used can be defined here Number of Axes specifies if the scanner controller has to operate in 2D or 3D mode this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card Correction file the ctb correction file to be used for operation provided by the vendor of the scan head Firmware file the hex firmware file to be used to operate the scanner controller card provided by SCANLAB Stand By Frequency frequency the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Stand By Length pulse length the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Field Left Position Field Upper Position defines the upper left coordinate of the field that has to be used by the scanner Field Size the total size of the field that is used by the scanner this parameter together with the left and upper position specifies the coordinates input vectors have to be located within in case there are input data which define a posi
341. his macro contains the Modbus RTU Master plug in and offers the possibility to access a Modbus slave After the Modbus data access highly depends on the purpose of the slave and the set up of the plug in this macro offers access to a slave using one specific configuration Depending on the real requirements it could be possible to change this macro To use it the internally used plug in has to be configured first here the serial connection parameters and the slave node address have to be set Digital IN DINOO DIN31 these inputs send single bits to the connected slave and change the state of the related outputs Numeric NINOO NINO3 these inputs send numeric values to the connected slave and change the state of its related outputs Digital OUT DOUT00 DOUT31 these outputs return the state of the inputs of the connected slave Numeric NOUTOO NOUTOS these outputs return the state of the related values of the connected slave Modbus TCP Master This macro uses the Modbus TCP Master plug in and offers the possibility to access a Modbus slave After the Modbus data access highly depends on the purpose of the slave and the set up of the plug in this macro offers access to a slave using one specific configuration Depending on the real requirements it could be possible to change this macro To use it the internally used plug in has to be configured first here the network connection parameters have to be set Digital IN DINOO D
342. his option can be combined with Split horizontal to define two dimensional movements Split distance the split size in vertical direction Split radial defines a splitting operation onto a ring this option can not be combined with one of the previous splitting modes Direction specifies the direction for the rotational splitting here it can be chosen between Horizontal and Vertical the axis that is assigned to this direction has to be aligned properly Diameter the total diameter of the ring where the split pieces have to be marked at Split angle the movement angle for every split the size of the single split pieces result out of this angle and the diameter of the ring Invert motion direction this option has to be used in case the inner side of a ring has to be processed there an inverted motion direction is required to concatenate the pieces in correct order Process order this order applies to the planar splitting modes and defines in which order the pieces have to be processed Left to right horizontal direction always starts from left Right to left horizontal direction always starts from right Zig zag from left horizontal direction starts from left and performs zig zag movements Zig zag from right horizontal direction starts from right and performs zig zag movements Top to bottom vertical movement starts from top Bottom to top vertical movement starts from bottom In
343. his plug in acts as Modbus slave and is able to accept incoming Modbus master connections via a TCP IP network connection For every of the data in and outputs a different operation mode can be defined within the configuration panel The valid range of the input depends on that operation mode and its capabilities conform to the Modbus specification Independent from the configured ranges and addresses this plug in internally manages the whole address range that is available for a Modbus device Beside of that it is possible to add more than one Modbus TCP Slave plug in to a project and to define different I O addresses for them in this case all of them will share the same address space and act as one single device As global configuration this plug in expects the IP and port number the slave has to listen at Two other options give the possibility to swap the bytes of the used address offset which might be necessary for some Modbus slaves and to write protocol related logging information into a file The last option can be used to find the reason for communication problems but should be handled with care such a log file can become very big in a very short time depending on the traffic that is handled by this plug in An other slave specific value can be set via the Maximum number of incoming connections it specifies how much slaves are allowed to connect at the same time As soon as this limit is reached all additional connection attempts wi
344. ibed above _in every case_ have to be done twice using BeamLock exe once using this users acount and once using a fully privileged Administrator account When doing these steps two times it is recommended to use the same passwords in both cases to avoid confustion when end user plays around with the used installation and does changes in environment BeamConstruct is used PLEASE NOTE For Linux it is assumed BeamConstruct is not executed as root but as a non privileged user In this case the steps described above in every case have to be done twice using BeamLock once using this users acount and once using the root account When doing these steps two times it is recommended to use the same passwords in both cases to avoid confustion when end user plays around with the used installation and does changes in environment BeamConstruct is used 240 7 17 BeamServer Remote Control Interface 7 17 1 Overview BeamConstruct provides an operation mode where whole application can be remote controlled This can be used to do some script or program controlled automation or to hide BeamConstruct while visually performing some other tasks in foreground To dothis a special program is provided BeamServer When it is started BeamServer exe under Windows BeamServer when using Linux instead of BeamConstruct a TCP server socket is created using port 11350 Now an external application can connect to this socket and send some specific ASClIl commands These com
345. ication data are valid only with the formatted transfer modes and require a server software that is able to understand this format for an example the Network Receiver plug in is able to handle this format other examples can be found within the SDK s OpenAPC interface implementations Next one of the following operation modes has to be selected Command Value a mode for formatted data transmissions that consists of pairs of data first the payload data DATA have to be set and second a unique command CMD has to be given this command is assigned to the payload data and causes the transmission of both the other communication partner will receive them as a pair Plain every data block is transferred immediately the CMD input behaves like the char payload data this is also a formatted transmission mode the binary data are transmitted using a special header that describes the data all other data are transmitted as text values and are terminated by a CR Raw every data block is transferred immediately and the data are not formatted in any way Char INO CMD input for a command value Digital IN1 DATA input for a digital value that has to be sent Numeric IN2 DATA input for a numeric value that has to be sent Character IN3 DATA input for text that has to be sent Binary IN4 DATA input for binary data that have to be sent Char OUTO CMD output for a command that was received this output emits
346. ied Digital INO trigger signal to emit a new digital output value at OUTO Digital IN1 trigger signal to emit a new numeric output value at OUT1 in configured range from 0 to the parameter set in plug in configuration Save Image Using this plug in binary image data can be saved to disk as image file Such an image file can be opened by other applications later This plug in supports different common file formats to save the image with Depending on the kind of image data and depending on the intended usage of the pictures an appropriate image format has to be chosen This plug in is able to handle up to four independent parameter sets for images that can be set within the configuration panel separately Default Filename the default file name that has to be used to create the picture file 128 File Format the file format of the picture here one of the formats PNG GIF PNM XBM XPM BMP or JPEG can be chosen PLEASE NOTE when the project is moved to a different platform or system it has to be made sure that the default paths given for the images are still valid according to the naming conventions of the target system Binary INO IMG1 the binary image data that have to be saved to disk the file is written using the current default file name 1 as soon as binary data arrive at this input Char IN1 FILE1 overwrites the default file name 1 Binary IN2 IMG2 the binary image data that have to be save
347. iem AM or post meridiem PM as appropriate r is equivalent to l M S p S is replaced by the second as a decimal number 00 60 v is equivalent to e b Y W is replaced by the week number of the year Monday as the first day of the week as a decimal number 00 53 w is replaced by the weekday Sunday as the first day of the week as a decimal number 0 6 X is replaced by national representation of the time x is replaced by national representation of the date Y is replaced by the year with century as a decimal number y is replaced by the year without century as a decimal number 00 99 Z is replaced by the time zone name z is replaced by the time zone offset from UTC a leading plus sign stands for east of UTC a minus sign for west of UTC hours and minutes follow with two digits each and no delimiter between them Y is replaced by national representation of the date and time 122 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_clock CSV to Control This plug in converts 2D or 3D movement and tool data that are given in a CSV file to the related binary control data structure These control data then can be handled by motion elements like the Schneider IMS MDrive plug in and to access tools like a mill or a laser to process materials The structure of the CSV files is partially fixed it in every case has to consist of X and Y coordinates whic
348. ies only to mark dialogue it hides the Motion tab pane 8388608 applies only to mark dialogue when this value is set the Geometry tab pane in mark dialogue is hidden 16777216 applies only to mark dialogue this hides the pilot laser tab pane 33554432 applies only when value 2 see above is used and when value 1073741824 see below is not set this option hides the edit pen button in Element tab pane 67108864 this centers and locks drawing area in case it is visible by setting the value 1 so that its positions can t be changed by dragging the mouse the view can be changed only by sending commands that modify the current zoom 134217728 applies only when value 2 see above is used it inhibits the possibility to edit single points when this value is used the coordinates grid in Geometry tab pane is disabled it is not necessary to set this value when 262144 see above is already set 1073741824 applies only when value 2 see above is used if it is set the Element panel is not shown 536870912 applies only when value 2 see above is used this hides the dynamically changing panel with the parameters of the currently selected element 1073741824 applies only when value 2 see above is used this disables and hides the layers panel 2147483648 do not load and use locally stored default settings the software starts with an empty default configuration when this initialisation value is us
349. ifies how smooth the drive should stop its movements Step Signal Output the output at the parallel port that is used for the pulsed step signal here it has to be made sure that an output is used only once overlapping mappings would cause problems during operation Direction Signal Output the output at the parallel port that is used to define the movement direction of the axis here it has to be made sure that an output is used only once overlapping mappings would cause problems during operation Invert Direction inverts the direction output the movement direction for this axis Reference Mode here it can be specified if a home referencing operation has to be done or not and if yes which method of referencing has to be used the chosen mode defines using which direction the software shall search for the reference switch and using which direction the switch shall be left afterwards Reference Signal Input the input where the reference switch is connected to Reference Speed Enter the speed that has to be used to search for the reference switch Reference Speed Leave the speed that has to be used to leave the reference switch once it was found the correct referenced position is that position where the reference switch just turns off Referenced Position the metric position in unit millimetres that has to be set at the referenced position When a movement is running at an axis i
350. ifies the number of digits a serial number has to consist of at minimum independent from their real value in case a number would have less digits than specified here it would be filled with one or more preceding zeros Time Offset here an offset can be specified using freely selectable numbers of years days hours and minutes this offset is added to the time information that can be incorporated into the resulting data and can be used e g to define a best before date counted from the current date time Format String this format string defines the layout and contents of the resulting data which are handed over to the assigned Primary Geometry element Here any desired text can be added and combined with some place holders which are replaced by serial number or date or time information Following place holders can be used and combined possible S this string is replaced by the serial number as defined with the parameters above A is replaced by national representation of the full weekday name a is replaced by national representation of the abbreviated weekday name B is replaced by national representation of the full month name b and h are replaced by national representation of the abbreviated month name C is replaced by the year divided by 100 c is replaced by national representation of time and date D is equivalent to Y m d y d is replaced by the day of the m
351. ifies which of the boards has to be used by this plug in Laser type the type of the connected laser the field that was selected here directly corresponds to the laser tab panes where some additional laser specific settings can be done for a detailed description of the available options please refer to the manual of the RTC5 and to the manuals of the laser device vendor Power output the laser output power can be controlled via an additional output the kind of output to be used can be defined here Number of Axes specifies if the scanner controller has to operate in 2D or 3D mode this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card Correction file the ctb correction file to be used for operation provided by the vendor of the scan head Firmware data directory the directory that contains the firmware files to be used to operate the scanner controller card provided by SCANLAB Stand By Frequency frequency the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Stand By Length pulse length the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Field Left Position Field Upper Position defines the upper left coordinate of the field that has to be used by the scanner Field Size the total size of the field that is used by the scanner this parameter together with the left and upper position specifies the coordinates input vectors have to be located within in case t
352. ify a different position reference mode No referencing has to be choosen a referencing position has to be set and referencing has to be performed This does not cause any referencing operation but immediately sets the current encoder based position to the one specified as Referenced Position Alternatively a standard referencing operation as described above can be performed too PLEASE NOTE an encoder can be used for one axis only when the same decoder input is configured for more than one axis the results are undefined e Encoder Factor this factor is used for calculation of axis incremental position here the ratio between encoder pulses and motor increments has to be specified When integrated into a ControlRoom project following flow I Os are available Numeric INO POS absolute position in unit millimetres to move axis 1 to here the factor out of the configuration is used to calculate the incremental position used by the drive out of the given metric distance when a value is set here the movement starts immediately using the last speed value that was set at the MODE input Numeric IN1 MODE at this input several other parameters can be specified depending on the given value when a value greater than 0 is set it is taken as speed information for the next movement of axis 1 when a value of 0 is set the axis is stopped independent from its current position a value of 1 causes a reference movement Numeric IN2 POS p
353. ilable for LUA scripts As an example when 10 s is equal to 16385 0x4001 that means va10 contains data of type boolean 0x01 and and val 6 contains numeric data 0x4000 all other parameters val1 val2 val3 val4 val5 and val7 are set to nil val0 val7 these parameters may contain data depending on the state of the lO flags Please note to let luaPLC call this function the main LUA script has to enable internal message handling This has to be done by calling oapc_thread_sleep regularly When a script is running without these calls or when a script does not call it for a longer time all received messages are held in a queue and do not arrive at this function As soon as oapc thread sleep is executed all probably old messages are delivered at this function Following functions can be used to access the data of the Interlock Server oapc ispace connect host port This function tries to establish a connection to an Interlock Server Here the string parameter host specifies the IP or host name to connect with the numeric parameter port the port number the Interlock Server is available at When host is set to an empty string and or the port is set to 0 the default values are used This function returns 1 in case of success or a number not equal to 1 otherwise All the following functions can be used only when this function returned 1 means when a connection could be established successfully oapc ispace set_da
354. ime and prior to putting a system into operation after a software update was installed This plug in can be used to access the Sintec ETH6608 scanner controller card for controlling a scan head and a connected laser in real time Within the configuration dialogue the plug in and the scanner controller card have to be configured according to the connected devices Basic Board IP the IP of the board that has to be accessed by this plug in Laser type the type of the connected laser the field that was selected here directly corresponds to the laser tab panes where some additional laser specific settings can be done for a detailed description of the available options please refer to the manual of the ETH6608 and to the manuals of the laser device vendor Scanner Output the output that has to be used for accessing the scanner here it can be chosen between analogue output and XY2 100 interface this has to be set to the output the scanner is connected with Power output the laser output power can be controlled via an additional output the kind of output to be used can be defined here Number of Axes specifies if the scanner controller has to operate in 2D or 3D mode this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card Correction file the bcorr ctb ct5 gcd or ucf correction file to be used for operation provided by the vendor of the scan head Stand By Frequency
355. important one you have to assure that this value goes down to O after some time or that it stays at constant low values in case cyclic event or timer triggered program flows are used As stated above there are some automatic mechanisms implemented within the application to avoid conditions that would slow down or stop the system in a way described above First of all every program flow internally uses an unique identifier When such a program flow reaches the input of a flow object where it fetched the output before that will be detected by using this identifier and the flow will be terminated automatically after the input value is set So such direct loops are suppressed automatically and a warning is shown within the debugger window when that happens After that method will not work when two or more looped program flows access the same flow object interleaved this mechanism is helpful but not 100 effective This means the number of active program flows still have to be checked Second within the project settings a time out value can be defined This time out value is the total time a program flow can run at maximum if it could continue to carry data to an other flow element after that time has elapsed it will be killed automatically Here also a warning is shown within the debugger window This mechanism is a bit more tricky than the preceding one after the time a flow element is handled by the application may differ slightly every time and after
356. in Slice Mode here it can be selected if the depth information has to be handled by the Z axis of a scanner or by usage of external equipment when mode Real 3D is selected all the slices are located at their exact Z position according to the origin model this mode is for usage with a 3D scanner in case mode Flat Z externally driven is selected all slices are located at Z position 0 and the movement in depth direction has to be done with a separate device Control elements for this device can be added to a slice group later In case the scanner card is configured for two axis operations only the second option is available in this case Real 3D is disabled and can t be selected when this value is changed all slices and possibly existing additional elements are removed and the slices are generated again Slice Pens this table can be used to define patterns for the pens that have to be assigned to every slice There separate pens can be specified for contour and hatch of a slice First of all the check box in front of a row of the list has to be selected to enable this entry Then the pens can be selected via the combo box Here the list rows have different meanings First Slice is used for the very first slice only that can be on top or bottom of the model dependent on the slice direction and Last Slice is used for the very last slice only that can be on top or bottom of the model dependent on the slice
357. in case a specific pen parameter has to be changed globally it is not necessary to edit it manually within every single pen 6 4 1 General Pen Settings This pane contains some basic pen parameters On top of this pane an input field can be found that can be used to rename the current pen there its name can be changed and the new name can be applied by pressing the return key 162 Beside of that the following parameters can be edited here Power the output power in range 0 100 a tool has to be driven with Frequency the frequency in unit Hz a tool has to be driven with On Speed the XY motion speed that is used during operation of the tool tool is turned on Off Speed the motion speed in X and Y direction that is used during jumps tool is turned off Tool Size the diameter of the tools on the working piece this value should be as exact as possible because it is used for different calculations Draw Off Movements this option is related to the visual representation of a project within CNConstruct only when this option is set not only these parts of the geometry are shown within the drawing area where the tool is turned on but also the jumps where the tool is turned off this option can be helpful to optimise a project Use as default Pen the pen where this option is set for is used as default pen for all newly created geometries More than this whenever a new pen is created the parameters
358. in this element Laserport a numerical value according to the valid range of the laserport e g 0 255 can be entered this value is sent to the card during processing in case the related check box is enabled Digital several buttons are shown that influence the related output ports bits and can be toggled into different states X means this bit is left unchanged 1 sets a bit to HIGH and 0 clears it here the first button is the highest bit while the last button is always bit 0 Analogue a numerical value according to the resolution of the analogue output e g 0 1023 can be entered this value is sent to the card during processing in case the related check box is enabled Pulse Output when this option is not set the output s simply is are set according to the settings that are done above In case this option is enabled and a time in unit milliseconds is given the output it switched to the defined state only for this time after that it is set back to its previous state So this option can be used to emit only pulsed signals instead of a permanent output value PLEASE NOTE The scanner controller hard has to be set up and configured BEFORE this element is used for the first time This is necessary because the capabilities of the scanner controller card need to be known for this element so that it can show the correct output options that belong to the card When a completely different scanner contr
359. inations of digital inputs to text Within the configuration of the object the user can decide which inputs are mapped to which outputs and which conversion method has to be used So the user can decide if the binary value on a set of selected inputs has to be converted to a text consisting of a combination of 0 and 1 that is equal to the input pattern or if specific values have to be output dependent on the state of an input Digital INO CLK depending on the configuration of this element the digital input O can be used either as data input for binary conversion to a text or as clock In last case these outputs that are configured to use the clock signal converted data are sent only when a digital 1 is received on this input Digital IN1 digital IN7 data inputs to be converted to text according to the configuration of this flow object Char OUT1 char OUT7 outputs that send the created text according to the configuration of the flow element Digital to CMD Value Pair A CMD Value pair is a combination of a value and a command name that is assigned to this value Such pairs can be used to connect to external applications or to identify a value for other purposes Using this element digital data can be converted to such pairs Within the configuration of the flow element a name can be assigned to every input The values that are received at this input will be combined with that name used as command to the pair of comman
360. ing data type Char OUT5 freely programmable text output corresponds to LUA string data type Char OUT6 freely programmable binary output corresponds to LUA pointer data type Char OUT7 freely programmable text output corresponds to LUA pointer data type Modbus Addressable RTU Master This is a specific variant of the plug in Modbus RTU Master that offers alternative possibilities to access a Modbus slave Instead of fixed pre configured slave addresses and base address offsets here these values can be set dynamically from outside That gives the possibility to access a much bigger range of slaves and all addresses that are available within such a slave The configuration of this plug in is similar to the non addressable variant only the type and behaviour of the in and outputs do slightly differ The plug in establishes a connection to a Modbus slave via a serial connection by using the pre defined slave addresses and address offsets at the first approach For every of the data in and outputs a different operation mode can be defined within the configuration panel The valid range of the input depends on that operation mode and its capabilities conform to the Modbus specification As global configuration this plug in expects the port name of the serial interface and the communication parameters of the slave device Beside of that a Slave Poll Delay has to be set it specifies how often the connected slave has to be polled for
361. ing direction is reversed 7 7 4 6 Star This element is a special variant of a circle it consists of two radii where every second point the element consists of belongs to an other radius Resulting from that stars can be drawn and modified by its parameters Such a star is drawn in two steps the first left mouse click into the drawing area specifies the centre point of it the second one specifies the first radius While drawing the star the second radius is set automatically to value smaller than the first radius After the star is drawn it still can be modified interactively Here every second point the ones that belong to the second radius is marked by a small blue cross This cross can be dragged with the mouse in order to change the second radius independent from the first one and in order to apply an offset to the angle of these points Next the star can be modified via its options Line Style the style the circle is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of single continuous lines Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points all these lines are connected Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set
362. initions are dropped no more fiducial recognition is possible until new fiducial s is are taught or loaded As soon as there is a fiducial definition active and valid it is used for marking operations When the marking dialogue is opened a fiducial recognition is performed automatically When the fiducial s can be detected in current live image the orientation and position of the actual marking project is changed according to the fiducial s orientation and position This procedure is repeated after every marking process automatically Additionally it can be triggered again in mark dialogue by pressing button Auto it starts a new cycle of recognition and correction 7 10 2 Vision Cookbook To get a Vision system that is working well and that produces exact results is not an easy thing and requires a lot of adjustment and experience As a starting point and to get some basic information to make own experiences with following some hints are given to get better results The steps listed below should be performed as accurate as possible 1 Use a camera with a high resolution The fiducial s should be visible very clear and quite large so that all relevant details of it them can be seen in cameras image 2 Adjust the lighting As first step a working piece should be placed in cameras view Now adjust the light so that the fiducial s on that working piece can be seen clear and has have a good contrast comparing to its underground and comp
363. iodically Numeric OUT3 numeric OUT4 numeric values that are sent periodically Char OUT3 char OUT4 text values that are sent periodically Exit Application This flow element exits an application whenever a logic HIGH is received at its only input the whole player application is exited This element can be used to implement a program end condition what is important especially within the OpenPlayer here without such a condition no other possibility exists to exit the application controlled It does not offer any outputs because after this element is used there are no more flows that could be handled in any way Digital IN1 digital input that exits the player application when a 1 is received here Delay While other flow elements process their data as fast as possible and send out the results of their operation to their outputs nearly immediately this element delays the data transfer The inputs are mapped to their related outputs directly and within the configuration dialogue the delay for every data flow can be defined PLEASE NOTE Within the OpenDebugger this element may behave not exactly as expected When the program flow is stopped there or when it is executed in single step mode the time configured here may cause different results than in the OpenPlayer due to the fact that a stopped or single stepped flow has a different timing in general Digital INO digital IN1 digital input for data flows that have to be delayed Nu
364. ion here an error correction level can be set Size this is a barcode type specific option here the resulting size can be specified which not influences the dimension of the barcode but the encoded data size Bar Width this parameter influences 1D barcodes only here the size of the resulting bar lines can be modified this value might be changed depending on the method of material processing in order to get a readable barcode Segments this parameter is used only for the Maxicode barcode it specifies the number of segments and therefore the smoothness of its circles Fade In Size this parameter is used for inverted barcodes it defines the size of the additional frame that is drawn around the barcode to get an inverted representation Force to Square this option applies to DataMatrix barcodes only in case it is set the resulting barcode is always a square and never a rectangle Merge Cells several barcode types may consist of cells rectangles or squares that are located directly beside each other this option merges such cells wherever that is possible without destroying the barcode information it can be used to save vector data Draw Cells as Dots when this option is enabled the cells some barcode types consist of are replaced by plain dots Draw Cells as Custom Dots when this option is enabled the cells some barcode types consist of are replaced by the custom dot geometry as defined within the settings I
365. ipFlop Numerical NOT This operation does not require any further definitions it treats the numerical value that is set to the input as 32 bit signed whole numbered value and inverts it on its binary level Numeric INO numeric IN7 the input for the values that have to be inverted Numeric OUTO numeric OUT7 the inverted values from the related inputs Numerical NOP This operation does not require any further definitions It does not modify the numerical value that is set to the input but simply returns it on next processing cycle NOP no operation It can be used e g for testing specific functionalities to synchronize the order of data flows or to let data flows arrive after each other Numeric INO numeric IN7 the input for the values that have to be inverted Numeric OUTO numeric OUT7 the inverted values from the related inputs Numerical N OR Using this flow control several inputs can be OR concatenated and the result can be inverted optionally Within the configuration dialogue the inputs that belong to one output and where the values have to be concatenated can be configured The input numbers are treated as 32 bit signed whole numbered values for concatenation so possibly existing decimal places will get lost Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears Numeric IN1 numeri
366. is node changes Numeric OUT3 output that is mapped to a node within the Interlock Server and that emits a numerical value whenever the configured output of this node changes Char OUT4 output that is mapped to a node within the Interlock Server and that emits a text whenever the configured output of this node changes Char OUT5 output that is mapped to a node within the Interlock Server and that emits a text whenever the configured output of this node changes Binary OUT6 output that is mapped to a node within the Interlock Server and that emits binary data whenever the configured output of this node changes Binary OUT7 output that is mapped to a node within the Interlock Server and that emits binary data whenever the configured output of this node changes Log Output This is a very specific flow object Different to the other objects it is allowed to exists exactly once within an project When it exists it receives all logging information that may be generated by other elements When 130 there are logging events defined in other elements but no Log Output object exists these logging information are dropped When a Log Output element exists and logging information are generated it is essential that all outputs of this element that belong to used log types are used When a output of this object is unused but the related log is used within the application that may lead to a memory overflow or at least to excessive but us
367. is plug in establishes a connection to a Modbus slave via a serial connection and exchanges data with that slave For every of the data in and outputs a different operation mode can be defined within the configuration panel The valid range of the input depends on that operation mode and its capabilities conform to the Modbus specification As global configuration this plug in expects the port name of the serial interface and the communication parameters of the slave device Beside of that a Slave Poll Delay has to be set it specifies how often the connected slave has to be polled for new data Two other options give the possibility to swap the bytes of the used address offset which might be necessary for some Modbus slaves and to write protocol related logging information into a file The last option can be used to find the reason for communication problems but should be handled with care such a log file can become very big in a very short time depending on the traffic that is handled by this plug in An other option is relevant for older project files only OpenAPC 1 x compatibility mode should not be set within new projects but has to be left enabled for version 1 x projects that make use of one of the single bit 10 s Coils or Input Registers As long as this option is set the 32 bit numbers that form 32 coil or register values are concatenated using the old style with exchanged byte order In case it is not set the bits are concatena
368. is turned on but not the motor Next the application waits for 5 seconds before DIGI1 of the same element is set to HIGH In both cases the interlock server informs all other connected clients about these changes the OpenPlayer which knows how to handle these data takes them and sends them to the flow element which itself switches the digital outputs and therefore turns on the lamp and the motor After some time the external application performs some similar steps it sets DIGI1 to LOW to turn off the motor and afterwards sets DIGIO of the correct data element to LOW to turn off the lamp 141 Flow HMI DigilO Digital f Controller Flow Main Application Element Digil0 in 0 Interlock Server RETN DigiIO in 1 1 turn on lamp DigilO in 0 2 turn on motor DigilO in 1 3 wait 5 sec 4 External Application For this example the same is true as described within the preceding section now the control no longer happens within a defined flow of the OpenDebugger OpenPlayer but within an external application that takes control over the complete system via this way 5 7 4 Conclusion The examples given here show only some very specialized and very theoretical usage possibilities Practically a combination of them will be used Depending on the complexity of a project it is recommended to have several applications that do separate jobs on the same project So
369. isor as long as this user is logged in all functionalities are enabled there exist no restrictions e Manager Users a user with this privilege is allowed to modify the users and its privileges within this tab pane this should be combined with the Modify Settings privilege in order to give the related user access to the configuration dialogue e Exit Application this privilege gives a user the possibility to leave the application e Modify Settings a user with this privilege is able to enter the project configuration dialogue and to change the global parameters and settings of an installed software Edit Geometry when this privilege is set for a user it is possible to modify loaded geometry and to edit the data of the currently loaded project e Load Project this gives a user the possibility to load an other project this privilege is similar to load recipe like it may be named in other software e Save Project a user with this privilege is allowed to save the current project to disk this privilege should be combined with an other privilege that gives the possibility to change the project settings to edit the loaded project or to load insert an other project elsewhere it would not make sense for this user to save an unchanged project only e Control Marking when this privilege is set a user is allowed to start and stop the marking process Comparing to all the other configuration parameters the user pr
370. isualisation and without the need to use external images It offers a resource saving possibility to use these symbols easily Once such an element was added to the HMI Editor within the configuration the colours and type of the symbol can be chosen Following symbols are supported at the moment Simple Knob a round knob Horizontal Valve symbol for a valve to be connected with horizontal pipes Vertical Valve symbol for a valve to be connected with to vertical pipes Pump right a pump that pumps to the right direction Pump left a pump that pumps to the left direction Pump up a pump that pumps up Pump down a pump that pumps something down Lamp electrical symbol for a lamp Horn electrical symbol for a buzzer or horn Switch electrical symbol for an open switch this symbol changes its appearance when it is enabled Motor electrical symbol for a motor Such a symbol button behaves like a toggle button a first click enables it turns it on a second click to it turns it off Beside of that it also can be switched via its input Digital INO input to turn on off the symbol Digital OUTO output that sends a LOW signal when the symbol is turned off and a HIGH signal when it is turned on here it doesn t matters if that happened by user interaction or by sending a signal to INO This plug in is located in hmiplugins libio_hmi_symbolubtton Text Listbox 33 Using this
371. ithin the Flow Editor the flow elements can be connected Every connection is similar to a data flow here during execution data are transferred from one element to an other Such a flow somehow looks like an electrical wire But it is important that these flows do NOT act like electrical devices While an electrical line typically holds a state for a defined time a logical state for a flow connection here is only temporarily So such a flow connection is a path definition for transferring data Comparing to electrical connections it acts as follows Electrical Signal Behaviour of a flow connection Static electrical state a line stays at a defined value Static logical state when a flow element submits a e g A HIGH or LOW signal there is no difference logic state on an output e g LOW or HIGH the flow between signals of the same level lines are used to evaluate which other flow elements have to receive it after the inputs of these flow objects are set to the related value the flow line itself has no state the data transmission has finished When two signals of the same level are transmitted 24 via such a line they are separate pieces of information and can be differentiated e g two HIGH signals following directly on each other that are not separated by a LOW signal in between them can still be counted as two signals Electric pulse a line is toggled for a defined time e g to HIGH or LOW after
372. ition where you want to place the new flow element Then right click the mouse to open a pop up menu There choose the option Add Element Below of that option you can find a hierarchy of flow element types and the related flow elements To make creation of several elements of the same type easier there is also a repeat functionality available When function key F2 is pressed the last flow element type that was created using this pop up menu is created again This new element is placed at the position of the last left mouse click within the Flow Editor On the right hand side of the editor exists a fold bar that offers an alternative way to select and add flow objects It provides the same categories of elements than the context menu described above These categories can be opened by double clicking the bar titles Then the list of flow elements is shown where one of it can be chosen The selected element is highlighted and a slow left click within the editors drawing area adds this element at the clicked position Selecting the same fold bar item again disables it so that an other slow left lick no longer places flow elements of this type Currently following types of flow elements are supported Connectors this type of flow element applies only to grouped objects within the Flow Editor is is possible to select several flow elements and to put them into one logical functional group that puts them together to one single group sy
373. itional GeOMe tty nssr e AA 163 174 201 216 Additional PANG ci A a a Et A aa tau E Aa A 24 Allow mark start via external Signal c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesseeaaeeeeeseeeaaeeeeeseeeaeeeesseenieeeeeeneees 191 Allow modificato Nea a al a DA fe doe DAI a E 8 a LE Ed AIDA RIAs 27 Analogue ClOCK uiar ineas tincho diia b oia 34 analogue dUtpUti saldado td 215 O E E E E E A ENEE EEE T A 146 Anigle Offset A S ad E A A EEE E E E E A 176 217 Angular Meterse ia a a a e a a a aaa a aana a aaia ea 23 34 Angular Regulatorn r E A e a O E RE 22 30 APCG EEEE PE EEAO PE EA EO EE EEE EE EE E EE EE T E E SEA 29 ArroWto dota daa 235 AS FSerial Interface eiii cl 63 aspectiatlO ista ta illinois aliada 247 AO iii idad atacado il 235 Auto Arrarige 3D MesheS ctas 206 AVERAGING dto lar did ad A 57 AVR Net 1O EIN rnet sesa enrere A da A ro 64 AVR NGAO SOMA a a A AE Aa A AAAA at 64 E RA E TEE IETA AEA E A EAE E A E E NAE EE E E 235 AXIS ANAS td tdt ct A S 192 B Background Cold vc Ri 17 20 190 A ies dott cagee loam bees ia cad cdi evs big DIA EE beep sab E de AR ae E AT va weeees 173 213 NN 248 Beam COMPAS iaa Ea 218 BeamConstrU Cuida a nove eto 11 30 37 44 186 BeamtConstructHD data LA A TA A A A an dub Gane id 248 BeamConstruct to ContrOl oocccccccoonncnncncconnnnnnncnononenononononnnnnnnonornnnnnnnnnrnnnnnencnnona 37 44 214ff 219 223 225 BeamConstruct2 Control iia e A a ao aa 192 Beam OG Kane a ti tai
374. ive line length with as less as much data and an as fast as possible resulting process time But in some cases this may lead to spirals that are not very smooth but angular at their inner radius Here the number of segments could be increased what would lead to a much higher amount of data used or the smoothing factor can be set to values greater 1 0 via this parameter this changes the calculation of a spiral in a way where the inner line length is shorter but more smooth while not using more data than necessary So the more smoothing factor is taken for the calculation the smaller the radius becomes Start Angle this parameters can be used to change the spirals starting angle Draw CCW normally a spiral has an clockwise orientation means it is drawn from its starting point 171 to right direction when this check box is set the drawing direction is reversed Inside To Outside this option influences the growing direction when the check box is set drawing of the spiral starts at the inner side and ends outside in case it is not set it starts at the outer side and ends at the inner 6 5 4 8 Polygon A polygon consists of an undefined number of edges but requires at least three Drawing it can be done by left clicking at the position where a corner between the connecting lines has to be positioned This can be done several times the process of drawing this polygon can be finished by right clicking the mouse Then the last corn
375. ivilege settings are not applied to the current project but to the local installation only This means a project file that is transferred to an other installation of BeamConstruct where no user management is enabled can be loaded and used without any limitations The user data are stored in the default application data directory of the used operating system within a sub folder beamhome The exact position depends on the used operating system The data are neither encrypted nor protected so deletion of the directory and its contents would disable the user management completely Thus it has to be ensured by using the operating systems functionalities that no user is able to access this folder without permission e g by disallowing users to exit the application and by locking the whole system as long as BeamConstruct is running This is done by intention to offer the possibility to restore a system just by deleting the beamhome directory when some relevant passwords got lost In case the user management was activated on next software start up all functions are disabled until a valid 194 user logs in by using the correct password Logging into the software can be done by pressing the user symbol in toolbar dk Since the parameters that have been specified here have to fit to the production environment where the constructed data have to be used it is important to use the same settings for all constructed data These project parameter
376. l functions can be found in menu Process of the main window Simulate a full process cycle is simulated means the complete project is updated all serial numbers date and time objects are triggered the process time of geometries is calculated delays are measured and movements are partially simulated The resulting total process time is displayed to the user This time is nearly the same time such a process would need within the target environment It differs only in case motion elements are used that perform absolute movements here the real processing time can t be calculated because the starting position of an driven axis is not known Mark this option requires at least a scanner card to be configured within the global project settings and gives the possibility to start a real marking process instead of simulating it In case the current project uses motion elements the related motion controllers should be configured too within the project settings After selecting this menu item a marking dialogue opens for more information about its functionalities please refer below Write Stand Alone Data this function applies only to these scanner controllers that support the related feature it gives the possibility to write scanner data to a disk for later usage in stand alone mode Send Stand Alone Data this function applies only to these scanner controllers that support the related feature it gives the possibility to send scanne
377. l movement operations Binary OUT7 IN binary data that reflect the state of the digital inputs of this scanner controller card these data are required by some plug ins that need to react on these inputs and there have to be connected to them like the scanner controller stepper motor plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_rtc3 SCANLAB R RTC4 Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Beside of that some laser equipment can be damaged in case it is controlled with wrong signals Thus it is highly recommended to check the output generated by this plug in using e g an oscilloscope to avoid problems caused by wrong configurations This should be done prior to putting a system into operation for the first time and prior to putting a system into operation after a software update was installed This plug in can be used to access the SCANLAB RTC4 scanner controller card for controlling a scan head and a connected laser in real time Within the configuration dialogue the plug in and the scanner controller card have to be configured according to the connected devices Basic Use Board Number in case more than only one board is used within the same host computer this value specifies w
378. l number elements of the current project are decremented the date and time elements are updated Reset all serial number elements of the current project are reset to its starting value the date and time elements are updated 6 8 Exporting CNC Data To use the created data on the target system for processing work pieces they have to be stored in a usable format Here following possibilities exist CNConstruct CNCP project files This is the project file format of CNConstruct here all information about used elements and sub elements and modified geometry as well as dynamic elements like serial numbers date or time information are contained no information are lost when this format is used CSV format The comma separated values format is more a simple list of parameters that are comma separated This format includes all geometry and pen information and can be used e g by the CSV to Control plug in of the ControlRoom software to extract the processing information out of it The geometry itself is static all dynamic elements are set to their default values and the data can t be modified during runtime any more HPGL format This is a vector graphics format that contains only geometry information the pen and thus the processing data are not part of this format So it should be used for data exchange with other applications only This format can be used with the HPGL to Control plug in Because of the missing pen informa
379. l perform this reconnect operation automatically 5 7 7 3 Single Remote Mode This server mode is similar to the single local mode but with one difference the Interlock Server will not run on the same host but somewhere else in network thus the OpenDebugger or OpenPlayer are not able to start the OpenlServer and the possibly required OpenPlugger instances automatically So a start up procedure is necessary that executes the components of the whole system in following order 1 The Interlock Server has to be started on the host that is configured within the project parameters 2 All OpenPlugger instances have to be started using the project file that contains the information about the Interlock Servers host 155 3 External applications that implement software interlocks have to be started 4 The OpenPlayer has to be started using the same project file please refer pt 2 5 External applications that implement automatic sequences have to be started 5 7 7 4 Redundant Remote Mode This is the most secure and also the most complex operation mode It extends the mirrored local mode here again two instances of the Interlock Server exist where one mirrors the data of the active one but they are executed on different hosts so that a complete hardware failure can be managed without any interruption This mode also requires a manual start up procedure with a fixed order to ensure proper operation 1 The first Interlock Server has to be started o
380. lOs Char INO CMD input for a command value Digital IN1 DATA input for a digital value that has to be sent Numeric IN2 DATA input for a numeric value that has to be sent Character IN3 DATA input for text that has to be sent Binary IN4 DATA input for binary data that have to be sent Char OUTO CMD output for a command that was received this output emits data only in operation mode Command Value and always together with a data value that was assigned to this command Digital OUT1 DATA received digital data Numeric OUT1 DATA received numeric data Char OUT1 DATA received text data Binary OUT1 DATA received binary data This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_serial_inout Speak This plug in offers a text to speech converter texts and characters given to the plug in are converted to 75 spoken voice and are send to the audio hardware This plug in is able to handle two independent voices that can be configured separately Pitch the pitch of the voice Speed the speed the text is spoken with Word Gap the delay in milliseconds that is done between every word Gender the gender of the voice here male female or neutral can be chosen Language this text to speech converter supports different native languages and tries to speak texts as natural as possible here the language has to be set that fits to the input texts PLEASE NOTE the Speak plu
381. labelname elsewhere within the code but not within a different function block or outside of the scope of the current function block JMPCN conditional jump to the label after a check if the accumulator is FALSE this label has to exist in format labelname elsewhere within the code but not within a different function block or outside of the scope of the current function block 5 7 5 3 2 Extended commands and statements The following commands are ControlRoom specific extensions of the IL language In case they are used within an IL script it may not run with other interpreters that do not understand these commands Nevertheless they are very useful and make programming in IL much easier PRINT prints the contents of the accumulator or of the optional operand to the console EXIT leave the instruction list immediately independent from the current position within or outside of a function block this command terminates the execution of the instruction list and avoids that the main script is restarted automatically after its end was reached STP stop the execution of the current script context for the time given in accumulator in milliseconds the accuracy of this time depends on the underlying operating system SIN calculate sinus value of the accumulator s content this operation changes the data type of the accumulator to LREAL COS calculate cosine value of the accumulator s content this operation changes the data ty
382. lected by calling CmdSelEntName and CmdSetSelEnt before CmdRefresh Refresh the current view This updates the shown geometries without recalculating and redrawing everything new CmdRedraw Redraw the current view This performs a full re calculation and re drawing of all geometries and therefore is slower than CmdRefresh This command should be called only when vector data of elements of the current project have been changed and the changes are not yet visible CmdListName lt num gt This command expects a positive number num as parameter and can be used to list all available elements with their name To get all elements it has to be called repeatedly with increasing numbers starting from 0 For every call with a different number the related element name will be given When there are no more elements an error is returned CmdListUID lt num gt This command expects a positive number num as parameter and can be used to list the UIDs of all available elements To get all elements UIDs this command has to be called repeatedly with increasing numbers starting from 0 For every call with a different number the related element UID will be returned When there are no more elements an error is returned 246 CmdSetElemFile lt path gt Changes the file that is assigned to an element and replaces the related data This command can be used e g with Scanner Bitmap Elements to replace the current image The path to the new file h
383. left to right starting with the lowest input number The configured constant is used for division as last value Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears Numeric IN1 numeric IN7 data inputs for the division Numeric OUT1 numeric OUT7 data outputs that send the values resulting from this operation 55 Compare Numbers This is a comparison function that checks if one of two numerical input values is smaller equal or greater than the second one Here one flow element contains two separate compare functions that act completely independent from each other Beside the name of the flow element no other parameters or values can be configured within its properties dialogue The comparison result is emitted every time a new input value is set Numeric INO A input of the first value of the first comparator that has to be compared Numeric IN1 B input of the second value of the first comparator that has to be compared Numeric IN3 A input of the first value of the second comparator that has to be compared Numeric IN4 B input of the second value of the second comparator that has to be compared Digital OUTO gt this output is set to HIGH when value A of the first comparator is greater than value B Digital OUT1 this output is set to HIGH when value A of the first comparator is equal to
384. lements Name the name of the flow element here a unique name without any blanks spaces or tabs has to be chosen This name can be used to access the data of such a flow element within the Interlock Server here the related option has to be enabled within the project settings As an example when a flow element is named DigitallnOut_13 its related name within the data space of the Interlock Server will be DigitallnOut_13 in for its inputs and DigitallnOut_13 out for its outputs In case the flow element corresponds to an HMI element in HMI Editor this name is the same like it is known from the HMI configuration dialogue changing it here also changes the name specified within the HMI Editor Interlock Server Map outputs to server this option requires the Interlock Server option to be enabled within the global project configuration when it is set the outputs of this flow element are submitted to the Interlock Server every time they change so this option enables a data flow from player to Interlock Server Interlock Server Allow modification this option requires the Interlock Server option to be enabled within the project configuration it defines a connection between the server and the inputs of this flow element whenever the related data element is changed within the data space of the server the input s of this flow element is are set to the new value which is sent from the Interlock Server so this o
385. lements that really are able to handle input data The second rule can be made explained better with an example as Primary Geometry a rectangle is drawn It is modified with a Sine Distortion Post processing Tool which changes the borders of the rectangle to have a sine waveform Next an additional element Hatch is used with adds lines to the geometry that fill the rectangle In this case the sine distortion is applied to the rectangle only because it is located before the sine element but not to the hatching lines because they are added after the sine distortion takes place So the hatching lines stay straight The situation becomes different when the two sub elements change their position When the first child element below of the primary element is the hatcher the resulting hatch lines will be distorted by the following Post processing Element too They are no longer straight lines but have the same sine shape like the rectangles border because the sine distortion now applies to the hatcher too that s caused by the fact that 202 the sine distortion Post Processing Tool stays after the hatcher PLEASE NOTE for the example explained above the line styles for rectangle and hatch have to be switched to Connected Lines 7 7 1 The Drawing Area Within BeamConstruct s main window the drawing area for geometry is located in the middle There new primary elements can be created or existing geometry can be modified Whenever a
386. lic announcement or press release to stop using the copies of the Software you will comply immediately with this request The provisions of paragraphs 3 7 8 and 12 will survive any termination of this Agreement 5 Limited Product Warranty The Vendor warrants to you that the Software will substantially conform to its published documentation and the media containing the Software shall be free from defects in material each for a period of thirty 30 days from the date of purchase The Vendors limited warranty is non transferable and is limited to the original purchaser This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary under local laws 6 Remedies The Vendors entire liability and your exclusive remedy for any breach of warranty shall be at the Vendors option to a repair or replace the Software or media provided that the Software or media is returned to the point of purchase or such other place as the Vendor may direct with a copy of the sales receipt or b refund the price paid Any replacement Software or media will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty 30 days whichever is longer These remedies are void if failure of the Software or media has resulted from accident abuse or misapplication 7 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY THE WARRANTIES EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES THE VENDOR AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAI
387. ll be rejected as long as none of the already connected slaves disconnects In case more such slave plug ins are available within a project only the first one is responsible for accepting connections all other ones will exchange data with this first instance Thus only the Max incoming connection value of the first plug in will be used for limiting the maximum number of slaves For every of the 8 inputs following parameters have to be set Operation Mode the method of data exchange with the slave this mode influences the range of in and output values and decides if data can be read and written or read only Base Address Offset the 0 based address offset within the slaves address space Numeric INO IN7 the values to be written to the slave Numeric OUTO OUT7 the values that have been read from the slave here new data are emitted whenever the related value changes within the slave 71 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_modbus_slave_tcp Network Client This plug in can be used to establish bi directional communication via a TCP IP network It is able to connect to a server and to exchange data with it These data can be formatted depending on the configured mode or they can be handed over to the plug in in as plain and unformatted data Within the configuration panel the IP and port number of the server to connect with have to be specified Additionally a user name and password can be given These authent
388. lly after mark dialogue was opened Attention this function may be dangerous and should be handled with care The start of a marking operation directly after opening the mark dialogue and without further actions may be unexpected and surprising for the user Scanhead Selection this combo box is dedicated to multihead configuration too different to the preceding combo box it is assigned to a scan head This differentiation is made because one scanner controller one plug in defined above may access several scan heads independently therefore head specific parameters have to be set separately The selection made with this box belongs to the following parameter Laser here a laser controller plug in can be selected that communicates with a laser independent from the scanner card As soon as a laser controller is selected for usage within BeamConstruct it can be configured by pressing the button Configure Z Shifter here a plug in can be selected that communicates with a special motion axis to be used for shifting the Z position expanding the beam or shifting the lasers focus independent from the scanner card As soon as such as Z Shifter is selected for usage within BeamConstruct it can be configured by pressing the button Configure Process Controller here a plug in can be selected that can control additional process parameters beside the laser marking related ones Possible parameters are pressure temperature gas flo
389. lly or vertically The flow speed can be modified via the related numerical input a negative value changes the flow direction and 0 stops the movement completely Numeric IN7 sets the speed of the currently shown flow a value that is set here overrides the default value of the default configuration Linear Meter This HMI plug in is able to display a numeric value within a linear meter Data usage and handling is very similar to the internal UI element Gauge But beside of the standard configuration parameters some other data can be set that influence the appearance of this element 35 e Limits the colour for the upper and lower limits e Value the colour of the displayed value Border the colour of the overall border e Ticks the colour of the ticks e Number of Ticks the total number of displayed ticks this value should fit to the minimum and maximum allowed value because for every tick the appropriate value is printed This plug in is located in hmiplugins libio_hmi_linearmeter Plot2D Using this plug in up to six independent graphs can be displayed within a two dimensional coordinate system The data for these graphs can be delivered from other flow elements as numeric data The graphs are updated every time a new value is set at an input So when a graph has to be displayed that shows a change over time the input has to be updated cyclically not only when a new value is available That can be done by using a tri
390. lly switches to the mode of the connecting client Char INO CMD input for a command value Digital IN1 DATA input for a digital value that has to be sent Numeric IN2 DATA input for a numeric value that has to be sent Character IN3 DATA input for text that has to be sent Binary IN4 DATA input for binary data that have to be sent Char OUTO CMD output for a command that was received this output emits data only in operation mode Command Value and always together with a data value that was assigned to this command Digital OUT1 DATA received digital data Numeric OUT1 DATA received numeric data Char OUT1 DATA received text data Binary OUT1 DATA received binary data This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_network_server Network Transmitter This plug in works and behaves exactly like the Network Client except one major difference it provides an uni directional connection only means it can only send data to a server it connects with and it doesn t provides any outputs For a detailed description of the functionality and parameters of this plug in please refer to description of Network Client plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_network_in Optris LT Pyrometer This plug in can be used together with an Optris LT pyrometer with serial interface to read temperature data from it and to react on the measured values accordingly The behaviour of the plug in can be configured The first
391. lock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears 42 Char IN1 char IN7 inputs for the texts that have to be converted Digital OUTO OVL the clock overflow signal is emitted whenever an overflow condition appeared during the conversion for outputs that react on the external clock This overflow clock signal e g can be transferred to the CLK input of the next Characters to Number converter Numeric OUT1 numeric OUT7 the output signals that are emitted dependent on the input values and the configuration of this object Overflow the text overflow output when the conversion operation did not match the rules defined within the configuration of the flow element so that no digital output signal could be found that belongs to the text at an input this number is sent to the overflow output Together with the OUTO OVL signal both can be used for a next conversion step to check some more conversion conditions Thus several conversion objects can be cascaded in order to implement complex conversion rules Characters to CMD Value Pair A CMD Value pair is a combination of a value and a command name that is assigned to this value Such pairs can be used to connect to external applications or to identify a value for other purposes Using this element digital data can be converted to such pairs Within the configuration of the flow element a
392. long to the ControlRoom environment As soon as a scanner card is selected for usage within BeamConstruct it can be configured by pressing the button Configure Although this configuration is done for the scanner controller card all the parameters like the working area size and position are used to set up BeamConstruct too Pilot Laser this section is related to the configuration of a pilot laser that does not perform marking operation but points to the position where the main laser would influence the working piece as some kind of preview laser This pilot laser can be used out of BeamConstruct s marking dialogue directly please refer below for more details the related parameters are enabled only in case a scanner controller card was chosen and configured properly Output Port here a port can be chosen that has to be used to turn the pilot laser on and off Output Number here the bit number at the previously chosen output port has to be selected which shall be used to toggle the pilot laser please note some scanner controller cards use some of their output bits for specific reserved purposes these bits should not be used for pilot laser to avoid any unwanted and undefined behaviour As a second precondition it is necessary to connect the pilot lasers on off input with the output that was selected here Invert Output Logic inverts the output value for the signal that should turn the pilot laser on this option needs to be s
393. lose as possible to the real colours walk through all pens where you found parameters for coloured marking results enable option Use for coloured scanner bitmaps and click the colour chooser Colour after marking there select a colour that is as close as possible to the marking result of this pen that s the step where the 201 calibrated monitor is required close pen dialogue import your coloured image using menu Project Import select option Use as coloured scanner bitmap in image import dialogue when this option is not enabled you don t have enough pens defined for usage in coloured bitmaps ontop left corner of import dialogue a preview of the image can be seen that makes use of the colours defined by the pens now the image can be manipulated using the sliders for Brightness Gamma Contrast Correction Red Correction Green and Correction Blue to improve the result Now after clicking OK the image is imported It is processed in a way that maps the existing coloured pens to closest colours in image During marking such an image is processed in several cycles one for every colour pen that is contained 7 7 Construction Of Geometry Comparing to other CAD applications that offer basic primitives with huge amount of options and parameters the concept of BeamConstruct is different It offers several basic primitives like lines circles and others that contain only as less parameters as necessary To g
394. lows are executed only no visual output is given the optional Interlock Server named OpenlServer that can be executed in background to reflect and store state information of a running project and that can be used to influence data flow and processes the optional runtime environment for plug ins named OpenPlugger that can be used for plug ins with hardware access that have to run outside of the scope of the OpenEditor and communicate with other components via the Interlock Server Beside of these applications there are several plug ins available Such a plug in is an external program technically it is a dynamically linked shared library that is loaded actively during runtime that provides additional functionalities to the main applications especially access to different hardware devices On the target system all unused plug ins can be removed from the installation in order to keep the size of the whole installation as small as possible Please note if there are plug ins removed that are required by a project it will not work properly So please be careful when deleting files out of the runtime package manually 5 1 System Architecture The ControlRoom software component offers different possibilities how a process control environment can be set up and used It highly depends on the problem formulation and requirements of the system to be controlled how the environment should be set up 12 OpenPlayer HMI
395. lt slot of the specified station the movement of the robot starts immediately after the station name is set at this input Char IN PUT_STAT this command can be used to PUT a wafer into the default slot of the specified station the movement of the robot starts immediately after the station name is set at this input Digital IN STOP stop a running movement of the robot immediately this input can to be used to interrupt a currently active movement and it has to be used when a motion command has to be sent to the robot while an other motion is stile active Digital IN HOME a HIGH signal at this input causes the robot to move to its home position in case of a volatile position encoder position referencing is done too Char IN SCAN_ STAT this command can be used to scan a station for wafers the movement of the robot starts immediately after the station name is set at this input and the resulting wafer mapping is submitted at numeric output SCN_MAP Digi IN VAC_CMD this input controls the vacuum valve for the chuck a HIGH signal turns on the vacuum to hold a wafer a LOW signal turns of the vacuum the state of this input influences the state of the outputs VAC_CMD feedback if the vacuum could be enabled disabled and VAC_SENS feedback if the wafer could be gripped in case of enabled vacuum Char IN RAW_CMD using this input any other commands can be sent to the robot directly Numeric OUT POS_R this output gives a feedback about
396. ltiple point dialogues expect the same values and behave the same except the following e the single point dialogue expects exactly one nominal and one actual coordinate value pair e the multiple point dialogue asks for a CSV file that contains pairs of nominal and actual coordinate values and shows an editable list of them within the dialogue The CSV file contains comma separated values in format nominal x nominal y actual x actual y using dot separated floating point numbers The dialogues offer the following fields and input values e Nominal Position X Nominal Position Y the nominal coordinate s in unit mm e Actual Position X Actual Position Y the actual measured coordinate s in unit mm e Working Area Position X and Y the top left position of the working area in unit mm e Working Area Size the size of the working area in unit mm here a squared working area is assumed When the dialogue is left with OK the current correction table is modified according to the given nominal and actual value s 250 8 5 Spatial Correction Dialogue This correction is inteded for cases where the scanhead is not mounted in parallel to the working area but is inclined e g in order to mark in inner side of a ring It requires a correction that already fits to the used scanhead and optic the spatial correction then can be applied to it as additional parameter Thus following steps have to be performed in order to get an exact
397. mands then invoke usage of BeamConstruct itself To make that clear BeamConstruct does not need to be started in this case this will be done by BeamServer automatically when related commands are sent 7 17 2 Usage A standard sequence of commands sent to BeamServer always looks like this 1 Start BeamServer with a number as command line parameter specifying which parts of the Ul have to be shown 2 2 Create a TCP connection to the IP of the computer where OpenAPC software package is installed and where BeamServer is running at connection has to be established to port 11350 3 and following send several ASCIl commands as described below to control BeamConstruct finally Send ExitUl to shut down and close BeamConstruct and BeamServer When TCP connection to BeamServer is interrupted somewhere within this sequence BeamConstruct is NOT shut down After re connecting to BeamServer a controlling application can continue at the point where it has been before interruption Beside of that only one connection to BeamServer is allowed at the same time For testing purposes it is also possible to connect with a normal Telnet client to BeamServer and to give commands manually In this case Telnet client has to be used in RAW operational mode auto negotiation deactivated 7 17 3 Starting BeamServer BeamServer expects a command line parameter specifying which parts of BeamConstruct UI have to be shown This parameter is a number When this nu
398. marking process if necessary the dialogue is closed automatically as soon as marking was finished 3006 increment the elements in current project 3007 decrement the elements in current project 31 3008 reset the elements in current project to their default start values 3011 open devices scanner card motion controller and image capture device as configured 3012 close opened devices 3013 open devices when not already done and show scanner card state dialogue 4001 show the about dialogue 4002 show license information 4003 reset the current license 4004 show the credits dialogue All five digit numbers correspond to remaining tool bar buttons and their functionality within the main application please refer to section BeamConstruct below to get detailled information about them 10001 zoom into view 10002 zoom out of view 10003 zoom to view full working area 10004 zoom to fully view selected element 10005 enable pointdrag mode for selected element 10006 log in a user 11002 create a new bezier primary element 11003 create a new circle primary element 11004 create a new delay primary element 11005 create a new dot primary element 11006 create a new external trigger primary element 11007 create a new laser output primary element 11008 create a new line primary element 11009 create a new motion primary element 11010 create a
399. mary Geometry element with variable parameters is available and where no Additional Geometry or no Post Processing Element is assigned Functions to edit geometries can be found at two places in menu Edit and its sub menus Non Destructive and Destructive within the main window and within the context menu of the drawing area that opens when an element is selected and the right mouse button is clicked 7 8 1 Edit Vectors Editing of one or more separate vectors requires selection of these vectors This can be done within the Coordinates list of the Geometry tab pane when an element is selected Here following functions are available Delete selected Points all selected points are deleted resulting from that the lines between them are removed too Delete selected Lines all lines between the selected points are removed the points itself are left untouched Insert point before a new point is added in the middle between the currently selected point ant its preceding one Insert point after a new point is added in the middle between the currently selected point ant its subsequent one 7 8 2 Edit Non Destructive 222 The non destructive editing functions perform modifications that leave the geometries and the elements they are created from untouched Some of them are available also from within the context menu of the Element Tree Alternatively they can be found in Menu Edit sub menu Non
400. mation please refer to http www Icdproc org It is possible to control up to four lines that show either text or a horizontal bar graph or a mixture of both Within the configuration the IP and port number of the LCDproc server have to be specified Global display parameters that can be set here but partially depend on the real capabilities of the hardware are Backlight the mode the backlight should be operated with Horizontal Split Position when both text and a bar graph have to be displayed this position specifies where the lines of the display have to be divided when only one element has to be displayed at a line here a number has to be given that is at least as big as the number of the displays characters per line Scrolling Speed when a text is set that is larger than a line within the display it is scrolled automatically this parameter defines the speed this text is scrolled with it does not apply to bar graphs they scale automatically to fit into the available space 67 Next for every of the up to four lines the layout has to be specified here it can be chosen if the text and the bar graph have to be displayed within the left or right part of the line When the split position is set to a value bigger than the number of display line characters the part that is defined for the right side is disabled data that are set at the related input are ignored Char INO LN1 the text that has to be displayed in line
401. may be not available or may be available only in a limited state The Open Advanced Process Control software package is available for different hardware and software platforms Dependent on the peculiarities of the used operating systems the exact storage position of the executable the plug ins and other required data may differ here always a storage location is chosen that is a common position for such a software on that operating system Within this document no operating system specific information are given here please refer to the user manual of the operating system 4 1 The Software Structure The OpenAPC package is a collection of software components and additional tools that can be used for different purposes The functionality of all of them can be combined in different ways depending on the type of application The OpenAPC package contains the following main components that itself may consist of several sub applications ControlRoom is a visualisation and process control software that can be used to create and to run HMls to control machinery and production processes as well as to solve different professional and home automation tasks the ControlRoom software itself consists of separate software applications that can be used for developing OpenEditor and OpenDebugger and for running a HMI OpenPlayer OpenHPlayer OpenPlugger InterlockServer CNConstruct is a CAD application that can be used to define CNC and material pro
402. mber is set to 0 BeamConstruct acts completely invisible When it is set to 255 full GUI is shown Between these numbers it is possible to define some subsets of the GUI to be shown just by adding the following values and giving the result as parameter 1 show drawing area the big area in the middle where vector data are drawn 2 show toolbars on top of main window where some basic functions and elements are accessible 4 show left hand side element panels 8 show right hand side element tree 241 16 show the menu bar with all menu items 32 show the close button in frame of main window 64 show the status bar at bottom of main window 131072 disables the possibility for the user to exit the application when this value is enabled the application can be left via command ExitUl only 262144 disable all possibilities for a user to edit projects or geometries when this value is set even dragging rotating or scaling of elements is no longer possible 524288 the warning dialogue on start up is disabled this value should be used only very rarely and only when user is already informed what the software does so that there can t be any surprising and therefore dangerous operations 1048576 applies only to mark dialogue when this value is used the manual scanner control tab pane in mark dialogue is not shown 2097152 applies only to mark dialogue this hides the part counter tab pane 4194304 appl
403. mbol with a bigger number of inputs and outputs To add a new input or output connector to such a group this kind of flow elements can be added As soon as it is placed the related group handles one additional incoming or outgoing connection that can be used for transferring data into our out of that group For a more detailed description of groups please refer below Data Conversion these flow elements can be used to convert data from one type to an other using different configurable conversion rules 26 Logic Operations when flow elements out of this category are used logic operations mainly with digital and numerical data can be performed Mathematical the flow elements within this category offer the possibility to perform calculations Flow Control elements out of this category are able to influence data flows in an generic way start new ones stop flows Input Output these flow elements perform IO operations with applications or devices outside of the scope of the current ControlRoom instance Motion this is a special subtype of flow elements that can be used to control external hardware that is somehow motion related like motors Data these flow elements do perform data operations such as loading or saving specific formats accessing databases and other things more that handle any kind of data but not related to external hardware devices Laser this category includ
404. meric IN AX4_SPD sets a new speed that is used for the next movement of axis 4 Digital IN AX4_STOP stops a movement of axis 4 immediately Digital IN AX4_HOME this input can be used when the axis has stopped it lets the axis do a reference movement to find its home position Numeric OUT AX1_CPOS the current position of axis 1 during a movement this output returns changing position data permanently Digital OUT AX1_MOVING this output is set to HIGH as long as the axis 1 is moving LOW indicates that the movement of the axis has stopped completely Numeric OUT AX2_CPOS the current position of axis 2 during a movement this output returns changing position data permanently Digital OUT AX2_ MOVING this output is set to HIGH as long as the axis 2 is moving LOW indicates that the movement of the axis has stopped completely Numeric OUT AX3_CPOS the current position of axis 3 during a movement this output returns changing position data permanently Digital OUT AX3_MOVING this output is set to HIGH as long as the axis 3 is moving LOW indicates that the movement of the axis has stopped completely Numeric OUT AX4_CPOS the current position of axis 4 during a movement this output returns changing position data permanently Digital OUT AX4_MOVING this output is set to HIGH as long as the axis 4 is moving LOW indicates that the movement of the axis has stopped completely 5 3 3 7 2 17 Data Flow Objects There exist no applica
405. meric IN2 numeric IN3 numerical input for data flows that have to be delayed Char IN4 char IN5 text input for data flows that have to be delayed Numeric IN7 DLY changes the delay values of all inputs a value set here overwrites the predefined default delays and can be used for a dynamic behaviour of the element Digital OUTO digital OUT1 digital output for data flows that are delayed Numeric OUT2 numeric OUT3 numerical output for data flows that are delayed Char OUT4 char OUT5 text output for data flows that are delayed Digital Triggered Gate A triggered gate expects a value at input 0 and emits it at an output as soon as an digital 1 is received at the related input Digi INO the input for the value that has to be emitted for every trigger signal Digi IN1 Digi IN7 the inputs for the trigger signals that cause the emission of the value from input O at the related outputs 60 Digi OUT1 Digi OUT7 the outputs for the data that are assigned to the trigger signal inputs Digital Gate This element can be used to enable or interrupt the flow of digital data Comparing to the triggered gate the digital GATE input does not cause the emission of data that have been stored before here this input allows incoming data to be output immediately HIGH to enable the gate or to be dropped LOW for a disabled gate When the GATE input is set to HIGH that does not cause a data transmission of values
406. metry Tab Pane This pane can be used only when an element is selected that contains some geometry Thus it does not offer any functionality as long as no element or as long as a geometry less Post Processing Tools is selected Within this panel geometry related values are displayed and can be changed When 3D mode is enabled the number of available and usable options and parameters depends on the currently selected view in 2D mode only these values and options can be changed and used that belong to a flat two dimensional project that only extend in X and Y direction Mirror X Mirror Y and Mirror Z buttons when pressing one of these buttons the currently selected geometry is mirrored in X Y or Z direction pressing the same button twice results in no changes 204 Centre X Centre Y and Centre Z buttons these buttons reposition the selected geometry within the current working area they centre it in X Y or Z direction Scale these input fields show the current scaling factor comparing to the original state of the geometry for X Y and Z direction a value of 1 0 means the geometry is not scaled values smaller than 1 0 mean it is shrunk in this direction vales greater than 1 0 mean it is bigger comparing to the original Top Left the upper left coordinates of the selected element whenever they are changed the element is repositioned without changing its size resulting from that the following values are changed too Bo
407. metry consists of several short lines including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style this mode starts with a line or a space at the next beginning of a hatch line depending on the previous hatch line the pattern is kept continuous Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings 217 Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the length of the additional points that form the selected line style Hatch Style here the hatching mode is defined depending on the selection made here a different pattern is used to fill a polygon Lines forward filling is done with parallel lines that go all into the same direction Lines forward backward the polygon is filled with parallel lines that change their direction Connected lines this mode extends the previous one here the parallel lines are connected and form some kind of waved lines Zig zag these lines are no longer parallel they exchange their direction alternative and are connected at their ends directly Inner lines this mode repeats the outline of the hatched polygon in its inner side as often as it fits with the chosen hatch distance Outer lines straight this mode is similar to Inner lines but
408. more than one privileges which would overlap within the HMI definition this priority comes into account the visibility definition of the privilege with the higher priority is taken This gives the possibility not only to change the visibility of HMI elements depending on one privilege but also depending on combinations of privileges a user might have Following it is described which mandatory and optional steps have to be done in order to set up the user management for a ControlRoom application 5 9 1 Defining User Privileges First of all the user management has to be enabled and a set of user privileges together with their names have to be defined This can be done within the global user privilege panel in menu File gt User Privileges This panel contains an Enable check box that has to be set as very first Only if this option is enabled all the different user management functionalities the related HMI element and flow objects are available Next a bunch of user privileges has to be set that are relevant for a project This is done by setting a short descriptive name for every of them These names can be used in later steps to identify such a privilege non ambiguous By default the application offers some possible privileges that can be used or modified Right beside the input field for the privilege names two arrows for up and down can be found If these arrows are pressed a privilege definition is moved up or down in the
409. motion functions are available e OUT2 OUT3 specifies which of the two possible motion controllers has to be used e Speed specifies the speed a manual motion operation can be performed with please note the value entered within this field is not clipped to the maximum possible speed immediately since every axis can have a different maximum speed it is decided on motion start which of these limits has to be used thus it may be possible an axis moves with a lower speed than specified within this field simply because is maximum speed is limited e Camera this button an be used to toggle the background image on and of in case manual image capture enabling is configured within project settings this button has the same functionality like the related vision menu item movement value the value that can be entered in middle between the arrows specifies the relative movement distance or the absolute motion position to move to depending on the arrow button that was pressed e Double arrows these buttons cause a movement as long as the button is pressed Single arrows these buttons cause a single movement via the distance or angle specified with the number input field in the middle here the time the button is pressed does not influence the motion e Arrow to dot when this button is pressed an absolute movement is performed the number input field in the middle between the buttons specifies the target position to move to t
410. mpad Please note a bigger font leads to a bigger size of the whole keyboard numpad Together with the keyboard size factor the resulting keyboard numpad may become too big for the used display 5 3 1 2 User Privilege Settings Using menu File User Privileges the internal user management functionality can be enabled several types of user privileges can be defined and their order which is equal to their priority can be changed As soon as the user management is enabled within this dialogue all related functionalities are available too the User Settings within the project menu the flow element to log in a user the user management HMI element and the user privilege panels within the configuration of all HMI elements For more details about the usage of the internal user management functionality please refer to the related section above 5 3 1 3 User Settings The menu item File Users can be used as soon as the internal user management was activated Here within this panel new users can be added existing ones can be deleted the data of existing ones can be edited their privileges can be changed and passwords can be set for them For more details about the usage of the internal user management functionality please refer to the related section above 5 3 2 The HMI Editor of the OpenEditor The HMI editor tab pane provides the functionality to set up a graphical interface that will be visible to the end user when it
411. n be chosen this group belongs to This category is important in case a group has to be used as functional macro Such functional macros can be added like normal flow elements out of the Flow Editors pop up menu The category that can be specified for a group is similar to the categories the macros are using So if a group is categorised within its properties dialogue and when it is saved within the folder macros of the applications installation or library directory it is added to the pop up menu within the Flow Editor automatically 5 3 3 7 The Flow Objects of the Flow Editor Following all available flow objects are described together with their functionality 5 3 3 7 1 Flow Objects of HMI Controls All flow objects that belong to a HMI element use digital input O and output 0 for the same functionality Depending on the value that is set at digital INO the appearance of the user interface element is changed Afterwards the same value is sent out at digital OUTO That functionality is fixed and common to all HMI elements therefore it is not described separately within the following sections 5 3 3 7 1 1 Flow Objects of Control type HMI Elements Simple Button Digital IN1 set the buttons state this kind of button can be toggled for a short time only also if the input keeps a 1 for a longer time Therefore this functionality in most cases will not make much sense and exists mainly for the sake of completeness Char IN3 sets a
412. n mark speed is used Digital IN3 L turns the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR the power the laser has to be driven with here a value in range 0 100 is expected that corresponds to the laser power value using unit percent Numeric IN5 FREQ the frequency in unit Hz the laser has to be driven with during marking Numeric IN6 CMD this input can be used to set additional commands and to perform additional control operations using them here following command values are currently supported e 0 stop marking immediately and flush the list of control commands that may be already stored within the plug in or within the scanner card Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to move the scanner and to control the laser such a stream can contain complex marking operation information Digital OUT6 BSY signals if marking is still active HIGH or if the scanner controller card has finished all operations this output has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data it is necessary to synchronize several movement operations Binary OUT7 IN binary data that reflect the state of the digital inputs of this scanner controller card requires Digi I O Extensionboard These data are required by some plug ins that need to react on these inputs and there have to be connected to them like the scanner controller stepper motor plug in
413. n A a c sa 205 Resina a A TAE 235 Reset CON sai it A 235 RA A E E iii 149f RETEN it a E E EES AA EATA A E Sabin sala Ain et TE edie AS bec da tba N 149f HON VONS a T EA bo E dd A 203 Rising Falling Edge iaa aa a a a a a dd N bos 53 Rotate Control Para E E S a a a a a a a a e E EEN 59 Rota AEAEE AE E EERE AA ETA TA Pe A E E E AE A eR 204 A A EAE ea cathe EEE A E TE Ata E E T heck one Liesl 157 159 Hd nd e o e O TR 157 159 O A A A A O NA 226 S RO 146 SAMLight CCI Controller ici api sendas 103 ASTAN ETO lais RA AO E EEE E T N AASA 91 sSave as default configU O uu dai 194 DAVES Elli case 232 DAVES MAGS ue biela o 128 DAVE Producir ibid 193 DAVE MEX AA PAI 129 TN 165 204 Scale Translate Control Parameters nit dadas 59 Tersia alere 10 A lcd 237 scanhead Selection e A EANA VAA PE A E EEN SAT 194 SCAN AB R RTC ScanAlo eaae eenaa eaea aa ke ea ii 93 SGANLAB R RTO oi di 95 SGCGANLAB R RT Chica dotar mean 97 SGANLAB R RITCS ee a eara ae aaaea pi ts 99 SCANNER N E EN EE AEE ERES ED N EAA EEE dd 190 SCaniner DitMa pew we e Fees a cscs aaa ana a tad eae nus a a a aa Ta a eaa a aa ada d ee dai enaA aR naaa 197 scanner controller daa 237 Scanner Controller tota td ida 191 Scanner Controller SelectiON ooocccccoccccnnccnnnocncnnaccnnnncnnnononononcnnnnnnnn ona a a ainn 190 Scanner Pen Semis iii A a aida 196 SCAPS FEB Controller a o cedo 105 SCAPS R NEEDS cach seh etn aden E N 100 SCAPS RUSA noia Aena 1
414. n be Exclusive OR concatenated and the result can be inverted optionally Within the configuration dialogue the inputs that belong to one output and from which the values have to be concatenated can be configured Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears If at least one output uses this input as clock no other outputs can be configured to use INO as data input Digital IN1 digital IN7 data inputs for the XOR concatenation Digital OUTO digital OUT7 data outputs that send the values resulting from this operation Digital N AND Using this flow control several inputs can be AND concatenated and the result can be inverted optionally Within the configuration dialogue the inputs that belong to one output and from which the values have to be concatenated can be configured Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears If at least one output uses this input as clock no other outputs can be configured to use INO as data input Digital IN1 digital IN7 data inputs for the AND concatenation Digital OUTO digital OUT7 data outputs that send the values resulting from this operation Digital Shift Register 49 This flow elements implements a shifting register it stores all data that
415. n be specified that is used as limit and triggers the LIM output and the amplifier specific gain value has to be set Digi INO RES whenever the limit was exceeded the digital output LIM is set using this input the amplifier can be reset and it starts again watching the measured values Numeric IN1 THR using this input the default threshold specified within the configuration panel can be 66 overwritten Digi OUTO LIM whenever the measured values exceed the given threshold this output is set to HIGH after that happened and to continue measurement a reset has to be done using input RES Numeric OUT1 VL this output permanently emits the current peak value measured by the device This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_gsv2 JoyWarrior Accelerometer This plug in can be used to retrieve data from the JoyWarrior24F accelerometer family and compatible It retrieves the current acceleration in X Y and Z direction in m s and calculates the current speed out of these values in m s The speed value may differ from the real speed over time thus there exists a possibility to synchronize it to the real speed using a different data source or by setting it to O when all motion has stopped Within the settings dialogue the input has to be specified where the JoyWarrior is connected to and the maximum acceleration it has been calibrated to has to be set Numeric IN3 SPDX sets the current speed for the X
416. n best case it should be a whole numbered multiple of the timer resolution Smaller timer resolution values result in a better timing accuracy but in a higher system load bigger values result in project global timers that are less accurate but save computing power on the target system External Application here one of the options Use local Interlock Server Use remote Interlock Server Use local mirrored Interlock Server or Use remote redundant Interlock Server can be chosen for projects that have to use the Interlock Server for enhanced control and management tasks in case one of these options is enabled it is possible to use the Plugged Devices list to configure externally running plug ins When one of the local Interlock Server modes is used the player or debugger will perform everything automatically load the project start the Interlock Server and start all OpenPlugger instances that are necessary to handle external plug ins All these components then will communicate with each other over the Interlock Server on localhost In case one of the options for remote Interlock Server modes is chosen one or two network IP s have to be specified where the OpenPlayer or OpenDebugger can find the Interlock Server instances In this case the player debugger will not be able to start the Interlock Server or the OpenPlugger s that has to be done manually Here the order is important first the OpenlServer s has have to be
417. n can be pressed This opens a popup menu where one of the following options can be chosen for further processing Refine this result some frequency and power values near around the chosen position are used to create a new matrix for a second more accurate calibration step Go back from this result this option performs the opposite operation of the previous one it creates a new power frequency matrix with a larger range of values Use parameters for pen when this item is chosen the parameter wizard will be closed and the found parameters power that belong to the selected field are set to the current pen For the other marking parameters apart the selected ones the pen parameter wizard always used values of the currently selected pen only the selected ones are varied and modified by this function 7 6 2 Scanner Pen Settings This tab pane contains all scanner related pen parameters Laser On Delay the time that is set between start of a mark movement and the moment the laser is switched on so this parameter specifies if and if yes how much the laser should be turned on delayed in case a marking operation is started Laser Off Delay the time that is set between the end of a mark operation and the moment the laser is turned off so this parameter specifies how much turning the laser off has to be delayed in case a 197 marking operation ends Jump Delay time the scanner waits when a jump was execu
418. n centre Numeric IN3 CZ Numeric IN4 AX Numeric IN5 AY Numeric IN6 AZ angle in unit degrees to rotate the geometry data around the X axis Binary OUTO CTRL the modified binary control data Z value of the coordinate to be used as rotation centre angle in unit degrees to rotate the geometry data around the X axis angle in unit degrees to rotate the geometry data around the X axis Scale Translate Control Parameters Using this plug in the geometry part of binary control data can be translated and scaled The related scaling and translation parameters can be defined as static default values within the plug ins configuration panel or they can be set dynamically via the inputs Binary INO CTRL the binary control data that have to be changed by this plug in Numeric IN1 SCX scaling factor in X direction that resizes the geometry data according to the coordinate origin Numeric IN2 SCY scaling factor in Y direction that resizes the geometry data according to the coordinate origin Numeric IN3 SCZ scaling factor in Z direction that resizes the geometry data according to the coordinate origin Numeric IN4 TX translation value for X coordinate for a relative movement by the specified distance Numeric IN5 TY translation value for Y coordinate for a relative movement by the specified distance Numeric IN6 TZ translation value for Z coordinate for a relative movement by the spe
419. n element is selected it is highlighted by a double lined blue border This border can be used to manipulate the element When pressing the left mouse button within this border and outside the coloured squares it contains it can be moved and repositioned Left clicking it within one of the squares gives access to other manipulation functions the dark grey rectangle at the lower right corner provides a resizing function where the aspect ratio between both visible directions is kept intact the medium grey rectangles at the lower or right border of the rectangle provide resizing functionality in one direction only the light grey rectangles in upper right and lower left corner allow to rescale the element in every direction and without keeping the current aspect ration between the two visible directions the cyan rectangles at the left and upper border can be used to slant the geometry in one of the visible directions the red rectangle in upper left corner can be used to rotate it How and by which value the elements are changed can be seen within the panels on the main windows left hand side as described in following section PLEASE NOTE The manipulation possibilities described above apply to the geometry that is currently selected When a primary element is selected the changes apply to its geometry possibly existing additional or Post Processing Tools are re calculated according to these changes Whenever additional geome
420. n one of the the hosts that is configured within the project parameters and with command line option r lt ip gt where ip is the IP of the other not yet started server this interlock server will become the active one automatically 2 The second Interlock Server has to be started on the other host that is configured within the project parameters and with command line option r lt ip gt where ip is the IP of the other already accessible server this interlock server will connect to the active one and start mirroring of its data 3 All OpenPlugger instances have to be started using the project file that contains the information about the Interlock Servers host they automatically try both IP s and connect to the active Interlock Server 4 External applications that implement software interlocks have to be started they have to check both IP s actively and use the one where the Interlock Server is accessible 5 The OpenPlayer has to be started using the same project file please refer pt 3 it automatically tries both IP s and connects to the active Interlock Server 6 External applications that implement automatic sequences have to be started they have to check both IP s actively and use the one where the active Interlock Server is accessible Now that the whole system is up and running a problem might happen with one of the both hosts where the Interlock Servers are running As soon as the first active instance
421. n the flow properties dialogue of this element this input can be used to trigger a data submission on Numerical OUT6 or OUT7 Numeric IN2 input for dynamically setting the minimum allowed value this input overwrites the default settings defined within the objects properties Numeric IN3 input for dynamically setting the maximum allowed value this input overwrites the default maximum defined within the objects properties Numeric IN7 when a number is transmitted to this input it is used and displayed as new value Numeric OUT6 and numeric OUT7 here the value of the element can be transmitted out to other flow elements within the flow configuration dialogue of this element it can be decided under which conditions such a transmission is started at which output Text Field and Password Field Digital IN1 when configured within the flow properties dialogue of this element this input can be used to trigger a data submission on Numerical OUT6 or OUT7 Char IN7 when a text is transmitted to this input it is used and displayed as new value Char OUT6 and char OUT7 here the value of the element can be transmitted out to other flow elements within the flow configuration dialogue of this element it can be decided under which conditions such a transmission of text data is started at which output 5 3 3 7 1 2 External Flow Objects of Control type HMI Elements BeamConstruct The BeamConstruct plug in provides full functionality
422. n was configured to use two axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y Digital IN3 L turns the laser on and off 79 Numeric IN4 PWR the power the laser has to be driven with here a value in range 0 100 is expected that corresponds to the as a percentage laser power value Numeric IN5 FREQ the frequency in unit Hz the laser has to be driven with during marking Numeric IN6 CMD this input can be used to set additional commands and to perform additional control operations using them here following command values are supported 0 stop marking immediately and flush the list of control commands that may be already stored within the plug in Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to move the scanner and to control the laser such a stream can contain complex marking operation information Digital OUT6 BSY signals if marking is still active HIGH or if the scanner controller card has finished all operations this input has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data it is necessary to synchronize several movement operations Binary OUT7 IN binary data that reflect the state of the digital inputs of this scanner controller card these data are required by some plug ins that need to react on these inputs and there have to be connected to them like the scanner controller stepper motor plug
423. nPlayer or the OpenPlugger would execute the Interlock Server automatically and it is still running no further action is taken That means a changed operation mode will not be applied to the running instance of the OpenIServer thus it will not switch over to the possibly different operation mode In such cases it is recommended to kill the OpenlServer first before running a project with a different Interlock Server mode 5 7 7 1 Single Local Mode This mode is the most simple one here the OpenPlayer or OpenDebugger starts exactly one instance of the OpenlIServer automatically This instance runs on the same host external applications have to connect to that host only no further actions are necessary 5 7 7 2 Mirrored Local Mode Using this mode two instances of the OpenlServer are started by OpenPlayer or OpenDebugger One of both becomes active immediately and its server socket can be accessed by applications The other one mirrors all data from the active instance but is not accessible from outside As soon as the first instance dies for some reason the second Interlock Server activates its server socket replaces the instance that has gone and starts a new Interlock Server that now will mirror all the data External applications that make use of the Interlock Server will lose the connection to it at this point they now simply have to reconnect to the same IP again Standard applications like the debugger the player or the OpenPlugger wil
424. nal the frequency in unit Hz a connected tool has to be used with for the movement to the coordinates given in the same line of the CSV file if no value is specified here the preceding state is used or 0 Hz in case no Frequency value was set within the current file Off Speed optional this is the speed a movement has to be performed with when the tool is turned off it is given in unit mm sec and has to be specified at least once before a movement with the tool turned off ON 0 is performed On Speed optional this is the speed a movement has to be performed with when a used tool is turned on it is given in unit mm sec and has to be specified at least once before a movement with the tool turned on ON 1 is performed Off Delay optional here a delay value can be specified in unit usec microseconds that defines a delay when the tool is turned off it turns off the tool using the given delay This delay can be negative in this case the tool is turned off the given time before the related position is reached On Delay optional here a delay value can be specified in unit usec microseconds that defines a delay when the tool is turned from off to on it turns on the tool using the given delay This delay can be negative in this case the tool is turned on the given time before the related position is reached Additional Parameter 1 optional this is a parameter that can be used freely for some additional values that mi
425. nbtn aul dyes nsaniid ete ces ie died Sadan e aa cteteetces 193 195 MarkinGsctt A eh et tied el hol Looted iil ie seth RO 234 Marking Active Signalliic 0 aa Anthea A iaa 191 Mahe mat a ld 27 Menu em SNO S a AI dd tada 161 190 Merges giret o e E a al 183 225 MM Ma a a a a a aci E E RAA 20 Minor Meco cir da a A A A a cas 164 204 MS A O ON a 164 204 MINO La at A e Ent o 204 MISC ten doe redada Nadando Shamans wee 194 MESE EA O OA TN 27 130 132 Miscellaneous Pen Settings iii be 162 MIXEA to Character ai Aisctinest fascia san ot os ovearas oa cl 44 NILE D E A O ESEA AN at E 148 Modbus Addressable RTU MaS E r aa e a a a raan a aa e aaia 69 Neol oE ma OANE EIKE AAAI E EAE AEE AAA T A S AE SA anna 69 70 77 Modbus TCP Master asc a a A O E T satus 70 77 ModbUS TCR Slave NN Na A etree 71 Mode can A ld dead aa 234 Modify Settings tt A Sask EAO 193 MOON a E E AE 216 MOON aaa EAT 27 109 118 174 214 Motion AXE Si aaa 192 235 Motion Controller cian aaa ad 192 Move DION a PEPEE E EEE daa 166 206 Move entity tree to tab panenane a A E ATE AEE A 190 Mov To Bots iia EAS E E ET E E E A 166 206 MOVE TO Ke o PE A E E E E E AA 166 206 Mov BT o P A TA T E A D E E E 166 206 MW E EEE AE A E ada 147 MUNTI CAG PATEE EE ATE A EASA E AEEA E A E N 236 Mutual EXCIUSI ON E a A T E A A A AA 53 MYSQL ACCES its 128 N NAME O 20 27 NES o cdo iaa 147 Network GION ti sta A a ala Bia aes 72 NetWork RECEIVES iii lia 72 NetWork Server cata
426. nce the real position of axis is not known to E1701M controller So as very first an axis always should be referenced High Limit the higher limit in unit mm is a soft limit specifying the maximum position the axis is allowed to move to in planar mode in case of angular mode this value is ignored PLEASE NOTE when an axis was not referenced yet this limit is useless since the real position of axis is not known So as very first an axis always should be referenced Maximum Speed this parameter can be used to limit maximum speed an axis can move with in unit mm sec for planar mode and deg sec in angular mode Independent from which speed value is specified during operation this limit is never exceeded Acceleration Mode specifies the shape of the ramp used during acceleration here it can be chosen between linear smooth acceleration exponential strong but not so smooth mode which may overshoot at end of acceleration phase or s shaped acceleration very smooth but not very fast accelerating Acceleration factor that specifies how strong acceleration is for chosen acceleration mode Deceleration Mode specifies the shape of the ramp used during deceleration here it can be chosen between linear smooth deceleration exponential strong but not so smooth mode which may lose increments at beginning of deceleration phase or s shaped deceleration very smooth but not very fast Deceleration factor that specifies how strong decele
427. ncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncrnnncnnnnnnns 136 5 6 Using the OpenHPlayer cool a e ata oead 137 5 7 Using the Interlock Server minicadena n 137 5 7 1 Reflect The Current State Of An ApplicatiON ooocoocicnnnncconoooconcccnnnnnnnncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno 139 5 7 2 Implement Software InterlOCkKkS oooooonnnncccnnnnnncnconononcccnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnn nr nenas 139 5 F 3 Automatic SEequUeEnNCES icons irritada io lar van eSebed a debs saaessegek ees 140 STA COMCIUSION cd 141 5 7 5 Accessing the Interlock Servera nann NAAAAANEEANANNNAAAAAAEEEEEA EAEAN nnna 142 5 7 5 1 Access Via Own AppliCatiONS ooooooccccnccocccccccnncnccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncninncnns 142 DM OZ Access Mia LUA Crisis aa seteasede aaae E EA a sa och aaa a aeaaea SAREES 143 5 7 5 3 Access Via IL Instruction Language ScriptS ooonoocccccnnnnoccccccnnnoncccncnnnnannncnononcnononnnnnnnnnnna 146 5 7 5 3 1 Commands according to IEC B1131 3 rs iiaii ean AR Ea ARa 146 5 7 5 3 2 Extended commands and stateMentS ooooooocccccnnnccoccccconcconccnnnnnnann cnn cnnnnnn cnn nn nnnnnnncannn 148 5 7 5 3 3 Reserved Function NaMeS ooccccccccoccccccccononcncncnonnnnnnnn cnn nn ncnn nn 150 5 7 5 3 4 Extended Commands for Interlock Server ACCESS oooooocconncccccccccoconcncccnanannccncnnnnnnnnnn 151 5 7 5 3 5 Supported Data Types ccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeecceneeeeeeeeeeeea
428. nd white image a plain black and white image or a greyscale image mark bidir this flag has an influence on behaviour during marking and enables a mode where lines are marked from beginning to end and from end to beginning alternating This saves some marking time since the jump back to the beginning of the next line is saved mark fromlastline this flag has an influence on behaviour during marking and lets the image be processed from bottom to top when it is set mark _wo_lineincr this flag has an influence on behaviour during marking and marks all lines of an image at the same y position mark inverted this flag has an influence on behaviour during marking and inverts the power values resulting in an image that is negative to the visual representation depending on the used material this finally may result in a positive image 247 aspect fixed x aspect fixed y these flags have no counterpart in BeamConstruct s UI and can be set or reset via BeamServer only they are used when an image of an existing Scanner Bitmap Element is replaced by command CmdSetElemFi le When none of these flags is set the new image is scaled to the same size like the previous image which may result in a loss of the current aspect ratio When one of both flags is set the aspect ratio of the new image is kept while one of the two sides X or Y uses the same width or height like the original image When both flags are set behaviour is undefined 248 8 Cor
429. ndex number that points to a code within the current code list the code that is located at the given position of the list is sent immediately Numeric IN3 LIST a value in range 1 10 that specifies which of the lists has to be used for the current operation only this list is used for comparison and transmission when one of the in or outputs NAME or INDEX is used Char OUTO NAME whenever the device receives a IR code it checks the currently used list for that code and returns the name of the code at this output when a matching IR code could be found Char OUT1 CODE here the raw code in UIRT PRONTO format is returned whenever a IR code is received by the device Numeric OUT2 INDEX whenever the device receives a IR code it checks the currently used list for that code and returns the index position of the code at this output when a matching IR code could be found This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_usbuirt and depends on the shared library uuirtdrv WLAN Position This plug in evaluates the current position without the use of GPS Therefore this positioning method also works within buildings and without a free view to the sky As only precondition a connection to the internet is necessary When the device the software is running at contains an active WLAN device and not only a plain Ethernet connection the position evaluation can be done more exact The only parameter that can be configured for this plug in is
430. nected Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the length of the additional points that form the selected line style Text here the text can be specified that has to be drawn Font Type here the type of font that has to be used for this text element can be chosen following options are available to select from TrueType the standard fonts that are installed on the system can be used when this option is selected the combo box directly below of this one is enabled to select a font out of it all these fonts are in no way optimised for output via a laser scanner system their intended target is publishing therefore their lines and paths are optimised for quality which may result in a slow output Laser Vector this special type of fonts is optimised for laser marking operations They consist of as less as possible lines and are designed for single lined outputs like they are done with lasers Using these fonts marking of texts is much faster than with the TrueType fonts When this font type is selected the font li
431. neral plug in settings a default file name to a PLT file has to be set which is used for conversion Since there are no measurement units specified within the file itself the HPGL Unit defines the size of one unit within the file Depending of the file version and the accuracy of the exporting application this can be 0 025 mm 0 01 mm or any other value Next for every pen that may exist within the HPGL file movement and tool parameters have to be set These parameters are used for every vector information of the related pen Thus different pens can be used to define different speed and or tool values Following pen parameters are required Power the power the tool has to be handled with in range 0 100 Frequency the frequency in unit Hz the tool has to be controlled with tool dependent parameter Off Speed the speed that is used for all movements where the tool is turned off means where the pen is defined as up within the HPGL file and where no visible vector data are defined within it On Speed the speed that is used for all movements where the tool is turned on means where the pen is defined as down within the HPGL file and where visible vector data are defined within it Off Delay the delay that becomes active when the tool is turned off this delay will be done by later processing steps between start of the movement and turning the tool off really this value might be negative On Delay the delay tha
432. new data Two other options give the possibility to swap the bytes of the used address offset which might be necessary for some Modbus slaves and to write protocol related logging information into a file The last option can be used to find the reason for communication problems but should be handled with care such a log file can become very big in a very short time depending on the load that is handled by this plug in An other option is relevant for older project files only OpenAPC 1 x compatibility mode should not be set within new projects but has to be left enabled for version 1 x projects that make use of one of the single bit 10 s Coils or Input Registers As long as this option is set the 32 bit numbers that form 32 coil or register values are concatenated using the old style with exchanged byte order In case it is not set the bits are concatenated within their real order and without grouping them into bytes For every of the two possible slave access connections inputs following parameters have to be set Operation Mode the method of data exchange with the slave this mode influences the range of in and output values and decides if data can be read and written or read only Slave Address the default address of the slave to communicate with as long as it is not changed dynamically 69 Base Address Offset the 0 based address offset within the slaves address space that has to be used as long as it is no
433. nforms about the result of every command that was given when a HIGH signal is given at this output the last command could be executed successfully LOW means an error happened In case of an error a plain error text is given at the ERROR output Please note this output is updated only in case a command input is set when values are set that do not invoke a command to the scanner card CMD_ OK is not used Char OUT ERROR the plain error text in case a command could not be executed successfully Digital OUT USC_INO USC_IN5 the state of the digital inputs of the USC scanner card these inputs are updated every time the input GET_USC_IN of this macro is set Digital OUT FEB_INO USC_IN7 the state of the digital inputs of the FEB stand alone option these inputs are updated every time the input GET_FEB_IN of this macro is set Sintec R ETH6608 Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Beside of that some laser equipment can be damaged in case it is controlled with wrong signals Thus it is highly recommended to check the output generated by this plug in using e g an oscilloscope to avoid problems caused by wrong configurations This should be done prior to putting a system into operation for the first t
434. ng a rectangle the upper left and the lower right corner of it have to be specified by two separate mouse clicks The resulting rectangle will always be parallel to X and Y coordinate axis Drawing functionality can be extended by pressing the Shift key after specifying the first corner point of the rectangle first click when this key is held down a square is created instead of a rectangle Horizontal distance from first point specifies the side length of the square Within the rectangles property tab pane following options are available Line Style the style the rectangles lines are created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of exactly four points that are connected by four completed lines which form a rectangle Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines connecting the four corners including additional points all these lines are connected and therefore form a closed rectangular shape Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points between the four corners every second line is drawn so that it results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifie
435. nly in case the plug in was configured to use two axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y Numeric IN2 Z the Z position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use three axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y z Digital IN3 L turns the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR the power the laser has to be driven with here a value in range 0 100 is expected that corresponds to the percentual laser power Numeric IN5 FREQ the frequency in unit Hz the laser has to be driven with during marking Numeric IN6 CMD this input can be used to set additional commands and to perform additional control operations using them curently there is one command value supported 0 stop marking immediately and flush the list of control commands that may be already stored within the plug in Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to move the scanner and to control the laser such a stream can contain complex marking operation information Digital OUT6 BSY signals if marking is still active HIGH or if the scanner controller card has finished all operations this input has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data it is necessary to synchronize several movement operations Binary OUT7 IN binary data that reflect the state of the digital i
436. nnnnnnns 20 5 3 2 1 3 User Privilege HMI Control Properties ooococccnnnnnccnnnnnnccccccnnonncccccnnnnnnrrnccnnnnnn 21 9 3 2 2 HMI CONtrOlTYPeS ii 21 A A cE E EE E A A E P E A ccawandat eocaadeses sabes N 22 a EA E S E E A E EE EPEE A T EE E E dev Mal ak E 23 9 9 2 2 9 otatlc Element E EA EE cava me 23 0 02 2 A COMBINES rada TE EE 23 5 3 3 The Flow Editor Of The OpenEditor ccceccccceeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecececaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneees 24 Thak The FlowSYMbDOIS 0 cial tai 25 5 3 3 2Adding HMIObjectS coloca ts 26 5 3 3 3 Add ing FON Objects vita Es 26 5 9 3 4 Editing POVODEC iii ti 27 5 3 3 5 Creating and Editing Flow CONNEC IONS oooooccccccnnococcccccnanoncnononannnncnn conan nn nan cnnnnn anna ncnnnannn 28 5 9 3 6 Grouping FOW ODJ ECIS uscar iia decades Na 28 5 3 3 7 The Flow Objects of the Flow EditOF ooooooocccncnnncocccccccnconccccccononnconccnnnnnnnoncnnnnnncnnnencnnnnnnnnnn 29 5 3 3 7 1 Flow Objects of HMI ControlS oooocconnoccccnnnnncccccccnonananccnononnnnncnnnnnnnn nn ccn non n nr nn nr nananana 29 5 3 3 7 1 1 Flow Objects of Control type HMI ElementS ooooconnocccnnnnnnoccccnccononacnoncnononinininnnn 29 5 3 3 7 1 2 External Flow Objects of Control type HMI Elements 30 5 3 3 7 1 3 Flow Objects of Display type HMI ElementS ooooocccccnnnnccccncccccnacccncnonnancnaninininnnno 34 5 3 3 7 1 4 External Flow Objects of Display type HMI Elements 34 5 3 3 7 1 5 Flow Objects of Sta
437. nput coordinates in relation to output On the fly factor X On the fly factor Y specifies the factor in X or Y direction for marking on the fly operation Gain X Gain Y linear correction factor in X and Y direction to stretch or shrink the output Rotation rotates the output by the given angle in unit degree using the center of the working area as rotation point Laser Ready Input specifies a specific digital input to be used as Laser Ready signal When this option is set marking is possible only in case a HIGH signal is detected at the input specified here Firmware Debug Log in case of problems operating the controller or in case the error LED is turned on this parameter can be used to get some logging information from controller and to write it into a file To use it a path to a file has to specified here where the controller firmware log has to be written into When this text field is left empty no debug log is written PLEASE NOTE the firmware log file is created new on every start up so all preceding log data are overwritten To get a useful log please perform the following steps 1 power on LY 001 scanner controller if already powered toggle power or reset controller 2 start application that makes use of LY 001 controller with a configuration where firmware debug log is already set 3 perform operations that lead to unexpected results or that let error LED turn on 4 stop this operation and close application
438. nputs of this scanner controller card these data are required by some plug ins that need to react on these inputs and there have to be connected to them like the scanner controller stepper motor plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_samsci SAMLight CCI Controller This macros encapsulates functionalities to access SCAPS SAMLight via the Client Control Interface Internally it uses the SAMLight CCI plug in As a first step this plug in has to be configured to access SAMLight correctly here the IP and port number where SAMLight is available at have to be set Within SAMLight the same connection parameter and the TCP IP access method need to be enabled for the Client Control Interface too The macro itself provides inputs of two types parameter inputs that do not cause a data transmission when a value is set and command inputs that send a command to SAMLight wait for the reaction and provide the result at the output Some of these command inputs require values that have to be set at the parameter inputs before Numeric IN X input parameter for X coordinates as it is used by several commands this input only sets a parameter for later use it does not invoke a command Numeric IN Y input parameter for Y coordinate values as it is used by some of the CCI commands this input only sets a parameter for later use it does not cause communication with the scanner card 103 Numeric IN Z input parameter for Z coordinate
439. nsists of lines that use exactly one starting and one end point where one single line is drawn between Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points all these lines are connected Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the length of the additional points that form the selected line style Polygon Style here it can be chosen if the last polygon point and the first one are connected by a line style Closed or not style Open 7 7 4 9 Bezier Curve Creation and parameters of this element are very similar to the polygon described above but it does not generate direct connections between the specified base points Using this element a smooth round Bezier curve is generated This curve uses the given base points as creation hint but does not necessarily cross them Such a Bezier curve consists of a undefined number of base points but requires at least three of them Specifying the position of these base points can be done by left clicking within the drawing ar
440. nt Next the circle can be modified further Line Style the style the circle is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of several short fully connected lines that form a closed circle for this mode the parameter Segments specifies how much of these short lines are used to create this circle the more lines are used the more smooth the circle becomes Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines that form the circle comparing to the previous option here the parameter Distance influences the length of these lines and therefore the resolution here the shorter the lines are the more segments this circle consists of and the more smooth it becomes Dashed Arcs the circle consists of dashes where the dashes are not straight lines but follow the shape of the circle and therefore are round Dashed Straights the circle consists of dashes where the dashes do not follow the shape of the circle but are straight lines Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance this parameter decides how long the resulting lines of the chosen line style have to be it is not valid for the continuous line style where the length would be always equal to the circumference Radius the radi
441. nt to an other kind of HTTP error This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_http_ client Load Image This plug in is able to load a picture and to provide the loaded image as binary data These binary data can be used e g to dynamically change images within the user interface Different HMI elements support that functionality like the Image Button or the Static Image When the binary data loaded by this plug in are sent to a flow element that is not able to handle images because it expects a different kind of binary data the image data are dropped In this case within the OpenDebugger an error message is given when the project is executed in OpenPlayer the user is not informed about this illegal operation The configuration panel of the plug in gives the possibility to pre define up to four image files Please note when the project is moved to a different platform or system it has to be made sure that the paths given for the images are still valid Digital INO loads the image that is predefined with image file 1 Char IN1 overwrites the current predefinition of image file 1 to be loaded and loads the new one immediately Digital IN2 loads the image that is predefined with image file 2 Char IN3 overwrites the current predefinition of image file 2 to be loaded and loads the new one immediately Digital IN4 loads the image that is predefined with image file 3 Char IN5 overwrites the current predefinition
442. nt value this operation may cause a loss of data DINT change the current numeric data type of the accumulator to DINT dependent on the current value this operation may cause a loss of data ULINT change the current numeric data type of the accumulator to ULINT dependent on the current value this operation may cause a loss of data LINT change the current numeric data type of the accumulator to LINT dependent on the current value this operation may cause a loss of data REAL change the current numeric data type of the accumulator to LREAL dependent on the current value this operation may cause a loss of data or accuracy LREAL change the current numeric data type of the accumulator to LREAL CAL call a function block those name is given as operand and return from this function block only when a command RET RETC or RETCN is executed there Calling a function block lets the instruction list continue with that block until a return command is found there afterwards the instruction list continues where the call to the function block appeared before A function block has to be encapsulated with the statements FUNCTION BLOCK and END_FUNCTION and is allowed to call other functions itself This possibility has to be handled with care when a function block calls itself in an endless iterative loop the application may stop or crash at some point when no more resources are available to handle this recursion When a function
443. ntal vertical direction of the drawing area 3D view here all three dimensions of the current project are visible at the same time within a three dimensional foreshortened view comparing to the other views here no elements can be created and edited but it is possible to rotate the view by moving the mouse while holding down the right mouse button split view when this view is enabled all four views described above are shown at the same time within a split view This mode requires more hardware resources but makes editing easier because all three views can be edited here simultaneously 7 7 2 The Property Tab Panes The main window of BeamConstruct contains some special tab panes on its left hand side These panes give access to different parameters and values they can be used to influence geometries in an very exact way 7 7 2 1 The Tab Pane Of The Currently Selected Element The very left tab pane is a dynamic one it changes its contents depending on the element that is currently selected As long as no element is selected this pane is empty no parameters can be changed here These element specific values that become visible as soon as something is selected within the drawing area or within the element tree on the windows right hand side are described in detail below together with the different elements In case more than one element or in case a simple group element is selected this tab pane is empty too 7 7 2 2 The Geo
444. nto the plug in can be detected by executing the project in OpenDebugger Whenever the script fails the related error information are given in debug information window Using these information the script can be modified and debugged According to the working principle of this plug in the provided in and outputs do not have a special meaning by default Digital INO freely programmable digital input corresponds to LUA boolean data type Digital IN1 freely programmable digital input corresponds to LUA boolean data type Numeric IN2 freely programmable numeric input corresponds to LUA numerical data types Numeric IN3 freely programmable numeric input corresponds to LUA numerical data types Char IN4 freely programmable text input corresponds to LUA string data type Char IN5 freely programmable text input corresponds to LUA string data type Char IN6 freely programmable binary input corresponds to LUA pointer data type Char IN7 freely programmable text input corresponds to LUA pointer data type Digital OUTO freely programmable digital output corresponds to LUA boolean data type Digital OUT1 freely programmable digital output corresponds to LUA boolean data type Numeric OUT2 freely programmable numeric output corresponds to LUA numerical data types Numeric OUT3 freely programmable numeric output corresponds to LUA numerical data types Char OUT4 freely programmable text output corresponds to LUA str
445. ntrol data is accepted that contains data to move the scanner and to control the laser such a stream can contain complex marking operation information Digital OUT6 BSY signals if marking is still active HIGH or if the scanner controller card has finished all operations this output has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data it is necessary to synchronize several movement operations This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_sc_gcode Generic Laser Controller 81 Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Using this plug in a laser can be controlled via serial interface ASCII commands It is able to connect to a laser controller via COM port serial interface send predefined commands to it and receive a response from the laser The received data can be interpreted in a minimum way The plug in provides a basic configuration panel where the serial interface parameters can be set according to the specifications of the laser to be connected A second panel gives the possibility to enter the commands that have to be sent to the laser Here several commands can be sent to the laser Every command has to be separated by specific characters that specify ca
446. ntrolRoom projects E1701 scanner controller card plug in can be controlled via its inputs directly by 84 transmitting coordinate values to the X Y and Z inputs or by using the Control input where a stream of movement data will be accepted It is recommended not to use both options at the same time or without additional synchronisation The results may be undefined when direct and control stream commands are set at the same time In case the Control input is used the BSY output has to be connected with the source of the control data it signalises if the scanner controller card is still working or if it has finished so that other operations can be started Following in and outputs are available for the E1701 plug in Numeric INO X the X position the scanner has to be moved to setting a new value to this input does not cause any movement it will be invoked only after the Y or Z input was set Numeric IN1 Y the Y position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use two axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y When laser is off jump speed is used for this movement when it is turned on mark speed is used Numeric IN2 Z the Z position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use three axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y z When laser is off jump speed is used for this movement when it is turned o
447. numbered unsigned data type range 0 255 8 Bit SINT whole numbered signed data type range 127 128 8 Bit UINT whole numbered unsigned data type range 0 65536 16 Bit INT whole numbered signed data type range 32767 32768 16 Bit UDINT whole numbered 32 Bit unsigned data type DINT whole numbered 32 Bit signed data type ULINT whole numbered 64 Bit unsigned data type LINT whole numbered 64 Bit signed data type REAL 32 Bit floating point data type signed LREAL 64 Bit floating point data type signed BOOL boolean data type that accepts only two states TRUE 0 and FALSE 0 STRING a text data type that can contain an ASCIll text of variable length 154 5 7 6 Usage Examples There are usage examples available within the OpenAPC SDK software development script So to get some working examples of scripts and programs that access the Interlock Server please download the SDK from our website 5 7 7 Interlock Server Operation Modes The Interlock Server can run in different modes The mode is set within the settings of the project and needs to be chosen depending on the desired functionality Following the available operation modes their purpose and usage is described Please note An Interlock Server will not be stopped automatically when the connected applications terminate in this case it simply flushes all data and stays active Now when a mode is used where the Ope
448. nvert barcodes created by this element consist only of the outlines together with the Hatching Additional Geometry element these outlines can be filled Depending on the used material processing method these filled areas may result in lighter or darker areas In case the result is not readable by barcode scanners the light and dark areas can be exchanged by this option here an additional border is drawn around the barcode so that the hatching function generates an inverted fill pattern 174 6 5 4 12 Delay This element does not have a visual representation it does not accept any additional data or post processing but it can be used to influence the material processing The elements of a project are processed in the order they appear within the entity tree At the position where this element is added the full process is delayed for the given time Thus this element can be used whenever a delay is necessary e g to let material become dry let material become colder or for whatever reason This element expects exactly one parameter Delay the delay in unit seconds the full process has to stop 6 5 4 13 Motion This element does not have a visual representation it does not accept any additional data or post processing but it can be used to influence the material processing The elements of a project are processed in the order they appear within the entity tree At the position where this element is placed additional motion axes be
449. o Tiles when this option is set the working area is split into invisible tiles that are used to rearrange the contours of the sliced 3D mesh Using these tiles it can be avoided to heat up the material at a specific position too much it lets the position where contour is marked make additional jumps in order to continue marking at a distant position means a distant tile When this option is set the following two parameters can be used to specify exact behaviour of this function After enabling this option the 3D mesh is re sliced but there will be no visible representation of the changes in working area it can be noticed during marking only This function influences only the contour of the slices hatches are not interrupted and broken into tiles in order to avoid damaged marking results To reduce heating of material during hatch processing please refer to description of the hatcher above there exists a similar functionality to skip hatch lines Together with the following parameters this function can be used to e g mark every second tile Assumed the working area has a size of 100 mm x 100 mm for this behaviour Tile Size needs to be set to 20 mm and Tile Skip Size has to be set to 2 With these settings first all these contours are marked that have vectors within red tiles finally all the remaining contours that have a vector in green tiles are marked Tiles itself are processed from upper left to lower right corner row by row It i
450. o find a similar font which might be only somehow similar exact positions sizes and outlines may be got lost in such a case Creation of a text is quite easy only one single click into the drawing area is necessary to specify the position of the text there a new geometry is set using a default text This text can be changed together with some other parameters Line Style the style the lines the text consists of is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of closed connected lines with as less as possible points Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points all these lines are connected Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the length of the additional points that form the selected line style Text here the text can be specified that has to be drawn Font this list of available fonts can be used to select a specific font and style for the text the number and types of available fonts depends on the operation system and whic
451. o receive data from nodes that belong to an other element within the same OpenPlayer it only can access nodes that exist within the Interlock Server but it can t access nodes that already belong to mapped elements within the player Digi INO input for digital data to be forwarded to a node and its input number as configured Digi IN1 input for digital data to be forwarded to a node and its input number as configured Numeric IN2 input for numerical data to be forwarded to a node and its input number as configured Numeric IN3 input for numerical data to be forwarded to a node and its input number as configured Char IN4 input for text data to be forwarded to a node and its input number as configured Char IN5 input for text data to be forwarded to a node and its input number as configured Binary IN6 input for text data to be forwarded to a node and its input number as configured Binary IN7 input for text data to be forwarded to a node and its input number as configured Digi OUTO output that is mapped to a node within the Interlock Server and that emits a digital value whenever the configured output of this node changes Digi OUT1 output that is mapped to a node within the Interlock Server and that emits a digital value whenever the configured output of this node changes Numeric OUT2 output that is mapped to a node within the Interlock Server and that emits a numerical value whenever the configured output of th
452. o the configuration done for the two possible input states LOW and HIGH Numeric IN7 set the current time information in UNIX format the number of seconds elapsed since 1 of 34 January 1970 the flow element Clock is able to deliver such a time format Digital OUT the through connection of the selection mode input Numeric OUT7 the through connection of the time information as set as IN7 This plug in is located in hmiplugins libio_hmi_aclock Chart This plug in can be used to display up to 8 values in a chart Here different bar and pie chart styles are supported Data for this chart have to be numeric values and can be delivered by other elements The chart HMI element does not visualise the change over time here the Plot2D element has to be used but the actual state The behaviour and layout of the plug in can be configured within its properties that are accessible in HMI Editor In tab pane Settings e Chart Type here the kind of chart can be selected that has to be drawn by this plug in the bar charts are able to display both positive and negative values while the pie chart only shows positive values negative ones are dropped and don t become part of the pie e Used Input Values this input field specifies how much of the up to 8 data inputs are used for calculation of the chart when a value smaller than 8 is given here data at disabled inputs are ignored and not shown within the chart e Show Axis Value
453. obal HMI editing area there the same pop up menus and functionalities are available To add a HMI control to this additional pane the pop up menu inside this pane has to be used Several of these additional panes can be used together with one Tabbed Pane or one Stacked Pane to create complex nested user interface layouts Single Panel this element can be added as single stand alone panel only it can be used to group elements The area within such an additional pane behaves similar to the global HMI editing area there the same pop up menus and functionalities are available To add a HMI control to this additional pane the pop up menu inside this pane has to be used If several of these additional panels are used within each other they do not organize in a structured way like Tabbed Pane Additional Pane they in every case stay as single elements 5 3 3 The Flow Editor Of The OpenEditor Within the Flow Editor the user interface elements that have been set within the HMI Editor can be put together logically so that they can control each other control and influence other flow elements control and send data to connected devices For every HMI object a flow object exists that functionally corresponds to its purpose Beside of that there are additional flow objects available within the Flow Editor that do not correspond to a user interface element but can be used to control the information flow or to access external hardware W
454. odel has to be imported Currently BeamConstruct supports the RenderWare RWX format and the Surface Tessellation Language STL in binary and ASCII format Beside of that the Common Layer Interface CLI format is supported too since this is a file format that already contains sliced data it can be used for processing but is not a real 3D format where a slicing operation can be applied to More directly supported 3D file formats will follow in future In case 3D data are available using a different file format than the ones described above a converter application can be used Here we recommend AccuTrans 3D which is available at http www micromouse ca and supports nearly every 3D file format that exists AccuTrans 3D itself is available for an extremely low price After selecting a 3D file for import a configuration dialogue opens where some initial slicing parameters can be configured All the slicing parameters can be changed later within the application Import Scale Factor a factor that can be used to scale the whole 3D object during loading Slice Distance the distance between every slice Slice Offset specifies an offset from top bottom of the 3D model where slicing has to start in case this value is set to 0 0 it may result in a first slice that contains nearly no relevant data dependent on the used 3D model Reduction expects a value in unit degrees to perform a lossy data reduction on sliced data whenever
455. odification of the state of all HMI elements is done by this flow element automatically For some more details please refer to the section User Management below Char INO USR character input for the login name of a user sending data to this input does not invoke a log in operation this happens only when a password is given Char IN1 PWD character input for the password of a user this input should be connected with a Password Field in order to hide the password while it is entered as soon as new data are given here the log in operation starts automatically when both the log in name from INO and the password belong to a valid user this user is logged in and all HMI elements of the current project are set to a state that belongs to the privileges granted to this user Digi IN2 CHG opens a password change dialogue for the currently logged in user so that he is able to set a new password for his account 131 Digi IN3 OUT logs out the current user and sets all HMI elements to their default state Char OUTO Name as soon as a user was logged in successfully this output gives the full name of this user as configured Digi OUT1 OK this output signalises if a user log in attempt could be done successfully or not here a HIGH signal is emitted as soon as a valid user logged in using the correct password in al other cases user not valid user disabled password not correct the output emits a LOW sign
456. of image file 3 to be loaded and loads the new one immediately Digital IN6 loads the image that is predefined with image file 4 126 Char IN7 overwrites the current predefinition of image file 4 to be loaded and loads the new one immediately Binary OUTO the loaded image data of file 1 Numeric OUT1 when loading of the image 1 failed an error code is given here Binary OUT2 the loaded image data of file 2 Numeric OUT3 when loading of the image 2 failed an error code is given here Binary OUT4 the loaded image data of file 3 Numeric OUT5 when loading of the image 3 failed an error code is given here Binary OUT6 the loaded image data of file 4 Numeric OUT7 when loading of the image 4 failed an error code is given here This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_loadimg Load Text This plug in is able to load a text file line by line Comparing to similar Plugins here a HIGH signal at the digital input does NOT cause the complete file to be loaded but it reads the next line out of it The configuration panel of the plug in gives the possibility to pre define up to four text files where the contents have to be loaded PLEASE NOTE when the project is moved to a different platform or system it has to be made sure that the paths given for the text files are still valid possibly these paths have to be adapted due to different file name conventions and drive naming restrictions Digital INO CLK1 loads
457. of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance this parameter decides how long the resulting lines of the chosen line style have to be it is not valid for the continuous line style Radius 1 the first radius that is valid for all odd numbered points Radius 2 the second radius that is valid for all even numbered points Spikes here it can be chosen how much spikes or rays the star shall have Angle offset here an offset can be specified for the points that are assigned to the second radius in order to create non regular spikes Draw CCW normally the star has an clockwise orientation means it is drawn to right direction when this check box is set the drawing direction is reversed 7 7 4 7 Spiral 210 This primary element can be used to create spirals Starting point is always a spiral that is drawn in two steps the first left mouse click into the drawing area specifies the centre point of it the second one specifies the outer radius Next the spiral can be modified via its options Line Style the style the spiral is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of several short fully connected lines that form a continuous spiral for this mode the parameter Segments specifies how much of these short lines are used to create this spiral the more lines are used the more smooth the resulting spiral
458. of the OpenlServer dies for some reason the second Interlock Server activates its server socket External applications that make use of the Interlock Server will lose the connection to it at this point they now have to reconnect to the other IP to continue operation with the other Interlock Server that already contains the data of the first one Standard applications like the debugger the player or the OpenPlugger will perform this reconnect operation automatically Whenever the host with the formerly active Interlock Server is back the OpenlServer has to be restarted again with the same command line option r lt ip gt it connects to the now active Interlock Server and starts mirroring of its data In this scenario the state of the two hosts that keep the Interlock Server has to be watched externally an in case one of them dies restoring of it hast to be triggered externally too 5 8 Using the OpenPlugger The OpenPlugger is an application that is important for system architectures where the player debugger does not contain all functionality and logic but where the access to devices is externalized Here the OpenPlugger performs following tasks load exactly one plug in out of the ones specified in the given project file communicate with the plug in initialize send and receive data communicate with the Interlock Server send data received from the Interlock Server to the plug in 156 and vice versa So an
459. of the ring where the split pieces have to be marked at Split angle the movement angle for every split the size of the single split pieces result out of this angle and the diameter of the ring Keystone correction when marking the inner side of a ring the laser beam has to be slanted in order to hit only the lower inner side of the ring and not the upper outer side too Resulting from that the length of the beam varies dependent on the X Y position of the geometry which results in a distortion when no special optic is used Using the keystone correction this distortion can be suppressed so that the marking result will look like expected This correction is done by setting an as a percentage correction factor and by defining 223 the side of the geometry this factor may apply to The correction factor specifies how much the geometry shall grow or shrink according to its original size at the outer position where the full distortion has to be expected Invert motion direction this option has to be used in case the inner side of a ring needs to be processed there an inverted motion direction is required to concatenate the pieces in correct order Process order this order applies to the planar splitting modes and defines in which order the pieces have to be processed Left to right horizontal direction always starts from left Right to left horizontal direction always starts from right Zig zag from left horiz
460. oller card is selected for a project it is necessary to save this project close and restart the application to force a re initialisation load the project again and then check if all Custom Output elements still use the correct ports and values This element is symbolised by this toolbar icon gt 7 7 4 15 External Trigger This element does not contain geometry and does not offer any options So after clicking the related tool bar symbol it is added to the project immediately Whenever the project reaches this position during execution all output is stopped until an external trigger signal is detected Here the external trigger according to the used scanner controller cards capability is used PLEASE NOTE starting the geometry after a trigger is received is done by the scanner controller the time between detection of the external trigger signal and output of the next geometry depends on the used scanner card and typically is less than some microseconds Waiting for a trigger after the last geometry has been sent or after the last Primary Element was processed completely is controlled by the application Here the reaction time highly depends on the used operating system and the available computing power So it is recommended to ensure a gap of of at least 20 milliseconds after the last element was processed until the external trigger may appear 7 7 4 16 Z Shifter This element does not have a visual representation but is somehow similar to
461. ollowing parameters are available to manipulate them Line Style the style the line is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of exactly one starting and one end point where one single line is drawn between Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points between the start and end point all these lines are connected Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points between the start and end point every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the distance between the additional points that form the selected line style Expand By Dot expands the line according to the chosen distance value by one dot or one line segment 168 Remove Last Dot removes the last dot or line segment 6 5 4 3 Triangle To draw a triangle all three corners have to be specified separately by single left mouse clicks for each First the starting point is defined with the next click the second corner of the triangle is specified and the last one completes the triangle by setting the third corn
462. ollowing parameters can be changed Slice Distance the distance between every slice when this value is changed all slices and possibly existing additional elements are removed and the slices are generated again Slice Offset specifies an offset from top bottom of the 3D model where slicing has to start in case this value is set to 0 0 it may result in a first slice that contains nearly no relevant data when this value is changed all slices and possibly existing additional elements are removed and the slices are generated again Reduction expects a value in unit degrees to perform a lossy data reduction on sliced data whenever an angle between two vectors of a layer is smaller than the angle given here they will be concatenated to one common vector For small angle values and in most cases this results in a memory consumption which is dramatically lower and processing speed therefore much higher while there is no visible loss in quality of the result Slice Direction here the slice direction for the the 3D model can be selected Top To Bottom may be used e g for depth engraving where operation starts on top of the model and moves into the material Bottom To Top can be used e g for rapid prototyping applications where processing starts from bottom and builds up a model slice by slice when this value is changed all slices and possibly existing additional elements are removed and the slices are generated aga
463. on Definition Dialogue The stronger this deviation is the larger the Y Angle value should be When the square is distorted at left and right edge distance marked in lower left corner in picture above this distortion has to be corrected with the X Angle parameter in Correction Definition Dialogue The stronger this deviation is the larger the X Angle value should be When the horizontal line is not marked at exact centre position of the working area distance marked in lower middle position in picture above after creation of a new correction file via Correction Definition Dialogue it has to be selected and shifted in vertical position This can be done in tab pane Geometry of CorrCorrect by moving it against the direction of its deviation depending on the strength of distortion this line may also be bent a bit in this case the distance from centre point has to be used for shifting When the vertical line is not marked at exact centre position of the working area after creation of a new correction file via Correction Definition Dialogue it has to be selected and shifted in horizontal position This can be done in tab pane Geometry by moving it against the direction of its deviation this deviation is not shown in example picture above In some cases it also may be necessary to rotate the correction table e g when the marking result and its distortion is rotated by 90 degrees comparing to the example picture above The rotation angl
464. on mode Command Value and always together with a data value that was assigned to this command 72 Digital OUT1 DATA received digital data Numeric OUT1 DATA received numeric data Char OUT1 DATA received text data Binary OUT1 DATA received binary data This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_network_out Network Server This plug in can be used to establish bi directional communication via a TCP IP network It is able to accept several incoming client connections and to exchange data with them These data can be formatted depending on the mode the clients are using or they can be plain and unformatted Within the configuration panel the IP and port number the server has to bind at have to be specified together with the maximum number of incoming connections the plug in will handle at the same time Additionally a user name and password can be given These authentication data are valid only with the formatted transfer modes and require clients that are able to understand this format for an example the Network Transmitter or Network Client plug in are able to handle this format other examples can be found within the SDK s OpenAPC interface implementations In case there are some authentication data set here a connecting client has to authenticate at this plug in When user name and password do not match the incoming connection is rejected A data transfer mode has not to be specified here this plug in automatica
465. on start up these values of course have to be loaded so that they are still available HMI Visualisation y Sequencer Software Interlock Interlock Server Data Handler External Plug Ins Hardware Driver 5 7 5 Accessing the Interlock Server 5 7 5 1 Access Via Own Applications The Interlock Server and its data can be accessed out of own applications easily by using functions provided by liboapc For details about how these functions can be used please refer to the OpenAPC SDK which is available for download from our webpage 143 5 7 5 2 Access Via LUA Scripts Lua is a lightweight reflective imperative and functional programming language designed as a scripting language with extensible semantics as a primary goal The name comes from the Portuguese word lua meaning moon and was developed at the Pontifical Catholic University of Rio de Janeiro Brazil The ControlRoom software component comes with a special LUA interpreter luaPLC that already contains functions to access the data of the Interlock Server The interpreter is a command line application that accepts the name of the LUA script file for execution So by calling luaPLC example lua the LUA interpreter is started loads the file example lua and executes it For a full description of the general functions and features of the LUA programming language please refer to http www lua
466. on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card and the used scan head Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to move the scanner and to control the laser such a stream can contain complex marking operation information Digital OUT6 BSY signals if marking is still active HIGH or if the scanner controller card has finished all operations this input has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data it is necessary to synchronize several movement operations Binary OUT7 IN binary data that reflect the state of the digital inputs of this scanner controller card these data are required by some plug ins that need to react on these inputs and there have to be connected to them like the scanner controller stepper motor plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_spice2 SAMLight R CCI This plug in gives access to the SAMLight Client Control Programming Interface It offers the possibility to remote control the SAMLight application to encapsulate its functionalities within a user interface that is much easier to handle and to automate processes and operations within the application To use this plug in a license for SAMLight may be necessary which is not part of this software package Please contact the vendor of SAMLight for such a license There is also a macro available that encapsulates this plug in and provides seve
467. on the command line that may help to find problems h display a short help that lists and describes all available command line options Here the option p which specifies the project file and one of the option n or i are mandatory they are necessary to identify the plug in that has to be used When a plug in runs within an OpenPlugger instance it gets all data from and sends all its own data to the Interlock Server automatically From there no default communication channel to the player is defined Here during set up of the project or during set up of the complete system the communication path has to be created explicitly This can be done via the Interlock Server Connection Flow Element not recommended or via separate scripts or programs that dock onto the Interlock Server receive data from one side player or external plug in and forward them to the other one external plug in or player Such scripts or programs can be used at this position to implement software interlocks they can check if an operation requested by the OpenPlayer is really allowed and safe in the current state of the application and then allow or reject these operation by forwarding the request to the plug in or by dropping it This would extend the use case described in section Implement Software Interlocks above here not only the data flow would be separated but also the applications where the data are handled into That adds an other level of security 5 9 Using
468. onal or Post processing Tools are re calculated according to these changes Whenever additional geometry within a primary element is selected and manipulated this has no feedback to its related superordinated primary element in this case the additional geometry might be changed without any relation to its parent geometry and therefore in a way that is possibly not desired The part of the current project that is visible within the drawing area can be changed too when no element is selected the whole area can be moved by holding down the left mouse button and dragging it into the direction where the view has to be moved to Beside of that there are zoom buttons available within the tool bar Zoom In zooms into the drawing area so that more details become visible Zoom Out show a bigger area but less geometric details Zoom To Working Area changes zoom and position of the current view so that the full working area is visible in the maximum size that is available in the drawing area Zoom To Selected changes zoom and position of the current view so that the currently selected element is visible in the maximum size that is available in the drawing area When one single element is selected that contains some geometry a special point editing mode can be enabled to modify the single points this element consists of This mode can be enabled by turning on the tool bar button right beside the zoom buttons Once this button is enabled
469. one or not and if yes which method of referencing has to be used the chosen mode defines using which direction the software shall search for the reference switch and using which direction the switch shall be left afterwards Reference Signal Input the input bit at the previously chosen input port where the reference switch is connected to Reference Speed Enter the speed that has to be used to search for the reference switch Reference Speed Leave the speed that has to be used to leave the reference switch once it was found the correct referenced position is that position where the reference switch just turns off Referenced Position the metric position in unit millimetres that has to be set at the referenced position When a movement is running at an axis it can t be overwritten by a new position value immediately such a new position information would be rejected by the plug in In such a case the axis first has to be stopped and after the related speed output indicates that this axis really has stopped by emitting a speed of 0 the new position can be set at the POS input Within the debugger such an invalid positioning request would be indicated within the OpenPlayer it is ignored without any further notice Numeric INO POS the absolute position in unit mm or degrees to move the axis 1 to for this movement the speed is used that was set last at the MODE input when a value is set here and no other
470. onfigured the communication protocol detection is done automatically Digital OUTO OK when there are position data available GPS fix this output returns a logic HIGH whenever the GPS fix is lost for some reason this is signalled by a logic LOW Numeric OUT1 LAT in case of GPS fix here the latitude in unit degrees is given Numeric OUT2 LON this output emits the longitude in unit degrees Numeric OUT3 HGT the height output is valid only in case of GPS fix Numeric OUT4 SPD the speed over ground here a value is returned only in case of GPS fix Numeric OUT5 T the time of the current week in seconds This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_gps GPSd This plug in works similar to the preceding one with two major differences itis available for Linux only it makes use of GPSd and therefore supports nearly all GPS devices and their data formats that are out there For a full description of the outputs and their purpose please refer to GPS above This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_gpsd GSV 2 Measurement Amplifier The GSV 2 measurement amplifier is a special device that can be used to watch states of special equipment and to send a signal when a specified limit is exceeded This plug in communicates via serial interface with the amplifier so within the first pane of the configuration panel the serial parameters have to be set Within the second panel the default threshold ca
471. only controls the HMI no application logic needs to be mixed with the GUI logic the structure is much closer to the generally accredited Open Systems Interconnection Reference Model http en wikipedia org wiki OSI_model due to the fact that the communication between elements is done via TCP IP all logic parts Sequencer OpenPlayer Interlock Server OpenPlugger s may be executed on own hosts so that a fairly complex system can be set up with components spread over a large network Of course there is also a disadvantage a system that is split in many separate parts is more difficult to set up and to maintain Nevertheless the advantages overbalance them with such a structure you are on the safe side when your project grows over the time it will stay maintainable independent from growing requirements The structures shown in the pictures here are only examples depending on the specific requirements the set up of a system can differ from them Following all components and features are described in detail but depending on the chosen architecture it may be possible that some of the functionalities documented here don t have to be used 15 5 2 Creating And Running A Project The procedure of setting up and using a project successfully consists of some simple steps The starting point for everything is the OpenEditor Here a new project can be created or an existing one can be loaded to be extended in
472. ontal direction starts from left and performs zig zag movements Zig zag from right horizontaldirection starts from right and performs zig zag movements Top to bottom vertical movement starts from top Bottom to top vertical movement starts from bottom In case two dimensional motion is defined both process order selections are combined with each other to describe the 2D motion Motion speed the movement speed in unit mm sec or degrees sec that is applied to the motion between the splits Overlap splits here an as a percentage value can be set that specifies how much the pieces should overlap means how much of the geometry should exists twice so that it is processed two times at the areas of intersection Try split between pieces here the splitting algorithm tries to find empty spaces between geometries to avoid cutting of lines in case this option is set the specified split distance or split angle is used as maximum value a cut is set wherever space between geometries is found or latest after the given split distance split angle In last case cutting of lines is still done So in this mode split distance split angle define the absolute maximum size of a resulting piece while the distances where the geometry are cut really can be smaller than this Axis mapping at the lower end of the property panel a matrix of radio buttons exists where the axes can be mapped to the related movements there it can be specified which of
473. onth as a decimal number 01 31 e is replaced by the day of month as a decimal number 1 31 single digits are preceded by a blank F is equivalent to Y m d 179 G is replaced by a year as a decimal number with century This year is the one that contains the greater part of the week Monday as the first day of the week g is replaced by the same year as in G but as a decimal number without century 00 99 H is replaced by the hour 24 hour clock as a decimal number 00 23 l is replaced by the hour 12 hour clock as a decimal number 01 12 j is replaced by the day of the year as a decimal number 001 366 k is replaced by the hour 24 hour clock as a decimal number 0 23 single digits are preceded by a blank l is replaced by the hour 12 hour clock as a decimal number 1 12 single digits are preceded by a blank M is replaced by the minute as a decimal number 00 59 m is replaced by the month as a decimal number 01 12 p is replaced by national representation of either ante meridiem AM or post meridiem PM as appropriate R is equivalent to H M r is equivalent to l M S p S is replaced by the second as a decimal number 00 60 s is replaced by the number of seconds since January 1st 1970 00 00 o clock UTC T is equivalent to H M S U is replaced by the w
474. ontrol data it is necessary to synchronize several movement operations Binary OUT7 IN binary data that reflect the state of the digital inputs of this scanner controller card these data are required by some plug ins that need to react on these inputs and there have to be connected to them like the scanner controller stepper motor plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_rtcscanalone SCANLAB R RTC3 Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Beside of that some laser equipment can be damaged in case it is controlled with wrong signals Thus it is highly recommended to check the output generated by this plug in using e g an oscilloscope to avoid problems caused by wrong configurations This should be done prior to putting a system into operation for the first time and whenever a software update was installed This plug in can be used to access the SCANLAB RTC3 scanner controller card for controlling a scan head and a connected laser in real time Within the configuration dialogue the plug in and the scanner controller card have to be configured according to the connected devices Basic Use Board Number in case more than only one board is used within the same host computer this
475. ontroller card you want to use After selecting it press the button Configure and set up the scanner controller card according to its specific needs choose things like firmware file correction table working area size number of controlled axes or what ever your card requires for proper operation and according to your local hardware configuration 3 Save Configuration Leave all these settings dialogues by pressing OK once all parameters have been entered correctly and select menu Project menu item Save as default configuration Now whenever you start BeamConstruct and as long as you do nat load a project file with a different hardware set up these settings are used by the application 4 Create basic geometry Select the blue triangle symbol within the tool bar and draw that triangle within the drawing area right below the tool bar There you have to left click your mouse three times at different positions to create the triangle every of these mouse clicks specifies an other corner of the triangle 5 Modify existing geometry interactively Once you have finished creation of the triangle this new element is selected and highlighted by a double lined blue box surrounding it This box can be used to modify the geometry While picking and dragging one of the coloured squares that are contained in this surrounding the triangles size can be changed the grey squares as well as its rotation the red square The cyan coloured
476. option can be done only by choosing an other pen as default one Use for Pilot Laser the parameters of this pen are used to control the pilot laser This means the speed and delay settings are used whenever the pilot laser is used Since this laser can be turned on and off only all values like power frequency and some delays are disabled they are not relevant 196 for the pilot laser Within a project only one pen can be used for the pilot laser so whenever this option is selected for a pen it is disabled resetting this option can be done only by choosing an other pen for the pilot laser Pen On Colour this colour is used within the drawing area for all geometries Pen Off Colour this colour is used when Draw Off Movements are enabled to show the laser jumps within the drawing area Use for coloured scanner bitmaps when this checkbox is set the current pen is used for coloured scanner bitmaps this option should be enabled only 1 when the current pen parameters cause a coloured result on current material 2 when the colour of this result is specified using button Colour after marking PLEASE NOTE setting the resulting colour requires an calibrated monitor in order to have exact results 7 6 1 1 Pen Parameter Wizard It is sometimes difficult to find parameter combinations that fit to a special material or application Thus the pen dialogue offers a special wizard that creates a matrix out of diffe
477. or X and Mirror Y buttons when pressing one of these buttons the currently selected geometry is mirrored in X or Y direction pressing the same button twice results in no changes Centre X and Centre Y buttons these buttons reposition the selected geometry within the current working area they centre it in horizontal and vertical direction 165 Scale these input fields show the current scaling factor comparing to the original state of the geometry for X and Y direction a value of 1 0 means the geometry is not scaled values smaller than 1 0 mean it is shrunk vales greater than 1 0 mean it is bigger comparing to the original Top Left the upper left coordinates of the selected element whenever they are changed the element is repositioned without changing its size resulting from that the following values are changed too Bottom Right the lower right coordinates of the selected element whenever they are changed the element is repositioned without changing its size resulting from that the previously described values for the top left corner are changed too Size the total width and height of the element when it is changed the geometry is scaled in X direction the related values for scaling the top left and the bottom right corner are changed too Rotation the angle in unit degrees the element is rotated with here the rotation can be changed which may result in changes of other parameters depen
478. or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured This plug in can be used to control a Makeblock XY plotter by sending appropriate G Code commands to it via serial interface It is independent from the tool used at this plotter which can be a laser or any other 88 hardware that can be toggled by straight on off signals The plug in provides a basic configuration panel where the serial interface parameters can be set according to the specifications of the laser to be connected Within a second panel the default mark speed to be used can be configured Beside of this it provides following in and outputs to control the plug in out of a ControlRoom application Numeric INO X x coordinate to move the plotter to setting this value does not result in any movement Numeric IN1 Y y coordinate to move the plotter to when a value is given at this input a movement to the given y position and the previously set x position is started movement speed depends on input L which specifies jump fast speed L 0 or mark speed L 1 Digital IN3 L turns on and off the laser tool connected to the plotter Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to fully control the plotter Numeric OUT5 ERR an error code specifying the current operational error state of th
479. ore vector data are sent that would use this new power value e Control waveform during process when this checkbox is set the plug in controls the used waveform means it sends the related command to it automatically on every change of waveform and before vector data are sent that would use it Job End Command this optional custom command is sent to the laser after submission of vector data to the scanner card has finished e End Ready for Marking Command this optional command is sent to the laser whenever it no longer needs to be ready for marking it is issued e g in case BeamConstruct closes the Mark dialogue e Device Close Command here an optional custom command can specified that is sent to the laser when everything is deinitialised and when all connected devices are closed this command is invoked e g when the main application is closed or when a user opens the global settings dialogue in BeamConstruct The plug in provides following in and outputs to be used within the Flow Editor of ControlRoom Digital IN3 L can be used to turn the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR controls the laser power Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to control the laser Digital OUT6 BSY signals if the plug in is still communicating with the laser HIGH or if it has finished all operations so that other components can start its operation this input has to be connecte
480. ored within every project file so it is recommended to save one empty project file that does not contain any more than these project definitions This can be done using menu Project sub menu Save as or the related Save project as button from the tool bar Later when starting with a new project this file can be loaded first using menu Project sub menu Open or the related Load project button of the tool bar to get these project settings 6 4 Pen Settings Every element that is created within a CNConstruct project has a pen assigned to its geometry This pen contains all movement information the related element will be processed with movement speed values delays power frequency and others more These parameters can be set within the pen settings dialogue that opens when the menu Project menu item Pen settings is selected On top of that dialogue a pen can be chosen for editing the same combo box can be used to create a new pen in this case the option Append new pen has to be selected there After selecting an existing or a new pen all its parameters can be changed within the lower part of the dialogue It is separated into sections that contain different categories of pen parameters All tab panes that hold these categories have one common functionality for selected parameters by pressing the button To all pens a parameters value can be applied to all pens that currently exist So
481. ormation that are place holders for special portions of the time handled by this plug in these place holders always start with a sign To have the real character within the format string a has to be entered Following format information are supported A is replaced by national representation of the full weekday name a is replaced by national representation of the abbreviated weekday name B is replaced by national representation of the full month name b and h are replaced by national representation of the abbreviated month name C is replaced by the year divided by 100 c is replaced by national representation of time and date d is replaced by the day of the month as a decimal number 01 31 G is replaced by a year as a decimal number with century This year is the one that contains the greater part of the week Monday as the first day of the week g is replaced by the same year as in G but as a decimal number without century 00 99 H is replaced by the hour 24 hour clock as a decimal number 00 23 l is replaced by the hour 12 hour clock as a decimal number 01 12 j is replaced by the day of the year as a decimal number 001 366 M is replaced by the minute as a decimal number 00 59 m is replaced by the month as a decimal number 01 12 Y n is replaced by a newline p is replaced by national representation of either ante merid
482. ound X axis unit degrees Numeric OUT4 YANG rotation around Y axis unit degrees Numeric OUT5 ZANG rotation around Z axis unit degrees SR FlipFlop A flip flop is an element that can have two logical stable states This special kind of a flip flop can set or reset that state when the flip flop is set its output Q is set to HIGH elsewhere it is set to low This flow element implements four flip flops that provide the same functionality but act completely independent from each other Digital INO S Digital IN1 R Digital IN2 S Digital IN3 R Digital IN4 S Digital IN5 R Digital IN6 S input to set the first flip flop Foe Ja Je Ja Digital IN7 R input to reset the fourth flip flop input to reset the first flip flop input to set the second flip flop input to reset the second flip flop input to set the third flip flop input to reset the third flip flop input to set the fourth flip flop Digital OUTO Q data output of the first flip flop it is set to HIGH when it is set S Digital OUT1 Q inverted data output of the first flip flop it is set to HIGH when it is not set R Digital OUT2 Q data output of the second flip flop it is set to HIGH when it is set S Digital OUT3 Q inverted data output of the second flip flop it is set to HIGH when it is not set R Digital OUT4 Q data output of the third flip flop it is set to HIGH when
483. ound colour of the HMI area the colour that is set here will be used in both cases within the HMI Editor and when the project is executed on the target Control Flow Time Out this parameter applies to the flow of data within a running project As described in following sections the elements of a project can be connected to transfer data between each other Every connection results in a flow of data Depending on the total length of such a flow connection the transfer of data may need a nameable time The value that can be set here limits the maximum allowed time for such a data flow So this parameter can be used as time out to avoid that a flow is running in an endless and useless loop But please be careful when you set a value that is too small for a specific project a data flow could be terminated before it reaches its final destination After the timing of such a data flow never will be 100 accurate it will be terminated on different positions for each data transmissions That means when the time out is too small it can result in a undefined and non reproducible application behaviour Timer Resolution during a project is executed the application uses one master timer to trigger additional events from This master timer is used to poll the outputs of external plug ins as long as they are polled cyclically That means the input poll cycle time that can be specified for these plug ins must be bigger than the time specified here i
484. ous mark vector was reached thus the laser is still on when motion for the following jump vector is performed In polygon delay too long scanner stops for a too long time at the position of an corner point within a polygon thus burn in points appear at these positions 200 In polygon delay too short mirrors are not able to arrive at the positions of the corner points within a polygon before the next mark vector starts thus the whole geometry is rounded the vectors are pulled into direction of the next one 7 6 3 Laser Pen Parameters This panel contains several parameters that belong to the used laser and the parameters signals that are required to operate it So depending on the laser type that was configured for the current project these options are enabled that contain useful parameters for proper laser operation For a detailed description of these parameters and their meaning please refer to your laser vendors manual PLEASE NOTE some laser types need to be operated using relatively tight parameter ranges When they are controlled with wrong parameters the results may be an undefined behaviour or the laser hardware may be damaged in worst case So when setting up new parameters or when changing them or after a software update was done it is highly recommended to re check these laser parameters and the output signals of the scanner controller in order to avoid problems with the laser Here software update not only includes update
485. ow Objects of Display type HMI Elements Horizontal Gauge Vertical Gauge Angular Meter and LC Numeric Display Numeric IN7 the number that is received on this input is used as new value to be displayed Numeric OUT7 pass through of numeric IN7 here the received number is available for transmission to the next flow element 5 3 3 7 1 4 External Flow Objects of Display type HMI Elements Analogue Clock Using this element different representations of an analogue clock can be added to a project It supports different styles of clock faces and freely editable colours ans sizes of the hands All these parameters can be defined within the configuration panel of this element Hour hand colour and size of the hour hand for LOW and HIGH state of digital input O Minute hand colour and size of the minute hand for LOW and HIGH state of digital input O Second hand colour and size of the second hand for LOW and HIGH state of digital input 0 Type appearance of the clock here a clock face can be chosen dependent on the type of clock face it might be necessary to change the colours of the hour minute second hand in order to have a good contrast The Analogue Clock itself does not contain or generate any time information and therefore will not display anything useful without an appropriate data source that delivers the time information Digital INO set the selection mode for clock and apply the parameters according t
486. ow the drawing area for geometry is located in the middle There new primary elements can be created or existing geometry can be modified Whenever an element is selected it is highlighted by a double lined blue border This border can be used to manipulate the element When pressing the left mouse button within this border and outside its coloured squares it can be moved and repositioned Left clicking it within one of the squares gives access to other manipulation functions the dark grey rectangle at the lower right corner provides a resizing function where the aspect ratio between x and y is kept intact the medium grey rectangles at the lower or right border of the rectangle provide resizing functionality in x or y direction exclusively the light grey rectangles in upper right and lower left corner allow to rescale the element in every direction and without keeping the current aspect ration between x and y the cyan rectangles at the left and upper border can be used to slant the geometry in x or y direction the red rectangle in upper left corner can be used to rotate it How and by which value the elements are changed can be seen within the panels on the main windows left hand side as described in following section 164 PLEASE NOTE The manipulation possibilities described above apply to the geometry that is currently selected When a primary element is selected the changes apply to its geometry possibly existing additi
487. paring to the fold bars of HMI Editor and Flow Editor this one does not select the elements here a single click does not cause any action while a double click adds the element to the list immediately The elements in the list can be selected by single clicking them with the left mouse button A selected element can be deleted via the context menu When such a list element is double clicked the configuration dialogue of the plug in is opened where its element specific parameters can be set and changed Fora description of all plug ins their purpose usage and parameters please refer to section The Flow Objects of the Flow Editor subsections External Flow Objects Different to the Flow Editor it is not possible to define any flow connections within this list Flow objects that are added here will run within an own OpenPlugger instance each and will communicate via the Interlock Server only Their input data are sent from that server to the OpenPlugger plug in and output data are sent from the plug in OpenPlugger back to the server So the player or debugger can communicate with these plug ins only via this Interlock Server 5 4 Using the OpenDebugger The OpenDebugger is a specific execution environment for an ControlRoom project Similar to the OpenPlayer here a project can be loaded and executed But different to it within the OpenDebugger there are several possibilities to analyse the flow of data detailed in order to find problems within
488. pe of the accumulator to LREAL POW calculate the value of the accumulator raised to the power of the operand LOG calculate the logarithmic value of the accumulator LN calculate the logarithmic naturalis e value of the accumulator SQRT calculate the square root value of the accumulator this operation changes the data type of the accumulator to LREAL MOD modulo of accumulator and operand the result is copied to the accumulator this operation can be performed with integer data types for both accumulator and operand only 149 USINT change the current numeric data type of the accumulator to USINT dependent on the current value this operation may cause a loss of data BOOL change the current numeric data type of the accumulator to BOOL dependent on the current value this operation may cause a loss of data here all values not equal to O are converted to TRUE 0 is converted to FALSE SINT change the current numeric data type of the accumulator to SINT dependent on the current value this operation may cause a loss of data UINT change the current numeric data type of the accumulator to UINT dependent on the current value this operation may cause a loss of data INT change the current numeric data type of the accumulator to INT dependent on the current value this operation may cause a loss of data UDINT change the current numeric data type of the accumulator to UDINT dependent on the curre
489. pens for all heads but the same pen number can have different parameters for different heads Below of this a pen can be chosen for editing the same combo box can be used to create a new pen in this case the option Append new pen has to be selected there After selecting an existing or a new pen all its parameters can be changed within the lower part of the dialogue It is separated into some sections that contain different categories of pen parameters All tab panes that hold these categories have one common functionality for selected parameters by pressing the button To all pens a parameters value can be applied to all pens that currently exists So in case a specific pen parameter has to be changed globally it is not necessary to edit it manually within every single pen PLEASE NOTE there is no feedback from a possibly connected laser or scanner equipment to this dialogue so the application can t know if a value is suitable for the connected equipment or not Although there are some logical and range checks that try to avoid heavy mistakes it is up to the user to keep all parameters within valid and useful ranges 7 6 1 General Pen Settings This panel contains some basic pen parameters On top of it an input field can be found that can be used to rename the current pen there its name can be changed and the new name can be applied by pressing the return key Beside of that the following parameters can be edited here
490. ph was reached here Delete at beginning removes the first data while new data are still appended at the end of the graph so it continues endless in its chosen direction Reset everything drops all data and starts drawing from the beginning and Overwrite from beginning starts drawing from the beginning while the old data aren t rejected before they are still available until they are overwritten Scientific Notation when numbers are displayed at axes and this option is set these numbers are shown in scientific notation as floating point numbers with exponent e Logarithmic Y Axis here displaying of data along Y axis can be switched to logarithmic mode Graphs Here every of the parameter sets described below exists once for every of the up to six graphs and for every of the two input selection states HIGH and LOW e Colour the colour the graph has to be drawn with e Line Size the thickness of the drawn line in unit pixels e Line Style the style of the graph here Simple is a plain line with no interruptions Dotted enables a mode where no lines are drawn but a single dot is shown at the position of every dataset Short Dashes enables a graph consisting of short dashes the line is interrupted in regular distances and Dots and dashes enables a line consisting of a dot and a short line alternating Digital INO input for the selection state depending on this input one of the two configurations HIGH and 36
491. plication is not recommended for larger projects or for projects that need to be future proof 132 Instead of this direct communication it is recommended to execute such plug ins separately within an own logical layer and to communicate with them via the Interlock Server To do that first of all the Interlock Server needs to be activated in global configuration Then a list becomes active in tab pane Plugged Devices where plug ins can be configured for external use The usage of this list is very similar to the Flow Editor right clicking into it opens a context menu where plug ins can be added Here only these flow categories are available where it makes sense to let the related plug ins run externally When such a plug in is selected it will be added to the list Now the symbol of this plug in is shown its unique name an unique number and the category it belongs to The number can t be changed it is set by the editor This number is important when the project file is opened using the OpenPlugger it is used to identify the plug in that has to be used by the OpenPlugger An alternative way of adding plugged flow elements is provided by the fold bar on the right hand side of the list It provides the same categories of elements than the context menu described above These categories can be opened by double clicking the bar titles Then the list of flow elements is shown where one of it can be appended to the list by double clicking it Com
492. plio Ai 192 Nan e0 u RNA 201 IMportSD MeShi croata is ea ee 206 A O IAE 112 In Polygon Delay tcd 162 197f UN LO EEEE te tte ck ahaa te pubs orca lente ne hiatal eG ee E Mas penta la tant cnicthe aig e tees ee ccc ah tah et 19f 29 Initial Flow Start A A secre ieee ele 59 INNerRAdUS ota A O Ii 161 190 Input Element ani dd a e A 163 201 AS A ost ee aces a a a a tas seta a a a bacael nanny ges a ieee gas ete tte eet nena 27 O O RRA 19 St A O eds aa dele 19 Inside TO DUtside ati A A RA 161 171 190 211 Instruction Language eere A E N 146 Instruction stats dar data lesa 14 146 IND a A asst teak Reet beagles he nid aun tae ena dS a 149 153 integrated user MANE Me earr arrea aE RE TE I EE S OO 156 Inteleave LINCS sran an tada 176 217 terca naaa A A E S E A A O EES 137 156 InterloCk Server iria dada 12f 15ff 20 27 130 133 137 156 Interlock Server Connection ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeetaaaaaaaeaeanaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseseseesececesacceeeceeeeeeeees 130 Interlock Server Connection Flow Element 2 cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeecaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceseseeseeeeeeeeeeas 156 Invert Output LOGIC n lt 2sencaci ce amanda eves ite nie bet ancl peas ae oehdaraln nal EAS 191 IIS A e ara 158 lOSelect Mode di ahs A ened edie deer de eee 237 Ler o Noe EN E E A A a dista 194 di A E E E A ne I A EN 6 114 A O E Gata AA annee eend Levin avi a A e aa ae a a a EA ara anaa ARAA Aa SETAA
493. ption enables a data flow from a connected Interlock Server to the player 27 5 3 3 5 Creating and Editing Flow Connections When there are at least two flow objects placed within the Flow Editor they can be connected using flow lines As described above these lines specify the data flow from one flow object to an other Such a flow connection has to be started at the output of one flow object and has to finish at the input of an other one The flow lines can be horizontal and vertical To start such a line move the mouse over the outputs source flow object These outputs are symbolised by small arrows at the bottom of the flow object symbol that point out of it When you have localised the output the appearance of the mouse pointer changes to crossed lines Now the left mouse button can be held down As long as the left mouse button is pressed a flow connection is drawn So when the mouse is moved to the input of the target flow object now the related flow line is drawn The inputs of a flow object are symbolised by small coloured arrows at the top of the flow symbol that point into that symbol When the position of such an input was found during drawing a flow connection the flow line is drawn in green When the mouse button is released now the connection between output and input is established automatically as long as both have the same data type So when an output arrow is connected with an input arrow of the same colour both have the same dat
494. put for binary control data that contain laser marking information according to the 44 values out of the loaded file here a stream of data is emitted until all geometry of a given file is processed an exact timing that would result out of the movement speeds and the position is ignored this is handled by a connected scanner controller plug in Comparing to the following two outputs OUT2 and OUT3 this one in every case has to be connected to a scanner controller plug in since OUTO does nat only emit motion information that can be handled by a simple motor controller but the more complex and feature loaded laser marking information a scanner controller card expects Numeric OUT1 ERR this output emits error codes in case the specified BEAMP file could not be loaded Binary OUT2 CTRL here additional motion data are emitted that correspond to motion elements used within the currently loaded BEAMP file the BSY output of the plug in that receives these control data has to be connected with the BSY input of this plug in Binary OUT3 CTRL here additional motion data are emitted that correspond to motion elements used within the currently loaded BEAMP file the BSY output of the plug in that receives these control data has to be connected with the BSY input of this plug in This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_beamp2ctrl Characters to Mixed This flow plug in parses an input string and extracts contained numeric values or sub s
495. r CSV to Number This plug in is able to split single lines of CSV data to extract the data fields out of convert it to floating point numbers and to emit them at its outputs When a CSV field does not contain a valid number the assigned output is not set Within the configuration panel the CSV separation character has to be specified here it can be chosen between tabulator semicolon comma space and colon Please note the use of a comma to separate CSV fields excludes the use of floating point number data fields that use a comma too Beside of that for every output a number has to be specified that corresponds to the field number of the CSV line that has to be emitted at this output Char INO CSV input for the CSV data whenever a new line is set it is converted and split automatically the fields are sent at the related outputs as configured Number OUTO Number OUT output for a CSV data field as configured within the plug in settings panel This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_csv2number De Compress Data Using this plug in binary data blocks can be compressed and decompressed Here no additional parameters can be configured the plug in works fully automatic The plug in can compress only binary data that have not been compressed before when a data block is handed over where already a compression has been applied it is rejected Within the debugger that rejection is indicated within the OpenPlayer no error me
496. r data to the controller without starting a mark operation immediately but for later usage in stand alone mode Show State this option shows different scanner controller state information which information are shown depends on the used scanner card and its capabilities but it may consist of digital output data reflects the data that have been sent to the output but not necessarily the data that really are set as long as the card does not support readback of these outputs digital input data plug in information scanhead information Increment all serial number elements of the current project are incremented the date and time elements are updated Decrement all serial number elements of the current project are decremented the date and time elements are updated Reset all serial number elements of the current project are reset to its starting value the date and time elements are updated 7 12 Marking 234 The mark dialogue can be opened via menu Process menu item Mark When this dialogue is opened for the first time or in case the hardware settings have been changed after it was used the last time as first operation the scanner controller cards and the optionally configured motion devices are opened Motion axes that are configured to reference on start up are moved to its reference home position All these operations may take some time dependent on the connected hardware In case this could be
497. r interface elements this double click will not work due to its internal structure and behaviour here you first have to select that element then right click it and choose the menu item Selected Control s Edit The HMI Control Property dialogue that now opens consists of at least one definition panel This panel can be used to configure name layout colour and other things that influence the appearance of the element Optionally there can be a logging panel where definitions can be made to log the data handled by the element Beside of that there can be some other panels that offer the possibility to do further definitions for that element These additional panels provide element specific functions and therefore are optional Some of the general mandatory properties of the first panel are available twice on some element types depending on the input signal on the digital input O INO please refer to the following section the state and design of that element can be changed So the visual representation of a user interface element can be modified depending on the data flow selection state or others 19 5 3 2 1 1 General HMI Control Properties Within the general property dialogue several parameters can be configured This dialogue is a standard one and is used for all user interface elements After some of the standard parameters do not apply to specific types of HMI controls some of the following parameters may be disabled in thi
498. r needs to fit to the data type of 152 the chosen data blocks lO elsewhere this operation will fail When an data block or IO is used that doesn t exists within the Interlock Server a new data block and or IO is created by this operation PLEASE NOTE when a value is stored that is mapped to a global variable using the MAP_1Sx END_MAP statement this modification is NOT notified to this variable only the contents of the data block within the Interlock Server are changed Because of that it is not recommended to use this function within a script when mapped variables are used too please refer to the description of the MAP_ISx END MAP statements below ISxD closes the connection to the Interlock Server afterwards no more ISx commands can be used and no data are received at the isX_cb_YYY_data callback functions isX_cb digi data this is a callback function which has to be defined within a FUNCTION BLOCK END FUNCTION block As soon as a connection to Interlock Server is established that belongs to the number x this function block is called automatically whenever digital data within the servers data space change or when all data are retrieved from the server using command ISxRA When this function block is called following local variables are created and can be used here nodeName STRING the name of the data block the following data belong to 10 s UDINT a bit mask that specifies which digital O s have
499. r processing the working piece Count X Y and Distance X Y these four parameter fields belong to each other and can be used to create arrays of geometry without the need to duplicate them here it can be defined how often they have to be repeated in X and Y direction and which distance has to be set between them 166 Number of vectors this is an informational element and can t be changed directly it displays the number of vector lines that are used to create the selected element Total line length this field contains an information too here the total length of the geometry is shown this value takes the on lines into account only off lines movements with the tool turned of to go to the beginning of the next on line are ignored here Process time here the time is displayed that is needed to process the currently selected element this value is calculated out of the length of on lines the length of off lines between them and the speed and delay information of the pen that are assigned to this element 6 5 2 4 The Layer Tab Pane Every element can be assigned to exactly one layer These layers are in no way related to the processing of the data within the target system but they are a useful utility that makes it easier to handle complex projects Within this tab pane two things can be done layers can be renamed according to their meaning and they can be turned on and off When the bo
500. rCorrect This section describes CorrCorrect a tool to create and modify scanhead correction tables 8 1 Overview When a scanhead a system with two mirrors that deflect a laser in X and Y direction is used the resulting movement on the working area can be distorted Here a few major reasons for distortions can be found 1 apincushion distortion that is caused by the mirrors and the used optics 2 a3D focal distortion that happens because the distance between last mirror and working area differs dependent on the position where the laser hits it the distance is shorter in the middle directly below of the mirror and longer on the borders of the working area resulting in a loss of focus for some of the positions 3 a spatial correction because the scanhead is not mounted in parallel to working area because it has to work inside of a concave working piece To correct such distortions special correction tables are used In most cases these correction tables are specific to and delivered together with a scanhead They use a vendor specific file format that has to be converted depending on the used software the used scanner controller plug in In other cases no such correction file exist and has to be generated from scratch As a third case for some very high accuracy applications existing correction files have to be modified so that they fit to the used hardware exactly All these three tasks can be done with CorrCorrect correction file
501. ra ho dado 22 CHECKED OAs cita a a ds ld id dd dl dr 232 E AA NS A Dh ce O 1g i teh chee ETET 232 A weaves NN 161 190 lc de A a A ee ee ee O 168 208 Br e a A aaa 226 A O 35 121 CMD Value Pairto Binary enea nern opar ridad 43 CMD Value Pair to Characters o ccconccccnccccnnncnnnnncnonononononononnncnonnarnnnnannnnnannnnnannnnnrnnn anno nan ran AEEA AREER EREEREER EREE nnen 43 CMD Value Pair to Digitalis ao d errar tada 40 CMD Value Pair to NUMBTIC ccooccccnncncnnncncnnnononononononononnnnnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrn non anno nor nnnnna narra na EREEREER AEEA EAEan EEn 42 A o Maia mee ut ce Reade E a a E E an 244 CMALISINAME E E oon a lee aa fee ke cloro ode i oct Biv osc oats 246 CMdALISUID a oa 246 CmaLo ad Prince icc OE avec Gauss asedincad causa necehaear rues 244 CMA Wu os 244 CmdaRedra Wer toi A A A IS ds cita 245 CmaResetElemilad c o0 cit A bebe 246 Cmd SendM AK ii A o ak a hl 245 CmdSendNamed Marko itit histone aa india dia A ie eed 245 CmadSetChanlO2 sz it ad et eee 244 CmdasetCha OD nia dE A ae 244 Gmdasetchan Dd id DEA dai 244 CmdSe tCharlOS it a A A A i a te 244 EmasetElembiles coa A A AS 246f CmdSetElemFlag iiien araa in TEE EN E eE NEE ee aden 246 EmasetsSelEnt iia A A O ias 245 CmdStopMark iia A A AA ee a a 242 CMW e Mark isis ia 244 EmdaZoomEl Mica a tt decd cachtael ae 245 CNG Ss a a a a aa a a aa aa a a teed aad dee 80 ENCON Star a a a a aaa a a A E a 11 37 45 CNConstruct to CONTON nitin anna a a a
502. ral parameters have to be given Factor specifies a factor that is used to calculate a metric value in millimetres out of the drive internal position information that is given by the position encoder the exact factor depends on your hardware set up and the gear you are using Low Limit specifies the lower limit in unit millimetres where the axis is allowed to move to at minimum 114 High Limit specifies the upper limit in unit millimetres where the drive is allowed to move to at maximum Axis Address the address that is set at the controller in order to identify it at the serial line Axis Home Timeout is a time out value in seconds that described after what time referencing has to be stopped when no home switch could be found When a movement is running at an axis it can t be overwritten by a new position value immediately Such a new position information would be rejected by the plug in In such a case the axis first has to be stopped and after the related speed output indicates that the axis really has stopped by emitting a speed of 0 the new position can be set at the POS input Within the debugger an invalid positioning request would be indicated within the OpenPlayer it is ignored without any further notice Every of the up to four axes is controlled via a pair of inputs Numeric INO POS the absolute position in unit mm to move the axis 1 to for this movement the speed is used that was
503. ral pre defined inputs and functionalities To use this plug in SAMLight has to be configured for remote access via TCP IP connection the direct connection via function calls can t be used Next within the configuration panel of the plug in the IP and port number where SAMLight is listening at has to be set Access to the CCI and all it s functions happen via the inputs of the plug in The Client Control Interface of SAMLight and therefore this plug in act in handshake mode means after execution of a command the application has to wait for a response that is given at OUTO When a new command is given before this response is available that command is rejected This fact is noticed within the OpenDebugger when it happens within the OpenPlayer the untimely command is rejected without any further action or notification 91 Numeric INO CMD whenever a number is set at this input the related command is executed via the CCI some of the commands require additional parameters that can be set using the other inputs Here only the mapping between the command number and the executed command is described for a detailed documentation about the purpose of every command please refer to the manual of SAMLight Together with the command the parameters are given these parameter names correspond to the names of the inputs where the related values are expected at So when a description 99 ScCciDoSometing X Y TXT is given that means that the command
504. ral short lines of a defined length including additional points all these lines are connected Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines of a defined length including additional points every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style 172 Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the length of the additional points that form the selected line style Bezier Style here it can be chosen if the last polygon point and the first one are connected by a line style Closed or not style Open Resolution this parameter specifies the smoothness of the Bezier line the bigger it is the more sub lines are used to create such a curve the more smooth it becomes and the more resources are used for it which may result in a longer processing time 6 5 4 10 Text This primary geometry can be used to draw some text using an existing TrueType font This element accepts static texts or dynamic values that can be set via an Input Element When such a project is moved from one computer to an other or from one operating system to an other it has to be made sure a used font is available on the other system too Otherwise the application tries t
505. ration Flow ObjectS oooconococccnnnnncccccnccconnaonccnccncccnnanananannnnnnnnn 63 5 3 91 2 141 10 Operation MaC O Siti eiii atlas 77 5 3 39 1 2 12 LaserFlow UD e Genan a a Hagen a e EAN 78 5 3 3 7 2 13 External Laser Flow Objects neiaa a a a aN Arras 78 5 3 3 1 2 14 Motion Flow ODES seee a E eia 109 5 3 3 7 2 15 External Motion Flow OBjectS ainai danaa aE sS pee eaka 109 5 3 3 12 10 Motlon MICOS irano etie ea E a AEN e Aa EAS AN EEA AERARII T INER 118 9 3 3 1 2 17 Data Flow Objects atico RE concent elt dd AA 121 5 3 3 7 2 18 External Data Flow ObjectS ooooooccccninncoccccnnoncococcncconnnnncnncnnnnanononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 121 5 3 3 7 2 19 Miscellaneous Flow ObjectS ooooocconnoocccccconcoocccccnononnconccnnnennnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnininnn 130 5 3 3 7 2 20 External Miscellaneous Flow ObjectS ooooocconnocccccnccccoocccccnonconccnnnncnnnnnananannnnno 132 5 3 4 The Plugged Devices List of the OpenEditOF ococooooocccccccnooccccnccnnnanconccnnnnnnnnnononnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 132 54 Usma tie OpenDeDugger ea a A ad 133 9 41 Debugging a Project iii as 133 5 4 1 1 Watching the Number of Program FlOWS ccccooooccccnccooocccccccnononcccncnanonononnnnanennnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnn 134 5 4 1 2 Watching the Outputs of Flow ElementS oooooocccccnnnocccccccononaccnnncnononccnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnrnncnnnnnnnnna 135 9 9 Using the Open Player cia A A ested ee 135 5 5 1 OpenPlayer Command Line OptiONS cococcccccccnnnnnnononononcncnnnnnnn
506. ration is for chosen deceleration mode Stop Deceleration factor that specifies strength of deceleration for all stop events stop by limit switch reference switch or by stop command Invert Direction all axis use a positive and negative movement direction which are used to describe the motion direction When this option is set positive and negative are exchanged which may be useful to make Ul layout appearance of these directions more convenient to user Reference Mode after first start up or when a motion error occurred where increments may got lost referencing is required for an axis To do this a reference switch is required at a defined mounting position refer to related parameter below Using reference mode parameter a sequence of movements in relation to this reference switch can be chosen that has to be performed on referencing Reference Timeout here a value in unit seconds can be specified When referencing could not be finished after this time has elapsed it will be cancelled since it seems axis is not able to find reference switch and or movement is not possible for some reasons Reference Signal Input here an input can be specified that is used as switch defining the referencing position Reference Speed 1 2 3 referencing is done in up to three different steps depending on used reference mode Speeds for these steps should be slow in order to not to overshoot when reference position is reached In case of mor
507. rd or operating in stand alone mode is supported Within the configuration dialogue the plug in and the scanner controller card have to be configured according to the connected devices Basic Laser type the type of the connected laser the field that was selected here directly corresponds to the laser tab panes where some additional laser specific settings can be done for a detailed description of the available options please refer to the manual of the RTC ScanAlone and to the manuals of the laser device vendor Power output the laser output power can be controlled via an additional output the kind of output to be used can be defined here Number of Axes specifies if the scanner controller has to operate in 2D or 3D mode this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card Correction file the ctb correction file to be used for operation provided by the vendor of the scanhead Stand By Frequency frequency the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Stand By Length pulse length the laser has to be driven with in standby mode 93 Field Left Position Field Upper Position defines the upper left coordinate of the field that has to be used by the scanner Field Size the total size of the field that is used by the scanner this parameter together with the left and upper position specifies the coordinates input vectors have to be located within in ca
508. re Thus there must be independent and working emergency stop equipment available in every case 190 7 5 Project Configuration When starting with a new project it has to be configured first so that the editing environment of BeamConstruct reflects the real processing conditions within production This can be done in global settings the related dialogue can be found in menu Project sub menu Project settings There a dialogue opens which offers several configuration options within different tab panes The following parameters can be set and modified within these panes In tab pane Drawing Area Grid Size this is a helper grid that is used and visible within the working area as an array of of points with an distance in X and Y direction as specified here Snap to Grid when this check box is selected all geometry that is drawn or re positioned within the working area automatically snap to a position that is defined by the visual grid this option gives the possibility to position elements very exact Background Colour this option changes the visual representation of the editor and does not have any influence on the generated data it specifies the colour of the background within BeamConstruct s drawing area Working Area Border the previously defined working area is shown as rectangle within the drawing area of the application here the colour of this rectangle can be changed similar to the previous option
509. rent to the OpenPlayer that starts a flow immediately after loading a project in OpenDebugger that has to be done manually That s necessary in case the user wants to change the debugging settings before the project is executed When a flow is started in debugging mode and the check box Stop on warning is selected the program flow will be stopped automatically whenever a warning condition is met please see below The next tool bar button opens the watch window that can be used to inspect the output values of flow elements it is symbolised by a magnifier Within that watch window flow elements can be added to display their output states Right beside the watch window button the functionality for performing a singe step can be found This button is symbolised by a foot Whenever the debugger is in run mode stopped and this button is pressed one single operation is performed Here single operation means 1 the outputs of all flow elements where a data flow is active are read 2 the data read from there are transferred to the input of the next connected flow object s and 3 they are set there at the output That s true for all flow elements that currently have to handle some data so a single step performs this operation for all available flow elements in parallel PLEASE NOTE in singe stepping mode all time dependent flow elements may behave not in the same way than in continuous execution mode This happens because total exec
510. rent values where the user can choose a suitable result from To open this wizard the button Parameter Wizard on upper left corner of the pen settings windows has to be pressed There a window opens where a 10x10 matrix of small marking areas is symbolised by a matrix of buttons On upper part of the window the parameters to be used have to be selected and their range to be checked can be entered These values are spread over the matrix in order to find best parameters Next the yellow Mark Start button right beside the button matrix has to be pressed in order to start output to the material ATTENTION by pressing the mark button a laser operation is started This may operate with up to 100 power and therefore is potentially dangerous Prior to opening the pen parameter wizard and prior to starting output out of this wizard all security measures have to be ensured As soon as marking has finished the area with the best marking result has to be chosen and the related button in pen parameter wizard has to be pressed To make it easier to find the correct position there is one circle and one triangle used for marking these symbols identify orientation and direction of the matrix uniquely So to find the position of the best result it is possible to first count from triangle to circle until the correct column is found and then count the row number When the same is done in pen parameters button matrix the exact position is found and this butto
511. rently stored output data are emitted 5 3 3 7 2 4 Logic Operation Flow Objects Mutual Exclusion The in and outputs of this plug in all work together using a common logic which implements a mutual exclusion At the input a HIGH signal is expected Independent from the current state of all other inputs only the last input that is set to HIGH sets its opposite output to HIGH too all other outputs are set to LOW As an example when there is set a HIGH signal at Digital IN3 the related output Digital OUT3 is set to HIGH too Now when Digital IN5 is set to HIGH digital OUT3 is set to LOW independent from the state of Digital IN3 and Digital OUT5 is set to HIGH instead More than this on every HIGH signal that is set on input side all eight outputs emit a value the one that belongs to the currently set input emits a HIGH and the other seven outputs emit a LOW Digital INO Digital IN7 digital inputs for the mutual exclusion Digital OUTO Digital OUT7 the related outputs where exactly one of them can be HIGH all other will be LOW This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_digimutex Rising Falling Edge This plug in detects if there is a rising or falling edge in digital or numerical signals The result is given at the 53 output Digital INO this input can be used to detect a digital rising edge a change from LOW to HIGH the result is given at Outputs OUTO and OUT 1 Digital IN2 here a digital falling edg
512. results in a new connection to the specified server Thus a connection problem can t be detected during application start up when the plug in is initialised but only during runtime when new data are requested Within the configuration settings a default IP a port number and a resource where the data have to be retrieved from can be specified IP is something in style xxx xxx xxx xxx or a domain name like openapc com Port typically is 80 and the resource is the exact document that has to be fetched e g index php Currently this plug in supports following mime types image loads an image and converts it to a raw binary bitmap text plain loads a plain text Following IO s are supported by this plug in Char INO IP overwrites the default IP or host name Numeric IN1 PORT overwrites the default port number specified within the set up Char IN2 RES overwrites the default resource information and tries to get it immediately Digital IN3 GET when this input is set to 1 Binary OUTO when some data like images have been downloaded they are emitted at this output Char OUT1 after downloading a plain text file the resulting lines of text are emitted at this output line by line Numeric OUT2 ERR this output returns an result code here positive numbers are equal to the HTTP error codes 200 means everything is fine negative numbers point to internal reasons for a failure all other codes not equal to 200 poi
513. rns laser on and off during such a marking process Output Port here a port can be chosen that has to be used for the Marking Active signal Output Number here the bit number at the previously chosen output port has to be selected which shall be used to toggle the Marking Active signal please note some scanner controller cards use some of their output bits for specific reserved purposes these bits should not be used for this signal in order to avoid any unwanted and undefined behaviour Invert Output Logic inverts the output value for the active signal Allow mark start via external signal some scanner cards provide a special input for a mark start signal when this option is set and the mark dialogue is opened marking process can t be started not only by pressing the mark button but also by setting the start input of the used scanner card 192 Parameters grouped in tab pane Image Capture are unique and independent from any head or scanner controller selection Video Controller this gives the possibility to choose a source for a live background video which is displayed in drawing area behind all vector and bitmap data This live image can be used to adjust the current marking project to the working piece that is shown by a connected camera To have a background image just as pattern for a laser project it is recommended not to use such a live image but to import a still image and use it as light ta
514. rong configurations This should be done prior to putting a system into operation for the first time and prior to putting a system into operation after a software update was installed This plug in can be used to access the 3rdEye PSC140P scanner controller card for controlling a scan head and a connected laser in real time Within the configuration dialogue the plug in and the scanner controller 78 card have to be configured according to the connected devices Basic Use Board Number in case more than only one board is used within the same host computer this value specifies which of the boards has to be used by this plug in Laser type the type of the connected laser the field that was selected here directly corresponds to the laser tab panes where some additional laser specific settings can be done for a detailed description of the available options please refer to the manual of the PSC140P and to the manuals of the laser device vendor Power output the laser output power can be controlled via an additional output the kind of output to be used can be defined here Correction file the pcf correction file to be used for operation provided by the vendor of the scan head Firmware file the hex firmware file to be used to operate the scanner controller card provided by 3rdEye Stand By Frequency frequency the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Stand By Length pulse length t
515. rriage return and or line feed Here for a carriage return the special character sequence CR has to be added for a line feed LF can be used Please note also in case only one laser command has to be sent the CR LF termination characters have to be used Which characters have to be used depends on the requirements of the used laser The Commands configuration panel offers following configuration possibilities Response End Character specifies which characters are expected in every response from the laser if none is chosen the plug in tries to receive some data after every command transmission but does not check the contents Device Open Command here the command can specified that is sent to the laser when everything is initialised and when all connected devices are opened Device Open Delay this is an optional delay that can be specified to let the plug in wait after the Device Open Command is sent and before all other operations like opening of other devices are continued this can be useful to let the laser start up settle completely Ready for Marking Command this command is sent to the laser whenever it has to be ready for marking it is issued e g in case BeamConstruct opens the Mark dialogue Ready for Marking Delay this is an optional delay that can be specified to let the plug in wait after the Ready for Marking Command is sent and before all other operations like start of marking operation ar
516. rrows left right up down using these arrows the whole geometry of the project can be shifted into the given direction in top view for 3D mode the shift step size in unit mm is taken out of the input field below of these arrows e Arrows rotation left right using these arrows the whole geometry of the project can be rotated into the given direction in top view for 3D mode the rotation step size in unit degrees is taken out of the input field below of these arrows e Button Auto this button can be used only when a live image is captured and when fiducials are teached using the integrated vision system it tries to detect the teached fiducials in current image and aligns and rotates the current geometry automatically according to the position and orientation of these fiducials e Button Reset when this button is pressed all changes in position and rotation of the current projects geometry are taken back it is reset to its default values In tab pane Motion Axes it is possible to drive configured motion axes manually and independent from any 235 motion elements in marking project Please note when there are some marking elements used directly within the project it has to be taken into account that the user may have changed the position of the axes via these manual functions Thus at least the first motion element should perform a movement to an absolute position or should reference its position Within the mark dialogue following
517. s and to write protocol related logging information into a file The last option can be used to find the reason for communication problems but should be handled with care such a log file can become very big in a very short time depending on the traffic that is handled by this plug in An other option is relevant for older project files only OpenAPC 1 x compatibility mode should not be set within new projects but has to be left enabled for version 1 x projects that make use of one of the single bit 10 s Coils or Input Registers As long as this option is set the 32 bit numbers that form 32 coil or register values are concatenated using the old style with exchanged byte order In case it is not set the bits are concatenated within their real order and without grouping them into bytes For every of the 8 inputs following parameters have to be set Operation Mode the method of data exchange with the slave this mode influences the range of in and output values and decides if data can be read and written or read onlyb Base Address Offset the 0 based address offset within the slaves address space Unit ID unit slave number of the target Numeric INO IN7 the values to be written to the slave Numeric OUTO OUT7 the values that have been read from the slave here new data are emitted whenever the related value changes within the slave This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_modbus_tcp Modbus TCP Slave T
518. s the radius of the circle the geometry is bent to this is the distance from the middle of the geometry to the radial centre point Angle Offset an offset for the bending angle starting point using this value the geometry can be shifted 6 5 7 Data Input Elements This type of element influences geometry only in a very indirect way it provides data that can be used by Primary Geometry elements to create their data So all types of Primary Geometry elements that accept such input data can be combined with all types of Data Input elements Of course it is not possible to have more than one Data Input element per Primary Geometry element To add such a Data Input element the Primary Geometry element has to be selected within the Entity Tree Next the green tool bar symbol of the Data Input has to be clicked to assign it to the Primary Geometry element 6 5 7 1 CSV Data Input This plug in offers basic connectivity to data out of tables in CSV format comma separated values a platform and application independent table file format It loads data out of a CSV table and jumps to next line row of this file during every marking operation The data read from this table are applied to the related Primary Element Within the settings panel of this plug in first the path to the CSV file has to be chosen Next two parameters specify the delimiter used within the CSV file to separate columns as well as the number of the column to be shown in case a
519. s also possible to have even bigger distances between tiles so that they do not touch at their edges 229 Parameters for a 90 mm x 90 mm working area are 15 mm for Tile Size and 4 for Tile Skip Size This results in a behaviour where marking starts with these contours that own vectors in red tiles next the contours in green tiles are marked This is continued until the whole working area was processed in this example by processing the remaining two tile sets in grey areaswith two additional steps Tile Size the size of a tile in working area this value should be such a fraction of the working area size that lets the tiles fit fully into whole working area Tile Skip Size skip distance between tiles this value decides how many tiles in horizontal direction should be skipped before marking continues in next tile remaining tiles are processed on next cycle this value should be much smaller than the total number of tiles that fit into the working area Section Support offers the following options and parameters which are available only when a model is created from bottom to top so this option is not available when doing deep engraving with a Sliced 3D Mesh Group Enable Support Structures this checkbox has to be enabled in order to let the software automatically create support structures when it is turned off the model will be processed as is and with no additional geometries When enabled additional geometries are calcul
520. s are stored within every project file Thus it may happen a project file is loaded that contains different hardware settings and therefore is not compatible to the local system To avoid such troubles two functions can be found in menu Project that handle the local default data Save as default configuration saves the current set up as default whenever the application is started or a new project is generated this configuration is used automatically this not only includes the settings done within the project settings but also the number of pens and pen settings Load default configuration loads a saved default configuration overwrites the current project settings and appends the loaded pen definitions to the currently used ones Tab pane Misc contains options and configuration possibilities that do not belong to any of the previous ones logically Enable lOSelect Mode this checkbox can be used to activate the lOSelect functionality please refer below and to enable the settings that belong to it Numbered Projects directory here path to a directory has to be specified that contains the project data to be loaded depending on the current input state Card 1 Input Port the digital input port that has to be used for external selection of next project this selection is important in case a card provides more than one digital input port Auto Start Marking when this option is set marking of lO selected project starts automatica
521. s as it is used by several commands Numeric IN ANGLE angle input parameter this input only sets a parameter for later use and does not invoke a command Numeric IN VALUE generic input parameter for numeric values used by some of the Client Control Interface commands Char IN ENTITY_NAME input to set a name of an entity for later use with a command Char IN VALUE generic input parameter for text values used by some of the CCI commands Char IN LOAD_JOB here a pathname is expected to a SJF jobfile this value is used to load the job specified by this path into SAMLight as a second parameter this command uses the value of numeric input VALUE if it is set to 1 a currently loaded job is dropped in case it was set to 0 before the previously loaded jobs are not removed but the new one is added to them Digital IN MARK_TRIGG this input enables the mark trigger mode using the currently selected job after setting this input the current job is marked as soon as the scanner card receives an external trigger Digital IN MARK_START starts marking the currently selected job immediately Digital IN ENTITY_ROT this command rotates a single entity of the current job and requires four values that have to be set before it is used the name of the entity input ENTITY_NAME the X and Y coordinates input X and Y of the centre where to rotate around and the rotation angle input ANGLE Digital IN ENTITY_SCA scales the entity specified by
522. s case Name the name that is specified here is never shown to the end user it is used to uniquely identify an object This name will be displayed within the Flow Editor when you set an existing HMI element there That name is also used together with the logging functionality whenever the elements data meet the definitions that cause a log event this name is used within the log information This name should be unique so that an element can be identified and accessed via an Interlock Server connection which uses this name too ID right beside the name input field a number is displayed This number is a unique identifier for every object and is used e g by the logging functionality to identify an object please refer to the description of the Log Recorder flow object below for a description of this identifier Min Max the values that can be entered here are relevant only for user interface elements that handle numerical data Here the allowed range for such a HMI control can be specified Please note when the allowed range for an element is limited by these fields every input value to such an element will be clipped in case it is outside the defined range This may lead to loss of information when values are modified this way Position these values influence the x and y position in unit pixels of the HMI control within the HMI Editor Size similar to the position these values can be used to set a specific width x and
523. s function works similar to the preceding one but it request all data that are available at the Interlock Server at the moment These data are returned at the callback function This function returns 1 in case the request could be sent successfully or a number not equal to 1 otherwise PLEASE NOTE dependent on the amount of data the Interlock Server currently stores calling this function may cause a nameable system load and big traffic when all the data available are transferred oapc ispace set value nodeName val Different to oapc_ispace set data this function can be used to set exactly one value for a datablock Here a string parameter nodeName is required that contains the name of the data block that has to be changed in style datablock io where is a number in range 0 7 that specifies the exact position where the data have to be written The second parameter val hands over the data that have to be send to this data block Here it is VERY important to hand over a value of the correct data type This data type decides if the value can be written successfully or not So for a digital IO of the data block a boolean value has to be given for a numeric IO a numeric value has to be given and for a char IO a string value has to be given As an example when a string value 42 is handed over for a numeric lO it can t be set and the operation will fail Here the correct value 42 or 42 0 has to be given This function returns 1 in case
524. s in unit degree can be chosen Factor specifies a factor that is used to calculate a metric value in millimetres or a rotational value in degrees out of the drive internal position information that is given in unit increments the exact factor depends on your hardware set up and the gear you are using Low Limit specifies the lower limit in unit millimetres where the axis is allowed to move to at minimum High Limit specifies the upper limit in unit millimetres where the drive is allowed to move to at maximum Acceleration a value that specifies how smooth the drive should start its movements Deceleration a value that specifies how smooth the drive should stop its movements Step Signal Output the output bit at the previously chosen output port type that is used for the pulsed step signal here it has to be made sure that an output is used only once overlapping mappings would cause problems during operation Direction Signal Output the output bit at the output port that was chosen in general configuration 117 panel this output bit is used to define the movement direction of the axis here it has to be made sure that an output is used only once overlapping mappings would cause problems during operation Invert Direction inverts the direction output the movement direction for this axis Reference Mode here it can be specified if a home referencing operation has to be d
525. s libio_parport_stepper2 Stepper Motor Driver Scannercard Using this plug in a stepper motor can be controlled via a connected scanner controller card This plug in does not control such a card directly but it generates output data that can be handled by a scanner controller card Thus the binary output OUT7 has to be connected with the binary input of the scanner controller cards plug in Beside of that a feedback from the scanner controller is necessary so the binary output of the scanner controller card needs to be connected with IN7 of this plug in in order to get feedback about the digital inputs on that scanner controller The plug in is able to control up to three axes via two output signals Step and Direction These axes will operate sequentially two or more axes will not move at the same time As global parameter only the digital output port and the digital input port of the connected scanner controller card have to be chosen Here is is up to the user to select IO ports that really exist for the used scanner controller in case an lO is specified that does not exists no data can be send to it or no input information can be received Which bit of the selected IO s is used for which purpose and which axis can be specified within the axis related configuration panels Axis Mode specifies the operational mode of the drive here out of the two options planar expects linear input data and rotational expects angular input value
526. s of the OpenAPC package or BeamConstruct Also in case the software or drivers that for an example belong to the scanner controller card are modified it is recommended to perform these checks 7 6 4 Using Pens for Coloured Bitmap Marking On some materials variations of power speed and frequency cause marking results in different colours This behaviour can be used within BeamConstruct to easily mark coloured bitmaps Following the steps are described to get such images First of all it is important to know that the process of marking colours is not easy to handle Environmental conditions may have a strong influence the result so that pen parameters that cause a specific colour one day may result in a different colour the next day So the whole process should be done in a well defined environment Next the material condition can have an influence too its state of oxidation grease or dirt on the surface may affect the resulting colour So in case of troubles a defined cleaning process may be necessary possibly by using a laser or by using a plasma cleaning process To get coloured bitmaps following steps are necessary check image and the colours it contains find as much as possible pen parameters that result in different colours when they are used for marking on your target material they should include as much of the colours that are contained in image to be marked calibrate your monitor so that the colours displayed there are as c
527. s place holders for the input values These place holders start with a followed by a format character d for whole numbers f for numbers in floating point representation and s for a text As last part of the place holder the input number has to be added So for this format string allowed place holders are d1 Y d4 Y f1 Yf4 and s5 s7 Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used to start the conversion for the current input values in case this option is enabled within the settings Numeric IN1 numeric IN4 the inputs for the numeric part that can be used for conversion Char IN5 char IN7 the inputs for the texts that can be used for conversion Char OUT1 the text that was converted according the rules of this element 5 3 3 7 2 2 External Data Conversion Flow Objects BeamConstruct to Control This plug in converts BeamConstruct laser marking project files to a stream of binary control data structures Comparing to the plug ins that convert static CSV or HPGL vector data this one supports all the dynamic and lasermarking specific features that BeamConstruct offers This includes setting of laser and scanner parameters counting of serial numbers setting date time information for every new process cycle manipulating the contents of a project via the inputs of the plug in synchronising different motion information waiting for external trigger signals
528. s that have to be collected at IN2 until the average is calculated and set at OUT2 Numeric IN4 DATA input for the samples that have to be collected Numeric IN5 the number of samples that have to be collected at IN4 until the average is calculated and set at OUT4 Numeric IN6 DATA input for the samples that have to be collected Numeric IN7 the number of samples that have to be collected at IN6 until the average is calculated and set at OUT6 Numeric OUTO AVG the average of the last amount of samples given at INO Numeric OUT2 AVG the average of the last amount of samples given at IN2 Numeric OUT4 AVG the average of the last amount of samples given at IN4 Numeric OUT6 AVG the average of the last amount of samples given at IN6 57 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_averaging Math Calculation 1 This plug in offers a set of mathematical operations that require exactly one operand This operand is set at an numeric input the result is given at the related output immediately No additional configuration is necessary for this plug in Numeric INO SIN input operand for calculation of sinus Numeric IN1 COS input operand for calculation of cosine Numeric IN2 In input operand for calculation of e logarithmus naturalis Numeric IN3 lg input operand for calculation of logarithm Numeric OUTO SIN result of sinus calculation Numeric OUT1 COS result of cosine calcula
529. s the binary motion data 111 Binary OUT7 CTRL output for the Control data delivered at IN7 here the control data are emitted synchronously dependent on the current movement position so that a tool can be controlled correctly dependent on the current position This output also pays attention to possible tool on delays or tool off delays as long as they are smaller than 0 the control data are emitted the given time before the related movement starts so that negative on off delays are handled correctly This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_e1701m_stepper Schneider IMS MDrive This plug in is able to control up to three axes of an Schneider IMS MDrive there is also a macro available that encapsulates the low level functionalities described here These axes can be moved independently or synchronously via the control input to perform flat linear X Y movements or three dimensional X Y Z movements This mode can be used e g together with an XY Table and a tool for machining purposes This drive can be controlled via a serial interface where all axes are connected to this line Independent from the fact if one or more axes are used all of the used drives have to be pre configured in the following way before operating them within a ControlRoom or BeamConstruct environment Following the configuration steps are described together with the commands that have to be sent to the drive to do this configuration 1 A unique device identifi
530. s the length of the additional points that form the selected line style 6 5 4 5 Circle This primary element can be used to create circles and arcs Starting point is always a circle that is drawn in 169 two steps the first left mouse click into the drawing area specifies the centre point of it the second one specifies the radius via the distance from the first point Next the circle can be modified using its options Line Style the style the circle is created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of several short fully connected lines that form a closed circle for this mode the parameter Segments specifies how much of these short lines are used to create this circle the more lines are used the more smooth the circle becomes Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines that form the circle comparing to the previous option here the parameter Distance influences the length of these lines and therefore the resolution here the shorter the lines are the more segments this circle consists of and the more smooth it becomes Dashed Arcs the circle consists of dashes where the dashes are not straight lines but follow the shape of the circle and therefore are round Dashed Straights the circle consists of dashes where the dashes do not follow the shape of the circle but are straight lines Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotte
531. s to be something like 0 filename epr where 0 specifies microSD card as storage place and epr is the recommended file name extension for such stand alone data When a file with this name already exists on the controller it will be overwritten without further notice 245 CmdSetSelEnt lt 0 1 gt Select or deselect a selected element visibly in view This operation is similar to a left click on an element by the user while shift key is held down An additional parameter 0 or 1 decides if the element has to be selected or deselected The element itself which is modified by this operation can be chosen by a call to function CmdSelEntName which internally selects the element for further operations After setting an element visibly selected by this command all Ul operations can be performed that belong to selected elements To fully zoom into a single element following sequence of commands can be used CmdSelEntNam lementnam CmdSetSelEnt 1 CmdZoomE lem To zoom to two elements this sequence of commands can be used CmdSelEntNam lementnamel CmdSetSelEnt 1 CmdSelEntNam lementname2 CmdSetSelEnt 1 CmdZoomE lem To unselect a previously selected element parameter 0 has to be used CmdSelEntNam lementnamel CmdSetSelEnt 0 CmdZoomE lem Zooms view to fully show all selected elements The element s to be shown after this command has have to be se
532. se position are ignored Within the triangles property tab pane following options are available Line Style the style the triangles lines are created with here following options exist Continuous the geometry consists of exactly tree points that are connected by three completed lines Connected Lines the geometry consists of several short lines connecting the three corners including additional points all these lines are connected and therefore form a closed shape Dashed the geometry consists of several short lines including additional points between the three corners every second line is drawn that results in a dashed line style Dotted no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected dots Dotted Custom no lines are drawn the geometry consists of a set of not connected points in custom dot style as configured within the parameter settings 208 Distance whenever a non continuous line style is selected this distance value specifies the length of the additional points that form the selected line style 7 7 4 4 Rectangle When drawing a rectangle the upper left and the lower right corner of it are specified by two separate mouse clicks The resulting rectangle will always be parallel to the currently shown coordinate axis Drawing functionality can be extended by pressing the Shift key after specifying the first corner point of the rectangle first click when this key is held down a square is cre
533. se there are input data which define a position outside this field they will not be marked Swap X and Y swaps the input X and Y coordinate to exchange X and Y axis values of the scanner Mirror X Mirror Y mirror the input coordinates On the fly factor X On the fly factor Y specifies the factor in X or Y direction for marking on the fly operation this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card Default Here several default parameters can be defined that are used when the direct axis control inputs X Y and Z are used or when control data are used that do not contain motion speed delay information Jump Speed the speed the position has to be changed with when the laser is turned off Mark Speed the speed the position has to be changed with when the laser is turned on Laser Off Delay Laser On Delay Jump Delay Mark Delay Polygon Delay these delays are used during marking operation they become active when the laser is turned off or on when the scanner jumps to an other position when it moves to an other position while marking or when the movement direction is changed during marking for a detailed description of these values their usage and their influence to the marking result please refer to the RTC ScanAlone manual All following tab panes contain laser specific definitions that are used depending on the selected laser type For information about these parameters
534. selected element 244 10006 log in a user CmdNewPr3 Clears all current data and flushes all existing elements settings and pens After calling this command default settings are restored and project does not contain any geometries When CmdAppendPrj is used afterwards to load a new project current default settings are kept CmdLoadPrj lt path gt Loads a new BEAMP project from given lt path gt The elements contained in the given project are appended to the current ones if there are any The current settings and pens are overwritten by the ones found in the loaded project file CmdAppendPrj lt path gt Loads a new BEAMP project from given lt path gt The elements contained in the given project are appended to the current ones if there are any The current settings and pens are kept the ones in loaded project file are ignored CmdSetCharI02 lt new text gt CmdSetCharI03 lt new text gt CmdSetChariI04 lt new text gt CmdSetChariI05 lt new text gt Set a new text to be used for all input elements that make use of the logical Char inputs When such an input element is assigned to a text or barcode primary element the text or barcode is replaced by the given lt new text gt for the next marking operation The four commands for char lO 2 5 correspond to the inputs 2 5 that can be selected in used input elements CmdWriteMark lt path gt Using this command it is possible to write the current project data
535. set last at the MODE input when a value is set here the motor is moved to the related position immediately Numeric IN1 MODE this input is used for different control commands depending on the value of the number that is set here when the given value is greater than 0 it is interpreted as speed and the value is used for the next movement command given at the preceding input when the input value is equal to 0 the motor is stopped immediately a value of 1 causes a movement to the home referencing position here the reference input has to be connected and configured properly and values in range 2 60 perform a movement to the indexed positions that are stored within the controllers internal configuration for positions 2 60 Numeric IN2 POS performs a movement with axis 2 similar to INO Numeric IN3 MODE defines the speed for axis 2 or controls its movement similar to IN1 Numeric IN4 POS performs a movement with axis 3 similar to INO Numeric IN5 MODE defines the speed for axis 3 or controls its movement similar to IN1 Numeric IN6 POS performs a movement with axis 4 similar to INO Numeric IN7 MODE defines the speed for axis 4 or controls its movement similar to IN1 Numeric OUTO POS this output gives the current position of axis 1 during a movement operation it changes permanently Numeric OUT1 MODE this is a state output that emits a O when the drive has stopped the current speed with values great
536. setting outputs of the scanner controller card and others more Before using this plug in following parameter has to be set within the configuration panel Default Filename path to a predefined BEAMP file that has to be loaded and converted this project file is loaded at startup of the application and can be replaced dynamically via character input IN1 This conversion plug in uses the following in and outputs Digital INO CLK start conversion of the loaded BeamConstruct project as soon as a HIGH value is given here the complete file is converted so that the related output emit a continuous stream of data according to the values found within the file Char IN1 FILE specifies and loads a new BEAMP file that will be converted when the next HIGH signal is given to INO Char IN2 input for dynamic text data that can modify the currently loaded BEAMP file in case the related input element is used within that project Char IN3 input for dynamic text data that can modify the currently loaded BEAMP file in case the related input element is used within that project Char IN4 input for dynamic text data that can modify the currently loaded BEAMP file in case the related input element is used within that project Digital IN7 BSY this is a synchronisation input that has to be connected with the BSY outputs of all scanner controller and motion elements that receive control data from this plug in Binary OUTO CTRL out
537. side the axes that are controlled by the geometry can be driven These axes have to be connected with the two additional CTRL outputs of the CNConstruct to Control plug in within an ControlRoom project that makes use of this CNCP file The motion can be influenced by the parameters that have to be set for this element First of all up to three axes can be controlled by the element using following parameters Enable specifies if an axis has to be changed by the following parameters or if it has to be left untouched axes that are not enabled stay at their current position Position the new position to move the axis to Speed the speed for the movement to the given position Relative defines a non absolute movement means the axis does not drive to the given position but changes it current position by the given distance Stop Axis the motion of an axis is stopped immediately this option is available only for motion controllers that support this function and ignores the given position and speed values Move axes to home position the axis is moved to its home reference position this option is available only for motion controllers that support this function and ignores the given position and speed values All other parameters influence the whole motion element Pre Motion Delay this delay is done before the motion is triggered Use Control Output the CNConstruct to Control plug
538. similar to INO Numeric IN5 MODE defines the speed for axis 3 or controls its movement similar to IN1 Binary IN7 CTRL input for 2D X and Y or 3D X Y and Z Control data to manage the movement here the related number of axes has to be configured properly The related output OUT7 emits motion synchronous control data that can be used by a tool for machinery Numeric OUTO POS this output gives the current position of axis 1 during a movement operation it changes permanently Numeric OUT1 MODE this is a state output that emits a O when the drive has stopped or the current speed otherwise Numeric OUT2 POS this is the position output for axis 2 similar to OUTO Numeric OUT3 MODE here the current state of axis 2 if given similar to OUT1 Numeric OUT4 POS this is the position output for axis 3 similar to OUTO Numeric OUTS MODE here the current state of axis 3 if given similar to OUT1 Binary OUT7 CTRL output for the control data delivered at IN7 here the control data are emitted synchronously dependent on the current movement position so that a tool can be controlled correctly dependent on the current position This output also pays attention to possible tool on delays or tool off delays As long as they are smaller than O the control data are emitted the given time before the related movement starts so that all negative on off delays are handled correctly This plug in is located in flowplugin
539. single Primary Geometry element and its sub elements to reduce its memory usage to the absolute minimum so that only the resulting static data of it are stored Split tries to split the geometry of an element into several pieces here splitting is done at positions where a geometry ends e g at the end of a logic element or the end of a polygon There are several levels of splitting so that it is possible to perform a splitting operation up to two times at the same data As an example when the splitting function is applied to a geometry that represents the string Text for the first time the result are four elements containing the geometries for the letters T e x and t In a second step the splitting function can be applied to the geometry of the letter e again Now it is split based on the contained poly lines the result are two elements that contain the two polygons the letter e consisted of one with the outline and one with the small part within the head of the e Optimize this function checks geometry for inefficient structures and optimizes them Here the visual representation of a geometry is not changed but the number of vectors and vertices is reduced if possible Reduce Geometry here the data a geometry consists of can be reduced As parameter this function expects the minimum size a vector may have within a geometry or a minimum angle a point may define Lines that are
540. sion is indicated within the OpenPlayer the execution of the second application isn t done without any further notification to the end user Digital INO executes the predefined application 1 when a HIGH signal is set Char IN1 overwrites the name and parameters of the predefined application 1 and executes the new one Digital IN2 executes the predefined application 2 when a HIGH signal is set Char IN3 overwrites the name and parameters of the predefined application 2 and executes the new one Digital IN4 executes the predefined application 3 when a HIGH signal is set Char IN5 overwrites the name and parameters of the predefined application 3 and executes the new one Digital IN6 executes the predefined application 4 when a HIGH signal is set Char IN7 overwrites the name and parameters of the predefined application 4 and executes the new one Numeric OUT1 gives the return value of application 1 as soon as it exits Numeric OUTS gives the return value of application 2 as soon as it exits Numeric OUT5 gives the return value of application 3 as soon as it exits Numeric OUT7 gives the return value of application 4 as soon as it exits This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_execute 5 3 4 The Plugged Devices List of the OpenEditor Within the Flow Editor it is possible to add plug ins that access external devices and communicate with them This direct communication where no separation is done between the logical layers of an ap
541. spatial correction mount the scanhead in parallel to the working area in a way where the distance between scanhead and working area is the same length like the shortest distance between scanhead and working area when mounted inclined e check if the correction for this scanhead fits and possibly modify it using the functions described above Once you can mark an exact square that does not show any distortions measure the size of that square and mount the head inclined e mark the same square again now that side of formerly square where distance between working area and scanhead is biggest has to be measured The resulting two values the normal expected length of the square measured in first step and the new bigger length of the square measured after inclining the scanhead have to be entered in dialogue for spatial correction As an other information that side of the current correction table where the square has been distorted and where its edge is longer than before has to be marked using the radio buttons After pressing OK button the spatial correction that stretched the squares width with growing distance will be applied to the correction table Now the result is a rectangle To correct its length to get back to a square the gain factor of this direction has to be changed in scanner card settings within BeamConstruct or the width height of the whole correction table has to be changed in Geometry Panel of CorrCorrect directly 8
542. speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned on this value is used only in ControlRoom context and when the plug in does not get binary control data Following in and outputs are available for the G Code plug in Numeric INO X the X position the scanner has to be moved to setting a new value to this input does not cause any movement it will be invoked only after the Y or Z input was set Numeric IN1 Y the Y position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use two axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y When laser is off jump speed or command GOO is used for this movement when it is turned on mark speed is used Numeric IN2 Z the Z position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use three axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y z When laser is off jump speed or command G00 is used for this movement when it is turned on mark speed is used Digital IN3 L turns the laser on and off Numeric IN6 CMD this input can be used to set additional commands and to perform additional control operations using them here following command values are currently supported e 0 stop marking immediately and flush the list of control commands that may be already stored within the plug in or within the scanner card Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of co
543. squares can be used to slant the geometry When the triangle is dragged by clicking the selection frame between these coloured squares its position can be changed PLEASE NOTE When modification of the geometry has finished it still has to be located completely within the working area that is symbolised by the grey rectangle This working area is the maximum range your scanner can work within so all geometry that is located outside of that range will be cropped 6 Modifying existing geometry manually The method described previously is a very quick way to change the geometry but it is also a very inaccurate one Thus there exists an other possibility As long as an element is selected there is a configuration pane usable at the windows left hand side The first configuration pane is always an element specific one in this example it contains several parameters and values that influence the creation of the triangles base geometry On the same side of the main window there also exists an other tab pane Geometry where the generic geometric data of an element can be changed by entering the desired numeric values Using this way things like size position and rotation can be modified in a very exact way The related values are taken over and applied to the geometry as soon as the data input is confirmed by pressing Return or by leaving the input field Several of these data depend on each other and will change automatically whenever one of them
544. ssage appears and the data block is rejected silently Binary INO input for binary data that have to be compressed using the ZIP compression algorithm Binary IN1 input for binary data that have to be compressed using the BZ2 compression algorithm Binary IN2 input for binary data that have to be compressed using the GZ compression algorithm Binary IN7 INFLATE input for data compressed using ZIP or BZ2 Binary OUTO ZIP here the ZIP compressed data are given as soon as the compression has been finished this method works asynchronously and requires some time dependent on the size and complexity of the input data Binary OUT1 BZ2 here the BZ2 compressed data are given as soon as the compression has been finished this method works asynchronously and requires some time dependent on the size and complexity of the input data Binary OUT2 GZ here the GZ compressed data are given as soon as the compression has been finished this method works asynchronously and requires some time dependent on the size and complexity of the input data Binary OUT7 INFLATE here the decompressed data are given as soon as the decompression has been finished this method works asynchronously and requires some time dependent on the size and complexity of the input data This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_compress 48 5 3 3 7 2 3 Logic Operation Flow Objects Digital NOT This operation does not require any further definitions it inverts
545. st below of this combo box is modified to show the available laser fonts to choose from Font this list of available fonts can be used to select a specific font and style for the text Depending on the font type chosen above here a specific font can be selected In TrueType mode the number and types of available fonts depends on the operation system and which ones are installed there In Laser Vector mode the internal laser fonts are listed here these fonts are delivered with BeamConstruct and do not depend on the fonts installed on the system Alignment the text is always drawn from a fixed position that is specified by the left mouse click when setting the text initially using this list it can be chosen how the text has to be aligned to this position left centred or right Orientation this list specifies the direction the single characters of the text have to be drawn Spacing this value can be used to modify the distance between the characters here a value of 100 is the distance that is specified by the used font smaller values set the characters closer to each other larger ones stretch it to a bigger distance Kerning this value can be used to influence the kerning distance for fonts that support it here 100 is equal to the kerning value that it specified by the font bigger values set the characters with a kerning value closer to each other values smaller than 100 set a bigger distance between them this parameter
546. sted If a condition is met that causes such a warning the name of the flow or HMI element is given where this happened Using these information it can be analysed in detail what happens where and which data are sent 5 4 1 1 Watching the Number of Program Flows At the lower end of the window some additional information are displayed Here the current run state can be seen and the number of program flows that are currently active are given The latter information is an important one normally when no flows are started cyclically and when no user interaction took place this value should go down to 0 If it stays at a value gt 0 or if the value grows continuously an illegal loop is set up with the current flow Such loops should be avoided in every case when itis a loop that runs continuously it consumes computing power and slows down the complete application and the underlying system on a possibly week target system this may result in an unusable application when the number of program flows grows dependent on user interaction or automatically without external input the application will consume all system resources after some time such a problem is very easy to recognise when it happens fast but when it builds up slowly the application may become 134 unusable only after a longer time a typical reason for strange and unexplainable reboots that are necessary only after some days So this information within the OpenDebugger is a very
547. struction list Beside of that they are called in parallel when an event occurs that causes such a function 151 block to be executed the main program flow of the instruction list is not interrupted both continue working So when these special function blocks are used it is important to check which global variables are used and modified from within this function block The reserved function block names are isX cb digi data isX cb num data and isX cb char data where X is the number of the Interlock Server connection the function belongs to The purpose and usage of these function blocks is described within the following section 5 7 5 3 4 Extended Commands for Interlock Server Access The following commands can be used to access the data of a connected Interlock Server and to control other connected components via these data These commands all contain an element ISx where x is a number that identifies a connection to an Interlock Server currently only one connection is supported so x has to be 0 always The order of commands reflects the calling order of the related functions in liboapc please refer to the SDK manual for a detailed description of the usage of the liboapc functions first a connection to the server has to be established using command ISxc then the data can be used with ISxRA LDISx STISx and at the end the connection has to be closed ISxD As soon as a connection is opened all changes within the data space of t
548. t This is done via the configuration possibilities within the dialogue e Arrange in X and Y when enabled the 3D Meshes are arranged on working area using the following parameters e Distance to borders specifies the minimum distance the 3D Meshes need to have to the border in both X and Y direction of the working area 231 e Distance between meshes specifies the minimum distance the 3D Meshes need to have between each other e Arrange in Z when enabled the 3D Meshes are aligned at a specific height using the following options and parameters Align geometries at top or bottom here it can be selected if all the meshes need to be aligned at their upper or lower position Arrange in Z this is an option which can be enabled when 3D Meshes have to be top or bottom aligned at a specific absolute height when it is set the height has to be specified in unit mm in case this option is not set but arrangement in Z is enabled all meshes are aligned at the highest lowest top bottom position of that 3D Mesh that is located at the highest lowest position according to its outlines top bottom border 7 10 Vision BeamConstruct provides an integrated Vision system for automatic adjustment and correction of marking data Using this vision system special markers so called fiducials can be teached Later the Vision system is able to recognise such a fiducial on a working piece and adjust position and rotation of the c
549. t all its sub elements are removed too Duplicate the currently selected Primary Geometry element is copied and inserted at a position that is slightly shifted according to the original element Move To Top the selected element is moved to the top position within its same hierarchically level means a child of a primary element will stay a child of it but it will become the first one Move Up the selected element is moved one position up but also within the same hierarchically level Move Down the selected element is moved one position down within the same hierarchically level Move To Bottom the selected element is moved to the bottom position within its same hierarchically level means a child of a primary element will stay a child of it but it will become the last one 167 6 5 4 Primary Geometry Elements To create a new primary element following steps have to be performed 1 select the desired function within the tool bar all primary elements use blue symbols there 2 Click into the working area to position the element depending on the geometry that is created by the related function it can be drawn now with some additional clicks into this area 3 now the new element is selected and its parameters are shown within the first element specific tab pane When the parameters of such an element are changed within its tab pane all following elements of the same type use exactly these parameters as def
550. t becomes active when the tool is turned on this delay will be done by later processing steps between start of the movement and turning the tool on really this value might be negative Additional Parameter 1 6 here some additional tool specific values can be set The plug in supports the following lO s Digital INO CLK start loading and parsing of the current HPGL file as soon as a HIGH value is given here the complete file is converted so that the related output emit a continuous stream of data according to the values found within the file Char IN1 FILE specifies a new HPGL file that will be loaded when the next HIGH signal is given to INO Binary OUTO CTRL output for binary Control data that contain movement and tool information according to the values out of the loaded file and the pen definitions done within the plug ins configuration here a stream of data is emitted until all vector data of a given file are processed a timing that would results out of the movement speeds and the position is ignored this has to be handled by the plug in that is responsible for the motion Numeric OUT1 ERR this output emits error codes in case the specified HPGL file could not be loaded 125 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_hpgl2ctrl HTTP Client Using this plug in data can be retrieved via the network using the HTTP protocol After HTTP is a stateless and connectionless protocol every attempt to retrieve data
551. t can t be overwritten by a new position value immediately such a new position information would be rejected by the plug in In such a case the axis first has to be stopped and after the related speed output indicates that this axis really has stopped by emitting a speed of 0 the new position can be set at the POS input Within the debugger such an invalid positioning request would be indicated within the OpenPlayer it is ignored without any further notice Numeric INO POS the absolute position in unit mm to move the axis 1 to for this movement the speed is used that was set last at the MODE input when a value is set here and no other movement operation is in progress at this axis the motor is moved to the related position immediately Numeric IN1 MODE this input is used for different control commands depending on the value of the number that is set here when the given value is greater than 0 it is interpreted as speed and the value is used for the next movement command given at the preceding input when the input value is equal to 0 the motor is stopped immediately stop command a value of 1 causes a movement to the home referencing position here the reference input has to be connected and configured properly Numeric IN2 POS performs a movement with axis 2 similar to INO Numeric IN3 MODE defines the speed for axis 2 or controls its movement similar to IN1 116 Numeric IN4 POS performs a movement with axis 3
552. t changed by external input data Unit ID unit slave number of the target Numeric INO 0 input O for the values to be written to the slave Numeric IN1 SL slave address for input 0 when this address is changed all data written to input INO 0 now are directed to this slave Numeric IN2 AD address offset for input 0 when this offset is changed all data written to input INO 0 now are directed to this slave and the output OUTO once emits the data read from this slave address and address offset Numeric IN4 1 input 1 for the values to be written to the slave Numeric IN5 SL slave address for input 1 when this address is changed all data written to input IN4 1 now are directed to this slave Numeric IN6 AD address offset for input 1 when this offset is changed all data written to input IN4 1 now are directed to this slave and the output OUT4 once emits the data read from this slave address and address offset Numeric OUTO 0 the values that have been read from the slave here new data are emitted whenever the related value changes within the slave or when a new address offset was set for this slave at IN2 Numeric OUT4 1 the values that have been read from the slave here new data are emitted whenever the related value changes within the slave or when a new address offset was set for this slave at ING This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_modbus_rtu_adar Modbus RTU Master Th
553. t consists of pairs of data first the payload data DATA have to be set and second a unique command CMD has to be given this command is assigned to the payload data and causes the transmission of it the other communication partner will receive them as pairs Plain every data block is transferred immediately the CMD input behaves like the char payload data this is also a formatted transmission mode the binary data are transmitted using a special header that describes the data all other data are transmitted as text values and are terminated by the given termination character sequence Raw every character data block is transferred immediately and the data are not formatted in any way here the character and command input are the same Raw E5AK checksum every character data block is transferred immediately and the data are not formatted in any way but a XOR based checksum is appended according to the specification of E5AK controller here the character and command input are the same The following selection gives the possibility to specify the character that have to be added to the data before transmission here it can be decided between CR r 0x0D LF In 0x0A CRLF r n OxODOA and no termination character This selection influences transmission only for reception of data it is always checked if at least one of the characters r or n or combinations of both are detected The plug in provides the following
554. t influences the smoothness of the resulting arcs while the Distance parameter influences their length Smoothing Factor normally a spiral is generated out of short lines where the length is calculated out of the number of segments and the current radius This leads to an adaptive line length with as less as much data and an as fast as possible resulting process time But in some cases this may lead to spirals that are not very smooth but angular at their inner radius Here the number of segments could be increased what would lead to a much higher amount of data used because of smoother corners also at curves where it would not be possible or the smoothing factor can be set to values greater 1 0 this changes the calculation of a spiral in a way where the inner line length becomes shorter and therefore more smooth while not using more data than necessary So the more smoothing factor is taken for the calculation the smaller the radius becomes Start Angle this parameters can be used to change the spirals starting angle Grow this parameter is valid in 3D mode only it defines how much the spiral shall grow in the third direction per every segment Here third direction does not necessarily mean Z direction this depends on the view the spiral is drawn in So in case the front side view is enabled the spiral extends in X and Z direction resulting from that the third direction where the grow parameter applies to is the Y direction
555. t is enabled and the operation is finished 2 Alternatively an other user logs in with privilege Manage Users only Here the visibility is set to ignore so that the other privileges are checked After none of the other HMI element privileges fit to the users privileges the operation stops in the last row None of them and disables the HMI element 3 Now a user logs in with the privileges Load Data and Start Process The first match between user privileges and HMI element privilege data can be found in row Load Data Here the HMI element is disabled and the operation is finished 4 No user is logged in which is default at program start up or the last user has logged out In this case no privileges are given and the definition of row None of them is used the HMI element is disabled Example number 3 shows the difference to simple 1 1 privilege assignments There is a difference between users that have the privilege Load Data and Start Process and users that have the privilege Start 159 Process only Both of them use the privilege Start Process and this privilege is defined for the HMI element but they still get different visibility states for this HMI element Resulting from that its a bit different to implement the most simple possibility where exactly one user privilege is used for the HMI element to enable it and to disable it for all others To get this assignment all visi
556. t nobody is able to delete these files accidentally or illegally 5 9 3 Specifying Visibility States for HMI Objects When the user management is enabled and privileges are defined as a next step it is possible to set the visibility for the HMI elements There within the configuration dialogue a special panel User Privileges exists Within this panel all existing privileges are shown ordered by priority as defined within the User Privileges settings dialogue out of menu File Here it can be defined which visibility and access state this HMI object will have dependent on the logged in user and the privileges that have been granted to this user It can be chosen from the options enabled the element is visible and usable disabled the element is visible but not usable and invisible the element is invisible and therefore not usable As a fourth option ignore can be chosen This option is necessary because within a ControlRoom project more than one privilege can be assigned to an user element Because of this functionality which does not exist in most other HMI solutions the assignment of visibility states to privileges is a bit more complex but offers much more flexibility So it is possible to have different visibility states not only dependent on one privilege only but also on combinations of privileges To use this feature it is necessary to understand how this feature works When a user logs in the
557. t right beside the menu tree view and can be removed from there using button Remove After the settings dialogue is left with OK these new menu shortcuts are applied to the menus These settings are locally only and do not become part of a project Custom Dot Style several operations like importing of data offer the possibility to use a custom dot style there instead of a singe coordinate point a custom geometry consisting of a regular polygon or of a spiral can be used Using the following parameters the custom geometry can be influenced Custom Dot Style selects the type of geometry here polygon includes a circle or spiral can be chosen Edges Segments specifies the number of the edges or segments the custom geometry has to consist of Outer Radius sets the size of the custom geometry Inner Radius this parameter is used only in case of a spiral it specifies the inner size of it Slope here the same is true this parameter applies to a spiral only and can be used to set the steepness it grows with Draw CCW here the drawing direction of the custom geometry can be inverted Inside To Outside when this option is set for a spiral it is drawn starting from its inner point Since the parameters that have been specified here need to fit to the production environment where the constructed data have to be used it is important to use the same settings for all constructed data These project parameters are st
558. ta are requested by executing oapc_ispace request data or oapc ispace request all data In all these cases the requested or new data are returned using the parameters of the callback function nodeName the name of the data node that was changed in Interlock Server this node name has format Idatablock io and does not contain the input number this information is given in parameter 10 s please refer below cmd specifies the reason for calling this function when this value is equal to 256 OAPC_CMDERR DOESNT EXISTS it means a specific data block was requested by calling 144 oapc _ ispace request data which doesn t exists In all other cases the data could be retrieved successfully the following parameters contain valid data and can be used TO s this numeric value contains a bit pattern that describes which of the following value parameters val0 val7 contains data of which type This parameter contains OR concatenated flags where every bit stands for one of the val parameters The position of this bit within one byte specifies the number of the val parameter and the position of the byte where this bit is set defines the data type So the bits from 0x00000001 to 0x00000080 specify digital boolean data types 0x00000100 to 0x00008000 specify numeric data types and the range from 0x00010000 to 0x00800000 specifies character text data types The range from 0x01000000 to 0x80000000 binary data is currently not ava
559. ta nodeName IO s val0 vall val2 val3 val4 val5 val6 val7 This function can be used to send a complete set of data to the server lts parameter can be used similar to the ones of the callback function oapc_ispace recv_callback nodeName the name of the data block where the data have to be set at in style datablock io I0 s a set of bits that defines which of the following parameters contain values of which type for the mapping of the bits please refer to description of oapc_ispace recv_callback above val0 val7 the values that have to be set for the data block at the same time This function returns 1 in case of success or a number not equal to 1 otherwise oapc ispace request_data nodeName Using this function the state of one single data block can be requested The values of the data block are returned within the callback function The only parameter of this function is the string nodeName which expects the name of the data block in format datablock io The same name is handed over to the callback function when the data are returned This function returns 1 in case of success or a number not equal to 1 otherwise When a data block does not exist this function will also return 1 success The information about the unknown data block is given within the callback function there the value of parameter cmd will be equal to 256 when the response for this data block is given oapc ispace request all _data 145 Thi
560. tal input 1 at the board Digital OUT1 the value of the digital input 2 at the board Digital OUT2 the value of the digital input 3 at the board Digital OUTS the value of the digital input 4 at the board Numeric OUT4 the value of the ADC input 1 Numeric OUTS the value of the ADC input 2 Numeric OUT6 the value of the ADC input 3 Numeric OUT7 the value of the ADC input 4 This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_avr_serio Capture Image Captures an image from a video device attached to the operating system Within the plug ins configuration panel the device number to capture the data from can be configured Beside of that it is possible to specify following values that influence the resulting image Scale to image width the image is scaled to the given width in unit pixels Scale to image heigth the image is scaled to the given height in unit pixels Don t scale when this checkbox is set the two previous values are ignored and the resulting image uses the largest resolution the capture device supports Brightness Contrast Gamma changes the brightness gamma an contrast of the captured image R G B changed the red green and blue image components these values are applied also in case the image is converted to greyscale here the colour correction is applied before the conversion to grey takes place Convert to greyscale the captured image is converted to an image with 256 shades o
561. ted this delay applies at the end of a jump to let the scanner finish its movement Mark Delay time the scanner waits when a marking operation was executed this delay applies at the end of a marked line to let the scanner finish its movement In Polygon Delay the time the scanner has to wait for every corner within a polygon when the laser is turned on and stays turned on Calculate Delays the delay values described above are essential to get high quality marking results also in case of an as high as possible marking speed Since the evaluation of the correct values is a difficult and time consuming process BeamConstruct offers a possibility to set some default values which can be used as starting point for optimising these delays Every scan head vendor provides a value named Time lag or something similar within its technical documentation This value describes the specific inertia of this scan head After pressing this button this time lag value has to be entered within the related dialogue When it is left by pressing OK BeamConstruct calculates some basic delay parameters that fit to the scan heads mechanical properties and that can be used for further optimisations For more details about the purpose of all these delays and their influence please refer to your scan heads or scanner controller manufacturers manual Set Defaults for Bitmap Marking when marking scanner bitmaps instead of vector data some very specific
562. ted within their real order and without grouping them into bytes For every of the 8 inputs following parameters have to be set Operation Mode the method of data exchange with the slave this mode influences the range of in and output values and decides if data can be read and written or read only Slave Address the logic address of the slave to communicate with Base Address Offset the 0 based address offset within the slaves address space Numeric INO IN7 the values to be written to the slave Numeric OUTO OUT7 the values that have been read from the slave here new data are emitted whenever the related value changes within the slave This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_modbus_rtu Modbus TCP Master 70 This plug in establishes a connection to a Modbus slave via a TCP IP network connection and exchanges data with that slave For every of the data in and outputs a different operation mode can be defined within the configuration panel The valid range of the input depends on that operation mode and its capabilities conform to the Modbus specification As global configuration this plug in expects the IP and port number the slave is listening at Beside of that a Slave Poll Delay has to be set it specifies how often the connected slave has to be polled for new or changed data Two other options give the possibility to swap the bytes of the used address offset which might be necessary for some Modbus slave
563. teps specifies how often processing of the geometry has to be repeated on the ring Process order this order applies to the planar movement modes and defines in which order the grouped geometry have to be repeated Left to right horizontal direction always starts from left Right to left horizontal direction always starts from right Zig zag from left horizontal direction starts from left and performs zig zag movements Zig zag from right horizontal direction starts from right and performs zig zag movements Top to bottom vertical movement starts from top Bottom to top vertical movement starts from bottom In case two dimensional motion is defined both process order selections are combined with each other to describe the 2D motion Motion speed the movement speed in unit mm sec or degrees sec that is applied to the motion Axis mapping at the lower end of the property panel a matrix of radio buttons exists where the axes can be mapped to the related movements there it can be specified which of the axes A B or C of the two possible outputs OUT2 and OUT3 have to provide the related planar movements in horizontal or vertical direction or the angular movement Later when such a project has to be used within a ControlRoom project is has to be made sure the outputs OUT2 and OUT3 of the CNConstruct to Control plug in are connected with the correct motion plug in Within these motion plug ins the related axes have to
564. ter data independent from their value Numeric OUT1 the number of counted values that have not been empty Numeric OUT2 the number of counted values that have been empty Numeric OUT3 the number of counted values Binary Data Counter This flow element can be used to count binary data Digital INO RES reset the state of all counters back to 0 Binary IN1 count all binary data independent from their type subtype contents or compression state Numeric OUT1 the number of counted data blocks 5 3 3 7 2 6 External Mathematical Flow Objects Averaging Using this plug in a defined amount of samples can be collected As soon as this number of samples was received by the plug in it calculates the average value out of them and emits this value So using this plug in averaging can be done over a set of input samples This is useful e g in cases where a noise with a higher frequency than the payload data has to be removed Within the configuration panel it is possible to define a default value for averaging The number of samples to be collected specified there is used as long as no other value is given at the related input Numeric INO DATA input for the samples that have to be collected Numeric IN1 the number of samples that have to be collected at INO until the average is calculated and set at OUTO Numeric IN2 DATA input for the samples that have to be collected Numeric IN3 the number of sample
565. that are required to display an application to the end user 5 7 Using the Interlock Server This part of the software package is some kind of server that runs in background completely It doesn t offers a graphical user interface and can be accessed only indirectly The I within the applications name OpenIServer points to one possible use cases of this server it is an abbreviation for interlock But more than that the OpenlServer can be used not only to implement software interlocks it is also an interface to access a complete project from outside to dock it to other applications to implement own software that takes control over the project that watches the states of some elements modifies the state of other elements and takes over complete control to realise automatic sequences The OpenlServer can be accessed via following ways from within the main application OpenDebugger or OpenPlayer where elements are configured to send their output states to that server and or to let their inputs be influenced from data changes within the server 137 from within an own application that makes use of liboapc and the related functions to access the data please refer to the SDK and the contained manual for a full description of these functions via a LUA or Instruction List script The task that is done by the OpenlServer is quite simple and can be summarised easily 1 Values are stored using a unique identifier a node nam
566. that are used to rearrange the contours of the sliced 3D mesh during marking Using these tiles it can be avoided to heat up the material at a specific position too much it lets the position where contour is marked make additional interruptions and jumps to other place in order to continue marking at a distant position means a distant tile When this option is set the following two parameters can be used to specify behaviour of this feature For a more detailed description and usage examples please refer below Tile Size the size of a tile in working area this value should be such a fraction of the working area size that lets all tiles fit fully into whole working area Tile Skip Size skip distance between tiles this value decides how many tiles in horizontal direction should be skipped before marking continues in next tile remaining tiles are processed on next cycle this value should be much smaller than the total number of tiles that fit into the working area When this configuration dialogue is left by pressing the OK button the 3D model is loaded and sliced according to the specified parameters Dependent on the size of the model the number of slices that result out of this size the slice distance and the complexity of the models geometry this operation may take a while When the slicing operation is finished a Sliced 3D Mesh group element is added to the current project that contains the 3D model and the slices
567. the User Management Functions The ControlRoom software offers an integrated user management that gives the possibility to change the layout of an HMI depending on the user that is currently operating it When this user management is enabled within a project a user has to log into the system first to get its personal view to the HMI Depending on the privileges this user has which may reflect e g the experience of this user he will be able to access functionalities of the project or not This user management requires several conditions that require each other and intertwine with each other User privileges have to be defined e g the privilege to start a process the privilege to change parameters the privilege to shut down the system Users have to be defined and privileges as created in previous step need to be granted to them HMI elements have to be configured if they are enabled and usable disabled and visible or invisible for the different privileges Now when a user logs in all these data are taken and it is checked for every HMI element how it has to appear for this specific user Here the user management within the ControlRoom software behaves different than within other visualisation solutions The user privileges have a priority here which is similar to their 157 order within the user privilege panel and a HMI element can support different visibility states for different privileges Now when a user has
568. the appearance of the current element changes now all editable points are surrounded by a rectangle These points now can be dragged to other positions This can be done for every point separately To drag a group of points together please refer the description of the Geometry Tab Panes table Coordinates below 6 5 2 The Property Tab Panes The main window of CNConstruct contains some special tab panes on its left hand side These panes give access to different parameters and values they can be used to influence geometries parameters very exact 6 5 2 1 The Tab Pane Of The Currently Selected Element The very left tab pane is a dynamic one it changes its contents depending on the element that is currently selected As long as no element is selected this pane is empty no parameters can be changed here The element specific values that are available as soon as something is selected within the drawing area or within the element tree on the windows right hand side are described in detail below together with the different elements In case more than one element or in case a group element is selected this tab pane is empty too 6 5 2 2 The Geometry Tab Pane This pane can be used only when an element is selected that contains some geometry Thus it does not offer any functionality as long as no element or as long as a Post Processing Tool is selected Within this panel all geometry related values are displayed and can be changed Mirr
569. the axes A B or C of the two possible outputs OUT2 and OUTS have to provide the related planar movements in horizontal or vertical direction or the angular movement Later when such a project has to be used within a ControlRoom project is has to be made sure the outputs OUT2 and OUT3 of the BeamConstruct to Control plug in are connected with the correct motion plug in Within these motion plug ins the related axes have to be configured correctly planar or rotational mode and they have to access the correct axes that belong to the defined motion modes After such a splitting group has been created and after the correct parameters have been set the appearance of the related geometry changes now it is overlapped by horizontal and or vertical lines These lines specify the cutting positions and can be modified manually They can be dragged with the mouse in horizontal or vertical direction exclusively to change the position where the geometry has to be cut The related modifications are done as soon as such a cutting line is released Please note the positions of the cutting lines do not influence the parameters given within the property panel but as soon as the parameters within the property panel are modified the position of the cutting lines are reset to their default Thus their positions should be changed only in case all other parameters do fit perfectly 7 8 2 2 Active Move Group This is a special kind of group that concatenates sev
570. the hour 24 hour clock as a decimal number 0 23 single digits are preceded by a blank l is replaced by the hour 12 hour clock as a decimal number 1 12 single digits are preceded by a blank M is replaced by the minute as a decimal number 00 59 m is replaced by the month as a decimal number 01 12 p is replaced by national representation of either ante meridiem AM or post meridiem PM as appropriate R is equivalent to H M r is equivalent to l M S p S is replaced by the second as a decimal number 00 60 s is replaced by the number of seconds since January 1st 1970 00 00 o clock UTC T is equivalent to H M S U is replaced by the week number of the year Sunday as the first day of the week as a decimal number 00 53 u is replaced by the weekday Monday as the first day of the week as a decimal number 1 7 V is replaced by the week number of the year Monday as the first day of the week as a decimal number 01 53 If the week containing January 1st has four or more days in the new year then it is week 1 otherwise it is the last week of the previous year and the next week is week 1 221 v is equivalent to e b Y W is replaced by the week number of the year Monday as the first day of the week as a decimal number 00 53 w is replaced by the weekday Sunday as the first day of
571. the possibility to set the modes faster too whenever a visibility state is set for one of the given privileges all privileges with lower priority means all privileges below of the selected one are set to the same state This check box only modifies the behaviour during editing but does not have any influence on the logging functionality itself 5 3 2 2 HMI Control Types The different HMI object types are assigned to different categories Control contains active elements that accept user input and emit data resulting from this user interaction Display objects only can display data that are submitted to them from a different source The Static elements can be used to add non interactive 21 objects to a user interface Although they can not be used to emit or display data directly they can be controlled to change its appearance during runtime The Container elements can be used to place HMI controls in own staggered containers 5 3 2 2 1 Controls Following HMI elements of type Control are supported by the application directly Simple Button a simple button that can be clicked by the user Image Button a button that can be pressed by the user and that displays pictures instead of the standard button design here a predefined internal image can be chosen or own images can be configured for normal disabled and selected state In last case the full path to these images has to be specified It is also
572. the week as a decimal number 0 6 X is replaced by national representation of the time x is replaced by national representation of the date Y is replaced by the year with century as a decimal number y is replaced by the year without century as a decimal number 00 99 Z is replaced by the time zone name z is replaced by the time zone offset from UTC a leading plus sign stands for east of UTC a minus sign for west of UTC hours and minutes follow with two digits each and no delimiter between them is replaced by national representation of the date and time Locale some of the date time place holders are replaced by information that depend on a language and or on local specialities using this parameter the locale can be chosen that has to be used for these time information 7 8 Edit Geometry Geometries are mainly generated by Primary Geometry elements Whenever the parameters of such an element are changed the geometry is re created and all assigned Additional and Post Processing Elements are executed again to apply their modifications to this new geometry Thus modifications that are done for single vectors get lost as soon as such modifications are done Nevertheless it is possible to perform such modifications in case one of the two conditions are met the parameters of the elements that create a geometry are not touched ageometry is converted to a static one where no Pri
573. thin the Flow Editor together with all their flow connections After this operation the internal buffer is empty the currently placed elements can t be placed again at an other position When the Cut function is called twice without inserting the cut elements the first HMI objects that have been cut are deleted by the second cut operation When a single user interface element is selected that selection is symbolized by a blue border around that element This is a multi functional border Within the edges grey rectangles are shown that can be used to scale the size of the element Here the lower right corner can be used to scale the size and to keep the aspect ratio the other corners can be used for free scaling The areas between these rectangles can be used to drag an element and to change its position For both editing methods the same principle has to be used hold down the left mouse button either within a rectangle or between them and drag it the size or position will be changed according to the mouse movement When more than one element is selected they are marked by a similar border Comparing to the preceding one this one does not contain the rectangles for scaling here all the elements can only be re positioned 5 3 2 1 HMI Control Properties When a user interface element is double clicked with the left mouse button a properties dialogue is opened where that element can be configured in detail For some of the provided use
574. thin the HMI no general set up is specified the available parameters completely depend on their specific functionality So within the following sections a full description of the existing application internal flow objects and external flow plug ins is given together with the purpose of their in and outputs 5 3 3 7 2 1 Data Conversion Flow Objects Digital to Number This element can be used to convert digital input values and combinations of digital inputs to numbers Within the configuration of the object the user can decide which inputs are mapped to which outputs and which conversion method has to be used So the user can decide if the binary value on a set of selected inputs has to be converted to its decimal number or if specific values have to be output dependent on the 39 state of an input Digital INO CLK depending on the configuration of this element the digital input O can be used either as data input for binary conversion to a decimal number or as clock In last case these outputs that are configured to use the clock signal converted data are sent only when a digital 1 is received on this input Digital IN1 digital IN7 data inputs to be converted to numbers according to the configuration of this flow object Numeric OUT1 numeric OUT7 outputs that send the numbers according to the configuration of the flow element Digital to Characters This element can be used to convert digital input values and comb
575. this one also does not influence the generated data Expand Move entity tree to tab pane this option saves some space in X direction the entity tree that is shown on main windows right hand side normally will be moved to the left side and becomes a normal tabbed pane there changes to this parameter require saving of the current configration as default one and a restart of the software in order to take effect Menu item shortcuts the area below of these parameters contains an editor that gives the possibility to edit the shortcuts of BeamConstructs menu items On lower left hand side the menu item to be edited can be selected in a tree view Next right beside that tree the new shortcut has to be typed in field New Shortcut and then can be added using button Add The new shortcut is shown in the list right beside the menu tree view and can be removed from there using button Remove After the settings dialogue is left with OK these new menu shortcuts are applied to the menus These settings are locally only and do not become part of a project In tab pane Custom Dot that is responsible for defining a style for a customised dot layout that is used by several geometric elements Custom Dot Style selects the type of geometry here polygon includes a circle or spiral can be chosen to be used as replacement for simple dots Edges Segments specifies the number of the edges or segments the custom geometry has
576. tic HMI Element ccccccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeaaees 38 5 3 3 7 1 6 External Flow Objects of Static HMI Element csccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 38 5 3 3 7 1 7 Flow Objects of Container type HMI Elements cccececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 38 5 3 3 7 1 8 Flow Objects of Miscellaneous type HMI Elements eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 39 5 3 3 7 2 Stand Alone Flow ObjectS ooocononocccnnnonoccccccconnnnncncnonnnoncccncnnnnnnccnnnnnnrn nn cnn nono nn nn nnnnnn nos 39 5 3 3 7 2 1 Data Conversion Flow ObjectS ooooconococcccninccoccccncnnnoaancnccnnanoncnnnonnnnnnnanoncnananannn 39 5 3 3 7 2 2 External Data Conversion Flow ObjectS ooooocconooccccnnconoccccnccnnnannnoncnoncnnnnnnnnnininnn 44 5 3 3 7 2 3 Logic Operation Flow ObjectS coocoonncccccnnnnncccccccconnconcconcnnnnan cnn r E cnn nr nana nn cana 49 5 3 3 7 2 4 Logic Operation Flow ODES ieoi a a a a cnn nnrnnnnnncnnnnnn 53 5 3 3 7 2 5 Mathematical Flow ObjectS oooocccccnnnccccccnnnnccoocccnnonconnnonncnnnnnn cnn conan a e 54 5 3 3 7 2 6 External Mathematical Flow ObjectS ooooooccccnnnnocccccnnnnccocccnconanoncccncnanarn cnn nnnannnncnn 57 5 3 3 71 2 7 Flow Control Flow Objects serren at r e EEA N nneeeas 59 5 3 3 7 2 8 External Flow Control Flow ObjectS ooooconncocccnnnnnccccccnccccccocccncnnnnarc conc nannn cnn nano 62 5 3 3 7 2 9 10 Operation Flow Objects arisi tortitas 63 5 3 3 7 2 10 External lO Ope
577. tion Numeric OUT2 In result of e logarithmus naturalis calculation Numeric OUTS Ig result of logarithm calculation This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_math1 Override Control Parameters This plug in offers an easy way to override modify some of the binary control data values globally It is able to influence power frequency speeds and delays They can be changed by a factor that can be set as a default value within the plug in settings and as dynamic values that can be specified dynamically via the related inputs Binary INO CTRL the binary control data that have to be changed by this plug in Numeric IN1 PWR factor in unit percent to change the power value with Numeric IN2 FREQ factor in unit percent to change the frequency value with Numeric IN3 SPD factor in unit percent to change all speed values with Numeric IN4 DEL factor in unit percent to change all delay values with Binary OUTO CTRL the modified binary control data PID Controller A PID Controller can be used to set up a complete control loop it is able to influence its parameters and to keep the controlled parameter Within the configuration panel all necessary values and parameters can be set up independent from that they also can be changed dynamically using the related inputs Following parameters can be defined Default Reference Value the reference value this controller has to reach as exact as possi
578. tion internal flow elements of this type all data related functionalities are provided by external plug ins 5 3 3 7 2 18 External Data Flow Objects Clock The Clock plug in provides several time related information So there are outputs that send pulses in definable time periods outputs that send numerical information and one output that gives a formatted time string Numeric IN2 the Clock plug in always uses the current time of the hosting system To work with other times this input can be used to define an offset to the current time This offset has to be given in seconds and can be positive or negative Digital OUTO this output sends HIGH signals Within the configuration the delay between two pulses can 121 be defined it is possible to have one every second every minute every hour or every day Digital OUT1 this output works similar but independent from OUTO Numeric OUT2 here a numerical information is given about the configured part of the time information within the configuration it can be specified if the current second minute hour day month year or Unix time stamp has to be emitted as numerical value Numeric OUT3 OUT7 these outputs works similar to OUT2 but are independent from it and can be configured for a different time portion to be given Char OUT7 using this output a formatted time string can be created The time string itself can consist of normal characters and some additional format inf
579. tion is done from left to right starting with the lowest input number The configured constant is used for subtraction as last value Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears Numeric IN1 numeric IN7 data inputs for the subtraction Numeric OUT1 numeric OUT7 data outputs that send the values resulting from this operation Numerical Multiplication Using this flow control the values of several inputs and or a constant value can be multiplied with each other Within the configuration dialogue the inputs that belong to one output and where the values have to be multiplied can be configured The input values are treated as floating point numbers Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used for conversion for these input output mappings that are configured to act only when this external trigger appears Numeric IN1 numeric IN7 data inputs for the multiplication Numeric OUT1 numeric OUT7 data outputs that send the values resulting from this operation Numerical Division Using this flow control the values of several inputs and or a constant value can be divided by each other Within the configuration dialogue the inputs that belong to one output and where the values have to be divided from can be configured The input values are treated as floating point numbers Division is done from
580. tion outside this field they will not be marked Swap X and Y swaps the input X and Y coordinate to exchange X and Y axis values of the scanner Mirror X Mirror Y mirror the input coordinates On the fly factor X On the fly factor Y specifies the factor in X or Y direction for marking on the fly operation this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card Default Here several default parameters can be defined that are used in case the direct axis control inputs X Y and Z are used or in case control data are used that do not contain motion speed delay information 97 Jump Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned off Mark Speed the speed the scanners position has to be changed with when the laser is turned on Laser Off Delay Laser On Delay Jump Delay Mark Delay Polygon Delay these delays are used during marking operation they become active when the laser is turned off or on when the scanner jumps to an other position when it moves to an other position while marking or when the movement direction is changed during marking for a detailed description of these values their usage and their influence to the marking result please refer to the RTC4 manual All following tab panes contain laser specific definitions that are used depending on the selected laser type For information about these parameters and their usage ple
581. tion they have to be entered within the plug ins settings manually The contained geometry itself is static all dynamic elements are set to their default values and the data can t be modified during runtime any more 6 9 Customise CNConstruct CNConstruct can be modified in a way so that it can be delivered together with machinery or additional equipment using an own brand Here following attributes can be changed the applications name the homepage shown in About dialogue the splash image shown during application start up and in About dialogue the application icon shown in taskbar and main window not supported on all operating systems the copyright as shown in About dialogue this copyright does not replace the current one but is added to it the toolbar and entity tree images To customise the application in this way a plain text file with the name cnc oem has to be created in UTF 8 format and placed in installation directory of the application for Windows operating systems typically C Program Files OpenAPC or in usr local openapc for Linux systems Within this file every line contains one customisation definition 1 the name of the application 185 the homepage URL to be shown in About dialogue path to the splash image in PNG format path to the icon image in PNG format Or 2 ANS copyright text to be shown in About dialogue The images that are shown within toolb
582. tion with the complete external hardware Here the capability of BeamConstruct to mark directly out of the application can be used 187 7 4 Quick Start into BeamConstruct This section describes how to use BeamConstruct in direct operation mode where laser marking is done out of the application and without the use of a separate ControlRoom project It gives a short overview about basic setup and usage of BeamConstruct and describes with some short steps how to get first results easily So this section is a shortcut to get results with this software very fast but it ignores most of the useful features These features are described in detail in following sections of the users manual so it is recommended to use this quick start only to understand the very basic working principles of the software while going deeper into it afterwards 1 SECURITY CHECK The following steps describe how to set up BeamConstruct and how to control laser equipment out of it Thus all laser safety rules and regulations need to be respected all required technical security mechanisms need to be available and active prior to starting with this software 2 Main configuration First the scanner controller card that has to be used needs to be selected and configured To do that select Menu Project menu item Project settings and go to panel Hardware of the opening settings dialogue Within the selection list named with Scanner Card choose the scanner c
583. tly only card 1 can be used to select a project via digital inputs e lOSelect mode is started only after mark dialogue was opened during switch to an other project mark dialogue is closed and re opens automatically afterwards 7 15 Customise BeamConstruct BeamConstruct can be modified in a way so that it can be delivered together with machinery or additional equipment using an own brand Here following attributes can be changed the applications name this value replaces the name BeamConstruct completely the homepage which is shown in About dialogue the splash image shown during application start up and in About dialogue the application icon shown in taskbar and main window not supported on all operating systems 238 the copyright as shown in About dialogue this custom copyright does not replace the default one but is added to it the images shown in toolbar and entity tree To customise the application in this way a plain text file with the name beam oem has to be created in UTF 8 format To become active it has to be placed in installation directory of the application for Windows operating systems typically C Program Files OpenAPC or in usr local openapc for Linux systems Within this file every single line contains one customisation definition 1 the name of the application 2 the homepage URL to be shown in About dialogue 3 path to the splash image in PNG format 4 path to the
584. to consist of Outer Radius sets the size of the custom geometry Inner Radius this parameter is used only in case of a spiral it specifies the inner size of it Slope here the same is true this parameter applies to a spiral only and can be used to set the steepness the spiral grows with Draw CCW here the drawing direction of the custom geometry can be inverted Inside To Outside when this option is set for a spiral it is drawn starting from its inner point In tab pane Scanner it is possible to configure the scanner controller and attached laser In case these components are set up properly according to the used hardware environment and in the same way like they would be used within a real world ControlRoom project it is possible to start marking and motion operations directly from within BeamConstruct Scanner Controller Selection this combo box has to be used in multihead mode where BeamConstruct controls more than one scanner card at the same time The selection with this 191 combo box influences the settings of all following parameters Please note in multihead and singlehead mode the first scanner controller always has to be set it is not possible to start e g with settings for the second scanner controller and leave the first one empty Scanner Controller here a scanner card can be chosen out of a list of available scanner controller types this list makes use of the related plug ins that be
585. to the desired input On the lower side of a flow element the outgoing flow connections can be started to be drawn These outputs are small arrows that point out of the flow objects symbol They use the colour that represents the data type this output is able to handle Beside of that some very specific flow elements can have an additional output at the right hand side of the flow symbol This is an overflow output Its behaviour depends on the kind of flow element but in most cases data are sent out there that could not be handled within this element or are outside of the valid range this element is able to handle 5 3 3 2 Adding HMI Objects To add the flow object of a HMI element that was set within the HMI Editor before you have to right click within the working area of the Flow Editor Then select the option Put Control within the pop up menu It opens a dialogue that lists all HMI controls that are available to be set within the Flow Editor When such a control is marked by a it means that this HMI object already was placed within the Flow Editor If you choose such an HMI control by double clicking it the flow element is replaced to the new position where you opened the pop up menu If you select a HMI object that doesn t exists within the Flow Editor at the moment it is put into the editing area newly 5 3 3 3 Adding Flow Objects Adding of flow objects that do not have a HMI part can be done very similar First choose the pos
586. ton is similar to the Toggle Button Check box this element offers the possibility to be checked using a tick symbol and to be unchecked The logical function of this element including its both states and the possibility to put it into a mutual exclusion group is similar to the Toggle Button so for a detailed description please refer above Horizontal Slider Vertical Slider sliders emit numerical values within a defined range and depending on the value that is set by dragging their knob to a specific position in horizontal or vertical direction Angular Regulator this element displays a graphical representation of an round knob that can be rotated between defined angles and emits a numerical value dependent on that position beside the standard parameters here the graphical start and end position the number of displayed ticks and the colours of the parts can be configured Number Field this HMI element can be used to enter whole numbers manually Floating Number Field comparing to the preceding element here also floating point numbers can be entered Text Field this is a field where the user can type all kinds of characters into Password Field an input field similar to the Text Field except the fact that the typed characters are replaced by dots so that it can be used for passwords Some of these elements can be also used for displaying data without the possibility to enter new ones h
587. tput has to be connected with the source of the control data it signalises if the scanner controller card is still working or if it has finished so that other operations can be triggered Following in and outputs are available for the SP ICE2 plug in Numeric INO X the X position the scanner has to be moved to setting a new value to this input does not cause any movement it will be invoked only after the Y or Z input was set Numeric IN1 Y the Y position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use two axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y Numeric IN2 Z the Z position the scanner has to be moved to only in case the plug in was configured to use three axes setting this input starts the movement to the coordinates at x y z Digital IN3 L turns the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR the power the laser has to be driven with here a value in range 0 100 is expected that corresponds to the as a percentage laser power value Numeric IN5 FREQ the frequency in unit Hz the laser has to be driven with during marking Numeric IN6 CMD this input can be used to set additional commands and to perform additional control operations using them here following command values are supported 0 stop marking immediately and flush the list of control commands that may be already stored within the plug in Please note the auto calibration commands depend
588. tput power can be controlled via an additional output the kind of output to be used can be defined here Number of Axes specifies if the scanner controller has to operate in 2D or 3D mode this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card Correction file the gcd correction file to be used for operation provided by the vendor of the scan head Stand By Frequency frequency the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Stand By Length pulse length the laser has to be driven with in standby mode Field Left Position Field Upper Position defines the upper left coordinate of the field that has to be used by the scanner Field Size the total size of the field that is used by the scanner this parameter together with the left and upper position specifies the coordinates input vectors have to be located within in case there are input data which define a position outside this field they will not be marked Swap X and Y swaps the input X and Y coordinate to exchange X and Y axis values of the scanner Mirror X Mirror Y mirror the input coordinates On the fly factor X On the fly factor Y specifies the factor in X or Y direction for marking on the fly operation this option depends on the capabilities of the used scanner controller card Default Here several default parameters can be defined that are used in case the direct axis control inputs X Y
589. tput state is send to that server and the external application that has been connected to it gets the information about the pressed button This external application and is now able to decide is the interlock condition true so that the motor can be started or not Only in case the motor is allowed to be used the application sends back a value 140 to the interlock server Now when the external application sets new data for an element that is linked to a flow element within the main application that itself sets the digital output which turns on the motor As soon as the external application modifies this data node within the interlock server the changes are sent to the OpenPlayer which itself sets the related flow element So comparing to a normal operation the way is just a bit longer instead of having a direct flow connection from the button to the flow element that sets the output the signal from the button is sent to the interlock server is checked by the external application and the result is conditionally sent back by this application to the server which triggers the output Now this external application is linked into the logic flow of data completely and can be part of decisions and conditions that are necessary for a project 5 7 3 Automatic Sequences For some applications it might be necessary to implement automatic operations with complex sequences where different external outputs are set in a defined order to control extern
590. trings out of it based on an format string string This format string describes the structure of the input data At positions where a number or a string is expected that has to be extracted and submitted via the outputs of the plug in a place holder has to be set Allowed place holders are f1 f2 f3 and f4 for numeric values that have to be emitted at outputs 1 4 and s5 s6 and s7 for character values that have to be emitted at outputs 5 7 As an example a format string speed f3 would be able to parse an input data string speed 135 to extract the number 135 out of it and to emit it at output 3 of the plug in Please note beside the place holders described above only the escape token for a single sign within the input string is allowed to be used All other combinations of followed by characters or numbers are strictly forbidden Any use of them could case an undefined behaviour of the application This plug in offers following lO s Digital INO CLK the clock signal that is used to start the conversion for the current input values used only in case this option is enabled within the elements properties dialogue Char IN1 DATA input data here the string is expected that is formatted in a way like it is described by the format string given within the plug ins configuration panel Numeric OUT1 output for values extracted out of the input strin
591. troller was connected with e Ethernet Password this parameter has to be given only in case Ethernet connection is used here a password can be specified in order to identify connection to a controller The same password has to be set within the related E1701M motion controller When password specified here and password configured at connected controller do not fit connection is closed and plug in is not able to use this controller e Swap X and Y this option is valid only in case the plug in is fed with coordinates and not with separate position values for each axis when it is set X and Y coordinate are exchanged When plug in is used out of BeamConstruct this option is inoperable e Firmware Debug Log in case of problems operating the controller or in case the error LED is turned on this parameter can be used to get some logging information from controller and to write it into a file To use it a path to a file has to specified here where the controller firmware log has to be written into When this text field is left empty no debug log is written PLEASE NOTE the firmware log file is created new on every start up so all preceding log data are overwritten To get a useful log please perform the following steps 1 power on E1701M motion controller if already powered toggle power or reset controller 2 start application that makes use of E1701M controller with a configuration where firmware debug log is already set 3 perform oper
592. try within a Primary Element is selected and manipulated this has no feedback to its parent Primary Element in this case the Additional Geometry might be changed without any relation to the parents geometry and therefore in a way that is not desired The part of the current project that is visible within the drawing area can be changed too when no element is selected the whole area can be moved by holding down the left mouse button and dragging it into the direction where the complete view has to be moved to Beside of that there are zoom buttons available within the tool bar Zoom In zooms into the drawing area so that more details become visible Zoom Out show a bigger area but less geometry details Zoom To Working Area changes zoom and position of the current view so that the full working area is visible in the maximum size that is available in the drawing area Zoom To Selected changes zoom and position of the current view so that the currently selected element is visible in the maximum size that is available in the drawing area When one single element is selected that contains some geometry a special point editing mode can be enabled to modify the single points this element consists of This mode can be enabled by turning on the tool bar button right beside the zoom buttons Once this button is enabled the appearance of the current element changes now all editable points are surrounded by a rectangle These points now
593. ts 3 7 Default values for tool on delay and off delay have to be set they are used as as long as the related delays are not available within the incoming binary control structure Binary INO CTRL motion synchronous control data that have to be converted Digital OUTO ON state of the tool itself HIGH signals it is turned on Low it has to be turned off when this signal changes its timing is corrected using the current on delay and off delay values in case they are greater than 0 and therefore not handled within the preceding motion element Numeric OUT1 PWR the power in range 0 100 the tool has to be used with Numeric OUT2 FREQ the frequency in unit Hz the tool has to be used with Numeric OUT3 PRM here a new value is emitted whenever the custom parameter changes that was configured for this output within the settings panel of the plug in Numeric OUT4 PRM here a new value is emitted whenever the custom parameter changes that was configured for this output within the settings panel of the plug in Numeric OUTS PRM here a new value is emitted whenever the custom parameter changes that was configured for this output within the settings panel of the plug in Numeric OUT6 PRM here a new value is emitted whenever the custom parameter changes that was configured for this output within the settings panel of the plug in Numeric OUT7 PRM here a new value is emitted whenever the custom parameter c
594. ttom Right the lower right coordinates of the selected element whenever they are changed the element is repositioned without changing its size resulting from that the previously described values for the top left corner are changed too Size the total width height and depth of the element when it is changed the geometry is scaled in X Y or Z direction the related values for scaling the top left and the bottom right corner are changed too Rotation the angle in unit degrees the element is rotated with here the rotation can be changed which may result in changes of other parameters depending on the shape of the used geometry Coordinates this list contains the coordinates of all points of the currently selected geometry here they can be changed to re position a single point of it selecting a point within this list also affects the highlighted element within the drawing area there the selected point is surrounded by a separate blue box which can be used to drag this point thus the geometry can be edited using the mouse Within this table of coordinates a single point or groups of points can be selected This can be done by left clicking into the row of the point that has to be selected Additional points can be chosen by selecting additional rows of points while the shift or control key is held down In case more elements are selected they can be modified within the drawing area by dragging them to other positions here all highli
595. type Primary Geometry Additional Geometry and Post processing Tools can exist several times as child of a Primary Geometry element but they influence only the state of the geometry like it exists before their own position an Input Element can exist exactly once for a Primary Geometry element and only for such elements that really are able to handle input data The second rule can be made explained better with an example as Primary Geometry a rectangle is drawn It is modified with a Sine Distortion Post processing Tool which modifies the borders of the rectangle to have a sine waveform Next an additional element Hatch is used with adds lines to the geometry that fill the rectangle In this case the sine distortion is applied to the rectangles shape only because it is located before the sine element but not to the hatching lines because they are added after the sine distortion takes place So the hatching lines stay straight The situation becomes different when the two sub elements change their position When the first child element below of the primary element is the hatcher the resulting hatch lines will be distorted too They are no longer straight lines but have the same sine shape like the rectangles border because the sine distortion applies to the hatcher now that s caused by the fact that the sine distortion Post processing Tool stays after the hatcher 6 5 1 The Drawing Area Within CNConstruct s main wind
596. uld be performed Within the configuration of this plug in only one option is available that gives the possibility to exchange the coordinates of X and Y data This would affect only coordinate related control data movement related control data which define the axis names A B and C are not influenced Following in and outputs are supported Binary IN7 CTRL input control data here coordinate related control data including tool handling information as well as plain motion related control data are accepted Numeric OUTO POS 1 time synchronous position information of axis 1 X or A depending on the type of input control data according to the control data set at IN7 Numeric OUT1 MODE 1 current state of axis 1 a value of O means the axis has stopped values greater than 0 specify the current motion speed in unit mm sec Numeric OUT2 POS 2 time synchronous position information of axis 2 Y or B depending on the type of input control data according to the control data set at IN7 Numeric OUT3 MODE 2 current state of axis 2 a value of O means the axis has stopped values greater than 0 specify the current motion speed in unit mm sec 46 Numeric OUT4 POS 3 time synchronous position information of axis 3 Z or C depending on the type of input control data according to the control data set at IN7 Numeric OUTS MODE 3 current state of axis 3 a value of O means the axis has stopped values greater than
597. um allowed value because for every tick the appropriate value is printed This plug in is located in hmiplugins libio_hmi_linearregulator 32 Pinpad The Pinpad plug in offers a possibility for numerical data input with a set of number buttons 0 9 a Clear and an OK button like it is known from payment card terminals It can be used to get whole numbered values from the user Digital INO set the selection mode for the list box and apply the parameters according to the configuration done for the two possible input states LOW and HIGH Numeric IN7 sets the given value into the display and overwrites a formerly entered value Numeric OUT6 emits the entered value as soon as the OK button was pressed by the user Numeric OUT7 emits the entered value as soon as the OK button was pressed by the user This plug in is located in hmiplugins libio_hmi_pinpad Position Correction This is a complex plug in that lets the user perform position corrections via touch It provides buttons for change of position as well as two rotation buttons The translation and rotation step size can be changed too all operations can be done completely without any keyboard The position correction values are emitted using a binary data structure Binary OUT7 POSCORR the position correction data are updated whenever the user presses one of the translation or rotation buttons Symbol Button Using this plug in some common symbols can be used within a v
598. up keeps two more 3D Meshes and creates slices that consist of all of their 3D data the 3D Meshes which can be positioned within the working area independent from each other Auto Arrange 3D Meshes this option is active only when a single Sliced 3D Mesh Group element is selected it gives the possibility to arrange several 3D Meshes that are managed by this Sliced 3D Mesh Group element for a detailed description of the auto arrange function please refer below 7 7 4 Primary Geometry Elements To create a new primary element following steps have to be performed 1 select the related button within the tool bar all primary elements use blue tool bar symbols 2 click into the working area to position the element depending on the geometry that is created by the related function it can be drawn now with some additional clicks into this area 3 now the new element is selected and its parameters are shown within the first element specific tab pane on the main windows left hand side When the parameters of such an element are changed within its tab pane all following elements of the same type use exactly these parameters as default values Following the available elements the steps to create them within the working area and their parameters are described 7 7 4 1 Dot This is the most simple element that is possible When it is selected for drawing within the tool bar the first click into the drawing area creates a single point at the l
599. urrent marking data according to the fiducials measured position Vision functions can be found in menu Edit submenu Vision and in mark dialogue To use the vision system it is mandatory to connect a camera and to configure a Video Controller in hardware settings This enabled the Vision menu entries and functionalities 7 10 1 Vision Functions Menu Vision Start Video When image capture is configured to be started manually this menu item can be used to start menu item checked and stop capturing menu item unchecked Menu Vision Freeze Video As soon as a Video Controller is configured a live image is shown in background of the working area This image changes permanently and can be freezed using this menu This is a toggle menu selecting it turns freeze mode on selecting it a second time turns this mode off and enables the live image again Menu Vision False Colours In some cases captured images have a very low contrast in desired parts of the image In such cases the shown image and the required details can be improved and made more visible by false colours The sub menu below of this menu item offers several false colour modes that can be used for this Menu Vision Calibrate Camera This functionality can be used to calibrate a camera and to adjust and correct distortions caused by the lens of the camera This function does NOT correct camera angle perspective distortions When selecting this menu item a c
600. us of the circle Segments here it can be chosen how much segments the circle has to consist of this parameter influences the accuracy of the resulting circle for the line style Dashed Arcs it influences the 209 smoothness of the resulting arcs while the Distance parameter influences their length Start Angle and End Angle these two parameters can be used to change the circles starting and end angle it can be used to draw arcs in case the resulting total angle is smaller than 360 degrees or to let a circle be drawn several times in case the resulting total angle is a multiple of 360 degrees Grow this parameter is valid in 3D mode only it defines how much the circle shall grow in the third direction per every rotation of it Here third direction does not necessarily mean Z direction this depends on the view the circle is drawn in So in case the right side view is enabled the circle extends in Y and Z direction resulting from that the third direction where the grow parameter applies to is the X direction Layered Sphere in 3D mode this option can be used to create a sphere that consists of circles of different diameters that form a sphere to use this option the Grow value has to be set which specifies the distance between the circles that form the sphere Draw CCW normally the circle has an clockwise orientation means it is drawn to right direction when this check box is set the draw
601. used for data exchange with other applications only This format can be used with the HPGL to Control plug in Because of the missing pen information they have to be entered within the plug ins settings manually Here no dynamic information are contained only static geometry can be marked when this format is used 7 13 Multihead Operations In many cases BeamConstruct will use one scanner card that uses exactly one rectangular working area In this configuration there will be one scan head performing movements for this working area In some special cases this so called singlehead operation mode can make use of a second working area and a second scan head where both heads perform the same movement This mode is often called secondary head it simply doubles the output but does not allow to mark different independent geometries with these two heads Full independence of all used heads is possible only with a real multinead mode In this mode BeamConstruct knows about more working areas that can overlap each other or that can exist beside each other But all these working areas are completely independent every area is assigned to an own scan head that performs separate movements This multihead mode can be used to e mark geometries that are larger than a single working area in this case it is recommended to let the working areas overlap to profit from vector data optimisations BeamConstruct performs automatically mark large complex g
602. ut When a command is sent into this flow element that is identical to this name the value is emitted at the related output Char INO CMD the input for the command here the command name that is assigned to the value is expected Binary IN1 the input for the value that is assigned to the command Binary OUTO Binary OUT the outputs for the values that could be identified by the configured command when the string that is set to Char INO could not be found within the configuration of the flow element nothing is output here CMD Value Pair to Characters This element performs the conversion back from Command Value pairs to plain values Within the configuration of the flow element a name can be assigned for every input When a command is sent into this 43 flow element that is identical to this name the value is emitted at the related output Char INO CMD the input for the command here the command name that is assigned to the value is expected Char IN1 the input for the value that is assigned to the command Char OUTO Char OUT the outputs for the values that could be identified by the configured command when the string that is set to Char INO could not be found within the configuration of the flow element nothing is output here Mixed to Characters This flow object performs a format string based conversion of numbers and characters Here the format string consists of a text that can be chosen freely and that contain
603. ution time in single stepping mode is much longer than in normal operation mode thus internal delays and timers will finish become active at a completely different state of the total flow environment As an example imagine a timer that emits pulses data every 500 milliseconds In normal execution mode these 500 milliseconds are enough to perform several complex operations and calculations so that for the internal processing such an event appears once for every several hundred to several thousand total flow cycles In single stepping mode this is quite different here the time between every manually triggered flow cycle may exceed the 500 milliseconds of your timer Resulting from that here the timer emits pulses data now for every flow cycle Resulting from that the complete project may behave different The next button within the tool bar can be used to configure the debugger and to define what conditions and warnings should cause a stop of the program flow This can be done within a separate configuration dialogue where these options can be selected or unchecked The last two check boxes within the tool bar are used to fully disable or enable the stop of the program flow in case of a stop condition and to display the names of the HMI elements within the HMI window that last option can be important to find a specific HMI element Below of this tool bar a panel can be found where the current running state and all warnings that occurred are li
604. vailable layers For more information please refer the section about the layer tab pane below Pen a pen is a definition about how the related geometry has to be processed on the target system here a pen can be assigned to the current geometry so that is is processed using these specific pen parameters please refer above for a description of the pen parameters Process Geometry this check box decides if the related geometry has to be processed or not when it is not checked the related element acts as some kind of help drawing only it is not used by the target system for processing the working piece 205 Count X Y Z and Distance X Y Z these four parameter fields belong to each other and can be used to create arrays of geometry without the need to duplicate them here it can be defined how often they have to be repeated in X Y and Z direction and which distance has to be set between them Number of vectors this is an informational element and can t be changed directly it displays the number of vector lines that are used to create the selected element Repeat marks using this parameter it can be specified how often marking of a single element has to be repeated during a single marking cycle Skip marks when this is set to a value greater than 0 the related element is no longer marked on every process cycle but skipped for the given number of times after this number has elapsed it is marked once and skipp
605. value B Digital OUT2 lt this output is set to HIGH when value A of the first comparator is smaller than value B Digital OUT3 gt this output is set to HIGH when value A of the second comparator is greater than value B Digital OUT4 this output is set to HIGH when value A of the second comparator is equal to value B Digital OUTS lt this output is set to HIGH when value A of the second comparator is smaller than value B Numerical Counter This flow element can be used to count numerical data events Digital INO RES reset the state of all counters back to 0 Numeric IN1 lt gt 0 count all numbers that are not 0 Numeric IN2 0 count all numbers that are equal to 0 Numeric IN3 count all numerical data independent from their value Numeric OUT1 the number of counted values that are not equal to 0 Numeric OUT2 the number of counted values that are equal to 0 Numeric OUT3 the number of counted values Compare Characters This is a comparison function that performs a case sensitive check if one of two text input values is smaller equal or greater than the second one A character value is greater than the other one when they are not identical and when the first ASCII character that does not match has a greater value Here one flow element contains two separate compare functions that act completely independent from each other Beside the name of the flow element no other parameters or v
606. ven distance or points that are located between two other ones and describe a smaller angle than the specified one are removed and merged with their predecessor The result is a geometry that may use less data and therefore can be processed faster but also may have changed in its visual representation 7 9 Process 3D Data There are two ways to process 3D data in BeamConstruct one possibility is to use their 3D information including the Z depth information to drive a 3D scanner and to mark them exactly as they appear Alternatively a solid 3D model can be imported and cut into horizontal pieces so called slices which can be processed separately and optionally without the need to involve a 3D scanner system The first variant does not require any more than a scanner controller card that is configured for 3 axis operation Resulting from such a configuration the user interface of BeamConstruct is switched into 3D mode too now it is possible to edit Z values within all property panels to switch the drawing area to profile views or to a real 3D view and to draw and edit elements also in depth direction 226 7 9 1 Slicing 3D Data The second processing method does not necessarily requires a 3D scanner here a 2D system can be used too the third dimension can be handled by external hardware like a drive that moves the position of the working piece in Z direction via a lift table As a precondition to use this operation mode a ready to use 3D m
607. via e mail It takes dynamically or statically data and submits it via the network Within the configuration panel following parameters have to be defined Mailserver the IP or host name of the server that has to deliver the mail this server has to be 124 configured to accept incoming connections and incoming e mails from the host where this project is running at To the recipient of the mail the recipients mail address Subject the subject of the mail Text the body of the mail Subject and body can be overwritten and replaced by dynamic data Digital INO SEND sends an e mail using the current data Char IN1 SUB overwrites the predefined subject with this text Char IN2 BDY overwrites the predefined text with this new one This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_mailnotifer HPGL to Control This plug in converts 2D vector data that are given in a HPGL PLT file to the related binary control data structure These control data then can be handled by motion elements like the Schneider IMS MDrive plug in and to access tools like a mill or a laser to process materials The plug in supports the HPGL 1 standard completely plus some parts of the HPGL 2 format specification Since HPGL does contain pen information but no data that could be used somehow to manage a tool or that define movement information these data have to be configured within the plug ins configuration panel Within the ge
608. w and others where the current value is read from an external device Depending on the possibilities and settings of the used plug in other devices can be controlled or switched and or the currently running marking process can be halted or continued Also depending on the used plug in the pen settings dialogue can be extended by an additional tab pane as soon as such a process control plug in is enabled This additional tab pane then contains parameters which are handed over to this plug in during runtime and dependent on which pen is currently selected As soon as such as Process Control plug in is selected for usage within BeamConstruct it can be configured by pressing the button Configure There all parameters can be set according to the capabilities of this plug in 195 7 6 Pen Settings Every element that is created within a BeamConstruct project has a pen assigned to its geometry or for scanner bitmaps to its bitmap data This pen contains all information the related element will be marked with scanner speeds delays laser power and frequency and others more These parameters can be set within the pen settings dialogue that opens when the menu Project menu item Pen settings is selected On top of that dialogue the head can be selected this pen applies to This is important for multihead configurations where more scanner controllers more independent working areas are used There will always exist the same number of
609. wards the line stays at the previous value e g LOW or HIGH Transmission of pulse a pulse is nothing more than the transmission of two logical states so the flow line is used to evaluate which flow elements have to receive two data packages containing two logical states e g LOW for the first one HIGH for the second one after this operation has finished the flow lines do not have a state until the next data package is transferred To sum it up a flow is more like a packet that is transferred over the flow lines from one element to an other Such a flow element stores the received data until an other package is received It is important that you keep these differences in mind while you set up a connection between your flow elements The flow objects itself support different data types An output of a flow object can be connected only with an input of the same type it is not possible to exchange the data type that is transferred over a flow line To connect elements with different data types special conversion flow elements are available that change the data type Following data types are supported Data Type Valid Range Colour Remarks purpose and variable internal format DIGITAL O and 1 equal to LOW and HIGH white NUMERIC 2 100 000 000 000 2 100 000 000 000 cyan Depending on the HMI object type and the flow object operation a numeric value can be floating point or whole numbered w
610. when an other command is still in progress Char OUT1 when a command could not be executed successfully here the original error message that is given from SAMLight is emitted Numeric OUT2 some commands retrieve numeric values from SAMLight this value is given at this output when the command could be executed successfully Char OUT3 some commands retrieve text values from SAMLight this value is given at this output when the command could be executed successfully This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_samcci SCANLAB R RTC ScanAlone Warning This plug in is designed to control laser equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured Beside of that some laser equipment can be damaged in case it is controlled with wrong signals Thus it is highly recommended to check the output generated by this plug in using e g an oscilloscope to avoid problems caused by wrong configurations This should be done prior to putting a system into operation for the first time and whenever a software update was installed This plug in can be used to access the SCANLAB RTC ScanAlone scanner controller card for controlling a scan head and a connected laser in real time This plug in supports the direct operation mode only no writing of laser marking data onto the ca
611. with the text given here Char IN3 corresponds to all OpenAPC inputs within the current project replaces the contents of related dynamic elements at input 3 with the text given here Char IN4 corresponds to all OpenAPC inputs within the current project replaces the contents of related dynamic elements at input 4 with the text given here Numeric IN5 CMD command input here specific input numbers cause a reaction within the plug in and can be used to trigger user interface operations 0 stop a currently running marking process All four digit numbers correspond to menu items and or tool bar buttons and their functionality within the main application when such a number is received at this input the related operation is invoked for a more detailled description please refer the BeamConstruct documentation below 1001 new project 1002 load existing project file 1003 import custom file format as supported by BeamConstruct vector and raster image formats 1004 save the current project using a known name 1005 save the current project using a new name 1101 export vector data in CSV format 1102 export vector data in HPGL PLT format 1103 export layer vector data in CLI format 1006 open general settings dialogue 1007 open pen settings dialogue 1008 save the current configuration as default settings 1009 load default settings this command has normally not to be used because th
612. within the Flow Editor Digital IN3 L can be used to turn the laser on and off Numeric IN4 PWR controls the laser power Numeric IN5 FREQ controls the lasers output frequency Binary IN7 CTRL here a continuous stream of control data is accepted that contains data to control the laser Digital OUT6 BSY signals if the plug in is still communicating with the laser HIGH or if it has finished all operations so that other components can start its operation this input has to be connected to the BSY input of plug in that is used to generate the control data This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_coherent_avia G Code Controller WARNING This plug in is designed to control laser and other equipment which may effect a person s health or may otherwise cause damage Prior to installation and operation compliance with all relevant safety regulations including additional hardware controlled safety measures has to be secured This plug in can be used to access laser controller or other similar devices that accept G Code CNC data transferred via Ethernet This is a generic plug in which does not expect a specific device but provides 80 generic G Code commands conform to the standard which normally should work with all G Code compatible devices Following parameters can be configured IP and Port IP and port number of the device to connect with Number of Axes specifies if the scanner controller has to
613. wrong 18 OOPC_ERROR_CREATE_ FILE FAILED creation of a new file appending data to an existing file failed file could not be opened 19 OAPC_ERROR_OPEN_FILE_ FAILED opening an file for reading failed happens e g when the file does not exist or is not accessible for some reason 20 OAPC_ERROR_WRITE_FILE_FAILED writing data into an already opened file failed e g because there is no more space left on a device 21 OAPC_ERROR_READ FILE FAILED reading data from an already opened file failed either because the file is damaged or truncated or because the file format is not as expected Following commands are supported by BeamServer Exitul After sending this command BeamConstruct is stopped and if visible the GUI of it is closed The BeamServer and it s TCP IP socket is shut down as well Afterwards it is not possible to send any other command CmdStopMark Tries to stop a running marking operation in the same way like it would be done by a user pressing the STOP button in mark dialogue TriggerUI lt number gt This command can be used to invoke any action that would be possible by user interaction within BeamConstruct too The given lt number gt specifies which operation has to be triggered here every user action like selecting a menu item or pressing a toolbar is possible Most of the commands return immediately independent if the operation was successful or not Synchronous commands that return only when relat
614. x in front of a layer is checked all elements that are assigned to this layer are drawn within the drawing area Layers that are not checked are not visible within the drawing area they are hidden and therefore can t be selected or edited 6 5 3 The Element Tree On the main windows right hand side a tree is shown that represents the current projects structure It consists of a list of primary elements and their optional child elements During processing on the target system the elements are processed in the same order as they are listed there from top to bottom Every primary element may contain several additional and Post Processing Tools They are listed as child nodes within this tree All these primary and child nodes can be edited within this tree via a context menu This menu can be opened by selecting a node within this tree and clicking the right mouse button Then following functions can be chosen Group Elements while holding down the Shift or Ctrl key it is possible to select a range of elements within the entity tree in case more than one Primary Geometry element is selected it is possible to put them into a group using this menu item UnGroup Elements this item can be used when a group element is selected it resolves the group pulls all element out of it into the hierarchical level where the group existed before Delete Element s deletes an element completely in case this is applied to a primary elemen
615. y drawing a rectangle directly into that image After releasing the left mouse button a fiducial detection is performed within that area The result of this operation is a list of keypoints which are marked by circles within the image and listed on the dialogues left hand side Now within that list all these keypoints have to be removed by pressing the Delete key or by using the related button that do not belong to a fiducial e g because marking of the area within the image was inaccurate or because they are located between desired positions when more than one fiducial is marked During all that time a fiducial detection is performed with the same image to get a rough recognition quality value This value is shown on lower left side of the dialogue It should be as close as possible to 100 When too much keypoints are removed this values decreases and the expected detection accuracy decreases as well As soon as this dialogue is left by pressing the OK button a fiducial is taught and can be used This fiducial can be saved in a separate file and can be loaded as needed with the following menu items Menu Vision Load Fiducial This menu can be used to load an already existing saved fiducial definition Currently used fiducial s is are replaced by this function Menu Vision Save Fiducial This menu can be used to save the current fiducial definitions for later usage Menu Vision Drop Fiducial The current fiducial def
616. y element and its sub elements to reduce its memory usage to the absolute minimum so that only the resulting static data of it are stored Split tries to split the geometry of an element into several pieces here splitting is done at positions where a geometry ends e g at the end of a logic element or the end of a polygon There are several levels of splitting so that it is possible to perform a splitting operation up to two times at the same data As an example when the splitting function is applied to a geometry that represents the string Text for the first time the result are four elements containing the geometries for the letters T e x and t In a second step the splitting function can be applied to the geometry of the letter e again Now it is split based on the contained poly lines the result are two elements that contain the two polygons the letter e consisted of one with the outline and one with the small part within the head of the e Optimize this function checks geometry for inefficient structures and optimizes them Here the visual representation of a geometry is not changed but the number of vectors and vertices is reduced if possible Reduce Geometry here the data a geometry consists of can be reduced As parameter this function expects the minimum size a vector may have within a geometry or a minimum angle a point may define Lines that are shorter than the gi
617. y further definitions It does not modify the binary value that is set to the input but simply returns it on next processing cycle NOP no operation It can be used e g for testing specific functionalities to synchronize the order of data flows or to let data flows arrive after each other Binary INO binary IN7 the input for the values that have to be inverted Binary OUTO binary OUT7 the inverted values from the related inputs Binary Shift Register This flow elements implements a shifting register it stores all data that are set at its input New values are stored so that they can be read at output 0 Whenever a new value is set all the preceding ones are shifted up by one output number so that the old value from output 0 is now located at output 1 the old one from 1 is located at output 2 and so on The old value from output 7 will be shifted to the overflow output This operation does not require any further definitions Digital INO OUT when this input receives a HIGH signal all the outputs from 0 7 emit the data that are currently stored Digital IN1 RES using this input all the stored data can be reset to their default value NULL Binary IN2 DATA every time new data arrive here the existing ones within the flow element are shifted up by one output position and the new one is stored to be fetched at output 0 at the next OUT signal Binary OUTO binary OUT7 on an HIGH signal on digital INO here the cur
618. y giving a correction factor It of course can not pull the AO output up to v when power supply delivers less than 5V but it can be used to adjust voltages below this limit Number of Axes specifies if the scanner controller has to operate in 2D or 3D mode e Correction file a correction file to be used for operation provided by the vendor of the scan head Here several formats are supported by the card directly and can be used without any conversion 83 Default Stand By Frequency frequency the laser has to be driven with in standby mode depends on selected laser type if applicable this frequency is emitted after initialisation of the plug in Stand By Length pulse length the laser has to be driven with in standby mode depends on selected laser type if applicable this pulse width is used after initialisation of the plug in Field Left Position Field Upper Position defines the upper left coordinate of the field that has to be used by the scanner Field Size the total size of the field that is used by the scanner this parameter together with the left and upper position specifies the coordinates input vectors have to be located within in case there are input data which define a position outside this field they will not be marked Swap X and Y swaps the input X and Y coordinate to exchange X and Y axis values of the scanner Mirror X Mirror Y mirror the input coordinates in relation to output On th
619. y of the currently selected element is created the copy is 100 identically to its original except to its position it is placed a bit above the original element 6 6 2 1 Active Split Group This is a special kind of group that concatenates several elements into one group Due to the kind of this group it is recommended to use only geometries and not to put other ones like motion elements into it An Active Split Group is able to handle geometries that are larger than the available working space It cuts them into smaller pieces and combines them with motion control information so that these large and cut geometries can be put together during processing So this functionality can be used to handle large working pieces that e g are moved by a XY table An other application is processing on the surface of rings here a specific radial mode is supported This mode gives the possibility to cut geometries into segments and to process the whole ring inner or outer side As soon as some geometric elements are grouped together within such an Active Split Group it s behaviour can be modified using the parameters that are available within the property panel of this group Split horizontal splits the grouped geometry along X axis this option can be combined with Split 181 vertical to define two dimensional movements Split distance the split size in horizontal direction Split vertical splits the grouped geometry along Y axis t
620. ynchronously dependent on the current movement position so that a tool can be controlled correctly dependent on the current position This output also pays attention to possible tool on delays or tools off delays as long as they are smaller than 0 the Control data are emitted the given time before the related movement starts so that negative on off delays are handled correctly This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_parport_stepper2 5 3 3 7 2 16 Motion Macros Schneider IMS MDrive Controller Using this macro it is possible to handle Schneider IMS MDrive and MDrive motors easily Internally it uses the Schneider IMS MDrive plug in as a first step it has to be configured the serial port parameters and the axes device names have to be set properly in order to use the macro 118 Numeric IN AX1_POS this is a command input that lets axis 1 move immediately to the given position using the speed value that is set at input AX1_SPD Numeric IN AX1_SPD sets a new speed that is used for the next movement of axis 1 Digital IN AX1_STOP stops a movement of axis 1 immediately Digital IN AX1_HOME this input can be used when the axis has stopped it lets the axis do a reference movement to find its home position Numeric IN AX2_POS this is a command input that lets axis 2 move immediately to the given position using the speed value that is set at input AX2_SPD Numeric IN AX2_SPD sets a new speed that is used for the next movement
621. yrometer Numeric OUT5 ERR when this value returns a value not equal 0 there is a problem with the plug in it is no longer able to read data from the Optris pyrometer and therefore can t control switching of connected device any more Digital OUT6 ON using this output a device like a heater can be controlled it goes to HIGH signal as soon as measured temperature falls below of the given lower temperature and switches back to LOW as soon as it exceeds the higher temperature threshold Binary OUT7 CTRL this output emits several additional control data in binary format signalling the state of the plug in and the measured values This plug in is located in flowplugins libio_opris_It Parallel Interface This plug in offers a cheap solution for digital O s using standard PC hardware Here the parallel interface the Centronics printer port is used for setting up to 8 different output bits and for getting up to 5 digital inputs This plug in works well with a real parallel port hardware the proper operation is not guaranteed when a USB to Parallel converter is used here it depends on the converter and its driver software if this plug in can be used On some operation systems it may be necessary that the complete application is executed with superuser privileges in order to get access to the parallel port hardware Within the configuration panel only the base address of the parallel port has to be defined Digital OUTO OUT7 DO D7
622. ystem into operation for the first time and prior to putting a system into operation after any software update This plug in can be used to access the Lyocon LY 001 scanner controller card for controlling a scan head and a connected laser in real time Within the configuration dialogue the plug in and the scanner controller card have to be configured according to the connected devices Basic configuration parameters e IP or Serial Interface here it has to be configured how and where the controller is accessible In case of Ethernet connection the IP in style aaa bbb ccc ddd has to be entered here in case of USB connection the name of the serial interface has to be given COMx for Windows dev ttyACMx for Linux where x is the number of the serial interface the controller was connected 86 with Ethernet Password this parameter has to be given only in case Ethernet connection is used here a password can be specified in order to identify connection to a controller The same password has to be set within the related LY 001 scanner controller When password specified here and password configured at connected controller do not fit to each other connection is closed and plug in is not able to use this controller Laser type the type of the connected laser the field that was selected here directly corresponds to the laser tab panes where some additional laser specific settings can be done for a detailed description of the availa

Open Advanced Process Control

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents